323-1851-102.4 (6500 R10.1 40G 100G OSIC ISS SLIC10 and 200GServices) Issue2

6500 Packet-Optical Platform
40G, 100G, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10 Circuit

Packs and 200G Services
Release 10.1
What’s inside...
40G, OSIC, ISS, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs
OCLD (100G, WaveLogic 3, Flex2, Flex3) and 100G (OCI, MUX, and OTR) circuit packs
323-1851-102.4 - Standard Issue 2

February 2015
Copyright© 2010-2015 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.
LEGAL NOTICES
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA
CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE
OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE.
REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN
AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS
COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed
to in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to
change without notice. For the most up-to-date technical publications, visit www.ciena.com.
Copyright© 2010-2015 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved
The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and
other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored
in a data base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation.
Security
Ciena® cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for
unauthorized use or access.
Contacting Ciena
Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com

Customer Technical Support/Warranty
In North America 1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224)
410-865-4961
In Europe, Middle East, 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
and Africa +44-207-012-5508
In Asia-Pacific 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
+81-3-6367-3989
+91-124-4340-600
In Caribbean and Latin 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
America 410-865-4944 (USA)
Sales and General Information 410-694-5700 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In North America 410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In India +91-124-434-0500 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
Training 877-CIENA-TD (243-6283) E-mail: techtng@ciena.com
or 410-865-8996
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.
6500 Packet-Optical Platform 40G, 100G, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10 Circuit Packs and 200G Services
Release 10.1 323-1851-102.4 Standard Issue 2
Copyright© 2010-2015 Ciena® Corporation February 2015
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE
INSTALLING OR USING CIENA CORPORATION (“Ciena”) SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DOCUMENTATION
(COLLECTIVELY, THE “EQUIPMENT”).
BY INSTALLING OR USING THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
1. Right to Use License; Restrictions. Subject to these terms, and the payment of all applicable license fees,
Ciena grants to you, as end user, a non-exclusive license to use the Ciena software (the “Software”) in object code
form solely in connection with, and as embedded within, the Equipment,. You shall have the right to use the
Software solely for your own internal use and benefit. You may make one copy of the Software and documentation
solely for backup and archival purpose, however you must reproduce and affix all copyright and other proprietary
rights notices that appear in or on the original. You may not, without Ciena's prior written consent, (i) sublicense,
assign, sell, rent, lend, lease, transfer or otherwise distribute the Software; (ii) grant any rights in the Software or
documentation not expressly authorized herein; (iii) modify the Software nor provide any third person the means to
do the same; (iv) create derivative works, translate, disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer or attempt to obtain
the source code of the Software in any way; or (v) alter, destroy, or otherwise remove any proprietary notices or
labels on or embedded within the Software or documentation. You acknowledge that this license is subject to
Section 365 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code and requires Ciena's consent to any assignment related to a bankruptcy
proceeding. Sole title to the Software and documentation, to any derivative works, and to any associated patents
and copyrights, remains with Ciena or its licensors. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in the
Software and documentation not expressly granted to you. You shall preserve intact any notice of copyright,
trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership from any original or copies of the Software or documentation.
2. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request, but not more frequently than annually without reasonable cause, you
shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software at such times as may be mutually agreed upon to ensure
compliance with this Agreement.
3. Confidentiality. You agree that you will receive confidential or proprietary information (“Confidential Information”)
in connection with the purchase, deployment and use of the Equipment. You will not disclose Confidential
Information to any third party without prior written consent of Ciena, will use it only for purposes for which it was
disclosed, use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software from unauthorized disclosure or
use, and must treat it with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but with no less than
reasonable care. You acknowledge that the design and structure of the Software constitute trade secrets and/or
copyrighted materials of Ciena and agree that the Equipment is Confidential Information for purposes of this
Agreement.
4. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and
52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Equipment and any accompanying technical
data (collectively “Materials”) are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations.
These Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this
Agreement, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR
Supplement 227.7202, software delivered to you is commercial computer software and the use of that software is
further restricted by this Agreement.
5. Term of License. This license is effective until terminated. Customer may terminate this license at any time by
giving written notice to Ciena [or] and destroying or erasing all copies of Software including any documentation.
Ciena may terminate this Agreement and your license to the Software immediately by giving you written notice of
termination in the event that either (i) you breach any term or condition of this Agreement or (ii) you are wound up
other than voluntarily for the purposes of amalgamation or reorganization, have a receiver appointed or enter into
liquidation or bankruptcy or analogous process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any
other rights or remedies Ciena may have. In the event of any termination you will have no right to keep or use the
Software or any copy of the Software for any purpose and you shall destroy and erase all copies of such Software in
its possession or control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been
destroyed or erased.
6. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all applicable laws, including all import regulations, and to
obtain all required licenses and permits related to installation and use of Equipment. Software, including technical
data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated
regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply
strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-
export, or import Software.
7. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF Ciena SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE
AMOUNTS PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY DESCRIBED
IN THIS SECTION ALSO APPLY TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER OF Ciena. NEITHER Ciena NOR ANY OF
ITS THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE, WHETHER
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST
PROFITS, CONTRACTS, DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING SUCH DATA OR
PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE
8. General. Ciena may assign this Agreement to any Ciena affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property
rights in the Software, but otherwise neither this Agreement nor any rights hereunder may be assigned nor duties
delegated by either party, and any attempt to do so will be void. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Maryland (without regard to the conflict of laws provisions) and shall be enforceable in the courts of
Maryland. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This
Agreement constitutes the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties relating to the
license for the Software and supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements,
verbal or written, between the parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining
provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
v
Contents 0
New in this release and documentation roadmap xi
40G, OSIC, ISS, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs 1-1
40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5 and NTK539RxE5) 1-2
Overview 1-2
Supported functionality 1-8
Line support 1-8
Client support 1-10
Cross-connection types 1-11
Cross-connection rates 1-11
Performance monitoring 1-11
Alarms 1-11
Equipping rules 1-14
Technical specifications 1-22
Latency 1-25
40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and NTK529SJE5) 1-26
Overview 1-26
Line support 1-34
Client support 1-34
Cross-connection rate 1-37
Supported CFPs 1-37
Alarms 1-39
Latency 1-49
40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) 1-50
Overview 1-50
Line support 1-54
Client support 1-54
Cross-connection rate 1-56
Supported XFPs 1-56
Alarms 1-59
vi Contents

Latency 1-68
40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) 1-69
Overview 1-69
Alarms 1-74
Latency 1-80
40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) 1-81
Overview 1-81
Line support 1-84
Client support 1-87
Alarms 1-87
Latency 1-102
40G functions 1-103
40G OCLD (NTK539PxE5) and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD (NTK539RxE5)
circuit packs functions 1-103
40G OCI (NTK529SAE5), 40/43G OCI (NTK529SDE5), and 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJE5) circuit packs functions 1-104
40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) circuit packs functions 1-105
40G XCIF (NTK525FAE5) circuit packs functions 1-105
40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) circuit packs functions 1-106
OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5) 1-115
Overview 1-115
Line support 1-117
Client support 1-117
Alarms 1-118
Inline Submarine Supervisory (ISS C-Band) circuit pack (NTK528YA) 1-121
Overview 1-121
Alarms 1-125
Contents vii
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack (NTK554HA) and
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 Flex C-Band) circuit pack
(NTK554HC) 1-129
Overview 1-129
Alarms 1-134
DWDM wavelengths 1-137
Latency specifications for 40G circuit packs 1-141
40G, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10 circuit packs provisioning procedures 1-150
40G OCI / 40/43G OCI / 40G+ CFP OCI and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD 1-151
40G MUX OCI and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD /
40G UOCLD 1-152
40G+ CFP OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI 1-153
40G+ CFP OCI and 40G MUX OCI 1-154
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD regenerator 1-155
40G XCIF and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD / 40G
UOCLD 1-156
OSIC submarine application 1-157
ISS submarine application 1-157
SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex submarine application 1-158
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCI circuit packs 1-158
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs 1-158
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/
40G UOCLD circuit packs 1-159
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G XCIF circuit packs 1-159
List of procedures
1-1 Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 1-162
1-2 Provisioning a pluggable automatically 1-163
1-3 Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 1-164
1-4 Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs 1-174
1-5 Adding a facility to an equipment 1-177
1-6 Editing facility parameters 1-182
1-7 Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 1-185
1-8 Creating ring configurations 1-194
1-9 Adding a new entry in the communications settings 1-197
1-10 Adding transponder connections 1-199
1-11 Adding a path connection 1-202
1-12 Changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode 1-205
1-13 Changing the primary state of a facility 1-206
1-14 Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable 1-208
1-15 Deleting a facility from an equipment 1-210
1-16 Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 1-212
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters 1-213
Equipment and facility primary and secondary states 1-213
OC192/768/STM64/256 facility parameters 1-216
viii Contents
ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters 1-220

WAN facility parameters 1-225
40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters 1-227
40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters 1-231
OSIC OTM2 facility parameters 1-232
ISS OTM2 facility parameters 1-236
OTM3 facility parameters 1-240
FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX (NTK525CFE5 variant) 1-251
TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters 1-253
OPTMON facility parameters 1-254
IDLER facility parameters 1-255
ADJ facility parameters 1-257
Comms setting parameters 1-259
DCC/GCC support and parameters 1-259
IISIS parameters 1-261
OSPF parameters 1-264
Ring APS configuration editor parameters 1-269
Transponder connections parameters 1-271
Path connections parameters 1-275
OCLD (100G, WaveLogic 3, Flex2, Flex3) and 100G (OCI, MUX, and
OTR) circuit packs 2-1
OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5, NTK539Ux, NTK539Bx, NTK539Qx) circuit
packs 2-2
Overview 2-2
Line support 2-31
Client support 2-43
Alarms 2-44
Latency 2-97
100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5 and NTK529AC) 2-98
Overview 2-98
Line support 2-107
Supported CFPs 2-110
Alarms 2-112
Latency 2-136
100G MUX circuit packs (NTK529BAE5 and NTK529BBE5) 2-137
Contents ix
Overview 2-137
Line support 2-152
Supported SFP+s/XFPs 2-154
Alarms 2-157
Latency 2-177
100G MUX Multi-Protocol 2xQSFP+/2xSFP+ circuit packs (NTK529EA) 2-178
Overview 2-178
Line support 2-183
Supported SFP+s/QSFP+s 2-185
Alarms 2-186
Latency 2-202
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 C-band LR4 Multirate circuit packs (NTK538Ux) 2-203
Line support 2-206
Alarms 2-213
Latency 2-222
Latency specifications for 100G/Flex circuit packs 2-223
100G circuit packs provisioning procedures 2-252
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX / 100GE OCI and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD 2-252
100G OCI and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 2-253
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator 2-254
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX and Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 2-255
100G OCI and Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 2-256
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 2-257
Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator 2-258
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX and 100G OCI 2-259
100G OCI and 100G OCI 2-260
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR 2-261
x Contents
Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs 2-261
Provisioning rules summary for the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs 2-263
Provisioning rules summary for the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G OCI circuit
packs 2-265
List of procedures
2-1 Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 2-267
2-2 Provisioning a pluggable automatically 2-269
2-3 Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 2-270
2-4 Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs 2-280
2-5 Adding a facility to an equipment 2-287
2-6 Editing facility parameters 2-292
2-7 Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 2-294
2-8 Adding a new entry in the communications settings 2-300
2-9 Adding a transponder connection 2-302
2-10 Changing the equipment profile 2-304
2-11 Changing the primary state of a facility 2-307
2-12 Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable 2-309
2-13 Deleting a facility from an equipment 2-311
2-14 Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 2-313
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters 2-314
Equipment and facility primary and secondary states 2-314
OC192/STM64 facility parameters for 100G circuit packs 2-317
ETH10G, ETH40G, and ETH100G facility parameters 2-319
WAN facility parameters 2-325
OTMC2 facility parameters 2-347
ODU facility parameters 2-353
FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX (NTK529BB) 2-354
TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters 2-356
ADJ facility parameters 2-357
Comms setting parameters 2-359
GCC support and parameters 2-359
IISIS parameters 2-360
OSPF parameters 2-363
Transponder connections parameters 2-367
xi
New in this release and documentation

roadmap 0
This Technical Publication supports 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500)

Release 10.1 software and subsequent maintenance releases for Release
10.1.
Issue 2
This document has been up-issued to specify that the following circuit packs
are supported in Release 10.11 and up:
• Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band Type 2
circuit pack (NTK539BN)
• Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band circuit
pack (NTK539QN)
• 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Submarine C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack
(NTK538UN)
This technical publication was also up-issued to update:
• Table 2-15, “100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD allowable slots (7-slot shelf and
6500-7 packet-optical shelf)” on page 2-79.
• Table 2-38, “100G WaveLogic 3 OTR supported wavelengths (for 50 GHz
C-Band spacing)” on page 2-208.
Issue 1
The following section details what’s new in 6500 40G, 100G, OSIC, ISS, and
SLIC10 Circuit Packs, 323-1851-102.4, Standard Issue 1 for Release 10.1.
The following new/enhanced features are covered in this document:

• new circuit packs and modules
— Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
Type 2 circuit pack (NTK539BN)
Note: NTK539BN is supported in software release 10.11.
xii New in this release and documentation roadmap
— Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Premium with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band

circuit pack (NTK539QJ)
— Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Enhanced with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band
circuit pack (NTK539QK)
— Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Standard with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band
circuit pack (NTK539QL)
— Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Basic with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band circuit
pack (NTK539QM)
— Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band
circuit pack (NTK539QN)
Note: NTK539QN is supported in software release 10.11.
— 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Premium C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack

(NTK538UJ)
— 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Enhanced C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack
(NTK538UK)
— 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Standard C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack
(NTK538UL)
— 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Basic C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack
(NTK538UM)
— 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Submarine C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack
(NTK538UN)
Note: NTK538UN is supported in software release 10.11.
— 100G MUX Multi-Protocol 2xQSFP+/2xSFP+ circuit pack

(NTK529EA)
• new pluggables
— 40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP+ (160-
9501-900)
Supporting documentation
The following is a list of application-specific documents that are applicable to
the 6500.
• The 6500 Packet-Optical Platform Control Plane Application Guide,
NTRN71AA, provides detailed information on Control Plane concepts,
applications, and engineering rules.
• The 6500 Packet-Optical Platform Submarine Networking Application
Guide, NTRN72AA, provides detailed information on Submarine
applications and engineering rules.
New in this release and documentation roadmap xiii
6500 Packet-Optical Platform technical publications

The following roadmap illustrates the structure of the 6500 technical
publications library.
Planning a Network Installing, Managing and Maintaining and Circuit Pack-Based
Commissioning and Provisioning Troubleshooting Documentation
Testing a Network a Network a Network
Planning - Installation - Administration Fault Management - Common Equipment

Parts 1, 2, 3, and 4 General Information and Security Performance (323-1851-102.1)
(NTRN10DB) (323-1851-201.0) (323-1851-301) Monitoring
(323-1851-520) Electrical
Documentation Installation - Configuration - (323-1851-102.2)
Roadmap 2-slot Shelves Provisioning
(323-1851-201.1) Fault Management -
(323-1851-090) and Operating OC-n/STM-n
Alarm Clearing
Parts 1 and 2 (323-1851-102.3)
Installation - 7-slot & Parts 1 and 2
Planning - (323-1851-310)
6500-7 packet-optical (323-1851-543) 40G/100G/OSIC/
Ordering Information
Shelves Configuration - ISS/SLIC10 and
(323-1851-151)
(323-1851-201.2) Bandwidth & Data Fault Management - 200G Services
Latency Services Parts 1,2,3 Module (323-1851-102.4)
Specifications Installation - Replacement
14-slot Shelves (323-1851-320)
(323-1851-170) (323-1851-545)
(323-1851-201.3) Broadband/SMUX
Pluggable Configuration - OTN FLEX MOTR
Datasheets Installation - Fault Management -
Control Plane (323-1851-102.5)
and Reference 32-slot Shelves SNMP
(323-1851-330)
(323-1851-180) (323-1851-201.4) (323-1851-740)
Photonics Equipment
Installation - Encryption and FIPS (323-1851-102.6)
TL-1 Description 2150 Passive Optical Security Policy Fault Management -
(323-1851-190) Multiplexer Chassis Overview and Customer Visible
Data and Layer 2
(3 & 6 slot versions) Procedures Logs
Site Manager (323-1851-102.7)
(323-1851-201.5) (323-1851-340) (323-1851-840)
for 6500 & CPL
Fundamentals Commissioning OTN I/F, PKT I/F, &
(323-1851-195) and Testing PKT/OTN I/F
(323-1851-221) (323-1851-102.8)
SAOS-based Command Fault and MIB

Configuration
Packet Services Reference Performance Reference
(323-1851-630)
Documentation (323-1851-610) (323-1851-650) (323-1851-690)
6500 Photonic 6500 Data 6500 / 5400 Common

Layer Guide Application Guide Interworking Solution Photonic Layer
Supporting (NTRN15DA) (NTRN15BA) (323-1851-160) Technical Publications
Documentation
Submarine Networking 6500 Control Plane Universal AC Rectifier Network Interworking
Application Guide Application Guide Application Note Guide
(NTRN72AA) (NTRN71AA) (009-2012-900) (NTCA68CA)
xiv New in this release and documentation roadmap
1-1
40G, OSIC, ISS, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex

circuit packs 1-
This chapter provides an overview of the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500)

40G, OSIC, ISS, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs and their associated
procedures. See Table 1-1 for different circuit packs covered in this chapter.
Table 1-1
40G, ISS, OSIC, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs in this chapter
Topic Page
40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5 and NTK539RxE5) 1-2
40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and NTK529SJE5) 1-26
40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) 1-50
40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) 1-69
40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) 1-81
OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5) 1-115
Inline Submarine Supervisory (ISS C-Band) circuit pack (NTK528YA) 1-121
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack 1-129
(NTK554HA) and Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 Flex C-Band)
circuit pack (NTK554HC)
1-2 40G, OSIC, ISS, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs
40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5 and NTK539RxE5)

Overview
The eDC40G OCLD 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band circuit pack (also referred to as
40G OCLD) and eDC40G OCLD Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
circuit pack (also referred to as Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD) are used to
implement mapping/wrapping functionality to a G.709 DWDM line.
The 40G OCLD circuit packs are offered in both C-Band and L-Band. The
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are offered in C-Band. The
combination of a 40G OCLD or a Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
pack and a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK620AA) provides OTN mapping
(OTU3 to ODU3, ODU2/ODU2e, ODU1, or ODU0).
The following variants of 40G OCLD C-Band and L-Band circuit packs are
supported:
• eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Comp 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band
(NTK539PAE5): up to 1800 km and 25 ps PMD performance
• eDC40G OCLD 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PBE5): up to 1800 km
and 10 ps PMD limit
• eDC40G OCLD Regional 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PCE5): up
to 600 km and 8 ps PMD limit
• eDC40G OCLD Metro 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PDE5): up to
300 km and 8 ps PMD limit
• eDC40G OCLD Submarine 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PEE5):
Submarine reach and 25 ps PMD performance
• eDC40G OCLD MetroHSRx 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PFE5):
up to 300 km and 11 ps PMD limit
• eDC40G OCLD MetroHSRx 1xOTU3+ DWDM L-Band (NTK539PUE5):
ATTENTION
The MetroHSRx variant of the 40G OCLD circuit pack has been developed
to optimize performance when used on an 565, 5100 and 5200 Advanced
Services Platform optical line and allow overlay on deployed 565, 5100 and
5200 Advanced Services Platform networks. Other variants of the 40G
OCLD circuit pack can also be used on the 565, 5100 and 5200 Advanced
Services Platform optical line if there are special requirements, such as high
PMD. The MetroHSRx variant of the 40G OCLD circuit pack must not be
used on 6500 or Common Photonic Layer photonic lines as it will not provide
best performance except for some very limited single span applications.
The following variants of Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD C-Band circuit

packs are supported:
• eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539RAE5): up to 2300 km and 30 ps PMD limit
• eDC40G OCLD Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band (NTK539RBE5):

• eDC40G OCLD Regional Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539RCE5): up to 1000 km and 10 ps PMD limit
• eDC40G OCLD Metro Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539RDE5): up to 300 km and 10 ps PMD limit
• eDC40G OCLD Submarine Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539REE5): Submarine reach and 30 ps PMD limit
Note: The "λ-Sel" that appears on the faceplate label of the circuit pack
is an abbreviation for "Wavelength-Selective".
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs include a
single 40G tunable OTM3 line interface.
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs offer the
same functionality. The Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs offer
the following additional functionalities when compared to the 40G OCLD:
• consume less power
• improved PMD tolerance
• improved reach
• Balanced PIN Coherent Receiver allowing for wavelength selectivity when
used in colorless photonic systems.
Figure 1-1 on page 1-4 shows the faceplate of a 40G OCLD circuit pack and
Figure 1-2 on page 1-5 shows the functional block diagram of a 40G OCLD
circuit pack. Figure 1-3 on page 1-6 shows the faceplate of a Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack and Figure 1-4 on page 1-7 shows the
functional block diagram of a Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack.
Figure 1-1
40G OCLD circuit pack faceplate (example: eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Comp 1xOTU3+ DWDM
C-Band variant)
Red triangle (Fail)

- Used to communicate hardware or software failure state
eDC40G OCLD
Enh PMD Comp
1xOTU3+ DWDM
C-Band
- Card not failed = LED off, Card failed = LED on
Green rectangle (Ready)
Fail
Ready
In Use
- Used to communicate hardware or software functional state
- Card initializing = Blinking LED; Card OK = LED on; Card not ready = LED off
Blue diamond (In Use)

Rx
Tx
- Used to communicate whether circuit pack can be extracted
1 (on->no pull, off->can be pulled)
- Equipment in-service = LED on; Equipment out-of-service = LED off
Transmit/receive fixed dual LC connector
Yellow circle (LOS)

- Used to communicate Rx Loss of Signal
Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 1-2
40G OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539PxE5)
Left
Mate Transmit Line 40G E/O Tx
Mapper and Subsystem
Deskew
Backplane
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Backplane
Interface
Receive
40G O/E Rx
Equalizer and
Subsystem
Demapper
Right
Mate
Processor Sync Power

Module Supply
Legend
E/O Electrical/Optical
EOC Electro-Optical Control
FEC Forward Error Correction
O/E Optical/Electrical
Figure 1-3
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack faceplate (example: eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Comp
Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band variant)
Red triangle (Fail)

eDC40G OCLD
Enh PMD λ-Sel
1xOTU3+ C-Band
Fail
Ready
In Use

Rx
Tx
Yellow circle (LOS)

Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 1-4
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539RxE5)
Left
Mate Transmit Line 40G E/O Tx
Mapper and Subsystem
Deskew
Backplane
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Backplane
Interface
Receive
40G O/E Balanced
Equalizer and
Pin Coherent
Demapper
Rx Subsystem
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Legend
The 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5) and Wavelength-Selective

40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539RxE5) offer different functions by working
with different 40G circuit packs. For complete details and graphics, refer to
“40G functions” on page 1-103.
Supported functionality
The 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PAE5, NTK539PBE5, NTK539PCE5,
NTK539PDE5, NTK539PEE5, NTK539PFE5, NTK539PUE5) and the
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539RAE5,
NTK539RBE5, NTK539RCE5, NTK539RDE5, NTK539REE5) provide the
following functionality:
Line support
• one fixed OTM3 (40G) line interface (port 1) when 40G OCLD is in
Transponder provisioning mode (for broadband client card mating). When
in OTN switching provisioning mode (POTS) (for OTN XCIF and eMOTR
mating), the circuit pack has one fixed PTP facility.
• same form and fit as 10G OTSC, all physical attributes (including LEDs)
are at parity with 10G OTSC
• G.709 wrapper (OTU3+)
• high coding gain FEC
• dual polarization QPSK modulation
• low to high PMD tolerance/compensation depending on the circuit pack
variant for 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs
• the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack has a Balanced PIN
Coherent Receiver allowing for wavelength selectivity when used in
colorless photonic systems.
• the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack has two optical power
detectors on its Rx interface: or, one for total input power (channel power
+ amplifier noise) and one for channel input power (the channel
corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). The total input
power corresponds to the sum total of all the wavelengths (up to 12) and
amplifier noise (ASE) when connected to the Colorless Channel Mux/
Demux (CCMD12) circuit pack.
• offers a fixed C-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant DWDM line interface
(1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm) for C-band circuit packs (applicable to 40G
OCLD circuit packs)
• offers a fixed C-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant line interface
(1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm) for C-band circuit packs (applicable only to
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs)
• offers a fixed L-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant DWDM line interface
(1568.77 nm to 1608.76 nm) for L-band circuit pack (applicable only to
40G OCLD circuit packs)
• offers a wide dynamic range receiver with automatic VOA control on the
line interface receiver
• offers GCC0 data communications channels between Broadband

interfaces
• full monitoring and termination of the line G.709 OH bytes
• no external bits sources required (line timing or on board reference
clocking is used)
• supports facility and terminal loopbacks on the OTM3 line facility. Facility
loopback causes ODU LCK conditioning to be sent towards the backplane
(away from the loopback). Terminal loopback on the 40G OCLD/
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD is bridged, that is, provisioned traffic will
be sent on the line egress.
• supports Short Term Optical Recovery Mechanism (STORM) in colored
Photonic systems (not supported in Photonic colorless systems) to enable
fast signal recovery from short term outages. For more information on
STORM, refer to Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating,
323-1851-310
• supports Control Plane (only for 40G OCLD; NTK539PxE5 variants)
(supported as Network Control Plane facility)
Note: Refer to the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform Control Plane
Application Guide, NTRN71AA, for detailed information on Control Plane
concepts, applications, and engineering rules supported in this release of
6500.
• line interworking between different 40G OCLD variants or between

different 40G Wavelength selective OCLD variants are shown in the
Table 1-2 on page 1-10.
Table 1-2
40G OCLD Line interworking
__40G OCLD (NTK539xx) 40G Wavelength-Selective OCLD

(NTK539xx)
PA PB PC PD PE PF PU RA RB RC RD RE
40G OCLD PA Same Partial Partial Partial No No No No No No No No
PB Same Partial Partial No No No No No No No No
PC Same Partial No No No No No No No No
PD Same No No No No No No No No
PE Same No No No No No No No
PF Same No No No No No No
PU Same No No No No No
40G RA Same Partial Partial Partial No

Wavelength
selective RB Same Partial Partial No
OCLD RC Same Partial No
(NTK539xx)
RD Same No
RE Same
Note: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance specifications. For
example, the NTK539PA can interwork with the NTK539PD but the link will only be able to support 8 ps mean DGD and
the reach will be limited to 300 km.
ATTENTION
Line interworking between 40G ULH OCLD variants (NTK539XA and
NTK539XE) is not supported. Also, line interworking between 40G OCLD
variants (NTK539Px-series or NTK539Rx-series) and 40G ULH OCLD
variants (NTK539XA and NTK539XE) is not supported.
Client support
There are no client ports on the 40G OCLD and
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
Cross-connection types
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs only
support the 2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder and OTN cross-connection
type.
ATTENTION
Cross-connects are not supported when the 40G OCLD or the Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack is mated with an eMOTR circuit pack.
Cross-connection rates
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs only
support the ODU3 transponder and OTN cross-connection rate.
Performance monitoring
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs support
the following monitored entities:
• OTM3 line interface
— PM collection for OTU3 layer
— PM collection for ODU3 layer
— Protection switch count/duration for ODU3 layer
— PM collection for Physical layer
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs support
the following monitored entities when mated with a 40G OTN XCIF or an
eMOTR circuit pack:
• PM collection for OTUTTP facilities
• PM collection for PTP facilities
For detailed information and procedures associated with performance

monitoring, refer to Fault Management - Performance Monitoring, 323-1851-
520.
Alarms
For a complete list of alarm clearing procedures for 6500, refer to Part 1 and
Part 2 of Fault Management - Alarm Clearing, 323-1851-543.
Equipment alarms
• Autoprovisioning Mismatch
• Circuit Pack Missing
• Circuit Pack Mismatch
• Circuit Pack Failed
• Circuit Pack Latch Open

• Circuit Pack Upgrade Failed
• Circuit pack Operational Capability exceeded
• Cold Restart Required: FPGA Changed
• Database Not Recovered For Slot
• Intercard Suspected
• Internal Mgmt Comms Suspected
• Provisioning Incompatible
OTM facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss of Channel (applies to Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD)
• Loss Of Frame
• Loss Of Multiframe
• Pre-FEC Signal Fail
• Pre-FEC Signal Degrade
• TX Manual Provisioning Required
• TX Tuning in Progress
• Rx Power Out Of Range
• Rx Channel Power Out Of Range (applies to Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD)
• TR Control Echo trace Mismatch
• OTU Trace Identifier Mismatch
• OTU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• ODU Trace Identifier Mismatch
• ODU BDI
• GCC0 Link Fail
• GCC0 OSPF Adjacency Loss
• Loopback Active - Facility
• Loopback Active - Terminal
• Protection Scheme Mismatch

• Protection Mode Mismatch
• Protection Switch Byte Fail
• Auto Protection Switch Acknowledge Time Out
• Protection Exerciser Failed
• Protection Switch Complete - Revertive
• Protection Switch Complete
• Forced Switch Active
• Manual Switch Active
• Lockout Active
• Far End Protection Line Fail
OTUTTP facility alarms

• Loss Of Frame
• Loss Of Clock
• OTU BDI
PTP facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• TR Control Echo Trace Mismatch
Photonic alarms
• Adjacency Mismatch
• Duplicate Adjacency Discovered
Control Plane alarms

• Remote Node Unreachable (OSRP line level)
• Configuration Mismatch
• Configuration Mismatch - Common ID

• Configuration Mismatch - Primary State
Software Auto-Upgrade alarms

• Software Auto-Upgrade in Progress
• Software Auto-Upgrade Failed
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit packs:
• is a one-port single slot interface
• can be equipped in any slot (1-14 except slots 7 and 8 if cross-connect
circuit packs are provisioned in slots 7 and 8) of the 14-slot packet-optical,
converged optical, converged optical/front electrical, or
converged optical/rear electrical shelves. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-
optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with this circuit pack.
• can be equipped in slots 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and 31-38 of the 32-slot
packet-optical shelf
• can be equipped in slots 1 to 7 of the 7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or
NTK503KA)
• can be equipped in slots 1 to 6 of the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf
(NTK503RA). Slots 7 and 8 of a 6500-7 packet-optical shelf cannot be
equipped with this circuit pack
• 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs cannot be
equipped in the NTK503MAE5 and NTK503NAE5 variants of the 2-slot
shelf.
• 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs can be
equipped in slots 1 or 2 of the NTK503LA variant of the 2-slot shelf.
• can be equipped in the same shelf with any other type of circuit pack
• any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCI/40G OCLD,
40/43G OCI/40G OCLD, 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD, or
40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD is possible (for example, 40G OCI,
40/43G OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit pack on left or right of 40G OCLD
circuit pack) starting in any slot with the exception of connections across
slots 6 to 7 and 8 to 9 for the 14-slot shelf types. Note that if you are
planning full-fill unprotected or regen 40G applications, connections
across the above slots will not occur, as they will be using the
recommended slots 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8 (not applicable to 14-slot
packet-optical shelf [NTK503SA]), 9 to 10, 11 to 12, and 13 to 14 for the
14-slot shelf types.
• any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCI/Wavelength-Selective

40G OCLD, 40/43G OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD,
40G+ CFP OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or
40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD is possible (for example,
40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit pack on left or right of
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack) starting in any slot with the
exception of connections across slots 6 to 7 and 8 to 9 for the 14-slot shelf
types. Note that if you are planning full-fill unprotected or regen 40G
applications, connections across the above slots will not occur, as they will
be using the recommended slots 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8 (not applicable
to 14-slot packet-optical shelf [NTK503SA]), 9 to 10, 11 to 12, and 13 to
14 for the 14-slot shelf types.
• in a 2-slot optical Type 2 shelf assembly (NTK503LA) and when one
40G OCLD circuit pack is mated with one 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
(OTR configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in slot 1 or 2 and the
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack can be in other slot. Similarly, one 40G OCLD
circuit pack is mated with one 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CFE5
variant) (MOTR configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in slot 1 or 2 and the
40G MUX OCI circuit pack can be in other slot.
• any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
40G OCLD/40G OTN XCIF is possible as long as 40G XCIF or
40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is in an even slot (for example, 40G OCLD
circuit pack on the left side of 40G XCIF or 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack).
The exception is slot 8 for the 14-slot shelf type, and slot 10 for the 32-slot
shelf type.
• any adjacent two-slot combination of
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G OTN XCIF is possible as long as
40G XCIF or 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is in an even slot (for example,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack on the left side of 40G XCIF
or 40G OTN XCIF). The exception is slot 8 for the 14-slot shelf type, and
slot 10 for the 32-slot shelf type.
• 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs can be
mated with eMOTR circuit packs to provide four virtual 10GE ports to
interconnect eMOTR via the 40G OCLD line.
The 40G OCLD/ Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD and eMOTR
equipment groups can be composed of up to two eMOTR circuit packs
(same type) and up to two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit packs where mate-to-mate bandwidth is automatically
provisioned between eMOTR circuit packs and between eMOTR and
40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs (for
allowable slots, see Table 1-3 on page 1-16 and Table 1-4 on page 1-17).
From a Layer 2 provisioning perspective, the user only provisions traffic on
the faceplate and 10GE backplane ports mated to the 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs. No specific Layer 2

provisioning is required to flow traffic between eMOTR circuit packs in the
same equipment group. There is 80 Gbps of traffic capacity between
adjacent eMOTR circuit packs in the same equipment group.
Table 1-3
Allowable slots for mated single-slot eMOTR circuit packs (NTK536AA) and
40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs
Shelf type 40G OCLD eMOTR eMOTR 40G OCLD

or Wavelength-Selective or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD 40G OCLD
Slots
7-slot 1 2 3 4
and 3 4 5 6
6500-7 packet-optical
14-slot 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
11 12 13 14
32-slot 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8
11 12 13 14
13 14 15 16
15 16 17 18
21 22 23 24
23 24 25 26
25 26 27 28
31 32 33 34
33 34 35 36
35 36 37 38
Table 1-4
Allowable slots for mated double-slot eMOTR circuit packs (NTK536FA) and
40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs
Shelf type 40G OCLD eMOTR eMOTR 40G OCLD

or Wavelength-Selective or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD 40G OCLD
Slots
7-slot 1 2/3 4/5 6

and
6500-7 packet-optical
14-slot 1 2/3 4/5 6
9 10/11 12/13 14
32-slot 1 2/3 4/5 6
13 14/15 16/17 18
21 22/23 24/25 26
33 34/35 36/37 38
• Two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs

provisioned in consecutive slots (except 6&7 and 8&9 for the 14-slot shelf
types) can be configured as an ODU3-transparent line regenerator. The
first circuit pack must be in an odd slot and the second circuit pack must
be in the adjacent even slot. For the 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf,
that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}. For the 14-slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4},
{5,6}, {7,8 except for 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA)}, {9,10},
{11,12}, and {13,14}. For the 32-Slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6},
{7,8}, {11,12}, {13,14}, {15,16}, {17,18}, {21,22}, {23,24}, {25,26}, {27,28},
{31,32}, {33,34}, {35,36}, {37,38}. Unlike 10G OC-192/STM-64 WT,
10GEL WT, 10G OTU2 WT, and 10G OTR circuit packs, where line
regeneration is achieved by back to back circuit packs interconnecting the
client-side interfaces using a patch cord, the line regeneration for
40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs is achieved
by back to back 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
packs in adjacent slots interconnecting through backplane.
• A 40G OCI circuit pack between two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, a 40/43G OCI circuit pack
between two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
packs, a 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack between two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, or a 40G MUX OCI circuit
pack between two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit

packs provides 1+1 OTN line-side protection. Signals are exchanged
between triplets using the backplane. For 1+1 protection, the choices are:
— slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {9,10,11}, and {12,13,14} for the 14-slot shelf
types
— slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {13,14,15}, {16,17,18}, {21,22,23}, {24,25,26},
{33,34,35}, and {36,37,38} for the 32-slot shelf type
— slots {1,2,3} and {4,5,6} for the 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf
type
• Two 40G XCIF circuit packs and two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit packs (two pairs of 40G XCIF/40G OCLD or
40G XCIF/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD) along with two
cross-connect circuit packs provide 1+1/MSP linear and
2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing protection (40G TR protected group). Signals
are exchanged between the six slots using the backplane.
• Two 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs and two
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD or 40G OCLD circuit packs form a
40G TR protected group. The protection group circuit packs provide
1+1 OTN protection with support from an OTN cross-connect circuit pack
where signals are exchanged between the
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G OTN XCIF or
OCLD/40G OTN XCIF pairs and the shelf OTN cross-connect over the
backplane.
• For 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing protection, the valid
protection group slots for 40G XCIF and 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD are described below:
a. in a 14-slot shelf:
– {1,2,3,4}
– {5,6,9,10}
– {11,12,13,14}
b. in a 32-slot shelf:
– {1,2,3,4}
– {5,6,7,8}
– {11,12,13,14}
– {15,16,17,18}
– {21,22,23,24}
– {25,26,27,28}
– {31,32,33,34}
– {35,36,37,38}
The 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are

equipped in odd slots. The 40G XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even
slots.
• For 1+1 OTN protection, the valid protection group slots for 40G OTN XCIF
and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD or 40G OCLD are described below:
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {3,4, 5,6}
– {9,10, 11,12}
– {11,12, 13,14}
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {5,6, 7,8}
– {11,12, 13,14}
– {15,16, 17,18}
– {21,22, 23,24}
– {25,26, 27,28}
– {31,32, 33,34}
– {35,36, 37,38}
c. in a 6500-7 packet-optical shelf:
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {3,4, 5,6}
The Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD or 40G OCLD circuit packs are
equipped in odd slots. The 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs are equipped in
even slots.
• For 1+1/MSP linear protection, the working
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G OCLD/40G XCIF
must be the two lower slot numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The
protection Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two higher slot numbers of the 40G TR
protected group.
• For 1+1 OTN protection, the working
40G OCLD/40G OTN XCIF must be the two lower slot numbers of the
40G TR protected group. The protection
40G OCLD/40G OTN XCIF must be the two higher slot numbers of the
40G TR protected group. Protection can be configured between ODU TTP

or TCM TTP facilities on working and protection 40G OTN XCIF circuit
packs.
• For 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, the east
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G OCLD/40G XCIF
must be the two lower slot numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The
west Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G OCLD/40G
XCIF must be the two higher slot numbers of the 40G TR protected group.
• Up to seven regenerators (two 40G OCLDs or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD) can be supported in a 14-slot shelf
(except for 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) where up to six
regenerators can be provisioned), up to three regenerators can be
supported in a 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf, and up to 16
regenerators can be supported in a 32-slot shelf when using the
40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
• Two 40G MOTR groups (40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD or
40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD while 40G MUX OCI
circuit pack must be NTK525CFE5 variant) provisioned in consecutive
slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without any
cross-connect). The first 40G MOTR group must be in the lower numbered
slots (considered the working path) and the second 40G MOTR group
must be in the higher numbered slots (considered the protection path).
The working/protection path slot is the slot number in which the
working/protection 40G MUX OCI is seated. The 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs must always be in the odd slots and the 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs in the adjacent even slots.
The working and protection 40G MUX OCI circuit packs require an XFP
on the client interface. For 1+1 TPT protection, the choices are:
— slots [{1,2}, {3,4}] and [{9,10}, {11,12}] for the 14-slot shelf types
— slots [{1,2}, {3,4}], [{13,14}, {15,16}], [{21,22}, {23,24}], and [{33,34},
{35,36}] for the 32-slot shelf type.
— slots [{1,2}, {3,4}] for the 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf type.
• Two 40G OTR groups (40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD or
40G+ CFP OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD) provisioned in
consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without
any cross-connect). The first 40G OTR group must be in the lower
numbered slots (considered the working path) and the second 40G OTR
group must be in the higher numbered slots (considered the protection
path). The working/protection path slot is the slot number in which the
working/protection 40G+ CFP OCI is seated. The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit

The working and protection 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs require a CFP on
the client interface. For 1+1 TPT protection, the choices are:
— slots [{1,2}, {3,4}] and [{9,10}, {11,12}] for the 14-slot shelf types
— slots [{1,2}, {3,4}], [{5,6}, {7,8}], [{11,12}, {13,14}], [{15,16}, {17,18}],
[{21,22}, {23,24}], [{25,26}, {27,28}], [{31,32}, {33,34}], and [{35,36},
• The maximum number of back-to-back 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD regenerator sites is eight.
• Requires high flow cooling fan modules (NTK507LDE5, NTK507MDE5,
NTK507LS, and NTK507MS) when equipped in a 14-slot shelf.
• Does not use any cross-connect capacity and can be installed in shelves
equipped with or without cross-connect circuit packs
The following restrictions on using a cross-connect circuit pack are applied

when deploying a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
pack:
• In a 14-slot shelf type (except for 14-slot packet-optical shelf type
[NTK503SA]), you cannot provision a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack in slot 7 or 8 if one of these
slots already contains a cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a
14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G
OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
[NTK503SA]), you cannot provision a cross-connect circuit pack in slot 7
or 8 if one of these slots already contains a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot
packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
[NTK503SA]), when the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
circuit packs are installed in slot 7 or 8, only Broadband circuit packs or
Photonic circuit packs can be provisioned in the other interface slots (slots
1 to 6 and 9 to 14), as MSPP interface circuit packs require a
cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs. See Part 1 of 6500
Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 3) for a full list of supported Broadband
and Photonic circuit packs.
Technical specifications
Table 1-5 lists the weight, power consumption, transmitter, and receiver
specifications for the 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs. Table 1-6 on
page 1-24 lists the weight, power consumption, transmitter, and receiver
specifications for the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD optical interface circuit
packs.
Table 1-5
Technical specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G OCLD (NTK539PAE5/NTK539PBE5/NTK539PCE5/

NTK539PDE5/NTK539PEE5/NTK539PFE5/NTK539PUE5)
Weight (estimated) 1.5 kg (3.4 lb)
Power consumption Typical (W): 137 (see Note 1)

Power Budget (W): 147 (see Note 2)
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation eDC40 Dual-polarization QPSK
Laser spectral width < 1 MHz
Line rate 46.0 Gbit/s (carried as 11.5 Gbaud Dual-polarization QPSK)
Tunable wavelength range 1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm for C-band circuit packs (see “DWDM
wavelengths” on page 1-137 for a list of supported wavelengths)
1568.77 nm to 1608.76 nm for L-band circuit pack
Tunable wavelength spacing 50 GHz
Central Wavelength Accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -11 to 0 dBm
Tx Power monitor accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver
Receiver type PIN
Connector type LC
Wavelength range C-Band (1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm)
Receiver sensitivity (minimum -20 dBm for NTK539PAE5/NTK539PBE5/NTK539PCE5/

EOL) NTK539PDE5/NTK539PEE5 (see Note 3)
-25 dBm for NTK539PFE5 (see Note 4)
-25 dBm for NTK539PUE5 (see Note 4)
Table 1-5
Technical specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G OCLD (NTK539PAE5/NTK539PBE5/NTK539PCE5/

NTK539PDE5/NTK539PEE5/NTK539PFE5/NTK539PUE5)
Loss of Signal Alarm Clear -24 dBm for NTK539PAE5/NTK539PBE5/NTK539PCE5/

NTK539PDE5/NTK539PEE5
-29 dBm for NTK539PFE5 and NTK539PUE5
Receiver overload 7 dBm (see Note 5)
Receiver damage level 17 dBm
Rx Power monitor accuracy +/- 0.5 dB at power levels >= -10 dBm
FEC coding gain at 1E-15 9.2 dB (using Ciena proprietary FEC)
Polarization Mode Dispersion 25 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PAE5

(PMD) tolerance 10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PBE5
8 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PCE5
8 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PDE5
25 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PEE5
11 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PFE5
25 ps <mean DGD> for NTK539PPE5
10 ps <mean DGD> for NTK539PQE5
8 ps <mean DGD> for NTK539PRE5
8 ps <mean DGD> for NTK539PSE5
25 ps <mean DGD> for NTK539PTE5
11 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PUE5
Chromatic dispersion +/- 50000 ps/nm

tolerance
Reach Up to 1800 km for NTK539PAE5

Up to 1800 km for NTK539PBE5
Up to 600 km for NTK539PCE5
Up to 300 km for NTK539PDE5 and NTK539PFE5 and NTK539PUE5
Submarine reach for NTK539PEE5
Note 1: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature of
25 (+/-3oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V).
Note 2: The power budget values are based on the maximum power consumption in an ambient
temperature range from 5oC to 40oC at a voltage of 40 V dc (+/-2.5 V). These values must be used in
sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.
Note 3: The minimum received power level is -22.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx
power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 4: The minimum received power level is -28 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Note 5: The maximum received power level is +7.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx
Table 1-6
Technical specifications for Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G
line interface)
Parameter Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD (NTK539RAE5/NTK539RBE5/

NTK539RCE5/NTK539RDE5/NTK539REE5)

Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation eDC40 Dual-polarization QPSK
Line rate 46.0 Gbit/s (carried as 11.5 Gbaud Dual-polarization QPSK)
Tunable wavelength range 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm for C-band circuit packs (see “DWDM
wavelengths” on page 1-137 for a list of supported wavelengths)
Central Wavelength Accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -11 to -3 dBm
Tx Power monitor accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver
Receiver type Balanced PIN
Connector type LC
Wavelength range C-Band (1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm)
Receiver sensitivity (minimum -20 dBm (per channel) (see Note 3 and Note 4)
EOL)
Loss of Signal Alarm Clear -24 dBm
Loss of Channel Alarm Clear -21 dBm for colorless applications

-23 dBm for colored applications
Receiver overload 0 dBm (per channel) (see Note 4 and Note 5)

7 dBm (total power) (see Note 4 and Note 5)
Receiver damage level 17 dBm (total power) (see Note 4)
Rx Power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB (per channel) at power levels >= -10 dBm (see Note 4)
+/- 0.5 dB (total power) at power levels >= -10 dBm (see Note 4)
Table 1-6
Technical specifications for Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G
line interface) (continued)
Parameter Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD (NTK539RAE5/NTK539RBE5/

NTK539RCE5/NTK539RDE5/NTK539REE5)
Polarization Mode Dispersion 30 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RAE5

(PMD) tolerance 10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RBE5
10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RCE5
10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RDE5
30 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539REE5

tolerance
Reach Up to 2300 km for NTK539RAE5

Up to 2300 km for NTK539RBE5
Up to 1000 km for NTK539RCE5
Up to 300 km for NTK539RDE5
Submarine reach for NTK539REE5
Note 3: The minimum per channel received power level is -22.5 dBm, which does not take into account
any Rx power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 4: The Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface:
— one for total input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when, connected to
the CCMD12 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]), and
— one for channel input power (the channel corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned
to).
When the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD is used in colored Photonic systems, the two 40G OCLD
Rx interface detectors see similar power levels. In colored line systems, the total input power monitor
is the preferred monitor for channel power since it is more accurate.
Note 5: The maximum per channel received power level is 0 dBm, which does not take into account
Latency
Refer to the following tables for 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD latency values:
• Table 1-28 on page 1-142 for MOTR configuration.
• Table 1-29 on page 1-146 for OTR configuration.
• Table 1-30 on page 1-147 for Regen configuration.
40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and

NTK529SJE5)
Overview
This release of 6500 supports the following variants of the 40G OCI circuit
packs:
• 40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit pack (also referred to as 40G OCI)
(NTK529SAE5).
The 40G OCI circuit pack includes a single fixed 40G OC-768/STM-256
client interface and is used to transparently map the OC-768/STM-256
clients onto an adjacent 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or
40G UOCLD circuit pack (G.709 OTU3 frame interface) via the backplane.
This is called an OTR configuration.
• 40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit pack (also referred to as
40/43G OCI) (NTK529SDE5)
The 40/43G OCI circuit pack includes a single fixed
40G OC-768/STM-256/OTM3 client interface and is used to transparently
map the OC-768/STM-256/OTM3 clients onto an adjacent 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack
(G.709 OTU3 frame interface) via the backplane. This is called an OTR
configuration.
• 40G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit pack (also referred to as
40G+ CFP OCI) (NTK529SJE5). The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack includes
a single pluggable 40G OC-768/STM-256/OTM3/ETH40G CFP client
interface:
— The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack is used to transparently map the
OC-768/STM-256/OTM3/ETH40G clients onto an adjacent
40G OCLD or, 40G UOCLD, or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
circuit pack (G.709 OTU3 frame interface) via the backplane. This is
called an OTR configuration.
— A 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack can be also used for network interface
between a 10G network (SONET/Ethernet/OTN/etc.) and a 40G OTN
network via interworking with a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
(NTK525CFE5 variant). An OTM3 facility is provisioned on the CFP
client port of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and various 10G services
(all client protocols and mappings supported by the 4x10G MUX OCI
except ETH10G client using the OPU1e/OPU2e mappings,
OTU1e/OTU2e client, and FC1200 client). This is called a 40G client
card back-to-back configuration.
— A 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack can be also used for network interface
between 40G networks (SONET/Ethernet/OTN/etc.) via interworking
with another 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack where
– an ETH40G facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the first

40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and an OTM3 facility is provisioned on
the CFP client port of the second 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
(network interface between a 40G Ethernet network and a
40G OTN network). This is called a 40G client card back-to-back
configuration.
– an OC768/STM256 facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of
the first 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and an OTM3 facility is
provisioned on the CFP client port of the second 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit pack (network interface between a 40G SONET network
and a 40G OTN network). This is called a 40G client card
back-to-back configuration.
– an OTM3 facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the first
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and another OTM3 facility is
circuit pack (network interface between two 40G OTN networks).
This is called a 40G client card back-to-back configuration.
– an ETH40G facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the first
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and another ETH40G facility is
circuit pack (network interface between two 40G Ethernet
networks). This is called a 40G client card back-to-back
configuration.
– an OC768/STM256 facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of
the first 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and another OC768/STM256
facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the second
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (network interface between two 40G
SONET networks). This is called a 40G client card back-to-back
configuration.
— The combination of a 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and a
40G OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK620AA) provides OTN mapping
(OTU3 to ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0).
Figure 1-5 on page 1-28 shows the faceplate of a
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit pack. Figure 1-6 on page 1-29 shows the
faceplate of a 40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit pack. Figure 1-7 on
page 1-30 shows the faceplate of a 40G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit
pack.
Figure 1-8 on page 1-31 provides a functional block diagram of the 40G OCI
circuit pack. Figure 1-9 on page 1-32 provides a functional block diagram of
the 40/43G OCI circuit pack. Figure 1-10 on page 1-33 provides a functional
block diagram of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack.
Figure 1-5
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

40G OCI
1xOC-768/STM-256
Fail
Ready
In Use

Rx
Tx
Yellow circle (LOS)

Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 1-6
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

40G OCI
1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3
Fail
Ready
In Use

Rx
Tx
Yellow circle (LOS)

Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 1-7
40G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

40G OCI
Multi-Protocol
1xCFP
Fail
Ready
In Use
(on->no pull, off->can be pulled)
T
1
R
Transmit/receive CFP dual LC connector
Yellow circle (LOS)

1
Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 1-8
40G OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529SAE5)
Left
Mate
OTU3+
Mapper
Backplane
Backplane 40G Transponder 1

Interface Module
OTU3+
Demapper
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Figure 1-9
40/43G OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529SDE5)
Left
Mate
OTU3+
Mapper
Backplane
Backplane 40/43G Transponder 1

Interface Module
OTU3+
Demapper
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Figure 1-10
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529SJE5)
Left
Mate
OTU3+
Mapper
Backplane
Backplane 40G CFP 1

Interface
OTU3+
Demapper
Right
Mate

Module Supply
The 40G OCI circuit pack (NTK529SAE5), 40/43G OCI circuit pack
(NTK529SDE5), and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (NTK529SJE5) offer
different functions by working with different 40G circuit packs. For complete
details and graphics, refer to “40G functions” on page 1-103.
The 40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit packs (NTK529SAE5),
40G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit packs (NTK529SJE5), and
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit packs (NTK529SDE5) provide the
Line support
There are no line ports on the 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI
circuit packs (except for OTN switching and OTN Control Plane where the
interface can be configured as line or add/drop port when NTK529SJE5 circuit
pack is mated with 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack).
Client support
• 40G OCI variant (NTK529SAE5) includes a fixed OC-768/STM-256 client
interface (port 1) offering 39.8 Gbit/s rate to facilitate client-side
interworking at OC768/STM256 signal rates.
• 40/43G OCI variant (NTK529SDE5) includes a fixed
OC-768/STM-256/OTM3 client interface (port 1) offering 39.8 Gbit/s and
43 Gbit/s rates to facilitate client-side interworking at
OC768/STM256/OTU3 signal rates.
• 40G+ CFP OCI variant (NTK529SJE5) includes a pluggable
CFP OC-768/STM-256/ETH40G/OTM3 client interface (port 1) offering
39.8 Gbit/s, 41.3 Gbit/s, and 43 Gbit/s rates to facilitate client-side
interworking at OC768/STM256/OTU3/40GE signal rates.
• when mated with the 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack, the 40G+ CFP OCI
variant (NTK529SJE5) supports a pluggable CFP OTM3 client interface
(port 1) offering 43 Gbit/s rate to facilitate client-side interworking at OTU3
signal rate. The following OTN mappings are supported for OTN switching
applications:
— OTU3 to ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0
— 40GE to ODU3 (GMP mapping)
— OC-768/STM-256 to ODU3 (BMP mapping)
• same form and fit as 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD. All
physical attributes (including LEDs) are at parity with 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD.
• full transparency for OC-768/STM-256 clients when using 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI
• ODU3 transparency on the OTU3 client of the 40G+ CFP OCI or
40/43G OCI circuit pack variant
• full transparency on the ETH40G client of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
variant
• 40G OCI or 40/43G OCI circuit pack supports facility loopbacks on its
client interface (OC-768/STM-256 or OTM3). Facility loopback causes
ODU LCK conditioning to be sent towards the backplane (away from the
loopback).
• 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its
client interface (OC-768/STM-256, ETH40G, or OTM3). Facility loopback
causes ODU LCK conditioning to be sent towards the backplane (away
from the loopback). Terminal loopback on the 40G+ CFP OCI turns off the
transmit laser.
• G.709 wrapper (OTU3)
• provisionable OTN tandem connection monitoring (TCM) for transponders
(only applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI variant; NTK529SJE5 variant)
• offers GCC1 data communications channels between Broadband
interfaces
• supports client side GCC0 data communications channels on the
40G+ CFP OCI or 40/43G OCI circuit pack variant
• a 40G OTR using the 40G OCI circuit pack can interwork with a 40G OTR
using the 40/43G OCI or 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack provided that the
40/43G OCI or 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack client is provisioned as
OC-768/STM-256
• a 40G OTR using the 40/43G OCI circuit pack can interwork with a
40G OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack provided that the client on
the 40/43G OCI circuit pack and 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack is provisioned
as OC-768/STM-256
• a 40G OTR using the 40/43G OCI circuit pack can interwork with a
40G OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack provided that the client on
the 40/43G OCI circuit pack and 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack is provisioned
as OTU3
• a 40G MOTR using the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CFE5 variant)
can interwork with a 40G OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack
provided that the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack client is provisioned as OTU3
and the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack clients are not provisioned to use the
11.05G or 11.09G ODU2 rates.
• a 40G OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack can interwork with a
40G OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack when the clients are
provisioned differently. The following mixes are supported:
— OTU3 at one end and OC-768/STM-256 at the other end.
— OTU3 at one end and 40GE at the other end.
• supports monitoring of OC-768/STM-256 section trace for 40G OCI,

40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs with option to edit the
expected Trace value (inducing a mismatch condition) with no support to
provision Tx Trace Value
clocking is used)
• client protocols and mappings on 40G OCI circuit packs are shown in
Table 1-7.
Table 1-7
Client protocols and mapping for 40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and
NTK529SJE5)
Client protocol OPUk Mapping procedure Transparency

(rate)
OC-768/STM-256 Proprietary OPU3+ Proprietary Asynchronous Data and timing transparent

(39.813G ± 20 ppm) Mapping Procedure,
PT= 0x89
40GBASE-R Proprietary OPU3+ Transcode + Proprietary Data and timing transparent

(41.250G ± 100 Asynchronous Mapping
ppm) Procedure,
PT= 0x8B
OTU3 Proprietary OPU3+ Proprietary Asynchronous ODU3 transparent,

(43.018G ± 20 ppm) Mapping Procedure, timing transparent
PT= 0x8A
OTU3, OC-768/ Proprietary OPU3+ Mapping used towards ODU3 transparent,

STM-256 handoff OTU3 client: timing transparent
(43.018G ± 20 ppm) Bit-synchronous mapping
procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
Mapping used towards
OTU3+ line:
Proprietary Bit-
Asynchronous Mapping
Procedure,
PT= 0x89
Table 1-7
Client protocols and mapping for 40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and
NTK529SJE5) (continued)
Client protocol OPUk Mapping procedure Transparency

(rate)
OTU3, 40GE Proprietary OPU3+ Mapping used towards ODU3 transparent,

handoff OTU3 client: timing transparent
(43.018G ± 20 ppm) Transcode + Generic
Mapping Procedure (GMP),
PT= 0x07
OTU3+ line:
Proprietary Transcode +
Asynchronous Mapping
Procedure,
PT= 0x8B
OTU3, 4xODU2 Proprietary OPU3+ Mapping used towards ODU3 transparent,

handoff OTU3 client: timing transparent
(43.018G ± 20 ppm) Asynchronous Mapping
Procedure (AMP),
PT= 20
OTU3+ line:
Proprietary Asynchronous
Mapping Procedure,
PT= 0x20
Note: OTU2 rate is OPU2 rate x 255/238 = 10.709G ± 20 ppm. OTU2e rate is OPU2e rate x 255/238 =
11.096G ± 100 ppm. OTU1e rate is OPU1e rate x 255/238 = 11.049G ± 100 ppm.
The 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs only support the
2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder and OTN (40G+ CFP OCI only)
cross-connection type.
Cross-connection rate
The 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs only support the
ODU3 transponder and OTN (40G+ CFP OCI only) cross-connection rate.
Supported CFPs
There are no CFP ports on the 40G OCI or 40/43G OCI circuit packs.
However, a 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack contains a client CFP pluggable
module as seen in Table 1-8.
Table 1-8
Supported CFP modules for the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported CFP module
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in a CFP may be supported by the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack. Refer
to Table 1-33 on page 1-179 to find out which facility types can be supported by 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs.
40G OCI Multi-Protocol • PCFP

1xCFP (NTK529SJE5) — 40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(see Note) (NTTA11BAE6)
— 40GBASE-SR4, 4x10G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO, CFP
(NTTA11AA)
— 39.8G to 44.6G, 40G Serial, SMF, 1550nm, 2km CFP
(NTTA13EEE6)
— 41.2G to 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP (160-
9013-900)
— 39.8G to 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA12BAE6)
Note: On the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the pluggable OC768/STM256/OTM3/ETH40G
CFP client interface (40G+). There are no line ports on the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs. A virtual OTM3
port 1 is also provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack. This is a mapping port used to
demarcate the ODU3 layer but does not have a physical connection.
The 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs support the
following monitored entities:
• OTM3 mapping layer interface
— Protection switch count/duration for ODU3 layer (40G+ CFP OCI
circuit pack only)
• Client interfaces
— PM collection of SONET section (S)/SDH regenerator section (RS)
and SONET line (L)/SDH multiplex section (MS) for OC-768/STM-256
facilities
— PM collection for OTU3 layer (40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs only)
— PM collection for ODU3 layer (mapping)
— PM collection for TCMTTP, TCMCTP, ETH40G facilities
(40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs only)
— PM collection of Physical layer for OC-768/STM-256 facilities

— PM collection of Physical layer for OTU3 facilities (40/43G OCI and
40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs only)
— PM collection of Physical layer for ETH40G facilities (40G+ CFP OCI
circuit packs only)
— operational measurements for ETH40G facilities (40G+ CFP OCI
circuit packs only)
The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored entities
when mated with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack:
• PM collection for STTP facilities
• PM collection for ETTP facilities

520.
Alarms
Note: Some of the alarms listed below do not apply to all three variants
of the 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs.
Equipment alarms
Pluggable alarms (40G+ CFP OCI variant only)

• Circuit Pack Missing - Pluggable
• Circuit Pack Mismatch - Pluggable
• Circuit Pack Failed - Pluggable
• Circuit Pack Unknown - Pluggable
• Autoprovisioning Mismatch - Pluggable
• Intercard Suspected - Pluggable
• Provisioning Incompatible - Pluggable
OTM facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• OTU Signal degrade
• OTU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• ODU BDI
• OPU AIS
• OPU Payload Type Mismatch
• Far End Client Signal Fail
• GCC0 Link Fail
• GCC1 Link Fail
• Laser Off Far End Failure Triggered

• Lockout active
• Protection Channel Match Fail
• Integrated Test Set Configured
• Integrated Test Set Data Save In Progress
• Event Log Full
• Mapping Mismatch
OCn/STMn facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• AIS
• Trace Identifier Mismatch
• Signal Fail
• Signal Degrade (NTK529SJE5 variants only)
• RFI
• Rx Power Out of Range
• Event Log Full

• Loss of Frame
• Loss of Clock
• OTU Signal Degrade
• OTU BDI
PTP Facility alarms

• Loss of Signal
Ethernet alarms
• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Data Synch
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Excessive Error Ratio
• Local Fault
• Remote Fault
• Event Log Full
TCM Facility alarms

• ODU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• TCM Loss of Tandem Connection
• ODU Signal Degrade
WAN alarms
• CMF UPI Mismatch
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and
40/43G OCI circuit packs:
• are one-port single slot interfaces
converged optical, converged optical/front electrical, or
converged optical/rear electrical shelves. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-
optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with this circuit pack.
packet-optical shelf.
NTK503KA).
equipped with this circuit pack.
• 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs cannot be
equipped in the NTK503MAE5 and NTK503NAE5 variants of the 2-slot
shelf.
• 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs can be equipped in slots 1 and 2 of the
NTK503LA variant of the 2-slot shelf.
• in MOTR configuration, any adjacent two-slot combination of
40G OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, 40G OCI/40G OCLD,
40G OCI/40G UOCLD, 40G+ CFP OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD,
40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD, 40G+ CFP OCI/40G UOCLD,
40/43G OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, 40/43G OCI/40G OCLD,
or 40/43G OCI/40G UOCLD is possible (for example,
40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack on left or right of
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit
pack) starting in any slot with the exception of connections across slots 6
to 7 and 8 to 9 for the 14-slot shelf types. Note that if you are planning
full-fill unprotected or regen 40G applications, connections across the
above slots will not occur as they will be using the recommended slots 1
to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8 (not applicable to 14-slot packet-optical shelf
[NTK503SA]), 9 to 10, 11 to 12, and 13 to 14 for the 14-slot shelf types.

40G OCLD circuit pack is mated with one 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
(OTR configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in slot 1 or 2 and the
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack can be in other slot.
• in 40G client card back-to-back configuration
(40G MUX OCI/40G+ CFP OCI), the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack must be
in an odd slot and the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack must be in the adjacent
consecutive even slot. The valid slots are:
— slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}, {9,10}, {11,12}, and {13,14} for the 14-slot
converged and packet-optical shelf types. The exception is slots {7,8}
which cannot be used in 14-slot packet-optical shelf type (NTK503SA).
— slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}, {11,12}, {13,14}, {15,16}, {17,18}, {21,22},
{23,24}, {25,26}, {27,28}, {31,32}, {33,34}, {35,36}, and {37,38} for the
— slots {1,2}, {3,4}, and {5,6} for the 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf
type.
— slots {1,2} for the 2-slot shelf types.
• in 40G client card back-to-back configuration (40G+ CFP OCI/40G+
CFP OCI), the first 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack must be in an odd slot and
the second 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack must be in the adjacent
— slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}, {11,12}, {13,14}, {15,16}, {17,18}, {21,22},
{23,24}, {25,26}, {27,28}, {31,32}, {33,34}, {35,36}, and {37,38} for the
type.
• a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack between two
packs provides 1+1 OTN line-side protection. Signals are exchanged
between triplets using the backplane. For 1+1 protection, the choices are:
types.
— slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {13,14,15}, {16,17,18}, {21,22,23}, {24,25,26},
{33,34,35}, and {36,37,38} for the 32-slot shelf type.
type.
• any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OTN XCIF is

possible as long as 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is in an even slot (for
example, 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack on the left side of 40G OTN XCIF
circuit pack). The exception is slot 8 for the 14-slot shelf type, and slot 10
for the 32-slot shelf type. The use of 40G OCI (NTK529SAE5) or 40/43G
OCI (NTK529SDE5) circuit packs is not supported in combination with
40G OTN XCIF.
• two 40G OTR groups (40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD or
40G+ CFP OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD) provisioned in
consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without
any cross-connect). The first 40G OTR group must be in the lower
numbered slots (considered the working path) and the second 40G OTR
group must be in the higher numbered slots (considered the protection
path). The working/protection path slot is the slot number in which the
working/protection 40G+ CFP OCI is seated. The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
The working and protection 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs require a CFP on
the client interface. For 1+1 TPT protection, the choices are:
— slots [{1,2}, {3,4}] and [{9,10}, {11,12}] for the 14-slot shelf types.
— slots [{1,2}, {3,4}], [{5,6}, {7,8}], [{11,12}, {13,14}], [{15,16}, {17,18}],
[{21,22}, {23,24}], [{25,26}, {27,28}], [{31,32}, {33,34}], and [{35,36},
• two 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs and two 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs
form a 40G TR protected group. The protection group circuit packs provide
where signals are exchanged between the 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OTN XCIF
pairs and the shelf OTN cross-connect over the backplane.
• for 1+1 OTN protection, the valid protection group slots for 40G OTN XCIF
and 40G+ CFP OCI are described below:
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {3,4, 5,6}
– {9,10, 11,12}
– {11,12, 13,14}
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {5,6, 7,8}
– {11,12, 13,14}
– {15,16, 17,18}
– {21,22, 23,24}
– {25,26, 27,28}
– {31,32, 33,34}
– {35,36, 37,38}
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {3,4, 5,6}
The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs are equipped in odd slots. The
40G OTN XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even slots.
• for 1+1 OTN protection, the working 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OTN XCIF must
be the two lower slot numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The
protection 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OTN XCIF must be the two higher slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. Protection can be configured
between ODU TTP or TCM TTP facilities on working and protection
40G OTN XCIF circuit packs.
• requires high flow cooling fan modules (NTK507LDE5, NTK507MDE5,
• does not use any cross-connect capacity and can be installed in shelves
equipped with or without cross-connect circuit packs.

when deploying a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack:
• in a 14-slot shelf type (except for 14-slot packet-optical shelf type
[NTK503SA]), you cannot provision a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit pack in slot 7 or 8 if one of these slots already contains
a cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit packs.
or 8 if one of these slots already contains a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit packs.
[NTK503SA]), when the 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit
packs are installed in slot 7 or 8, only Broadband circuit packs or Photonic
circuit packs can be provisioned in the other interface slots (slots 1 to 6
and 9 to 14), as MSPP interface circuit packs require a cross-connect
circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA)
cannot be equipped with 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit
packs. See Part 1 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 3) for a full list
of supported Broadband and Photonic circuit packs.
Table 1-9 lists the transmitter and receiver specifications for the 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI optical interface circuit packs. The
governing document for the optical specifications for 40G OCI and
40/43G OCI circuit packs is ITU G.693, in particular application class
VSR2000-3R2 for 40G OCI and application class VSR2000-3L2F for
40/43G OCI. For the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack, application class is tied to
the CFP module used in this circuit pack.
Table 1-9
Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI optical
interface circuit packs (40G, 40G+, and 40/43G client interface)
Parameter 40G OCI 40/43G OCI 40G+ CFP OCI

(NTK529SAE5) (NTK529SDE5) (NTK529SJE5)
40G rate 43G rate

(Note 1) (Note 2)
Weight (estimated) 1.5 kg (3.4 lb) 1.5 kg (3.4 lb) 1.0 kg (2.1 lb)
Power consumption Typical (W): 80 Typical (W): 80 Typical (W): 33

(see Note 3) (see Note 3) (see Note 3)
Power Budget (W): 89 Power Budget (W): 91 Power Budget (W): 39
Transmitter
Connector type LC LC LC (see Note 5)
Laser modulation IMDD NRZ IMDD NRZ IMDD NRZ
Wavelength range 1530 nm to 1565 nm 1530 nm to 1530 nm to

1565 nm 1565 nm
Minimum laser side mode 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB

suppression ratio (SMSR)
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB
Transmit output power 0 to 3 dBm 0 to 3 dBm 0 to 3 dBm
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 1.5 dB +/- 1.5 dB +/- 1.5 dB
Electronic dispersion N/A N/A N/A

compensation range
Table 1-9
interface circuit packs (40G, 40G+, and 40/43G client interface) (continued)

40G rate 43G rate

(Note 1) (Note 2)
Receiver
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN (see Note 5)
Connector type LC LC LC
Wavelength range wide band (C-Band) wide band wide band

(C-Band) (C-Band)
Receiver sensitivity -6 dBm -6 dBm -8 dBm (see

(minimum EOL), BER not Note 6)
worse than 1E-12
Minimum receiver overload 3 dBm (see Note 7) 3 dBm (see 3 dBm (see
Note 7) Note 7)
Receiver damage level 5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm
Polarization mode 7.5 ps [peak DGD] 7.5 ps 7.5 ps [peak

dispersion (PMD) [peak DGD]
DGD]
Maximum chromatic 40 ps/nm 40 ps/nm 40 ps/nm

dispersion tolerance
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 1 dB +/- 1 dB +/- 1 dB
Optical path
Optical path budget MPI-S 0 to 4 dB 0 to 4 dB 0 to 6 dB (see Note 5)

to MPI-R
Maximum optical path 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB

penalty
Table 1-9
interface circuit packs (40G, 40G+, and 40/43G client interface) (continued)

40G rate 43G rate

(Note 1) (Note 2)
Note 1: The technical specifications written in this column for 40/43G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SDE5)
are only applicable to 40G rate.
Note 2: The technical specifications written in this column for 40/43G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SDE5)
are only applicable to 43G rate.
Note 3: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature of 25
(+/-3oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V).
Note 5: For optical CFP client specifications, see the following section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10DB (Chapter 8):
— “CFP optical specifications”
Note 6: The BER for this application is specified after error correction only in ITU-T Rec. G.693.
Note 7: Although the receiver overload threshold is set at 8.5 dBm in Site Manager, the physical power
at the input of the receiver that can be guaranteed is 3 dBm and must not be exceeded.
Latency
Refer to the following tables for 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI
latency values:
• Table 1-31 on page 1-149 for 40G client card back-to-back configuration
(only applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack).
40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5)

Overview
The 4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit pack (also referred to as
40G MUX OCI) is offered in two variants:
• NTK525CAE5
• NTK525CFE5
A 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CAE5 or NTK525CFE5 variant) is used
for transparent aggregation of up to four 10G client channels into a G.709
OTU3+ signal for handoff across the backplane to the adjacent 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD. This is called an MOTR
configuration.
A 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CFE5 variant) can be also used for
network interface between a 10G network (SONET/Ethernet/OTN/etc.) and a
40G OTN network via interworking with a 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
(NTK529SJE5 variant). An OTM3 facility is provisioned on the CFP client port
of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and various 10G services (all client
protocols and mappings supported by the 4x10G MUX OCI except ETH10G
client using the OPU1e/OPU2e mappings, OTU1e/OTU2e client, and FC1200
client) are provisioned on the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack client ports. This is
called a 40G client card back-to-back configuration.
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack includes four 10G, XFP-based client
interfaces. Each 10G client is independently configurable and independently
operated. Non-OTU2 clients are first mapped into an ODU2 before
multiplexing. OTU2 clients have the OTU2 layer terminated on ingress,
resulting in an ODU2 as well. The four resulting ODU2 signals are then
multiplexed into an OTU3+ frame structure and this OTU3+ is then transmitted
to the 40G+ CFP OCI, 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or
40G UOCLD via the backplane.
The combination of a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CFE5 variant only)
and a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK620AA) provides the following OTN
mappings:
• OC-192/STM-64 to ODU2
• 10GE to ODU2 or ODUe
• OTU2 to ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0
• OTU2e to ODU2e
The 40G MUX OCI variants offer the same functionality with NTK525CFE5
consuming less power. Table 1-10 on page 1-51 lists some other differences
between two variants of 40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
Table 1-10
40G MUX OCI circuit pack variants
Functionality 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
NTK525CAE5 NTK525CFE5
FC800 protocol support on FLEX facility (see Note 1 and Note 2) Not supported Supported
FC1200 protocol support on FLEX facility (see Note 1 and Note 2) Not supported Supported
TPT client side protection Not supported Supported
DWDM tunable XFPs Not supported Supported
G.7041 compliant Client Management Frames (CMF) and Not supported Supported
Ordered Set Transparency (see Note 3)
Terminal loopback Not supported Supported
40G client card back-to-back configuration Not supported Supported
Note 1: The FLEX uses a flexible facility concept where there is a common facility type (FLEX) that
has a protocol attribute to indicate what facility it can support. The intent is to group all protocols into
this model. For example, for the NTK525CFE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, the FLEX
facility includes FC800 (only when using NTTP86BA or NTTP86AA XFP), and FC1200 protocols
(only when using NTTP86AA, NTTP84BA, or NTTP86BA XFP).
Note 2: Refer to Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310 (Chapter 1) to
see the type of pluggables used to support FC800 and FC1200 protocols in this circuit pack.
Note 3: Compliancy to G.7041 Sub-clause 7.9.2.2, which provides a mapping mode that preserves
the Ordered Set information of the 10GBase-R client signal by mapping Ordered Sets into their own
GFP-F frames (Client Data Frame). Consequently, this mapping mode does not require the GFP
Client Management Frames (CMF) to communicate local faults, remote faults, all clears, and other
PCS layer ordered set information. Therefore, this feature allows 6500 systems to better interop with
other vendors’ products when using 10GE GFP mapping.
ATTENTION
The NTK525CFE5 variant of the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack does not
interwork with the NTK525CAE5 variant at the OTU3 layer (cannot be book-
ended). This means that you cannot have an NTK525CAE5 circuit pack at
one end of the 40G link and an NTK525CFE5 at the other end of the 40G
link. However, the NTK525CFE5 variant does interwork with the
NTK525CAE5 variant via the 10G client ports. This means that you can
connect an NTK525CAE5 circuit pack to a NTK525CFE5 circuit pack via
XFP ports (assuming same client protocol/XFP type is used on both),
therefore separating 40G channels on the same link. In-service PEC editing
from NTK525CAE5 variant to NTK525CFE5 variant is supported. However,
the NTK525CFE5 circuit pack cannot be used as a spare for the
NTK525CAE5 circuit pack unless 40G MUX OCI circuit packs at both ends
of the 40G link are replaced at the same time.
ATTENTION
The NTK525CFE5 variant of the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack does not
interwork with the 40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) in a 40G link. Use
the NTK525CAE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit pack to interwork with the
40G XCIF circuit pack in a 40G link.
Figure 1-11 shows the faceplate of a 4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit
pack and Figure 1-12 on page 1-53 shows the functional block diagram of a
40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
Figure 1-11
4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

- Used to communicate hardware or
software failure state
- Card not failed = LED off,
Card Failed = LED on

software functional state
- Card initializing = Blinking LED;
Card OK = LED on; 4x10G MUX
4x10-11.1G SFP
Card not ready = LED off Fail
Ready
In Use

- Used to communicate whether
1
circuit pack can be extracted
- Equipment in-service = LED on; 2
Equipment out-of-service = LED off
Transmit/receive XFP
Red/yellow bi-color circle (Fail/LOS) dual LC connector
- Used to communicate Rx Loss
3
of Signal/optical module (XFP) fail
- Red = module fail;
Yellow = Rx Loss of Signal 4
Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 1-12
40G MUX OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK525CAE5/NTK525CFE5)
Left
Mate
10G 1
XFP
Client Monitor
10G
XFP 2
Backplane
Client Monitor
OTU3+
Mapper/
Backplane Demapper 10G
Interface XFP 3
Client Monitor
10G
XFP 4
Client Monitor
Right
Mate

Module Supply
The 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) offer
The 4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and
NTK525CFE5) provide the following functionality:
Line support
There are no line ports on the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (except for OTN
switching and OTN Control Plane where both line and add/drop ports are
supported when NTK525CFE5 circuit pack is mated with 40G OTN XCIF
circuit pack).
Client support
• when in Broadband mode, up to four OC192/STM64, ETH10G, or OTM2
(at 10.7, 11.05, or 11.09) client interfaces (ports 1 to 4), a virtual OTM3
port 100 is also provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack
• when in OTN switching mode (POTS), up to four PTP client interfaces
(ports 1 to 4)
• the OTN digital wrappers enable transporting any mix of the client rates
shown below:
— complete transparency for OC-192/STM-64/10G-BASE-W
(9.95328 Gbit/s) and 10GBASE-R (10.3125 Gbit/s)
— ODU2 transparency for OTU2 (10.7 Gbit/s), OTU2 (11.05 Gbit/s), and
OTU2 (11.09 Gbit/s)
• each client port supports:
— optical power monitoring with 3 dB accuracy
— threshold crossings alerts (TCA) based on Rx Power High and Rx
Power Low
• offers fixed C-band 100 GHz-compliant EML DWDM XFP client interfaces
(1546.92 nm to 1554.13 nm)
• offers tunable C-band 50 GHz-compliant DWDM XFP tunable client
interfaces (1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm)
• multirate DWDM, SR, IR, and LR client via XFP optics
• facilitates broad cross-portfolio interoperability at 10G line rate on the
client interfaces
• FEC support (RS8)
Note: The RS8 FEC algorithm is also known as ITU-T G.709 RS-8.
• GCC1 is supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 100). GCC0
is supported on the OTM2 client facilities (ports 1 to 4).
• 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports facility loopbacks on its client
interfaces (OC-192/STM-64, ETH10G, FLEX, and OTM2). Facility
(away from the loopback).
• 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CF variant only) also supports
terminal loopbacks on its client interfaces (OC-192/STM-64, ETH10G,
FLEX, and OTM2). Terminal loopback on the 40G MUX OCI turns off the
transmit laser.
• provisionable OTN tandem connection monitoring (TCM) for client ports
• client protocols and mappings on 40G MUX OCI circuit packs are shown
in Table 1-11.
Table 1-11
Client protocols and mapping for 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5)
Client protocol OPUk (rate) (see Note) Mapping procedure Transparency

(rate)
OC-192/STM-64 OPU2 Bit-synchronous Mapping Data and timing transparent

(9.953G ± 20 ppm) (9.995G ± 20 ppm) Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
10GBASE-W OPU2 Bit-synchronous Mapping Data and timing transparent

(9.953G ± 20 ppm) (9.995G ± 20 ppm) Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
OTU2 N/A N/A ODU2 transparent,

(10.709G ± 20 ppm) timing transparent
OTU1e N/A N/A ODU2 transparent,


Table 1-11
Client protocols and mapping for 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5)

(rate)
10GBASE-R OPU2 GFP-F, PT= 0x05 Ethernet MAC and LF/RF

(10.313G ± 100 ppm) (9.995G ± 20 ppm) transparent
Extended OPU2 GFP-F with Ordered Sets Ethernet MAC and

(10.000G ± 20 ppm) transparency preamble and ordered sets
(NTK525CFE5 only), transparent
PT= 0x09
Extended OPU2 GFP-F, PT= 0x08F Ethernet MAC and

(10.000G ± 20 ppm) (default) preamble transparent
OPU2e Bit-synchronous Mapping Data and timing transparent

(10.356G ± 100 ppm) Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03

PT= 0x11
FC800 OPU2 Proprietary enhanced Data and timing transparent

(8.500G ± 100 ppm) (9.995G ± 20 ppm) CBR mapping
(NTK525CFE5 only),
PT= 0x81 (default)
FC1200 OPU2e Proprietary Transcode + MAC transparent

(10.519G ± 100 ppm) (10.356G ± 100 ppm) GFP-T (NTK525CFE5
only)
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the 2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder
and OTN cross-connection type, including OTN Control Plane sub-network
connections.
Cross-connection rate
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the ODU3 transponder and OTN
cross-connection rate, including OTN Control Plane sub-network connections.
Supported XFPs
Table 1-12 provides a list of the XFPs that are supported on the 40G MUX OCI
circuit pack.
Table 1-12
Supported XFP modules for the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported XFP module
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in an XFP may be supported by the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack. Refer
to Table 1-33 on page 1-179 to find out which facility types can be supported by 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs.
4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G • P10GSEL

XFP (NTK525CAE5 and — OC192/STM64 IR-2 / S-64.2 / 10GBase-ER,EW (NTTP80DA)
NTK525CFE5)
• P10GEL
(see Note 1)
— 10GBASE-SR/SW, 850 nm, 30-300 m, MMF (NTTP81AA) (see Note
2)
• P10GSOEL
— OC192/STM64 SR-1/ I-64.1 / 10GBase-LR,LW / OTU2 / 10G
FC1200 (NTTP84BA)
— Multirate 15xx.yy nm EML DWDM 1600 ps/nm XFP (NTK587Ax to
NTK587Dx, where x= see Note 3)
— 5G-11.09G multirate 1310 nm (NTTP86BAE6), only supported in
NTK525CFE5 variant
— 8.5G-10.52G multi-rate, 850nm MMF (NTTP86AA), only supported
in NTK525CFE5 variant
— 9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP84AAE6)
— 9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP81KAE6)
— Multirate LongHaul ITU CWDM XFP (NTTP84Hx, where x= A, B, C,
D, E, F, G, or H), only supported in NTK525CFE5 variant
• PXFP
— Multirate 15xx.yy nm EML DWDM 800 ps/nm XFP (NTK587Ex to
NTK587Hx, where x= see Note 3)
— Multirate 15xx.yy nm DWDM 3200 ps/nm XFP (NTK588xx, where
xx= see Note 3), only supported in NTK525CAE5 variant
— Multirate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable DWDM
XFP (NTK583AAE6)
— Multirate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable Type 2
DWDM XFP (NTK583AB)
— Multirate 15xx.yy – 15xx.yy Tunable Dispersion Tolerant
DWDM (NTK589xx, where xx= see Note 3) (only applicable to
NTK525CFE5 variant)
Table 1-12
Supported XFP modules for the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (continued)
Interface circuit pack Supported XFP module
Note 1: On the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, port 1 to 4 are the client interfaces (FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64, ETH10G, or OTM2 (at 10.7, 11.05, or 11.09) when 40G MUX OCI is in Broadband
mode and PTP when in OTN switching mode (POTS)). There are no line ports on 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs.
Note 2: MMF stands for multi-mode fiber.
Note 3: Refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, Chapter 3: Table “Multirate DWDM/
CWDM pluggable optics modules (XFP)”, for the complete list of ordering codes.
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored entities:
facility
— PM collection for TCMTTP, TCMCTP, ETH10G, FLEX (FC800 and
FC1200), and WAN facilities
— Protection switch count/duration
— PM collection of Physical layer for OTM2, OC-192/STM-64, ETH10G,
FLEX (supported protocols), and WAN facilities
— operational measurements for ETH10G, FLEX (FC800 and FC1200),
and WAN facilities
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored entities when
mated with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack:
• PM collection for STTP facilities
• PM collection for ETTP facilities
• operational measurements for ETTP facilities

520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Pluggable alarms
• Circuit Pack Missing - Pluggable
• Circuit Pack Failed - Pluggable
• Circuit Pack Unknown - Pluggable
OTM facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame

• OTU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• ODU BDI
• OPU AIS
• GCC0 Link Failure
• Laser Off far End Failure Triggered
• Lockout Active
• Multiplexed Rate Mismatch

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• AIS
• Signal Fail
• RFI
• Frequency Out of Range
Ethernet and fiber channel facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Local Fault
• Remote Fault

• Loss of Frame
• Loss of Clock
• OTU BDI
ETTP facility alarms

• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Local Fault
• Remote Fault
STTP facility alarms

• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• AIS
• RFI
• Signal Fail
• Signal Degrade
Flex facility alarms
• Loss of Signal
• Loss of Clock

• Fiber Channel Link Not Operational
• Local Fault
• Remote Fault
TCM Facility alarms

• ODU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
WAN alarms
• Link Down
• Loss of Frame delineation
• Far End Client Rx Signal Failure
Photonic alarms

Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G MUX OCI circuit packs:
• is a four-port single slot interface
converged optical, converged optical/front electrical, or converged optical/
rear electrical shelves. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with this circuit pack.
ATTENTION
All 40G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 40G groups if the
shelf is adequately powered. However, for specific feeder ratings and
combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and some or all of
the remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid
exceeding shelf power capacity. Before equipping the shelf with high power
circuit packs, you must always consider power budgeting and power feeds by
referring to the "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10DB (Chapter 8).
NTK503KA).
• both NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5 variants of 40G MUX OCI circuit
pack cannot be equipped in the NTK503MAE5 and NTK503NAE5 variants
of the 2-slot shelf.
• NTK525CFE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit packs can be equipped in
slots 1 and 2 of the NTK503LA variant of the 2-slot shelf.
• can be equipped in the same shelf with any other type of circuit pack.
• in MOTR configuration, any adjacent two-slot combination of
40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD or 40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD is possible (for example, 40G MUX OCI circuit pack on left or right
of 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack) starting in
any slot with the exception of connections across slots 6 to 7 and 8 to 9 for
the 14-slot shelf types. Note that if you are planning full-fill unprotected or
regen 40G applications, connections across the above slots will not occur,
as they will be using the recommended slots 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8
(not applicable to 14-slot packet-optical shelf [NTK503SA]), 9 to 10, 11 to
12, and 13 to 14 for the 14-slot shelf types. However for 40G MUX OCI/
40G UOCLD slot combination, you must see the details in “40G UOCLD
circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5)” on page 1-81.
40G OCLD circuit pack is mated with one 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
(NTK525CFE5 variant) (MOTR configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in
slot 1 or 2 and the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack can be in other slot.
• in 40G client card back-to-back configuration
(40G MUX OCI/40G+ CFP OCI), the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack must be
in an odd slot and the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack must be in the adjacent
— slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}, {11,12}, {13,14}, {15,16}, {17,18}, {21,22},
{23,24}, {25,26}, {27,28}, {31,32}, {33,34}, {35,36}, and {37,38} for the
type.
• a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack between two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs provides
1+1 OTN line-side protection. Signals are exchanged between triplets
using the backplane. For 1+1 protection, the choices are:
types.
— slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {13,14,15}, {16,17,18}, {21,22,23}, {24,25,26},
{33,34,35}, and {36,37,38} for the 32-slot shelf type.
type.
• a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack between two 40G UOCLD circuit packs
provides 1+1 OTN line-side protection. Signals are exchanged between
triplets using the backplane. For 1+1 protection, the choices are:
— slots {2,3,4,5,6} and {10,11,12,13,14} for the 14-slot shelf types.
— slots {2,3,4,5,6}, {14,15,16,17,18}, {22,23,24,25,26}, and
{34,35,36,37,38} for the 32-slot shelf type.
— slots {2,3,4,5,6} for the 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf type.
• two 40G MOTR groups (40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD or
40G MUX OCI/ Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD while 40G MUX OCI
circuit pack must be NTK525CFE5 variant) provisioned in consecutive
slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without any
cross-connect). The first 40G MOTR group must be in the lower numbered
slots (considered the working path) and the second 40G MOTR group
must be in the higher numbered slots (considered the protection path).
The working/protection path slot is the slot number in which the
working/protection 40G MUX OCI is seated. The 40G MUX OCI circuit
The working and protection 40G MUX OCI circuit packs require an XFP
on the client interface. The 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD at one end of protection group must talk to the same 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD at the other end of protection group.
• any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G MUX OCI/40G OTN XCIF is

possible as long as 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is in an even slot (for
example, 40G MUX OCI circuit pack on the left side of 40G OTN XCIF
circuit pack). The exception is slot 8 for the 14-slot shelf type, and slot 10
for the 32-slot shelf type. The use of NTK525CAE5 variant of 40G MUX
OCI circuit pack is not supported in combination with 40G OTN XCIF.
• two 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs and two 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CFE5
variant only) circuit packs form a 40G TR protected group. The protection
group circuit packs provide 1+1 OTN protection with support from an OTN
cross-connect circuit pack where signals are exchanged between the
40G MUX OCI/40G OTN XCIF, pairs and the shelf OTN cross-connect
over the backplane.
• for 1+1 OTN protection, the valid protection group slots for 40G OTN XCIF
and 40G MUX OCI are described below:
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {3,4, 5,6}
– {9,10, 11,12}
– {11,12, 13,14}
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {5,6, 7,8}
– {11,12, 13,14}
– {15,16, 17,18}
– {21,22, 23,24}
– {25,26, 27,28}
– {31,32, 33,34}
– {35,36, 37,38}
– {1,2, 3,4}
– {3,4, 5,6}
The 40G MUX OCI circuit packs are equipped in odd slots.
The 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even slots.
• for 1+1 OTN protection, the working 40G MUX OCI/40G OTN XCIF must
protection 40G MUX OCI/40G OTN XCIF must be the two higher slot

• the maximum number of back-to-back 40G Mux OCI regenerator sites is
eight.
Note: The regen limits do not apply to "daisy chain/ loopback" systems
acceptance test set soaks. It is expected that the number of
"daisy chain/ loopback" XFP connections can exceed these limits for idle
test set soaks (no fiber pulls, card re-seats, protection switching, etc.) at
ambient temperature with nominal clock frequencies.


when deploying a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack:
[NTK503SA]), you cannot provision a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack in slot 7
or 8 if one of these slots already contains a cross-connect circuit pack.
Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be
equipped with 40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
or 8 if one of these slots already contains a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack.
Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be
equipped with 40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
[NTK503SA]), when the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs are installed in slot 7
or 8, only Broadband circuit packs or Photonic circuit packs can be
provisioned in the other interface slots (slots 1 to 6 and 9 to 14), as MSPP
interface circuit packs require a cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8
of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with
40G MUX OCI circuit packs. See Part 1 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB
(Chapter 3) for a full list of supported Broadband and Photonic circuit
packs.
Table 1-13 lists the weight, power consumption, and XFP specifications for the
40G MUX OCI optical interface circuit pack.
Table 1-13
Technical specifications for 40G MUX optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 40G MUX OCI
NTK525CAE5 NTK525CFE5
Weight (estimated) 1.1 kg (2.5 lb) 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)
Power consumption Typical (W): 80 (see Typical (W): 36 (see

Note 1 and Note 3) Note 1 and Note 3)
Power Budget (W): 88 Power Budget (W): 36
(see Note 2 and Note 3) (see Note 2 and Note 3)
XFP specifications (see Note 4)
Note 3: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with XFPs, the power values published in this table
do not include XFPs power values. You must add 2 W to typical power value and 3 W to power budget
for each XFP module with reach less than IR-2/S-64.2b. You must add 3 W to typical power value and
4 W to power budget for each XFP module with IR-2/S-64.2b reach or greater.
Note 4: For optical XFP client specifications, see the following sections in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
— “Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for SONET/SDH applications”
— “Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for 10G Ethernet applications”
— “XFP transmitter, receiver, and link specifications for OTU2 applications”
— “Multirate DWDM/CWDM XFP optical specifications”
— “Multirate Tunable DWDM XFP optical specifications”
Latency
Refer to the following tables for 40G MUX OCI latency values:
• Table 1-31 on page 1-149 for 40G client card back-to-back configuration.
40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5)

Overview
The XC I/F 40G STS-1/HO circuit pack (also referred to as 40G XCIF) allows
STS-n grooming capabilities between 6500 MSPP interfaces and 6500
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit packs
by using the shelf cross-connect circuit pack. It provides the following
capabilities:
• 40G line integration within 6500 MSPP applications
• 40G interfacing with the existing cross-connect architecture
• leveraging of the existing STS traffic routing and protection capabilities of
the cross-connect for 40G circuit packs
The 40G XCIF circuit pack provides up to 40G of bandwidth shared between
two slots for STSn/STMn traffic as follows:
• 20G from/to the cross-connect circuit pack to/from the 40G XCIF slot
• 20G from/to the cross-connect circuit pack via the mate 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD slot to/from the
40G XCIF slot
Note: The NTK525CFE5 variant of the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack does
not interwork with the 40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) in a 40G link.
Use the NTK525CAE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit pack to interwork
with the 40G XCIF circuit pack in a 40G link.
Figure 1-13 on page 1-70 shows the faceplate of a 40G XCIF circuit pack and
Figure 1-14 on page 1-71 shows the functional block diagram of a 40G XCIF
circuit pack.
Figure 1-13
40G XCIF circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

XC I/F
40G STS-1/HO - Card not failed = LED off, Card failed = LED on
Fail
Ready
In Use

R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 1-14
40G XCIF circuit pack block diagram (NTK525FAE5)
40G Backplane OTU3+

Mate
Interface Mapper/
Demapper
Backplane
40G / 4 x10G
XC SONET/SDH
OHP

Module Supply
Legend
OHP Overhead Processor
The 40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK529FAE5) offers different functions by

working with different 40G circuit packs. For complete details and graphics,
refer to “40G functions” on page 1-103.
The 40G XCIF circuit packs (NTK525FAE5) provide the following functionality:
• supports up to four virtual OC-192/STM-64 ports (101-104) that are user
manually provisioned, up to four virtual OTM2 10.7G ports (101-104) that
are auto-created when the OC-192/STM-64 ports are user provisioned
and one OTM3 virtual port (port 100) that is auto-created when the
40G XCIF equipment is provisioned. The OC-192/STM-64 facilities can be
manually provisioned, provided that the 40G XCIF circuit pack is mated
with the adjacent 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or
40G UOCLD circuit pack (that is, an ODU3 connection is assigned
between the 40G XCIF OTM3 facility and the 40G OCLD, Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD OTM3 facility).
• offers OTU2 rate of 10.709 Gbit/s for OTM2 facility
• terminates section/RS and line/MS overhead on OC-192/STM-64 facilities
— terminates section/RS and line/MS overhead bytes in Rx direction
— inserts section/RS and line/MS overhead bytes in Tx direction
• terminates GCC1 overhead on OTM3 facility
— terminates GCC1 overhead bytes in Rx direction
— inserts GCC1 overhead bytes in Tx direction
• line/MS DCC for SONET/SDH Control Plane
• supports unprotected, 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, 1+1/MSP linear, and
UPSR/SNCP traffic protection schemes on the four virtual
OC-192/STM-64 ports (101-104)
• line timing synchronization support (provides the handover between the
line timing and the shelf)
• supports SSM monitoring/generation
• supports Control Plane (supported as both add/drop Control Plane facility
and Network Control Plane facility)
6500.
The 40G XCIF circuit pack supports the following cross-connection types:
• Path cross-connection types when connecting to a shelf cross-connect
circuit pack:
— 1WAY (Unidirectional)
— 2WAY (Bidirectional)
— 1WAYPR (Unidirectional Path Ring)
— 2WAYPR (Bidirectional Path Ring)
— 2WAYDPR (Dual Bidirectional Path Ring)
• Transponder cross-connection type when connecting to a 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack:
— 2WAY (Bidirectional)
The 40G XCIF circuit pack supports the following cross-connection rates:
• Path cross-connection rates when connecting to a shelf cross-connect
circuit pack for OC-192/STM-64 facilities
— STS1/HO VC3, STS3c/VC4, STS12c/VC4-4c, STS24c/VC4-8c,
STS48c/VC4-16c and STS192c/VC4-64c
• Transponder cross-connection rate when connecting to a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack
— ODU3
The 40G XCIF circuit pack supports the following monitored entities:
• PM collection for ODU3 layer
• PM collection of SONET section (S)/SDH regenerator section (RS),
SONET line (L)/SDH multiplex section (MS), and
SONET path (P)/SDH path (P) for OC-192/STM-64 facilities
• PM collection for ODU2 layer
• PM collection for STS1, STS3c/VC4, STS12c/VC4-4c,
STS24c/VC4-8c, STS48c/VC4-16c, and STS192/VC4-64c concatenated
payloads

520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
• Warm Restart Required
OTM facility alarms

• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• ODU BDI
• OPU AIS
• GCC1 Link Fail
• Multiplexed Rate Mismatch

• AIS
• DCC OSPF Adjacency Loss
• Forced Ring Switch Active

• LINE DCC Link Failure
• LINE DCC OSPF Adjacency Loss
• Lockout Active
• Lockout Protection Active
• Lockout Working Ring Active
• Loopback Active
• Loss Of Frame
• Manual Ring Switch Active
• Node Id Mismatch
• Protection Switch Fail
• Protection Default K-bytes
• Protection Invalid K-bytes
• Ring Protection Switch Complete
• RFI
• Signal Fail
• Signal degrade
• SECTION DCC Link Failure
• SECTION DCC OSPF Adjacency Loss
STS Path alarms

• Loss of Pointer
• AIS
• Unequipped
• Payload Label Mismatch
• Excessive Error Rate
• Signal Degrade
• RFI
• Test Access in Progress - Monitor E
• Test Access in Progress - Monitor F
• Test Access in Progress - Monitor EF
• Test Access in Progress - Split A
• Test Access in Progress - Split B
• Test Access in Progress - Split E
• Test Access in Progress - Split F
• Test Access in Progress - Split EF
• Traffic Squelched
Control Plane alarms

• Remote Node Unreachable (OSRP line level)
• Configuration Mismatch
• Configuration Mismatch - Common ID
• Configuration Mismatch - Primary State
Common alarms
• Timing Distribution Loss Of Reference - n Ref (n=1 to 4)
• Timing Distribution Forced Switch - n Ref
• Timing Distribution Lockout - n Ref
• Timing Generation Loss Of Reference - n Ref - Major
• Timing Generation Loss Of Reference - n Ref - Minor
• Timing Generation Forced Switch - n Ref
• Timing Generation Lockout - n Ref
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G XCIF circuit packs:
• is a single-slot circuit pack with no physical port but it has a virtual OTM3
port 100, four virtual OC-192/STM-64 ports (ports 101-104) and four
virtual OTM2 ports (ports 101-104) that are provisioned by software
internally on the circuit pack.
• can be equipped in the 14-slot converged optical, converged optical/front
electrical, converged optical/rear electrical, or packet-optical shelves in
— even slots (2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14) if mated with a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack.
— different slots if mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack (as defined as
follows)
– 40G XCIF in slot 1 when mated with 40G UOCLD in slot 2/3
Note: When mated with a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit pack in a 14-slot shelf type, the 40G XCIF is only
supported when using with STS-1/VC-3 (160/0), 240G+ STS-1/VC-3
(240/0), or 240G+/80G VT1.5/VC-12 (240/80) cross-connect circuit packs.
Also if the 14-slot shelf is equipped with
X-Conn 160G+ STS-1/VC-3 (160/0) circuit packs (NTK557BA), the
40G XCIF circuit pack can be only equipped in slots 6 and 10. When
mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack in a 14-slot shelf type, the
40G XCIF is only supported when using with 240G+ STS-1/VC-3 (240/0)
or 240G+/80G VT1.5/VC-12 (240/80) cross-connect circuit packs.
ATTENTION
• can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf in

— Even slots (2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38)
if mated with a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
pack.
— Different slots if mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack (as defined as
follows)
Note: In a 32-slot shelf type, the 40G XCIF is only supported when using
X-Conn 640G+ STS-1/VC-3 (640/0) circuit packs (NTK610BBE5).
• cannot be equipped in the 7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or

NTK503KA)
• cannot be equipped in a 6500-7 packet-optical shelf type (NTK503RA) in
this release
• cannot be equipped in the 2-slot shelf
• it cannot be operated as a single circuit pack and must be mated with a
pack.
• two 40G XCIF circuit packs and two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit packs form a 40G TR protected group. The protection
group circuit packs provide 1+1/MSP linear and 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing
protection with support from a cross-connect circuit pack where signals
are exchanged between the 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF pairs and the shelf cross-connect over the
backplane.
• the combination of 40G XCIF and 40G UOCLD circuit packs can only form
unprotected group (no 40G UOCLD/40G XCIF protected group in this
release).
• for 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing protection, the valid
protection group slots for 40G XCIF and 40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD are described below:
– {1,2,3,4}
– {5,6,9,10}
– {11,12,13,14}
– {1,2,3,4}
– {5,6,7,8}
– {11,12,13,14}
– {15,16,17,18}
– {21,22,23,24}
– {25,26,27,28}
– {31,32,33,34}
– {35,36,37,38}
The 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are
equipped in odd slots. The 40G XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even
slots.
• for 1+1/MSP linear protection, the working 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two lower slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The protection
40G OCLD/40G XCIF or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF
must be the two higher slot numbers of the 40G TR protected group.
Protection can be configured between OC192/STM64 facilities on working
and protection 40G XCIF circuit packs.
• for 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, the east 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two lower slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The west 40G OCLD/40G XCIF
or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two higher slot
between OC192/STM64 facilities on east and west 40G XCIF circuit
packs.
• for both 1+1/MSP linear protection and 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, the
facilities forming a 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing
protection group must have the same port mode (SONET or SDH) and the
same port number.
• uses cross-connect capacity and must be installed in shelves equipped
with cross-connect circuit packs.
Table 1-14 lists the weight and power consumption specifications for the
40G XCIF interface circuit packs. This circuit pack is physically portless (no
optical or electrical ports), therefore optical or electrical specifications are not
applicable to the 40G XCIF circuit pack.
Table 1-14
Technical specifications for 40G XCIF optical interface circuit packs
Parameter 40G XCIF (NTK525FAE5)

Latency
Table 1-15 shows the latency specifications for the 40G XCIF circuit pack.
Table 1-15
Latency for 40G XCIF circuit packs
Description PEC Typical Latency (µs)
Fiber → 40G OCLD → XC → OC-n/STM-n
OC-n/STM-n (XCIF) → (XCIF) → 40G OCLD →
XC fiber
or or
Fiber→ Wavelength- XC→ OC-n/STM-n
Selective 40G OCLD → (XCIF) → Wavelength-
OC-n/STM-n (XCIF) → Selective 40G OCLD
XC → fiber
XC I/F 40G STS-1/HO Circuit Pack NTK525FAE5 74 9
40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5)

Overview
The eDC40G OCLD ULH C-Band 1xOTU3+ DWDM circuit pack (also referred
to as 40G UOCLD) is used to implement the mapping/wrapping functionality
to a G.709 DWDM line. The combination of a 40G UOCLD circuit pack and a
40G OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK620AA) provides OTN mapping (OTU3 to
ODU3, ODU2/ODU2e, ODU1, or ODU0).
The following variants of 40G UOCLD circuit pack are supported:

• eDC40G OCLD ULH C-Band 1xOTU3+ DWDM circuit pack
(NTK539XAE5): up to 3000 km reach and 25 ps PMD compensation
• eDC40G OCLD ULH Submarine C-Band 1xOTU3+ DWDM circuit pack
(NTK539XEE5): up to 8000 km reach and 25 ps PMD compensation
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack includes a single 40G C-band tunable OTM3
line interface and is compatible with the 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5 and
NTK525CFE5), 40G OCI (NTK529SAE5), 40G+ CFP OCI (NTK529SJE5),
and 40/43G OCI (NTK529SDE5) in this release of 6500.
Figure 1-15 on page 1-82 shows the faceplate of a 40G UOCLD circuit pack
and Figure 1-16 on page 1-83 shows the functional block diagram of a
40G UOCLD circuit pack.
Figure 1-15
40G UOCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Yellow circle (LOS)

Figure 1-16
40G UOCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)
Left
Mate Transmit Line 40G E/O
Mapper and DP-BPSK
Deskew Tx Subsystem
Backplane
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Backplane
Interface
Receive
40G O/E
Equalizer and
DP-BPSK
Demapper
Rx Subsystem
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Legend
DP-BPSK Dual Polarization Binary Phase Shift Keying
The 40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) offer

The 40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) provide the
Line support
• one fixed OTM3 (44.57 Gbit/s) line interface (port 1) when 40G UOCLD is
in Broadband mode. When in OTN switching mode (POTS), the circuit
pack has one fixed PTP facility.
• G.709 wrapper (OTU3+)
• coherent optical frequency division multiplexing (CoFDM) dual polarized
binary phase shift keying (DP-BPSK) modulation
• reach of greater than 8000 km
• high PMD tolerance/compensation
• C-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant DWDM line interface (1527.99 nm to
1565.50 nm)
• total of 95 wavelengths supported within 1527.99 nm to 1565.50 nm
wavelength range
• 88 wavelengths supported with Ciena Common Photonic Layer in SLTE
configuration
• wide dynamic range receiver (33 dB) with automatic VOA and EDFA
control on the line interface receiver
• GCC0 data communication channels between Broadband interfaces
• OTU3 provisioning (including trace)
• full monitoring and termination of line G.709 overhead bytes
• no ODU3 termination
• OTU3 alarm monitoring
• no external BITS sources required (line timing or on board reference
clocking is used)
• does not support PEC editing. This means that different variants of
40G UOCLD circuit packs cannot be used as spares for each other.
• the submarine variant of 40G UOCLD circuit pack (NTK539XEE5) cannot
interwork with any of the other 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5),
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539RxE5), or
another 40G UOCLD variant (NTK539XAE5).
• supports Control Plane (supported as both add/drop Control Plane facility
and Network Control Plane facility)

6500.
• 88 wavelengths supported with Ciena Common Photonic Layer line

system wavelengths. Refer to Table 1-16 on page 1-86 for a complete list
of supported wavelengths.
ATTENTION
For this release of 6500, the supported amplifier line system link is between
the 40G UOCLD and the Ciena Common Photonic Layer Release 4.0 or
higher, 6500 Release 7.0 or higher, and foreign Photonic line system. The
40G UOCLD is not compatible with the Common Photonic Layer Filtered
Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux (SCMD8) module (NTT861AA-AH, AJ). Line
interworking with 565, 5100 and 5200 Advanced Services Platform is not
supported in this release.
Table 1-16
40G UOCLD supported wavelengths (for the CMD44 50 GHz and Enhanced CMD44 50GHz)
Wave- Freq. Wave- Chan. Wave- Freq. Wave- Chan. Wave- Freq. Wave- Chan.
length (THz) length ID. length (THz) length ID. length (THz) length ID.
# (nm) # (nm) # (nm)
1 196.20 1527.99 0 33 194.60 1540.56 27 65 193.00 1553.33 59
2 196.15 1528.38 0 34 194.55 1540.95 28 66 192.95 1553.73 60
3 196.10 1528.77 93 35 194.50 1541.35 29 67 192.90 1554.13 61
4 196.05 1529.16 94 36 194.45 1541.75 30 68 192.85 1554.54 62
5 196.00 1529.55 95 37 194.40 1542.14 31 69 192.80 1554.94 63
6 195.95 1529.94 96 38 194.35 1542.54 32 70 192.75 1555.34 64
7 195.90 1530.33 1 39 194.30 1542.94 33 71 192.70 1555.75 65
8 195.85 1530.72 2 40 194.25 1543.33 34 72 192.65 1556.15 66
9 195.80 1531.12 3 41 194.20 1543.73 35 73 192.60 1556.55 67
10 195.75 1531.51 4 42 194.15 1544.13 36 74 192.55 1556.96 68
11 195.70 1531.90 5 43 194.10 1544.53 37 75 192.50 1557.36 69
12 195.65 1532.29 6 44 194.05 1544.92 38 76 192.45 1557.77 70
13 195.60 1532.68 7 45 194.00 1545.32 39 77 192.40 1558.17 71
14 195.55 1533.07 8 46 193.95 1545.72 40 78 192.35 1558.58 72
15 195.50 1533.47 9 47 193.90 1546.12 41 79 192.30 1558.98 73
16 195.45 1533.86 10 48 193.85 1546.52 42 80 192.25 1559.39 74
17 195.40 1534.25 11 49 193.80 1546.92 43 81 192.20 1559.79 75
18 195.35 1534.64 12 50 193.75 1547.32 44 82 192.15 1560.20 76
19 195.30 1535.04 13 51 193.70 1547.72 45 83 192.10 1560.61 77
20 195.25 1535.43 14 52 193.65 1548.11 46 84 192.05 1561.01 78
21 195.20 1535.82 15 53 193.60 1548.51 47 85 192.00 1561.42 79
22 195.15 1536.22 16 54 193.55 1548.91 48 86 191.95 1561.83 80
23 195.10 1536.61 17 55 193.50 1549.32 49 87 191.90 1562.23 81
24 195.05 1537.00 18 56 193.45 1549.72 50 88 191.85 1562.64 82
25 195.00 1537.40 19 57 193.40 1550.12 51 89 191.80 1563.05 83
26 194.95 1537.79 20 58 193.35 1550.52 52 90 191.75 1563.45 84
27 194.90 1538.19 21 59 193.30 1550.92 53 91 191.70 1563.86 85
28 194.85 1538.58 22 60 193.25 1551.32 54 92 191.65 1564.27 86
29 194.80 1538.98 23 61 193.20 1551.72 55 93 191.60 1564.68 87
30 194.75 1539.37 24 62 193.15 1552.12 56 94 191.55 1565.09 88
31 194.70 1539.77 25 63 193.10 1552.52 57 95 191.50 1565.50 89
32 194.65 1540.16 26 64 193.05 1552.93 58
Client support
There are no client ports on the 40G UOCLD circuit packs.
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the 2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder
and OTN cross-connection type, including OTN Control Plane sub-network
connections.
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the ODU3 transponder and OTN
cross-connection rate, including OTN Control Plane sub-network connections.
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the following monitored entities:
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the following monitored entities when
mated with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack:

520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms

OTM3 facility alarms

• GCC0 Link Fail
• Loopback Active - Terminal (R7.0)
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Loss Of Signal
• ODU AIS
• ODU BDI
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• OTU BDI
• Lockout Active

PTP facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal

• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• OTU BDI
GCCTTP facility alarms

Photonic ADJ facility alarms


Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G UOCLD circuit packs:
• occupies two slots, and offers one 40G line port.
• is identified by the left-hand slot number of the two occupied slots.
• can be equipped in 6500-7 packet-optical shelf (NTK503RA), 7-slot optical
shelf (NTK503PAE5 or NTK503KA), 14-slot packet-optical, converged
optical, 14-slot converged optical/front electrical, 14-slot converged
optical/rear electrical, and 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in Table
1-17.
Table 1-17
40G UOCLD allowable slots
Configuration 7-slot shelf and 6500-7 14-slot shelf (see Note 1 32-slot shelf (see Note 1
packet-optical shelf (see and Note 2) and Note 3)
Note 1)
Unprotected TR For 7-slot shelf: N/A • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3
group with 40G and and a 40G XCIF or 40G and a 40G XCIF or 40G
XCIF or 40G OTN OTN XCIF in slot 1 OTN XCIF in slot 1
XCIF For 6500-7 packet-optical
shelf: • a 40G UOCLD in slots 4/5 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 4/5
and a 40G XCIF or 40G and a 40G XCIF or 40G
• a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3 OTN XCIF in slot 6 OTN XCIF in slot 6
and a 40G OTN XCIF in
slot 1 • a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots
10/11 and a 40G XCIF or 14/15 and a 40G XCIF or
• a 40G UOCLD in slots 4/5 40G OTN XCIF in slot 9 40G OTN XCIF in slot 13
and a 40G OTN XCIF in
slot 6 • a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots
12/13 and a 40G XCIF or 16/17 and a 40G XCIF or
(see Note 4) 40G OTN XCIF in slot 14 40G OTN XCIF in slot 18
(see Note 4) • a 40G UOCLD in slots
22/23 and a 40G XCIF or
40G OTN XCIF in slot 21
• a 40G UOCLD in slots
Table 1-17
40G UOCLD allowable slots (continued)
Note 1)
Protected TR group N/A • Protected TR group 1: • Protected TR group 1:

with 40G OTN XCIF — working: a 40G UOCLD — a 40G UOCLD in slots
in slots 2/3 and a 40G 2/3 and a 40G OTN
OTN XCIF in slot 1 XCIF in slot 1
— protection: a 40G — a 40G UOCLD in slots
UOCLD in slots 4/5 and 4/5 and a 40G OTN
a 40G OTN XCIF in slot XCIF in slot 6
6 • Protected TR group 2:
• Protected TR group 2: — a 40G UOCLD in slots
— working: a 40G UOCLD 14/15 and a 40G OTN
in slots 10/11 and a 40G XCIF in slot 13
OTN XCIF in slot 9 — a 40G UOCLD in slots
— protection: a 40G 16/17 and a 40G OTN
UOCLD in slots 12/13 XCIF in slot 18
and a 40G OTN XCIF in • Protected TR group 3:
slot 14
— a 40G UOCLD in slots
22/23 and a 40G OTN
XCIF in slot 21
24/25 and a 40G OTN
XCIF in slot 26
• Protected TR group 4:
34/35 and a 40G OTN
XCIF in slot 33
36/37 and a 40G OTN
XCIF in slot 38
Table 1-17
Note 1)
Unprotected optical • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3
muxponder with and a 40G MUX OCI in and a 40G MUX OCI in slot and a 40G MUX OCI in
40G MUX OCI to the slot 1 1 slot 1
left • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6
and a 40G MUX OCI in and a 40G MUX OCI in slot and a 40G MUX OCI in
slot 4 4 slot 4
• a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots
10/11 and a 14/15 and a
40G MUX OCI in slot 9 40G MUX OCI in slot 13
13/14 and a 17/18 and a
22/23 and a
40G MUX OCI in slot 21
25/26 and a
34/35 and a
37/38 and a
muxponder with and a 40G MUX OCI in and a 40G MUX OCI in slot and a 40G MUX OCI in
40G MUX OCI to the slot 4 4 slot 4
right • a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots
(see Note 5) 10/11 and a 14/15 and a
22/23 and a
34/35 and a
Table 1-17
Note 1)
Protected optical • a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3, • a 40G UOCLD in slots
muxponder 2/3, a 40G UOCLD in a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6, 2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 5/6, and a and a slots 5/6, and a
40G MUX OCI in slot 4 40G MUX OCI in slot 4 40G MUX OCI in slot 4
10/11, a 40G UOCLD in 14/15, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 13/14, and a slots 17/18, and a
22/23, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 25/26, and a
slots 37/38, and a
Table 1-17
Note 1)
transponder with and a 40G OCI, and a 40G OCI, and a 40G OCI,
40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI in slot 1 OCI in slot 1 40/43G OCI in slot 1
40/43G OCI to the • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6
left and a 40G OCI, and a 40G OCI, and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI in slot 4 OCI in slot 4 40/43G OCI in slot 4
10/11 and a 40G OCI, 14/15 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/
OCI in slot 9 43G OCI in slot 13
13/14 and a 40G OCI, 17/18 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/
OCI in slot 12 43G OCI in slot 16
22/23 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/
43G OCI in slot 21
43G OCI in slot 24
43G OCI in slot 33
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI in slot 36
Table 1-17
Note 1)
transponder with and a 40G OCI, and a 40G OCI, and a 40G OCI,
40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI in slot 4 OCI in slot 4 40/43G OCI in slot 4
40/43G OCI to the • a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots
right 10/11 and a 40G OCI, 14/15 and a 40G OCI,
(see Note 6) 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G+ CFP OCI, or
OCI in slot 12 40/43G OCI in slot 16
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
Protected optical • a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3, • a 40G UOCLD in slots
transponder with a 2/3, a 40G UOCLD in a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6, 2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
40G OCI, slots 5/6, and a 40G OCI, and a 40G OCI, slots 5/6, and a
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G OCI,
40/43G OCI 40/43G OCI in slot 4 OCI in slot 4 40G+ CFP OCI, or
• a 40G UOCLD in slots 40/43G OCI in slot 4
10/11, a 40G UOCLD in • a 40G UOCLD in slots
slots 13/14, and a 14/15, a 40G UOCLD in
40G OCI, slots 17/18, and a
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G 40G OCI,
OCI in slot 12 40G+ CFP OCI, or
slots 25/26, and a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
slots 37/38, and a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
Table 1-17
Note 1)
Optical regen with • a 40G UOCLD in slots 1/2 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 3/4 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 1/2
another 40G and another and another and another
UOCLD 40G UOCLD in slots 3/4 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6 40G UOCLD in slots 3/4
• a 40G UOCLD in slots • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6
9/10 and another and another
40G UOCLD in slots 11/12 40G UOCLD in slots 7/8
11/12 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
13/14
15/16 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
17/18
21/22 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
23/24
25/26 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
27/28
31/32 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
33/34
35/36 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
37/38
Table 1-17
Note 1)
Optical regen with a • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3
40G OCLD or and a 40G OCLD or and a 40G OCLD or and a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength- Wavelength-Selective Wavelength-Selective Wavelength-Selective
selective 40G OCLD 40G OCLD in slot 1 40G OCLD in slot 1 40G OCLD in slot 1
• a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6 • a 40G UOCLD in slots 5/6
and a 40G OCLD or and a 40G OCLD or and a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective Wavelength-Selective Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD in slot 4 40G OCLD in slot 4 40G OCLD in slot 4
10/11 and a 40G OCLD or 14/15 and a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD in slot 9 40G OCLD in slot 13
13/14 and a 40G OCLD or 17/18 and a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD in slot 12 40G OCLD in slot 16
22/23 and a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD in slot 21
40G OCLD in slot 24
40G OCLD in slot 33
40G OCLD in slot 36
Table 1-17
Note 1)
Note 1: The slot positions of the 40G UOCLD and 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI
are not interchangeable.
Note 2: Mixing of different 40G groups (40G MOTR, 40G OTR, and 40G Regen) is allowed, however, for
specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full fill may not be possible and some or all of the
remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf power capacity.
Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider power budgeting and
power feeds by referring to the "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB
(Chapter 8). For example:
— 40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, {4, 5/6}, {11/12, 10}
— 40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3} and 40G UOCLD MOTR (protected) in {10/11, 12, 13/14}
— 40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, 40G – 40G UOCLD Regen in {4, 5/6}, and 40G UOCLD
40G UOCLD Regen in {9/10, 11/12}
Note 3: Mixing of different 40G groups (40G MOTR, 40G OTR, and 40G Regen) is allowed, however, for
specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full fill may not be possible and some or all of the
remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf power capacity.
Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider power budgeting and
power feeds by referring to the "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB
(Chapter 8). For example:
— 40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, {4, 5/6}, {14/15, 16}, {22/23, 24}
— 40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, {4, 5/6} and 40G UOCLD MOTR (protected) in {14/15, 16,
17/18}
— 40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, 40G – 40G UOCLD Regen in {4, 5/6}, and 40G UOCLD
40G UOCLD Regen in {11/12, 13/14}
Note 4: When a 40G XCIF is mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack in a 14-slot shelf type, the 40G XCIF
is only supported when using with 240G+ STS-1/VC-3 (240/0) or 240G+/80G VT1.5/VC-12 (240/80)
cross-connect circuit packs.
Note 5: This configuration allows in-service reconfiguration to the protected optical muxponder
configuration.
Note 6: This configuration allows in-service reconfiguration to the protected optical transponder
configuration.
• Cannot be equipped in the 2-slot shelf
ATTENTION
• Can be equipped in the same shelf with any other type of circuit pack
• A 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack
between two 40G UOCLD circuit packs provides 1+1 OTN line-side
protection. Two 40G UOCLD circuit packs carry the working and
protection paths with a 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit pack in between. Signals are exchanged between
triplets using the backplane. The 40G triplet must be equipped in
consecutive slots. The working 40G UOCLD circuit pack must be in the left
slot of the triplet and the protection 40G UOCLD circuit pack must be in
the right slot of the triplet. In a 14-slot shelf, two 40G U OCLD 1+1
protection groups are supported. In a 32-slot shelf, four 40G UOCLD 1+1
protection groups are supported. In a 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf,
one 40G UOCLD 1+1 protection group is supported. For 1+1 protection,
the choices are:
— slots {2/3,4,5/6} and {10/11,12,13/14} for the 14-slot shelf types
— slots {2/3,4,5/6}, {14/15,16,17/18}, {22/23,24,25/26}, and
{34/35,36,37/38} for the 32-slot shelf type
— slots {2/3,4,5/6} for the 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf type
• The combination of 40G XCIF and 40G UOCLD circuit packs can only
form unprotected group (no 40G UOCLD/40G XCIF protected group in
this release).
• The combination of 40G OTN XCIF and 40G UOCLD circuit packs can
form unprotected group and also 40G UOCLD/40G OTN XCIF protected
group.
• Two 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs and two 40G UOCLD circuit packs form
a 40G TR protected group. The protection group circuit packs provide
where signals are exchanged between the 40G UOCLD/40G OTN XCIF
pairs and the shelf OTN cross-connect over the backplane.
• For 1+1 OTN protection, the valid protection group slots for 40G OTN XCIF
and 40G UOCLD, are described below:
– {1,2/3, 4/5,6}
– {9,10/11, 12/13,14}
– {1,2/3, 4/5,6}
– {13,14/15, 16/17,18}
– {21,22/23, 24/25,26}
– {33,34/35, 36/37,38}
• For 1+1 OTN protection, the working 40G UOCLD/40G OTN XCIF must
protection 40G UOCLD/40G OTN XCIF must be the two higher slot
• requires that all unequipped slots be equipped with filler circuit packs
(NTK505YA)
• requires that the 6500 shelf is equipped with the SP-2 shelf processor
(NTK555CAE5, NTK555EAE5, or NTK555FAE5) or an SPAP-2 w/2xOSC
(NTK555NA) in the case of a 7-slot optical Type 2 shelf (NTK503KA),
otherwise the 40G UOCLD equipment does not provision
NTK507LS, and NTK507MS) when equipped in a 14-slot shelf
• when equipping in a 14-slot shelf with front-exhaust fans (NTK507LDE5 or
NTK507LS) that is currently equipped with an air deflector grill
(NTK509FA/NTK509FAE6), the air deflector grill must be removed
• when equipped in a shelf that is equipped in the same rack as one or more
other shelves configured for front exhaust, refer to “Front exhaust
considerations” in the Bay/rack configurations section in Part 1 of
Planning, NTRN10DB
specifications for the 40G UOCLD optical interface circuit packs.
Table 1-18
Technical specifications for 40G UOCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)

Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation eDC40 CoFDM dual-polarization BPSK
Line rate 46.01 Gbit/s (carried as two 23.0034G sub-carriers CoFDM dual-
polarization BPSK sharing the same 50 GHz ITU channel)
Tunable wavelength range 1527.99 nm to 1565.50 nm

(Note 3) (see “DWDM wavelengths” on page 1-137 for a list of supported
wavelengths)
Central wavelength accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -14 dBm to -4 dBm
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver
Receiver type Coherent
Connector type LC
Wavelength range 1527.99 nm to 1565.50 nm
Receiver sensitivity (minimum -17 dBm (with 6 dB PDL) (Note 4)

EOL)
Loss of Signal Alarm Clear -29 dBm
Receiver operating range -26 dBm to 7 dBm
Receiver overload +7 dBm
Receiver damage level +16 dBm
Table 1-18
Technical specifications for 40G UOCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.7 dB between -10 dBm and 10 dBm
ROADM support 10 (estimate)

tolerance
Polarization Mode Dispersion 25 ps (mean DGD)

(PMD) tolerance
Polarization Dependent Loss 2 dB

(PDL)
Reach > 3000 km for NTK539XAE5

> 8000 km for NTK539XEE5
Note 3: Tx wavelength indicates the center frequency of the channel, not that of either subcarrier.
Note 4: This value does not include +/- 1.5 dB Rx Power monitor accuracy.
Latency
Refer to the following tables for 40G UOCLD latency values:
40G functions
40G circuit packs can perform in different functions as described below.
40G OCLD (NTK539PxE5) and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD

(NTK539RxE5) circuit packs functions
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs can
• form optical transponders (40G OTRs) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCI, a 40G+ CFP OCI, or a 40/43G OCI circuit pack (see
Figure 1-17 on page 1-107).
• form optical muxponders (40G MOTRs) when used in conjunction with a
40G MUX OCI circuit pack (see Figure 1-17 on page 1-107).
• form regenerators (40G Regen) when used in conjunction with a
40G UOCLD circuit pack or another 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit pack (see Figure 1-17 on page 1-107).
• be used for GbE aggregation when used in conjunction with a L2 MOTR
or SuperMux circuit pack and mating with a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
(see Figure 1-19 on page 1-109).
• form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are used in conjunction with one 40G
OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (see
• form 40G MOTR 1+1 TPT protection when two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are used in conjunction
with two 40G MUX OCI circuit packs and a TPT (see Figure 1-21 on page
1-111).
• form 40G OTR 1+1 TPT protection when two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are used in conjunction
with two 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs and a TPT (see Figure 1-22 on page
1-112).
• be used in conjunction with a 40G XCIF circuit pack and two
cross-connect circuit packs to allow STS-1 grooming capabilities between
6500 MSPP interfaces and a 6500 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack. Two pairs of
40G OCLD/40G XCIF or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF
circuit packs and two cross-connect circuit packs form a 40G protected TR
group. Such a protection group can provide 1+1/MSP linear protection or
2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing on the four virtual OC192/STM64 ports of
40G XCIF circuit packs (see Figure 1-23 on page 1-113).
• be used in conjunction with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack and two OTN
cross-connect circuit packs to allow grooming capabilities by enabling
OTN I/F interface into fabric of existing 40G line by mapping OTU-3 into
ODU-3, ODU-2, ODU-1, or ODU-0 container. Two pairs of
40G OCLD/40G OTN XCIF or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G OTN

XCIF circuit packs and two OTN cross-connect circuit packs form a 40G
protected TR group. Such a protection group can provide 1+1 OTN
protection on the virtual ODU TTP and TCM TTP facilities ports of 40G
OTN XCIF circuit packs (see Figure 1-24 on page 1-113).
Note: A circuit pack described as an "OTN I/F" interfaces between OTN

mappings on its client or line ports and the cross-connect or fabric circuit
packs.
40G OCI (NTK529SAE5), 40/43G OCI (NTK529SDE5), and 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJE5) circuit packs functions
40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs can
• form optical transponder (40G OTR) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack
• form 40G client card back-to-back configuration when a 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit pack is used in conjunction with a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
(NTK525CFE5 variant) or another 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (see Figure
1-18 on page 1-108).
• form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when used in conjunction with two
packs (see Figure 1-20 on page 1-110).
• form 40G OTR 1+1 TPT protection when two 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs
are used in conjunction with two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit packs and a TPT (see Figure 1-22 on page 1-112).
OTN I/F interface into fabric of 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack by mapping
OTU-3 into ODU-3, ODU-2, ODU-1, or ODU-0 container (only applicable
to 40G+ CFP OCI variant; NTK529SJE5). Two pairs of
40G+ CFP OCI/40G OTN XCIF circuit packs and two OTN cross-connect
circuit packs form a 40G protected TR group. Such a protection group can
provide 1+1 OTN protection on the virtual ODU TTP and TCM TTP
facilities ports of 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs (see Figure 1-25 on page
1-114).
40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) circuit packs functions

40G MUX OCI circuit packs can
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack
• form 40G client card back-to-back configuration when a 40G MUX OCI
circuit pack (NTK525CFE5 variant) is used in conjunction with a
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (see Figure 1-18 on page 1-108).
or SuperMux circuit pack and mating with a 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack (see
• form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when used in conjunction with two
packs (see Figure 1-20 on page 1-110).
• form 1+1 40G MOTR TPT protection when two 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs are used in conjunction with two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs and a TPT (see Figure
1-21 on page 1-111).
OTN I/F interface to interwork with fabric of existing 10G OCI circuit packs
by providing OTN mapping (only applicable to NTK525CFE5 variant). Two
pairs of 40G MUX OCI/40G OTN XCIF circuit packs and two
OTN cross-connect circuit packs form a 40G protected TR group. Such a
protection group can provide 1+1 OTN protection on the four virtual ODU
TTP and TCM TTP facilities ports of 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs (see
40G XCIF (NTK525FAE5) circuit packs functions

40G XCIF circuit packs can
• mate with 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD
circuit packs to form unprotected TR group (see Figure 1-23 on page
1-113).
• mate with 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs to
form protected TR group (see Figure 1-23 on page 1-113).
40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) circuit packs functions

40G UOCLD circuit packs can
• form optical transponders (40G OTRs) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCI, a 40G+ CFP OCI, or a 40/43G OCI circuit pack (see
• form regenerators (40G Regen) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack or another
40G UOCLD circuit pack (see Figure 1-17 on page 1-107).
or SuperMux circuit pack and mating with a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
• form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when two 40G UOCLD circuit packs are
used in conjunction with one 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40/43G OCI, or
• be used in conjunction with a 40G XCIF circuit pack and two cross-
connect circuit packs to allow STS-1 grooming capabilities between 6500
MSPP interfaces and a 6500 40G UOCLD circuit pack. Unlike 40G OCLD
or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, 40G protected TR
group is not supported (see Figure 1-23 on page 1-113).
• can be used in conjunction with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack and two OTN
OTN I/F interface into fabric of existing 40G line by mapping OTU-3 into
ODU-3, ODU-2, ODU-1, or ODU-0 container. Two pairs of
40G UOCLD/40G OTN XCIF circuit packs and two OTN cross-connect
circuit packs form a 40G protected TR group. Such a protection group can
provide 1+1 OTN protection on the virtual ODU TTP and TCM TTP
facilities ports of 40G OTN XCIF circuit packs (see Figure 1-24 on page
1-113).
Figure 1-17
40G circuit packs functions (40G OTRs, 40G MOTRs, 40G Regens)
Optical Transponder (OTR) Optical Muxponder (MOTR)
OC-768/STM-256/OTU3
G.709 OTU3+Line
STM-64, 10GbE, OTU-2,

or ETH40G Client
(Overclocked)
10G Client (OC-192,

G.709 OTU3+Line
(Overclocked)
FC800/1200)
40G OCLD/40G OCI
or
40G OCLD/40/43G OCI 40G OCLD/40G MUX OCI
or or
40G OCLD/40G+ CFP OCI Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G MUX OCI
or or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G OCI 40G UOCLD/40G MUX OCI
or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40/43G OCI
or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G+ CFP OCI
or
40G UOCLD/40G OCI
or
40G UOCLD/40/43G OCI
or
40G UOCLD/40G+ CFP OCI
Some 10G signals are passed through

Regenerator (Regen) using patch cords
10GbE, OTU-2, FC800/1200)

10G Client (OC-192,STM-64,
10GbE, OTU-2, FC800/1200)
10G Client (OC-192,STM-64,
G.709 OTU3+Line
G.709 OTU3+Line
(Overclocked)
(Overclocked)
G.709 OTU3+Line
G.709 OTU3+Line
(Overclocked)
(Overclocked)
40G OCLD/40G OCLD

or
40G UOCLD/40G UOCLD
or Other 10G signals are
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD added/dropped
or
40G OCLD/40G UOCLD
or Back-to-back 40G Regen with 40G MUX OCI
40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
or
40G UOCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
Figure 1-18
40G client card back-to-back configuration
40G client card back-to-back configurations
(NTK525CFE5)
40G+ CFP OCI

(NTK529SJE5)
40G MUX OCI
40G+ CFP OCI
40G+ CFP OCI

(NTK529SJE5)
(NTK529SJE5)
Figure 1-19
40G circuit packs functions (GbE aggregation)
GbE aggregation GbE aggregation
4 times 4 times
OTU3+
OTU3+
10GbE LAN PHY or OTU2
OC192 or OTU2
10G Client (ETH10G)
10G Client (OC192)

G.709 OTU3+Line
G.709 OTU3+Line
(Overclocked)
(Overclocked)
L2 MOTR
SMUX
GbE
40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD GbE 40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD

or or
40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD 40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
or or
40G MUX OCI/40G UOCLD 40G MUX OCI/40G UOCLD
GbE aggregation
4 times
OTU3+
(1+8)xOTN Flex MOTR
10G Client (OTU2)
G.709 OTU3+Line
(Overclocked)
OTU2
GbE
40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD

or
40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
or
40G MUX OCI/40G UOCLD
Figure 1-20
40G circuit packs functions (1+1 OTN line-side protection)
1+1 OTN line-side protection
OC-768/STM-256 or
G.709 OTU3+Line
G.709 OTU3+Line
(Overclocked)
(Overclocked)
OTU3 Client
Working Protection
40G 1+1 Protected Line

40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI with two 40G OCLDs. The two 40G OCLDs
can be two 40G UOCLDs, two 40G OCLDs, two Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs, or
one 40G OCLD and one Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD.
1+1 OTN line-side protection

10G Client (OC-192, STM-64,
10GbE, OTU-2, FC800/1200)
G.709 OTU3+Line
G.709 OTU3+Line
(Overclocked)
(Overclocked)
Working Protection
40G 1+1 Protected Line

40G MUX OCI with two 40G OCLDs. The two 40G OCLDs can be two 40G UOCLDs,
two 40G OCLDs, two Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs, or one 40G OCLD and one
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD.
Figure 1-21
40G circuit packs functions (40G TPT protected MOTR group)
4-slot groups to TPT 4-slot groups to TPT
40G MUX OCI
Wavelength-selective
40G MUX OCI
TPT
40G OCLD
TPT
40G OCLD
40G MUX OCI
40G MUX OCI
40G OCLD
40G OCLD
40G TPT protected MOTR group 40G TPT protected MOTR group
4-slot groups to TPT

40G MUX OCI
TPT
40G OCLD
40G MUX OCI
40G OCLD
40G TPT protected MOTR group
Figure 1-22
40G circuit packs functions (40G TPT protected OTR group)
4-slot groups to TPT 4-slot groups to TPT
40G+ CFP OCI
40G+ CFP OCI
TPT
40G OCLD
TPT
40G OCLD
40G+ CFP OCI
40G+ CFP OCI

40G OCLD
40G OCLD
40G TPT protected OTR group 40G TPT protected OTR group
4-slot groups to TPT

40G+ CFP OCI
TPT
40G OCLD
40G+ CFP OCI
40G OCLD
40G TPT protected OTR group
Figure 1-23
40G circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G XCIF)
4-slot groups to cross-connect
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD

40G TR
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD

Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD,
or 40G OCLD
Cross-connect
Cross-connect
40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD
40G XCIF
or 40G OCLD
40G XCIF
40G XCIF
Cross-connect
Cross-connect
Unprotected TR group 40G protected TR group

The two 40G OCLDs forming the protection group can be
two 40G OCLDs, two Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs, or
one 40G OCLD and one Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD.
Figure 1-24
40G circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G OTN XCIF)

40G TR

OTN Cross-connect
OTN Cross-connect
40G OTN XCIF

OTN Cross-connect
OTN Cross-connect
40G OTN XCIF
40G OTN XCIF
Unprotected TR group
40G protected TR group
Figure 1-25
40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G OTN XCIF)

40G TR
OTN Cross-connect
OTN Cross-connect
40G OTN XCIF
OTN Cross-connect
OTN Cross-connect
40G+ CFP OCI

40G OTN XCIF
40G+ CFP OCI
40G OTN XCIF

40G+ CFP OCI
Figure 1-26
40G MUX OCI circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G OTN XCIF)

40G TR
OTN Cross-connect
OTN Cross-connect
40G OTN XCIF
OTN Cross-connect
OTN Cross-connect
40G OTN XCIF

40G MUX OCI
40G MUX OCI
40G OTN XCIF

40G MUX OCI
OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5)

Overview
The Optical Supervisory and Idler Channel circuit pack (also referred to as the
OSIC circuit pack) is used to monitor and manage optical amplifiers and
repeaters in a submarine optical transmission network. It provides a dedicated
management channel that allows fault sectionalization.
The Idler Channel fills the spectrum as required to meet wet plant amplifier
input power level while allowing optimized launch power for the 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD submarine circuit packs.
The OSIC circuit pack is optimized for co-propagation with DP-BPSK and
DP-QPSK signals, and should be used in all cases where idler channels are
required.
The 6500 OSIC card includes:

• a Command Channel (CCTX) for transmitting an optical signal including
an operation command to notify of a state of a supervisory target
• an optical amplifier repeater that transmits a response optical signal
including a response code obtained by measuring the supervisory target
in response to the operation command.
The 6500 OSIC card also includes a Response Channel (RCRX) for receiving
the response optical signal via an optical fiber and an information processing
unit for converting the response code into a numerical form by using a
predetermined expression that links the response code with measured
information obtained by measuring in advance the supervisory target with an
external measuring device during operation of the optical amplifier repeater in
response to the operation command.
Figure 1-27 on page 1-116 shows the faceplate of an OSIC circuit pack and
Figure 1-28 on page 1-117 shows the functional block diagram of an OSIC
circuit pack.
Figure 1-27
OSIC circuit pack faceplate
Yellow circle (LOS)

Red triangle (Fail)

- Card initializing = Blinking LED; Card OK = LED on;
Card not ready = LED off
- Equipment in-service = LED on;
Figure 1-28
OSIC circuit pack block diagram (NTK528XAE5)
Backplane
DWDM
Supervisory Channel Tx/Rx 1
Optics

Module Supply
The OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5) provides the following functionality:
Line support
• one fixed OTM2 line interface (port 1) for idler and supervisory features
only
1565.09 nm)
• supports Idler Channel
• AM support for Supervisory Channel
• supports SBS (NLS) Dither
Client support
There are no client ports on the OSIC circuit packs.
Alarms
Equipment alarms

• Loss Of Signal

Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to OSIC circuit packs:
• occupies a single slot, and offers one line port (port 1).
• can be equipped in any slot (1-14, except slots 7 and 8 if cross-connect
• can be equipped in slots 1-7 of the 7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or

NTK503KA).
• cannot be equipped in the 2-slot shelf.
• each 6500 shelf supports a maximum of one OSIC circuit pack with Tx AM
Format provisioned to SC Idler, but can support several OSIC circuit
packs with Tx AM Format provisioned to Idler in the same shelf. In other
words, a single 6500 shelf can support up to one SC Idler circuit pack and
multiple Idler circuit packs.
• cannot be equipped in the same shelf as an OSIC circuit pack associated
with another repeater wet plant. However, OSIC circuit packs associated
with different repeater wet plants can be equipped in different shelves that
are member shelves of the same consolidated node.
otherwise the OSIC equipment does not provision.
specifications for the OSIC optical interface circuit packs.
Table 1-19
Technical specifications for OSIC optical interface circuit packs (10G line interface)
Parameter OSIC (NTK528XAE5)

Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation IMDD NRZ
Table 1-19
Technical specifications for OSIC optical interface circuit packs (10G line interface) (continued)
Parameter OSIC (NTK528XAE5)

(see “DWDM wavelengths” on page 1-137 for a list of supported
wavelengths)
Central Wavelength Accuracy 0.02 nm
Transmit output power -7 to 3.0 dBm
Sub-carrier Frequency 100 kHz to 250 kHz

Modulation
Modulation Type On-Off Keying (OOK)
Baud Rate 333.33 or 1667 baud
Encoding Format NRZ or 3SB1 (3 symbols/bit)
Receiver
Receiver type PIN
Connector type LC
Receiver operating range -7 dBm to 3.1 dBm
Receiver damage level 10 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 1 dB between -15 dBm and 5 dBm
Sub-carrier Frequency 4.0 kHz to 63.0 kHz

Modulation
Baud Rate 16.67 or 83.33
Encoding Format NRZ or 3SB1 (3 symbols/bit)
Inline Submarine Supervisory (ISS C-Band) circuit pack (NTK528YA)

Overview
The Inline Submarine Supervisory (ISS C-Band) circuit pack (also referred to
as the ISS C-Band circuit pack) is used to monitor and manage optical
amplifiers and repeaters in a submarine optical transmission network. It
provides a dedicated management channel that allows fault sectionalization.
The ISS C-Band circuit pack is a functional replacement for the OSIC circuit
pack with the following additional functionalities:
• The Tx Command channel in ISS C-Band circuit pack modulated onto the
aggregate traffic signal, via the inline Tx VOA device. This allows a
command channel to be generated without blocking any traffic bearing
slots, which improves spectral utilization.
• The Rx (response channel) detection path in ISS C-Band circuit pack
includes both the old format ASK detector and a newly added BPSK
detector to support a new repeater family.
Figure 1-29 on page 1-122 shows the faceplate of an ISS C-Band circuit pack
and Figure 1-30 on page 1-123 shows the functional block diagram of an ISS
C-Band circuit pack.
Figure 1-29
ISS C-Band circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

- Used to communicate whether circuit pack can be extracted Monitor Out port
Common In port
Common Out port
Supervisory Rx In port
Figure 1-30
ISS C-Band circuit pack block diagram (NTK528YA)
Common In 2
Backplane
Supervisory Tx and VOA Monitor Out 1
Common Out Supervisory 3
Supervisory Rx Supervisory In 4

Module Supply
Legend
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
The ISS C-Band circuit pack (NTK528YA) provides the following functionality:
• one fixed OTM2 supervisory interface (port 4) for supervisory feature
• two fixed OTM2 interfaces (port 2 and 3) for monitoring and common
features
• AM support for Supervisory Channel
• see Table 1-20 on page 1-124 for function and connector type for each
port
Table 1-20
ISS C-Band optical interfaces
Interface name Physical port # Function Connector type
Mon 1 Monitor output port LC
Common In 2 Optical input from the line amplifier LC
Common Out 3 Optical input to the supervisory port LC
Superv Rx 4 Supervisory port LC
The 6500 monitors and collects physical PMs for ISS C-Band circuit pack
facilities. Table 1-21 provides a list of monitor types supported on ISS C-Band
circuit packs. Figure 1-31 on page 1-125 shows the ISS C-Band circuit pack
optical monitoring points.

520.
Table 1-21
Monitor types table for ISS C-Band circuit packs
Monitor Type Facility
Port 2 and 4 Port 3
OPR-OCH X
OPRMIN-OCH X
OPRMAX-OCH X
OPRAVG-OCH X
OPRN-OCH X
OPT-OCH X
OPTMIN-OCH X
OPTMAX-OCH X
OPTAVG-OCH X
OPTN-OCH X
Figure 1-31
ISS C-Band circuit pack optical monitoring points
Facility: OTM2 port 2

Parameter: OPR-OCH*, OPRN-OCH
Common In 2
Supervisory Tx and VOA Monitor Out 1
Common Out Supervisory 3

Backplane

Parameter: OPT-OCH*, OPTN-OCH
Supervisory Rx Supervisory In 4

Parameter: OPR-OCH*, OPRN-OCH

Module Supply
* AVG, MIN, and MAX measurements also provided
Legend
Alarms
Equipment alarms


• TX Power Out Of Range
• TX Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Signal

Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to ISS C-Band circuit packs:
• occupies a single slot, and offers one supervisory port (port 4)
• can be equipped in any slot (1-14, except slots 7 and 8 if cross-connect
packet-optical shelf
• can be equipped in slots 1-7 of the 7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or
NTK503KA)
equipped with this circuit pack
• can be equipped in the same shelf with any other type of circuit pack
• can be equipped in the same shelf as an OSIC circuit pack associated with
another repeater wet plant. Also, OSIC and ISS C-Band circuit packs
associated with different repeater wet plants can be equipped in different
shelves that are member shelves of the same consolidated node.
otherwise the ISS C-Band equipment does not provision
specifications for the ISS C-Band optical interface circuit packs.
Table 1-22
Technical specifications for ISS C-Band optical interface circuit packs (10G line interface)
Parameter ISS C-Band (NTK528YA)

Transmitter
Monitor Output Port 1:
Connector type LC
Insertion Loss Port 3 to Port 1 17 dB to 21 dB
Output Power Range -22 dBm to 0 dBm
Power Monitor Accuracy +/- 1 dB
Monitor Output Port 3:
Connector type LC
Thru-Port Insertion Loss 1.9 dB to 4 dB
Latency Thru-Port 35 µs Max. (for 7 m of splicing fibers)
Output Power Range -1 dBm to 18 dBm
Tx Power Monitor Accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Sub-carrier Frequency Modulation Rate 100 kHz to 500.5 kHz
Baud Rate 1667 (Family A); 150 (Family B); 1000 (Family C)
Table 1-22
Technical specifications for ISS C-Band optical interface circuit packs (10G line interface)
Parameter ISS C-Band (NTK528YA)
Encoding Format NRZ2, 3SB1 or 3SB2 (3 symbols/bit)
Receiver
Common Input Port 2:
Connector type LC
Input Operating Range 5 dBm to 23 dBm
Damage Level 26 dBm
Rx Power Monitor Accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Supervisory Input Port 4:
Connector type LC
Receiver Operating Range -7 dBm to 6 dBm
Receiver Damage Level 9 dBm
Rx Power Monitor Accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Modulation Type On-Off Keying (OOK) Binary Phase Shift Keying

(BPSK)
Sub-carrier Frequency Modulation Rate 4.0 kHz to 68.0 kHz 43.0405 kHz
Baud Rate 16.67 or 83.33 5 (Family C); 150 (Family B);

83.33 (Family A)
Encoding Format NRZ2, 3SB1 or 3SB2 (3 NRZ2

symbols/bit)
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack

(NTK554HA) and Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 Flex C-
Band) circuit pack (NTK554HC)
Overview
The Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack (also
known as SLIC10) and Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel
(SLIC10 Flex C-Band) circuit pack (also known as SLIC10 Flex) are idler
circuit packs for submarine photonics line systems. They are used to control
the per-wavelength power in an amplified system that uses a total output
power amplifier control scheme. These circuit packs are improvement over the
existing OSIC idlers currently in use.
The primary purpose of the SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs are to
provide lasers to form an idler pair. The main difference between SLIC10 and
SLIC10 Flex circuit packs is that in case of a SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA),
all idler pairs will be C-band provisionable with a fixed ITU grid offset capability
of +12.5 GHz or -12.5 GHz while in case of a SLIC10 Flex circuit pack
(NTK554HC), all idler pairs will be C-band provisionable with tunable ITU grid
offset capability from +25 GHz to -25 GHz in 0.1 increments.
One or more idler pairs can be required at different wavelengths depending on

the system implementation. SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex wavelengths are
intended to be inserted into the line like any other channel (for example, via a
WSS port). The SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs are primarily used in
Submarine applications.
Figure 1-32 on page 1-130 shows the faceplate of a SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex
circuit pack. Figure 1-33 on page 1-131 provides a functional block diagram of
the SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack.
Figure 1-32
SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack faceplate (example: NTK554HA or NTK554HC)
Red triangle (Fail)

- Used to communicate hardware or software
failure state
- Used to communicate hardware or software
functional state Monitor port
- Card initializing = Blinking LED; Card OK = LED
on; Card not ready = LED off Common Out
Blue diamond (In Use) port
- Used to communicate whether circuit pack can
be extracted
- Equipment in-service = LED on; Equipment
out-of-service = LED off
Figure 1-33
SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack block diagram (NTK554HA or NTK554HC)
ITLA# 1
ITLA# 2
ITLA# 3
ITLA# 4
Power Combiner 1
ITLA# 5
ITLA# 6
Backplane
2
ITLA# 7
PD
ITLA# 8
ITLA# 9
ITLA# 10
Processor Power
Module Supply
Legend
ITLA Integrated tunable laser assembly
PD Photodiode
The SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA) and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack
(NTK554HC) provide the following functionality:
• includes five idler facility pairs, each creating a dual idler channel (against
the common out port) to control the output power in a total output power
(TOP) controlled system
• supports a tunable range of 88 wavelengths
• in case of a SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA), all idler pairs will be C-band
provisionable with a fixed ITU grid offset capability of +12.5 GHz or
-12.5 GHz
• in case of a SLIC10 Flex circuit pack (NTK554HC), all idler pairs will be
C-band provisionable with tunable ITU grid offset capability from +25 GHz
to -25 GHz in 0.1 increments
• requires WSS 50 GHz w/OPM 9x1 circuit packs (such as NTK553FAE5)
to function
• not allowed as pass thru channel type
• see Table 1-23 for function and connector type for each port
Table 1-23
SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex optical interfaces
Interface name Physical port # Function Connector type
Mon 1 Monitor output port LC
Common Out 2 Optical output from the idler circuit pack LC
The 6500 monitors and collects physical PMs for SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex
circuit pack facilities. Table 1-24 provides a list of monitor types supported on
SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs. Figure 1-34 on page 1-134 shows the
SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack optical monitoring points.

520.
Table 1-24
Monitor types table for SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs
Monitor Type Facility
OPTMON
OPT-OTS X
OPTAVG-OTS X
OPTMIN-OTS X
OPTMAX-OTS X
Figure 1-34
SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack optical monitoring points
ITLA# 1
ITLA# 2
ITLA# 3
ITLA# 4
Power Combiner 1
ITLA# 5
ITLA# 6
Backplane
2
ITLA# 7
PD
ITLA# 8
ITLA# 9
ITLA# 10
PMs collected at PD location

Facility: OPTMON port 2 Processor Power
Parameter: OPT-OTS* Module Supply
* AVG, MIN, and MAX measurements also provided
Legend
ITLA Integrated tunable laser assembly

PD Photodiode
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Idler Facility alarm

• Laser Failed
• Target Unachievable
• Tx Tuning In Progress
COM alarms
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack:
• is a double slot interface
• can be equipped in slot 1 to 13 (except slots 7 and 8 if cross-connect circuit
packs are provisioned in slots 7 and 8) of the 14-slot packet-optical,
optical, converged optical, optical/front electrical, converged optical/front
electrical, optical/rear electrical, or converged optical/rear electrical
shelves. SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack cannot be placed in slot 14
since SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack is a double slot interface.
Note: SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA) and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack
(NTK554HC) are not supported with metro front electrical shelf
(NTK503GA).
packet-optical shelf. SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack cannot be placed
in slot 8, 18, 28, or 38 since SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack is a double
slot interface
NTK503KA). SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack cannot be placed in slot
7 since SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack is a double slot interface
(NTK503RA). SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack cannot be placed in slot
8 since SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack is a double slot interface

when deploying a SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack:
• the SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit packs do not use any cross-connect
capacity and can be installed in shelves equipped with or without
cross-connect circuit packs
• in a 14-slot shelf type, when the SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit packs are
installed in slots 7 and 8, only Broadband circuit packs or Photonic circuit
packs can be provisioned in the other interface slots (slots 1 to 6 and
9 to 14), as MSPP interface circuit packs require a cross-connect circuit
pack. See Part 1 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 3) for a full list of
supported Broadband and Photonic circuit packs.
Table 1-25 lists the weight, power consumption, and other specifications for
the SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex optical interface circuit packs.
Table 1-25
Technical specifications for SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex optical interface circuit packs
Parameter SLIC10 (NTK554HA) and

SLIC10 Flex (NTK554HC)

Power Budget (W): 70 (see Note 2 and Note 3)
Connector type LC
Frequency range (50 GHz spacing) 191.5375 THz to 195.9125 THz
Wavelength range (50 GHz spacing) 1530.237 nm to 1565.190 nm
Total Output Power (max) 15 dBm
Per-wavelength power range -2.4 dBm to +6.0 dBm
Nominal loss for MON port to Tx 10 dB
Frequency offset SLIC10 (NTK554HA): fixed at +/-12.5 GHz

SLIC10 Flex (NTK554HC): adjustable
between +25 GHZ and -25 GHZ in 0.1 GHz
increments
Note 3: This circuit pack occupies two slots in the shelf and power is drawn from the left-most slot.
When equipped in a 14-slot packet-optical or 32-slot shelf, the shelf processor applies this circuit pack’s
power budget to the zone associated with the left-most slot occupied by the circuit pack.
DWDM wavelengths
Table 1-26 on page 1-138 lists the DWDM C-band frequencies and
wavelengths for the following circuit packs supporting tunable transmitters in
50 GHz spacing:
• 40G OCLD C-band (NTK539PAE5/NTK539PBE5/NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/NTK539PEE5/NTK539PFE5) and Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD C-band (NTK539RAE5/NTK539RBE5/NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5)
• 40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)
Table 1-26
DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)
Frequency Wavelength (nm) Frequency Wavelength (nm) Frequency Wavelength (nm)

(THz) (THz) (THz)
196.25 1527.60 195.25 1535.43 194.25 1543.33

(see Note 1)
196.20 1527.99 195.20 1535.82 194.20 1543.73

(see Note 2)
196.15 1528.38 195.15 1536.22 194.15 1544.13

(see Note 2)
196.10 1528.77 195.10 1536.61 194.10 1544.53
196.05 1529.16 195.05 1537.00 194.05 1544.92
196.00 1529.55 195.00 1537.40 194.00 1545.32
195.95 1529.94 194.95 1537.79 193.95 1545.72
195.90 1530.33 194.90 1538.19 193.90 1546.12
195.85 1530.72 194.85 1538.58 193.85 1546.52
195.80 1531.12 194.80 1538.98 193.80 1546.92
195.75 1531.51 194.75 1539.37 193.75 1547.32
195.70 1531.90 194.70 1539.77 193.70 1547.72
195.65 1532.29 194.65 1540.16 193.65 1548.11
195.60 1532.68 194.60 1540.56 193.60 1548.51
195.55 1533.07 194.55 1540.95 193.55 1548.91
195.50 1533.47 194.50 1541.35 193.50 1549.32
195.45 1533.86 194.45 1541.75 193.45 1549.72
195.40 1534.25 194.40 1542.14 193.40 1550.12
195.35 1534.64 194.35 1542.54 193.35 1550.52
195.30 1535.04 194.30 1542.94 193.30 1550.92
Table 1-26
DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) (continued)

(THz) (THz) (THz)
193.25 1551.32 192.65 1556.15 192.05 1561.01
193.20 1551.72 192.60 1556.55 192.00 1561.42
193.15 1552.12 192.55 1556.96 191.95 1561.83
193.10 1552.52 192.50 1557.36 191.90 1562.23
193.05 1552.93 192.45 1557.77 191.85 1562.64
193.00 1553.33 192.40 1558.17 191.80 1563.05
192.95 1553.73 192.35 1558.58 191.75 1563.45
192.90 1554.13 192.30 1558.98 191.70 1563.86
192.85 1554.54 192.25 1559.39 191.65 1564.27
192.80 1554.94 192.20 1559.79 191.60 1564.68
192.75 1555.34 192.15 1560.20 191.55 1565.09
192.70 1555.75 192.10 1560.61 191.50 1565.50

(see Note 2)
191.45 1565.90
(see Note 3)
191.40 1566.31
(see Note 3)
191.35 1566.72
(see Note 3)
Note 1: This wavelength is only applicable to 40G OCLD circuit packs.

Note 2: This wavelength is only applicable to 40G OCLD and 40G UOCLD circuit packs.
Note 3: This wavelength is only applicable to Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
Table 1-27 on page 1-140 lists the DWDM L-band frequencies and
wavelengths for the 40G OCLD L-band circuit pack (NTK539PUE5)
supporting tunable transmitters in 50 GHz spacing.
Table 1-27
DWDM L-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)
(THz) (THz) (THz)
191.10 1568.77 189.50 1582.02 187.90 1595.49
191.05 1569.18 189.45 1582.44 187.85 1595.91
191.00 1569.59 189.40 1582.85 187.80 1596.34
190.95 1570.01 189.35 1583.27 187.75 1596.76
190.90 1570.42 189.30 1583.69 187.70 1597.19
190.85 1570.83 189.25 1584.11 187.65 1597.62
190.80 1571.24 189.20 1584.53 187.60 1598.04
190.75 1571.65 189.15 1584.95 187.55 1598.47
190.70 1572.06 189.10 1585.36 187.50 1598.89
190.65 1572.48 189.05 1585.78 187.45 1599.32
190.60 1572.89 189.00 1586.20 187.40 1599.75
190.55 1573.30 188.95 1586.62 187.35 1600.17
190.50 1573.71 188.90 1587.04 187.30 1600.60
190.45 1574.13 188.85 1587.46 187.25 1601.03
190.40 1574.54 188.80 1587.88 187.20 1601.46
190.35 1574.95 188.75 1588.30 187.15 1601.88
190.30 1575.37 188.70 1588.73 187.10 1602.31
190.25 1575.78 188.65 1589.15 187.05 1602.74
190.20 1576.20 188.60 1589.57 187.00 1603.17
190.15 1576.61 188.55 1589.99 186.95 1603.60
190.10 1577.03 188.50 1590.41 186.90 1604.03
190.05 1577.44 188.45 1590.83 186.85 1604.46
190.00 1577.86 188.40 1591.26 186.80 1604.88
189.95 1578.27 188.35 1591.68 186.75 1605.31
189.90 1578.69 188.30 1592.10 186.70 1605.74
189.85 1579.10 188.25 1592.52 186.65 1606.17
189.80 1579.52 188.20 1592.95 186.60 1606.60
189.75 1579.93 188.15 1593.37 186.55 1607.04
189.70 1580.35 188.10 1593.79 186.50 1607.47
Table 1-27
DWDM L-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing) (continued)
(THz) (THz) (THz)
189.65 1580.77 188.05 1594.22 186.45 1607.90
189.60 1581.18 188.00 1594.64 186.40 1608.33
189.55 1581.60 187.95 1595.06 186.35 1608.76
Latency specifications for 40G circuit packs

Table 1-28 to Table 1-31 on page 1-149 provide typical unidirectional end-to-
end latency for different 40G circuit packs. “N/A” indicates Not Applicable.
Table 1-28
Latency specifications for Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40G MUX
OCI circuit packs (MOTR configuration)
DWDM circuit Client circuit pack Typical unidirectional, end-to-end

pack latency (µs) (see Note)
Description Description Client Mapping NTK525CAE5 NTK525CFE5

and (PEC) and (PEC)
40G OCLD 40G MUX OCI OC-192/ 10.7G-OPU2 (Synchronous 77 68

(NTK539PAE5/ (NTK525CAE5 STM-64 CBR10G)
NTK539PBE5/ and ETH10G • 11.05G-OPU1e (PCS 75 68
NTK539PCE5/ NTK525CFE5) transparent), or
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/ • 11.09G-OPU2e (PCS
NTK539PFE5/ transparent)
NTK539PUE5) Any packet size
or • 10.7G-GFP/OPU2 76 68
Wavelength- (standard/MAC
selective 40G transparent), or
OCLD • 10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
G.7041 GFP-F mappings
(NTK539RAE5/ (preamble/MAC
NTK539RBE5/ transparent), or
NTK539RCE5/ • 10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
NTK539RDE5/ (preamble/ordered
NTK539REE5) set/MAC transparent);
NTK525CFE5 only
Packet mapping with 64
byte packets
Add this value for all 2

ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 1518
byte packets
Add this value for all 9 15

ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 9600
byte packets
FC800 Enh CBR10G to OPU2e N/A 69
FC1200 512/513 TTT, GFP-T to N/A 69

OPU2e (TCODEGFPT)
Table 1-28
OCI circuit packs (MOTR configuration) (continued)


and (PEC) and (PEC)
40G OCLD 40G MUX OCI OTM2 ODU transparent regen, Null 77 69
(NTK539PAE5/ (NTK525CAE5 FEC, 10.7G
NTK539PBE5/ and OTM2 ODU transparent regen, Null 76 69
NTK539PCE5/ NTK525CFE5) FEC, 11.05G/11.09G
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/ OTM2 ODU transparent regen, 83 75
NTK539PFE5/ RS8 FEC, 10.7G
NTK539PUE5)
OTM2 ODU transparent regen, 82 74
or RS8 FEC, 11.05G/11.09G
Wavelength-
selective 40G
OCLD
(NTK539RAE5/
NTK539RBE5/
NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5)
Table 1-28


and (PEC) and (PEC)
40G UOCLD 40G MUX OCI OC-192/ 10.7G-OPU2 (Synchronous 158 149
(NTK539XAE5/ (NTK525CAE5 STM-64 CBR10G)
NTK539XEE5) and ETH10G • 11.05G-OPU1e (PCS 157 149
NTK525CFE5) transparent), or
• 11.09G-OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
Any packet size
G.7041 GFP-F packet 157 150

mappings (packet
mapping with 64 byte
packets):
• 10.7G-GFP/OPU2
(standard/MAC
G.7041 GFP-F mappings
transparent), or
• 10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent), or
• 10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/ordered
set/MAC transparent);
NTK525CFE5 only
Add this value for all 2

ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 1518
byte packets
Add this value for all 9 15

ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 9600
byte packets
FC800 Enh CBR10G to OPU2e N/A 151
FC1200 512/513 TTT, GFP-T to N/A 151

OPU2e (TCODEGFPT)
Table 1-28


and (PEC) and (PEC)
40G UOCLD 40G MUX OCI OTM2 ODU transparent regen, Null 158 151
(NTK539XAE5/ (NTK525CAE5 FEC, 10.7G
NTK539XEE5) and OTM2 ODU transparent regen, Null 157 150
NTK525CFE5) FEC, 11.05G/11.09G

RS8 FEC, 10.7G

RS8 FEC, 11.05G/11.09G
Note: The unidirectional, end-to-end latency is measured one way from (input to output). For example for a path
from a client 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5) input to a far-end client 40G MUX OCI output through two 40G
OCLDs or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLDs when client mapping is OC-192/STM-64, the total latency is 77 µs
(not 2x77= 154 µs).
Table 1-29
Latency specifications for Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs (OTR configuration)
DWDM circuit Client circuit pack Typical unidirectional, end-to-end latency

pack (µs) (see Note)
Description Description Client mapping NTK529SAE5 NTK529SJE5 NTK529SDE5

and (PEC) and (PEC)
40G OCLD 40G OCI, 40G+ 40GE N/A 69 N/A

(NTK539PAE5/ CFP OCI, and
40/43G OCI OC768/STM256 75 69 75
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/ (NTK529SAE5, OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) N/A 71 81
NTK539PDE5/ NTK529SJE5,
NTK539PEE5/ and OTU3 (with FEC OFF) N/A 69 75
NTK539PFE5/ NTK529SDE5)
NTK539PUE5)
or
Wavelength-
selective 40G
OCLD
(NTK539RAE5/
NTK539RBE5/
NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5)
40G UOCLD 40G OCI, 40G+ 40GE N/A 153 N/A

(NTK539XAE5/ CFP OCI, and
40/43G OCI OC768/STM256 157 153 157
NTK539XEE5)
(NTK529SAE5, OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) N/A 155 163
NTK529SJE5,
and OTU3 (with FEC OFF) N/A 153 157
NTK529SDE5)
Note: The unidirectional, end-to-end latency is measured one way from (input to output). For example for
a path from a client 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI input to a far-end client 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP
OCI, or 40/43G OCI output through two 40G OCLDs or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLDs when client
mapping is OC-768/STM-256, the total latency is 75 µs (not 2x75= 150 µs).
Table 1-30
Latency specifications for Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, 40G OCLD, and 40G UOCLD circuit
packs (regen)
DWDM circuit pack DWDM circuit pack Typical unidirectional, end-to-end

latency (µs)
Description PEC Description PEC
40G OCLD NTK539PAE5/ 40G OCLD NTK539PAE5/ 66 (see Note 1)

NTK539PBE5/ NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/ NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/ NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/ NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/ NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5 NTK539PUE5
40G OCLD NTK539PAE5/ Wavelength- NTK539RAE5/ 66 (see Note 2)

NTK539PBE5/ Selective NTK539RBE5/
NTK539PCE5/ 40G OCLD NTK539RCE5/
NTK539PDE5/ NTK539RDE5/
NTK539PEE5/ NTK539REE5
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5
40G UOCLD NTK539XAE5/ 40G UOCLD NTK539XAE5/ 148 (see Note 3)

NTK539XEE5 NTK539XEE5
40G UOCLD NTK539XAE5/ 40G OCLD NTK539PAE5/ 215 (Dual Regen; see Note 4)
NTK539XEE5 NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5
40G UOCLD NTK539XAE5/ Wavelength- NTK539RAE5/ 215 (Dual Regen; see Note 5)
NTK539XEE5 Selective NTK539RBE5/
40G OCLD NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5
Table 1-30
Latency specifications for Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, 40G OCLD, and 40G UOCLD circuit
packs (regen) (continued)
DWDM circuit pack DWDM circuit pack Typical unidirectional, end-to-end

latency (µs)
Description PEC Description PEC
Note 1: Regen mode is two 40G OCLD circuit packs with a transponder connection between the line-
side ports. The latency value is measured from the line-side Rx port of one 40G OCLD circuit pack
forming the regen pair to the line-side Tx port of the other 40G OCLD circuit pack forming the regen
pair.
Note 2: Regen mode is one 40G OCLD and one Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack with
a transponder connection between the line-side ports. The latency value is measured from the line-
side Rx port of 40G OCLD circuit pack forming the regen pair to the line-side Tx port of the
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack forming the regen pair.
Note 3: Regen mode is two 40G UOCLD circuit packs with a transponder connection between the
line-side ports. The latency value is measured from the line-side Rx port of one 40G UOCLD circuit
pack forming the regen pair to the line-side Tx port of the other 40G UOCLD circuit pack forming the
regen pair.
Note 4: This dual regen consists of two 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD regens connected by 0km of fiber
(additional fiber latency (in microseconds) = 4.897 X Fiber length (km)). Each 40G UOCLD => 40G
OCLD regen has one transponder connection between the line-side ports in each direction. This
latency applies to both (40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD ---fiber--- 40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD) as well as
(40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD ---fiber--- 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD) configurations. The latency value
is measured from the line-side Rx port of the first 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD regen to the line-side
Tx port of the other 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD regen and includes the unidirectional latency for all 4
circuit packs.
Note 5: This dual regen consists of two 40G UOCLD => Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD regens
connected by 0km of fiber (additional fiber latency (in microseconds) = 4.897 X Fiber length (km)).
Each 40G UOCLD => Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD regen has one transponder connection
between the line-side ports in each direction. This latency applies to both (40G UOCLD =>
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD ---fiber--- Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD) as well
as (Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD ---fiber--- 40G UOCLD => Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD) configurations. The latency value is measured from the line-side Rx port of the
first 40G UOCLD => Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD regen to the line-side Tx port of the other 40G
UOCLD => Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD regen and includes the unidirectional latency for all 4
circuit packs.
Table 1-31
Latency specifications for 40G+ CFP OCI and 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (40G client card back-
to-back configuration)
Client circuit pack Client circuit pack Typical unidirectional,

end-to-end latency
Description Client mapping Description Client mapping (µs)
and (PEC) and (PEC)
40G+ CFP OCI 40GE 40G+ CFP OCI 40GE 4

(NTK529SJE5) (NTK529SJE5)
40GE OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 6
40GE OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 4
OC768/STM256 OC768/STM256 4
OC768/STM256 OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 6
OC768/STM256 OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 4
OTU3 (with RS8 OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 6

FEC)
OTU3 (with RS8 OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 6

FEC)
OTU3 (with FEC OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 4

OFF)
40G MUX OCI ETH10G 40G+ CFP OCI OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 6
(NTK525CFE5) (NTK529SJE5)
ETH10G OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 4
OC192/STM64 OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 6
OC192/STM64 OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 4
OTU2 (with RS8 OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 10

FEC)
OTU2 (with FEC OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 6

OFF)
OTU2 (with RS8 OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 10

FEC)
OTU2 (with FEC OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 4

OFF)
FC800 OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) 6
FC800 OTU3 (with FEC OFF) 4
40G, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10 circuit packs provisioning procedures

The following flowcharts provide the various steps/procedures that must be
performed in order to have the 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD,
40G UOCLD, 40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40G MUX OCI,
40G XCIF, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10 circuit packs ready to carry traffic. Mating
with the 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is covered in OTN I/F, PKT I/F, and PKT/
OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-102.8.
40G OCI / 40/43G OCI / 40G+ CFP OCI and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD
Install 40G OCI, 40/43G OCI,

or 40G+ CFP OCI & 40G OCLD,
or 40G UOCLD Circuit Packs Note: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
and pluggables if applicable
Procedures 1-1 and 1-2 layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
323-1851-102.6.
Fiber Client and Line
Side Ports
Procedures 1-3 & 1-4
Edit 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective

OTM3 Facility Parameters
(Tx Wavelength & Tx Power)
Procedure 1-6
Add and edit client facilities on 40/43G

OCI or 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
Procedure 1-5
Provision ODU3 Transponder

Cross-Connection
between the OCI and the OCLD
Procedure 1-10
Yes Change Protection

Is 40G 1+1 Line Side
Scheme to 1+1
Protection required?
Procedure 1-7
No
Is line Side or
OTU3 mapping layer Yes Provision GCC0/GCC1
GCC0/GCC1 Procedure 1-9
Required?
No
Is this to be carried End

over a Procedure
No
Photonic Layer?
Yes
See "Photonic
Network SLAT" in the
Photonic Layer Guide
NTRN15DA
40G MUX OCI and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD /

40G UOCLD
Install 40G MUX OCI &

40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD Note : To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
circuit pack(s) and install clients layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
XFPs on 40G MUX OCI provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
Procedure 1-1 & 1-2
323-1851-102.6.
Fiber client and line

side ports

OTM3 facility parameters
Procedure 1-6
Add & edit 40G MUX OCI

OTM2, OC-192, STM-64, or
ETH10G client facility
Procedure 1-5

Cross-Connection
between the 40G MUX OCI and
the 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective
Procedure 1-10
Change protection
Is line side or client side Yes scheme to 1+1 or
protection required? 1+1 Port TPT
Procedure 1-7
No
Is GCC0/GCC1 Yes Provision GCC0/GCC1

required?
Procedure 1-9
No

over a Procedure
No
Photonic Layer?
Yes
See "Photonic
NTRN15DA
40G+ CFP OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI
Install 40G+ CFP OCI circuit

packs and install pluggables Note : To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
Procedure 1-1 & 1-2
323-1851-102.6.
Connect fibers to circuit
packs
Add & edit 40G+ CFP OCI

40G facilities
Procedure 1-5

Cross-Connection
between the two 40G+ CFP OCI
Procedure 1-10

required?
Procedure 1-9
No

over a Procedure
No
Photonic Layer?
Yes
See "Photonic
NTRN15DA
40G+ CFP OCI and 40G MUX OCI
Install 40G+ CFP OCI &

40G MUX OCI circuit
packs and install pluggables Note : To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Procedure 1-1 & 1-2 provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
323-1851-102.6.
Connect fibers to circuit
packs
Add & edit 40G+ CFP OCI

OTM3 facility
Procedure 1-5
Add & edit 40G MUX OCI

10G client facilities
Procedure 1-5

Cross-Connection
between the 40G MUX OCI and
the 40G+ CFP OCI
Procedure 1-10

required?
Procedure 1-9
No

over a Procedure
No
Photonic Layer?
Yes
See "Photonic
NTRN15DA
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD regenerator
Install 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective

40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit packs
Note: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Procedure 1-1 layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
323-1851-102.6.
Fiber line
side ports

Procedure 1-6

cross-connection
between the 2 OCLDs
Procedure 1-10
Is GCC0 Yes Provision GCC0

required? Procedure 1-9
No

over a Procedure
Photonic Layer? No
Yes
See "Photonic
NTRN15DA
40G XCIF and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD
Install 40G XCIF & 40G OCLD, Note 1: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
or 40G UOCLD circuit pack(s) layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
Procedure 1-1 provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
323-1851-102.6.
Fiber line side ports Note 2: Protection is not supported when
40G XCIF is mated with Wavelength-selective
Edit 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD or 40G UOCLD.
40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD Note 3: For control plane provisioning procedures, refer to
(Tx wavelength & Tx power)
Configuration - Control Plane, 323-1851-330.
Procedure 1-6
Change 40G XCIF

equipment mode
Procedure 1-12
Add OC192/STM64
client facility
Procedure 1-5
Edit the OC192/STM64

facility to OOS
Procedure 1-13

facility parameters
as required
Procedure 1-6
Change protection BLSR/MS-SPRing Change protection Create ring

scheme to 1+1 1+1 scheme to BLSR configuration
OC192/STM64 protection?
/MS-SPRing
Procedure 1-7 Procedure 1-7 Procedure 1-8
Unprotected/UPSR
Provision lower layer DCC/GCC

Is DCC/GCC required? Yes and router circuit
Procedure 1-9
No

facility to IS
Procedure 1-13
Yes Provision path

Path connections
cross-connections
to be provisioned?
Procedure 1-11
No
Is this to be carried Yes See "Photonic

over a Network SLAT" in the
Photonic Layer? Photonic Layer Guide
NTRN15DA
No
End
Procedure
OSIC submarine application
Install OSIC circuit packs

Procedure 1-1
Edit OSIC OTM2 facility parameters (depending on whether

Idler or Supervisory Channel Idler mode required)
Procedure 1-6
Provision the supervisory channel address list

See Submarine Networking Application Guide,
NTRN72AA
Configure and test CPL or 6500 SLTE

NTRN72AA
Perform a supervisory scan

NTRN72AA
Provisioning
complete
ISS submarine application
Install ISS circuit packs

Procedure 1-1
Edit ISS OTM2 facility parameters as required
Procedure 1-6
Provision the supervisory channel address list

NTRN72AA
Configure and test CPL or 6500 SLTE

NTRN72AA
Perform a supervisory scan

NTRN72AA
Provisioning
complete
SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex submarine application
Install SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit pack(s)
Procedure 1-1
Install the WSS circuit pack

See Photonics Equipment, 323-1851-102.6
Connect the fiber between SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex

and WSS circuit packs
Procedures 1-3 and 1-4
Edit the IDLER facility parameters

on the SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex
Procedure 1-6
Configure and test the SLTE

NTRN72AA
Provisioning
complete
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCI circuit packs

• If a PKT/OTN cross-connect is not provisioned in the shelf, the circuit pack
supports the broadband facilities (OTMn, ETH40G, OC768/STM256) only.
• If the equipment provision mode is not TRNSPNDR, then facilities must be
manually provisioned.
• Manual provisioning of broadband facilities is possible when mated with
40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD. 40G+ CFP
OCI can also be mated with 40G+ CFP OCI or 40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CFE5 variant).
• For the NTK529SJE5 variant, manual provisioning of OTN I/F facilities is
possible when the provisioning mode is set to POTS. PTP provisioning
triggers equipment mating with the 40G OTN XCIF. See OTN I/F, PKT I/F,
and PKT/OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-102.8, for more information
about the OTN I/F facilities.
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs
supports the broadband facilities (OTMn, ETH10G, OC192/STM64) only.

40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD. The
NTK525CFE5 variant can also be mated with 40G+ CFP OCI.
• For the NTK525CFE5 variant, manual provisioning of OTN I/F facilities is
possible when the provisioning mode is set to POTS. PTP provisioning
triggers equipment mating with the 40G OTN XCIF. See OTN I/F, PKT I/F,
and PKT/OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-102.8, for more information
about the OTN I/F facilities.
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective

40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs
supports the broadband facilities (OTM3) only, except when mated with
eMOTR. Manual provisioning of PTP facility is possible when 40G OCLD/
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD is mated with eMOTR. 40G UOCLD
cannot be mated with eMOTR.
40G OCI, 40G MUX OCI, or 40G XCIF.
• Manual provisioning of OTN I/F facilities is possible when the provisioning
mode is set to POTS. PTP provisioning triggers equipment mating with the
40G OTN XCIF. See OTN I/F, PKT I/F, and PKT/OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-
1851-102.8, for more information about the OTN I/F facilities.
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G XCIF circuit packs

• In a 14-slot converged shelf with a 160G cross-connect, the 40G XCIF
with 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD is only supported in
slots 6 and 10. The 40G XCIF and 40G UOCLD combination is not
supported with the 160G cross-connect.
• With a 240G and above cross-connect, the 40G XCIF is supported in all
even slots, plus slots 1, 13, 21, and 33 of a 32-slot shelf and slots 1 and 9
of a 14-slot shelf.
• If the 40G XCIF is paired with a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD, the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD must be in the
odd slot to the left of the 40G XCIF in an even slot.
• If the 40G XCIF is paired with a 40G UOCLD, the valid slots for the pair
are:
— {1x, 2/3u}, {4/5u, 6x}, {9x, 10/11u}, and {12/13u, 14x} in a 14-slot shelf:
— {1x, 2/3u}, {4/5u, 6x}, {13x, 14/15u}, {16/17u, 18x}, {21x, 22/23u}, {24/
25u, 26x}, {33x, 34/35u}, and {36/37u, 38x} in a 32-slot shelf
where u stands for the 40G UOCLD and x stands for the 40G XCIF.
• The OTM3 facility is auto-created/deleted with the 40GXCIF equipment.

• The OCn facilities can only be provisioned after 40G XCIF is mated
(ODU3 transponder connection is provisioned).
• The ODU3 transponder connection can only be deleted after all OCn
facilities have been deleted.
• The equipment profile attribute is supported on the 40GXCIF equipment
to configure the OCn mode as OC192/STM64. OC768/STM256 is not
supported in this release but not blocked.
• The 40G XCIF does not support physical ports. All interfaces are defined
with virtual port numbers starting with value 100:
— 40G interface for OTM3: port 100
— 10G interfaces for OC192 and OTM2: ports 101 to 104
• In OC192/STM64 mode, the OC192/STM64 facility is manually created/
deleted. The OTM2 layer facility and ODU2 connections are auto-created/
deleted/managed with the client OC192 facility.
Table 1-32 provides references to different procedures covered in this chapter.
Table 1-32
Procedures in this chapter
Topic Page
Procedure 1-1‚ Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 1-162
Procedure 1-2‚ Provisioning a pluggable automatically 1-163
Procedure 1-3‚ Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 1-164
Procedure 1-4‚ Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs 1-174
Procedure 1-5‚ Adding a facility to an equipment 1-177
Procedure 1-6‚ Editing facility parameters 1-182
Procedure 1-7‚ Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 1-185
Procedure 1-8‚ Creating ring configurations 1-194
Procedure 1-9‚ Adding a new entry in the communications settings 1-197
Procedure 1-10‚ Adding transponder connections 1-199
Procedure 1-11‚ Adding a path connection 1-202
Procedure 1-12‚ Changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode 1-205
Procedure 1-13‚ Changing the primary state of a facility 1-206
Table 1-32 (continued)

Procedure 1-14‚ Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable 1-208
Procedure 1-15‚ Deleting a facility from an equipment 1-210
Procedure 1-16‚ Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 1-212
Procedure 1-1
Provisioning a circuit pack automatically
If automatic equipping is enabled, a 40G circuit pack and any pluggables
present are automatically provisioned when inserted in the shelf. Facilities
may or may not auto-provision, depending on the circuit pack and pluggable
type. See Table 1-33 on page 1-179 for facilities that auto-provision and
facilities that must be manually provisioned.
To enable automatic equipping, refer to the “Enabling/disabling slot-based

automatic equipping” procedure in Administration and Security, 323-1851-
301.
See the Equipping rules section for supported slots for 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, 40G OCI, 40G MUX OCI, 40G XCIF, 40G
UOCLD, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex. If a circuit pack is inserted in
an unsupported slot, an Autoprovisioning Mismatch alarm is raised.
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage
Electrostatic discharge can damage electrostatic sensitive
devices. Use antistatic protection to avoid damaging circuit
packs.
Prerequisites
• To provision equipment for an empty equipment slot, ensure the last
equipment that occupied the slot and its related facilities and cross-
connects have been deleted.
• Ensure the plastic pin protector on the circuit pack has been removed.
• Ensure automatic equipping is enabled.
Step Action
1 Wear an appropriate ESD personal grounding device to dissipate

electrostatic charges. If you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap, connect the
cord on the shelf installed in a grounded rack/cabinet or clip to a suitable
ground point.
2 Insert the circuit pack in the correct slot in the shelf.
If you are logged in to Site Manager when you automatically provision a circuit
pack, the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application will auto-refresh to
display the circuit pack in the list of available equipment. You can also click
the Refresh button to do the manual refresh.
—end—
Procedure 1-2
Provisioning a pluggable automatically
Pluggables are supported on the 40G MUX OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs only. This procedure is not applicable to other 40G circuit packs.
If automatic equipping is enabled, when inserted in the circuit pack, a

pluggable equipment is automatically provisioned but facilities are not auto-
created.
If a pluggable was originally provisioned and then manually deleted, reseating

any pluggable on the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack will trigger the auto-
provisioning of all pluggable equipment present on the same circuit pack. You
need to manually delete the pluggables that are not desired.

301.
CAUTION
packs.
Prerequisites
• To provision a pluggable for an empty circuit pack port, ensure the last
pluggable that occupied the circuit pack port and its related facilities and
cross-connects have been deleted.
• Ensure the plastic pluggable port protector has been removed.
Step Action

ground point.
2 Insert the pluggable in the correct circuit pack port in the shelf. XFPs are
supported in ports 1 to 4 of the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack. CFPs are
supported in port 1 of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack.
3 Repeat step 2 for all pluggables to be provisioned.
—end—
Procedure 1-3
Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf
Use this procedure to route fiber-optic cables onto the 2-slot, 7-slot, 6500-7
packet-optical, 14-slot, or 32-slot 6500 shelf, as applicable.
In order to prevent congestion in the shelf fiber manager and minimize

interference between fiber patch cords and a shelf front cover, you must
consider the recommendations detailed in “Some operational considerations”
in 323-1851-151, Planning - Ordering Information, if any of the following apply:
• using fiber patch cords with a boot length greater than 42.5 mm (not
recommended, but using an extended depth cover solution will provide
additional space in front of the circuit packs)
• using in-line optical attenuators (fixed pads) (not recommended, but using
an extended depth cover solution will provide additional space in front of
the circuit packs)
• using fiber patch cords with a 2.0 mm diameter when more than 192 fibers
are required per side in a 14-slot shelf or per quadrant in a 32-slot shelf
(using bend-insensitive optical patch cords with 1.6 mm diameter is
recommended when fiber manager congestion is a concern)
• using bend-insensitive optical patch cords with a 1.6 mm diameter when
more than 256 fibers are required per quadrant in a 32-slot packet-optical
shelf.
The fiber manager in each quadrant of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf

accommodates 256 1.6 mm fiber patch cords. With Release 10 or higher
of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf, for any slot that uses only 1.6 mm bend-
insensitive fiber, it is possible to further reduce fiber congestion by
converting the slot’s fiber routing guide from a bend radius of 25 mm to
10 mm by snapping off the removable part of the slot fiber guide. When
the 25 mm snap-off/on feature is removed, the fiber bend radius is 10 mm,
which requires the use of bend-insensitive fiber.
Figure 1-35 on page 1-165 shows examples of fiber managers and related
slot fiber guides based on the version of 32-slot packet-optical shelf.
Procedure 1-3 (continued)

Figure 1-35
Examples of fiber managers and slot fiber guides—32-slot packet-optical shelves
Pre-Release 10 of a
32-slot packet-optical shelf
Example showing one
quadrant with fixed
slot fiber guides
Release 10 or higher
of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf
Example showing one

quadrant with slot fiber
guides with and without
the 25 mm bend radius
snap-off/on feature
Examples showing Examples showing

the 25 mm bend radius the 25 mm bend radius
snap-off/on feature snap-off/on feature
removed (10 mm bend installed (default configuration)
radius configuration)
Whenever possible, it is recommended to convert the fiber guides for each slot
starting from the outer slot in a quadrant and working towards the center of the
shelf. When all the fiber guides in a quadrant are converted from a bend radius
of 25 mm to 10 mm, 384 1.6 mm fiber patch cords can be accommodated. For
details, see Figure 1-36 on page 1-166.

Figure 1-36
32-slot packet-optical shelf—(Release 10 and higher)—preparing fiber managers for a high
density of 1.6 mm bend-insensitive fiber in a quadrant
Slot fiber guides

in the fiber manager
of a quadrant
Fixed part of a
slot fiber guide

Removable part of the slot fiber guide

(25 mm bend radius snap-off/on feature)
Hole
Pin
starting from the outer slot in a quadrant and working towards the center of the shelf.
To disengage the snap-off/on part of the slot fiber guide,

flex the triangular part of the fixed slot fiber guide forward
while pushing down the front of the snap-off/on part to be removed (as shown).
The pin of the snap-off/on part disengages from the hole in the fixed part.
Then remove the snap-off/on part. Repeat for all the slot fiber guides in the quadrant.
To re-install the 25 mm bend radius snap-off/on feature,

angle the removable part and insert it so that it engages with the clips at the rear
of the fixed part of the slot fiber guide. Push the removable part such that the
pin aligns with the hole in the fixed triangular part, flexing the fixed part of the slot
fiber guide as required.

Examples of fiber routing on various shelves follow:

• 2-slot optical shelf Type 2—Figure 1-37
• 7-slot shelves—Figure 1-38 on page 1-168
• 6500-7 packet-optical shelf—Figure 1-39 on page 1-169
• 14-slot shelves—Figure 1-40 on page 1-170 and
Figure 1-40 on page 1-170
• 32-slot packet-optical shelves—Figure 1-41 on page 1-171
Some figures show power cables and communication cables as well as fiber-
optic cables. Before routing fiber-optic cables, connect power cables to the
power input cards and communication cables to the access panel. (For
details, see the Installation technical publication specific to the respective
6500 shelf type.) For certain shelves, the fiber-optic cables overlap with power
cables and/or communication cables. For such shelves, a right side view of the
shelf is also provided to show the placement of each type of cable.
Figure 1-37
Example of fiber routing for a 2-slot optical shelf Type 2 (NTK503LA)

Figure 1-38
Example of fiber routing for a 7-slot shelf (NTK503PAE5)

Figure 1-39
Example of fiber routing for a 6500-7 packet-optical shelf (NTK503RA)

Figure 1-40
Example of fiber routing for a 14-slot shelf

Figure 1-41
Example of fiber routing for a 32-slot packet-optical shelf
Prerequisites
• Make sure that you have hook and loop cables ties (such as VELCRO).
• Make sure that you have removed the snap-off/on part of the fiber routing
guides of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf (Release 10 or higher), for all slots
that will be equipped with a high density of 1.6 mm bend-insensitive fiber
patch cords (see Figure 1-36 on page 1-166).

CAUTION
Risk of fiber-optic cable damage
The minimum bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 1.5 in.
(3.8 cm). Observe this limit at all times to avoid low fiber-optic
cable performance or damage.
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

ground point.
2 Select your next step.
If the shelf cover is Then
installed on the card cage remove the shelf front cover (refer to the
appropriate procedure in the Installation
technical publication specific to the
respective 6500 shelf type). Then go to step
3.
not installed on the card cage go to step 3
3 If applicable, flip down the fiber channel door.

4 Route the optical fibers or cables through the fiber channel.
• For the 2-slot shelf, route optical fibers that terminate on slot 1, 2, and 15
through the large slot on the right side of the shelf to the appropriate
channel of the fiber routing guide. Use curly locks or hook and loop
fasteners (such as VELCRO) to bundle the fibers exiting the shelf.
• For the 7-slot shelf or the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf, route optical fibers
that terminate on slot 1 to 4 toward the bottom of the rack through the
appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide, and route optical fibers that
terminate on slot 5 to 7 (slot 5 to 8 of the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf)
toward the top of the rack through the appropriate channel of the fiber
routing guide.

Step Action
• Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 1 to 7 of 14-slot shelf

or slot 1 to 8 and 21 to 28 of the 32-slot shelf to the left side of the rack
through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 8 to 14 of 14-slot
shelf or slot 11 to 18 and 31 to 38 of the 32-slot shelf to the right side of
the rack through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
For examples of fiber routing, see Figure 1-37 on page 1-167 to Figure 1-41
on page 1-171.
Use external fiber management drawers to store excess fiber cable. Fiber
slack storage is not provided for fibers leaving the 6500 shelf.
5 Close the fiber channel door if applicable.
6 If you have removed the shelf cover to route optical fibers and cables,
re-install the shelf cover (refer to the appropriate procedure in the Installation
technical publication specific to the respective 6500 shelf type).
—end—
Procedure 1-4
Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs
Use this procedure to connect fiber-optic cables to circuit packs.
Prerequisites
• Make sure you have the appropriate patch cords before connecting
fiber-optic cables.
• Make sure you have the correct tool to disconnect the connector.
See Figure 1-42.
Figure 1-42
LC connector assembly and connector tool
• If you are using fixed attenuators for the optical interfaces and the shelf is
equipped with a front cover, do not add the attenuators on the optical
interface. Instead, add the required attenuators to the patch panel or
inside a fiber storage tray.
• For 6500 circuit packs such as SMUX that the fiber connection is coming
out from faceplate at 90 degrees, use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm
flexible strain relief boots, NTTC50++V6 Ciena supplied patchcords or
equivalent with Telcordia GR-326 compliant, short flexible LC strain relief
boot (Corning or equivalent).

Do not install in-line plug attenuators at the 6500 circuit pack faceplate on
ports that are perpendicular to the faceplate (also not recommended on
angled ports). See Figure 1-43.
Figure 1-43
6500 optical fiber boot length
Example of
incorrect boot length
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury
When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack
emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
the optical interface circuit packs capped when they are not
connected to optical fiber cables. Never look directly into the
end of an optical fiber.

CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

ground point.
2 Inspect and clean connectors and adaptors on patch cords. See the chapter
on cleaning connectors in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.
Make sure the two connectors to be mated are clean.
3 Connect the fiber-optic patch cord to the circuit pack port.
4 Repeat step 2 and step 3 for all ports on the circuit pack.
5 Making sure not to violate the fiber-optic cable minimum bend radius, place
any slack fiber-optic cable in external fiber management drawers.
—end—
Procedure 1-5
Adding a facility to an equipment
Use this procedure to:
• add a facility that was manually deleted
• add a facility for a pluggable on which the facility is not auto-created
• add an OC192/STM64 facility on a 40GXCIF
• add child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facilities to an OTM facility
All facilities on the ISS circuit pack are auto-created when the circuit pack is
provisioned. They cannot be manually added.
The OC192/STM64 facility on a 40GXCIF can only be provisioned after

40G XCIF is mated (ODU3 transponder connection is provisioned).
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure you must use an account with a level 3 or higher
UPC.
Step Action
1 Select the required network element in the navigation tree.

2 Select Equipment & Facility Provisioning from the Configuration drop-
down menu to open the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application.
3 Select the required shelf from the Shelf drop-down list.
4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment or pluggable and port (if
applicable) that will support the facility.
See Table 1-33 on page 1-179 for facilities supported on 40G circuit packs.
5 Click Add in the Facility area to open the Add facility dialog box.
The dialog box displays the first facility that is not provisioned and is available.
6 Select the required facility type from the Facility Type drop-down list (if
applicable).
Selecting the SONET or SDH facility automatically sets the port mode to the
appropriate mode.
7 If adding a child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facility, click the Add Child button in
the parent OTM facility area.

Step Action
8 Select the required parameters from the drop-down lists. See the following for
facility attribute descriptions:
• Table 1-39 on page 1-216 for OC192 /STM64 and OC768/STM256 facility
parameters
• Table 1-40 on page 1-220 for ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters
• Table 1-42 on page 1-227 for 40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters
• Table 1-43 on page 1-231 for 40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters
• Table 1-44 on page 1-232 for OSIC OTM2 facility parameters
• Table 1-46 on page 1-240 for OTM3 facility parameters
• Table 1-48 on page 1-251 for FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX OCI
• Table 1-49 on page 1-253 for TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters
• Table 1-50 on page 1-254 for OPTMON facility parameters
• Table 1-51 on page 1-255 for IDLER facility parameters
9 Click OK to add the facility and close the Add facility dialog box.
—end—
Table 1-33
Facilities supported on 40G, OSIC, and SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit packs (Note 1)
Circuit pack Facilities on the Pluggable Facilities on the pluggable (Note 2)

(Equipment) circuit pack equipment
40G MUX OCI • OTM3 (auto), • P10GSEL • ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2, ADJ),
40GMUX) (Note 3 TCMCTP TCMCTP (Note 12)
and Note 4) • OC192/STM64 (OTM2, ADJ),
NTK525CAE5 TCMCTP (Note 12)
NTK525CFE5 in
TRNSPNDR mode • P10GEL • ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2, ADJ),
TCMCTP (Note 12)
• P10GSOEL • ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2, ADJ),

TCMCTP (Note 12)
• OC192/STM64 (OTM2, ADJ),
TCMCTP (Note 12)
• OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP
(Note 12)
• FLEX (OTM2, ADJ, WAN Note 10)
(Note 13), TCMCTP (Note 12)
• PXFP • OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP

(Note 12)
• OC192/STM64 (OTM2, ADJ) (Note
11), TCMCTP (Note 12)
• ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2, ADJ)
(Note 11), TCMCTP (Note 12)
40G OCI (40GOCI) • OC768/STM256 N/A N/A

(Note 5) (OTM3) (Note 14)
NTK529SAE5/SDE5 • OTM3 (ADJ) (Note
15)
40G+ CFP OCI • N/A • PCFP • OC768/STM256 (OTM3), TCM CTP

(40GOCI) (Note 6) • OTM3 (ADJ), TCM TTP, TCM CTP
NTK529SJE5 in
TRNSPNDR mode • ETH40G (OTM3), TCM CTP


40G OCLD OTM3 (ADJ) (auto N/A N/A

(40GOCLD) Note 8) (Note 16)
NTK539PAE5 to
NTK539PFE5,
NTK539PUE5,
40G OCLD
(40GOCLD)
NTK539RAE5 to
NTK539REE5
in TRNSPNDR mode
(Note 7)
40G UOCLD OTM3 (ADJ) (auto) N/A N/A

(40GUOCLD) (Note 16)
NTK539XAE5/XEE5
in TRNSPNDR mode
(Note 7)
OSIC (OSIC) OTM2 (ADJ) (auto) N/A N/A

NTK528XAE5 (Note 17)
ISS (ISS) NTK528YA (OTM2 port 2, OTM2 N/A N/A

(Note 18) port 3, OTM2 port 4,
ADJ)
40G XCIF (40GXCIF) OTM3 (auto), N/A N/A

NTK525FAE5 OC192/STM64
(OTM2)
SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex IDLER (auto), N/A N/A

(SLIC) OPTMON (auto),
NTK554HA/HC ADJ (auto)
Note 1: Refer to Table 1-12 on page 1-57 for the supported XFP modules in this release.
Note 2: The (auto) means the facility is auto-provisioned upon equipment/pluggable equipment
creation. The facilities in brackets are facilities auto-created on the same port as the main facility. These
facilities inherit the primary state of the main facility and are auto-deleted when the main facility is
deleted.


Note 3: On the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, port 1 to 4 are the client interfaces (OC192/STM64,
ETH10G, or OTM2 (at 10.7, 11.05, or 11.09)). A virtual port 100 is provisioned by software internally on
the circuit pack. For more information on the rules related to this circuit pack, see “Provisioning rules
summary for the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs” on page 1-158.
Note 4: All Broadband circuit packs that support transparent OC192/STM64 transport can similarly
support transparent 10GE WAN transport through the use of the OC192/STM64 facility type. Make sure
the selected XFP supports OC192/STM64 facility type. XFPs that do not support OC192/STM64 facility
type (such as NTTP81xx) cannot be used to support the 10GE WAN protocol on these circuit packs.
Note 5: On the 40G OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the client interface (40G). There are no line ports on
the 40G OCI circuit packs.
Note 6: On the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the CFP-based client interface. For more
information on the rules related to this circuit pack, see “Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCI
circuit packs” on page 1-158.
Note 7: On the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs, port 1 is the
line interface (40G). There are no client ports on the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD circuit packs. For more information on the rules related to this circuit pack, see “Provisioning
rules summary for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs” on page
1-159.
Note 8: On the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, the OTM3 line facility auto-
provisions only if the Auto Facility Provisioning system parameter is set to On in the Node Information
application. The Auto Facility Provisioning system parameter does not impact the 40G UOCLD circuit
packs.
Note 9: The WAN facility is auto-created only when the ETH10G packet mapping is 10.7G GFP.
Note 10: The WAN facility is auto-created only with the FC1200 FLEX facility.
Note 11: The OC192/STM64 and ETH10G facilities are supported on the PXFP variants of NTK583AA/
AB and NTK587Ex to NTK587Hx only. Supported on the NTK525CF variant only.
Note 12: TCM is supported on the NTK525CF variant only.
Note 13: The FLEX facility is only supported on the NTTP86AA, NTTP86BA, or NTTP84BA XFP.
FC800 is supported on NTTP86AA and NTTP86BA only while FC1200 is supported on NTTP86AA,
NTTP86BA, and NTTP84BA.
Note 14: OC768/STM256 facility is auto-provisioned on the 40G OCI circuit pack but not on the 40/
43G OCI circuit pack when the circuit pack is inserted. OTM3 layer facility on 40G OCI circuit pack is
auto-provisioned when OC768/STM256 facility is added.
Note 15: OTM3 client facility is applicable to 40/43G OCI circuit pack only.
Note 16: OTM3 TX and OTM3 RX facilities represent the TX and RX portions of the OTM3 facility.
Note 18: On the ISS, facilities are created/deleted automatically with the provisioning/deleting of the
ISS equipment and cannot be manually added/deleted. OTM2 facilities are created on ports 2, 3 and 4.
ADJ facilities are created on ports 1 and 3.
Procedure 1-6
Editing facility parameters
Use this procedure to edit the facility parameters for a facility.
The OSIC circuit pack OTM2 facility must have the following provisioning to
function in Idler mode:
• Tx Power (dBm) must be provisioned to valid value
• Tx Wavelength must be provisioned to valid non-default value
The OSIC circuit pack OTM2 facility must have the following provisioning to
function in Supervisory Channel Idler mode (enable repeater queries):
• Tx Power (dBm) must be provisioned to valid value
• Tx Wavelength must be provisioned to valid non-default value
• Tx SBS Dither must be provisioned to On
• Tx AM Format must be provisioned to SC Idler
Note: Each 6500 shelf supports a maximum of one OSIC circuit pack with
Tx AM Format provisioned to SC Idler, but can support several OSIC
circuit packs with Tx AM Format provisioned to Idler in the same shelf. In
other words, a single 6500 shelf can support up to one SC Idler circuit
pack and multiple Idler circuit packs.
The ISS circuit pack must have the following provisioning to allow repeater
query:
• OTM2 port 3 facility must have the Repeater System Family parameter set
to a valid value (Family A, B, or C). See Table 1-45 on page 1-236 for more
information on changing the Repeater System Family parameter.
• The OTM2 facility primary state must be IS.
• A valid repeater address must be provisioned. For repeater family B, the
source address on sequence 1 must also be provisioned.
The SLIC IDLER facility must be put OOS before you can provision the
following parameters as indicated in the engineering data sheet:
• Wavelength for the first laser: 1530.33 nm to 1565.09 nm
• Wavelength for the second laser: 1530.33 nm to 1565.09 nm
Note: You must select either the same wavelength for both lasers or two
adjacent wavelengths, with the shorter wavelength assigned to the first
laser.

• Output power for the first laser: -2.4 dBm to 6 dBm

• Output power for the second laser: -2.4 dBm to 6 dBm
• SBS dither for the first laser: OFF or ON
• SBS dither for the second laser: OFF or ON
Put the SLIC IDLER facility back to IS after provisioning.
If a redundant SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex exists, make the same provisioning on the

second SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit pack.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must use an account with a level 3 or higher
UPC.
Step Action

4 In the Equipment area of the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application,
select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to edit.
5 Select the appropriate facility from the Facility Type drop-down list if more
than one facility type is supported.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to edit.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit Facility dialog box.
• Table 1-39 on page 1-216 for OC192 /STM64 and OC768/STM256 facility
parameters
• Table 1-40 on page 1-220 for ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters
• Table 1-41 on page 1-225 for WAN facility parameters
• Table 1-42 on page 1-227 for 40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters
• Table 1-43 on page 1-231 for 40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters

Step Action
• Table 1-44 on page 1-232 for OSIC OTM2 facility parameters

• Table 1-45 on page 1-236 for ISS OTM2 facility parameters
• Table 1-48 on page 1-251 for FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX OCI
• Table 1-50 on page 1-254 for OPTMON facility parameters
• Table 1-51 on page 1-255 for IDLER facility parameters
• Table 1-52 on page 1-257 for ADJ facility parameters
9 Click OK.
—end—
Procedure 1-7
Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities
Use this procedure to change the protection scheme for a pair of facilities:
• from 1+1 linear (OTN) to unprotected (applicable to OTM3 line facilities on
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD)
• from unprotected to 1+1 linear (OTN) (applicable to OTM3 line facilities on
40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD)
• from 1+1/MSP linear to unprotected (applicable to OC192/STM64 on
40G XCIF)
• from unprotected to 1+1/MSP linear (applicable to OC192/STM64 on
40G XCIF)
• from unprotected to 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing (applicable to OC192/
STM64 on 40G XCIF)
• from 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing to unprotected (applicable to OC192/
STM64 on 40G XCIF)
• from 1+1 Port TPT to unprotected (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 40G MUX OCI and OTM3 client or mapping facilities on 40G+
CFP OCI)
• from unprotected to 1+1 Port TPT (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 40G MUX OCI and OTM3 client or mapping facilities on 40G+
CFP OCI)
CAUTION
Risk of traffic loss
Changing the protection scheme is a service impacting
procedure.
The following apply when changing the protection scheme:

• For 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, three 40G circuit
packs form the protection triplet. Two 40G OCLDs or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLDs carrying the working and protection paths with a
40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit pack in
between. The 40G triplet must be equipped in consecutive slots. The
working 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack must
be in the left slot of triplet and the protection 40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack must be in the right slot of triplet. The
valid protection group slots are {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {9, 10, 11}, and {12, 13,
14} on a 14-slot shelf; {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {13, 14, 15}, {16, 17, 18}, {21, 22,
23}, {24, 25, 26}, {33, 34, 35}, and {36, 37, 38} on a 32-slot shelf. {1, 2, 3}
and {4, 5, 6} on a 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf.

• For 40G UOCLD circuit packs, the protection triplet occupies 5 slots, with
the working 40G UOCLD in the two left slots of the triplet and the
protection 40G UOCLD in the two right slots of the triplet. Two 40G
UOCLDs carrying the working and protected paths with a 40G MUX OCI,
40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack in between. The
valid protection group slots are {2-3, 4, 5-6} and {10-11, 12, 13-14} on a
14-slot shelf; {2-3, 4, 5-6}, {14-15, 16, 17-18}, {22-23, 24, 25-26}, and {34-
35, 36, 37-38} on a 32-slot shelf; {2-3, 4, 5-6} on a 6500-7 packet-optical
or 7-slot shelf.
• For 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CF variant) in 1+1 Port TPT, the
working and protection circuit packs are both in odd slots. The mate 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD must be provisioned in the even
slot to the right. The valid protection group slots are:
— in a 14-slot shelf
– {1, 2} and {3, 4}
– {9, 10} and {11, 12}
– {1, 2} and {3, 4}
– {13, 14} and {15, 16}
– {21, 22} and {23, 24}
– {33, 34} and {35, 36}
— in a 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf
– {1, 2} and {3, 4}
• For 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs in 1+1 Port TPT, the working and
protection circuit packs are both in odd slots. The mate 40G OCLD/
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD must be provisioned in the even slot to
the right. The valid protection group slots are:
– {1, 2} and {3, 4}
– {9, 10} and {11, 12}
– {1, 2} and {3, 4}
– {5, 6} and {7, 8}
– {11, 12} and {13, 14}
– {15, 16} and {17, 18}

– {21, 22} and {23, 24}

– {25, 26} and {27, 28}
– {31, 32} and {33, 34}
– {35, 36} and {37, 38}
— in a 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf
– {1, 2} and {3, 4}
• The CFPs equipped on the 40G+ CFP OCI that are connected to the TPT
must be NTTA12BA or NTTA11BA.
• The port on which working and protection facilities are provisioned must
be the same. For example, if the working client facility is provisioned on
port 1 of the working 40G MUX OCI, the protection client facility must be
provisioned on port 1 of the protection 40G MUX OCI.
• For 40G+ CFP OCI, the LOFEF client port parameter can be enabled or
disabled when 1+1 Port TPT is provisioned.
• For 40G MUX OCI, the LOFEF client port parameter must be disabled or
the conditioning type parameter cannot be LOFEF when 1+1 Port TPT is
provisioned.
• It is recommended that the LOFEF client port parameter be set to
Disabled when 1+1 OTN line-side protection is provisioned. Enabling
LOFEF may result in a longer switch time.
• The XFPs equipped on the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack that is connected
to the TPT must be NTTP84BA or NTTP86BA. For 1550 nm applications,
the NTTP84AA XFP can be used, but only with the 10-channel TPT
(NT0H59ACE5), which is the only qualified variant for 1550 nm
applications. Performance is not guaranteed for other XFP types.
• Two 40G XCIF circuit packs and two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD circuit packs (two pairs of 40G XCIF/40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD) along with two cross-connect circuit
packs provide 1+1/MSP linear and 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing protection
(40G TR protected group). For 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-
SPRing protection, the valid protection group slots for 40G XCIF and 40G
OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD are: {1-2, 3-4}, {5-6, 9-10}, and
{11-12, 13-14} on a 14-slot shelf; {1-2, 3-4}, {5-6, 7-8}, {11-12, 13-14}, {15-
16, 17-18}, {21-22, 23-24}, {25-26, 27-28}, {31-32, 33-34}, and {35-36, 37-
38} on a 32-slot shelf. The 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD circuit packs are equipped in odd slots. The 40G XCIF circuit packs
are equipped in even slots.

• The working and protection ports on 40G XCIF circuit packs must be
horizontally aligned. For example, if the working port is on slot 2 port 3,
then the protection port is on slot 4 port 3 (same port number). This rule
applies irrespective of protection scheme being utilized. You can provision
the ports to have different protection schemes.
• For all protection schemes that involve the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs for working and protection must be both
C-band or both L-band but can be different variants. The working can be
any NTK539Px PEC and the protection can be any NTK539Px or
NTK539Rx PEC. Or vice versa.
• For 1+1/MSP linear and BLSR/MS-SPRing protection schemes, both
working and protection OC192/STM64 facilities must be set to the same
port mode.
• You cannot change the protection scheme from unprotected to 1+1/MSP
linear if there are already path cross-connects provisioned on the facility
that will become the protection facility.
• The BLSR/MS-SPRing scheme cannot be provisioned if there are already
path cross-connects provisioned on either of the two facilities to be
provisioned.
• Before the 1+1 linear (OTN) protection is provisioned, equipment in
working slot (left 40G OCLD or 40G UOCLD) must be in Equipment Mode
of ‘M’; equipment in protection slot (right 40G OCLD or 40G UOCLD) must
be in Equipment Mode of ‘MP’.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must:
• ensure you have all the documentation relating to deleting transponder
and path cross-connects, editing a BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration, and
changing a facility state. Refer to the “Deleting transponder connections”,
“Deleting path connections”, and “Editing a BLSR/MS-SPRing
configuration for a node” procedures in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth
and Data Services, 323-1851-320, and Procedure 1-13, Changing the
primary state of a facility on page 1-206 for details.
• use an account with a level 3 or higher UPC

Step Action

2 If you are changing the protection scheme Then go to
from unprotected to 1+1 linear (OTN) step 3
from 1+1 linear (OTN) to unprotected step 4
from unprotected to 1+1/MSP linear step 5
from 1+1/MSP linear to unprotected step 6
from unprotected to 1+1 Port TPT step 7
from 1+1 Port TPT to unprotected step 9
from unprotected to BLSR/MS-SPRing step 10
from BLSR/MS-SPRing to unprotected step 11
3
CAUTION
Ensure cross-connects are not carrying traffic before
you delete them. Deleting a cross-connect that is
carrying traffic causes traffic loss.
Delete any transponder cross-connects on the protection slot OTM3 facility.

Refer to the “Deleting transponder connections” procedure in Part 1 of
Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320, for details.
Go to step 14.
4
CAUTION
If you place a facility out-of-service, you can cause a
loss of traffic.
Change the protection slot OTM3 facility in OTN 1+1 to the out-of-service
state. See Procedure 1-13, Changing the primary state of a facility on page
1-206.
Go to step 14.
5
CAUTION
Ensure that any 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR (UPSR/SNCP protected) path cross-

connects that exist on the working slot facility are changed to 1WAY or 2WAY
(unprotected).

Step Action
To change from protected (1WAYPR or 2WAYPR) to unprotected (1WAY or

2WAY), you must delete the protected path cross-connects and re-add them
as unprotected path cross-connects. Refer to the “Deleting path connections”
procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-
1851-320 and Procedure 1-11, Adding a path connection on page 1-202.
Go to step 14.
6
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
Change the protection slot facility in 1+1 protection to the out-of-service state.
See Procedure 1-13, Changing the primary state of a facility on page 1-206.
Go to step 14.
7 Change the protection facility to the out-of-service state. See Procedure 1-13,
Changing the primary state of a facility on page 1-206.
8
CAUTION
You must provision the TPT protection group before
connecting the Tx fiber of the protection circuit pack to
the TPT tray. Otherwise, traffic can be impacted.
Ensure that the protection Tx fiber is not connected to the TPT tray.
Go to step 14.
9 Ensure to disconnect the protection card fibers from the TPT tray. Change the
protection facility to the out-of-service state. See Procedure 1-13, Changing
the primary state of a facility on page 1-206.
Go to step 14.
10
CAUTION
Delete path cross-connects for the facilities that are in the unprotected
configuration. Refer to the “Deleting path connections” procedure in Part 1 of
Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
Go to step 14.

Step Action
11
CAUTION
Delete path cross-connects for the facilities that are in a BLSR/MS-SPRing

configuration. Refer to the “Deleting path connections” procedure in Part 1 of
12 Delete the APSIDs for facilities in the ring map of the BLSR/MS-SPRing
configuration. Refer to the “Editing a BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration for a
node” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services,
323-1851-320.
The APSIDs of the facilities must be deleted from the ring map at each
network element in the BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration.
13
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
Change the east and west slot facilities in BLSR/MS-SPRing protection to the
out-of-service state. See Procedure 1-13, Changing the primary state of a
facility on page 1-206.
14 Select Protection Provisioning from the Protection drop-down menu to
open the Protection Provisioning application.
15 Select the appropriate equipment or facility type and shelf from the Type and
Shelf drop-down lists.
The provisioning data table opens.
16 Select an entry from the table.
When changing the protection scheme, provisioning the protection scheme
for one of the facilities/circuit packs in a pair automatically provisions the
protection scheme for the other facility/circuit packs in the pair.
17 Click Edit to open the Edit protection provisioning dialog box.
18 Select the radio button of the new protection scheme (Unprotected,
1+1 linear, MSP linear, 1+1 Port TPT, 2F BLSR/MS-SPRing, or 1+1).

Step Action

from unprotected to 1+1 linear (OTN) or 1+1 Port TPT step 20
from unprotected to 1+1/MSP linear step 21
from unprotected to BLSR/MS-SPRing step 22
from protected to unprotected step 23
20 Select the OTN G.873.1 remote standard if applicable.

You can change the Switch mode (Unidirectional or Bidirectional), Revertive
mode (Yes or No), and Wait to restore time (if Revertive mode is Yes). See the
“Changing the protection parameters for a pair of facilities or equipment”
procedure in Part 2 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-
310.
Go to step 23.
21 Select the required remote standard (G-841, GR253, or EN300) if applicable.
You can change the Switch mode (Unidirectional or Bidirectional) and Route
diversity (On or Off). Route diversity is applicable to 40G XCIF only. See the
310.
Go to step 23.
22 Select the required wait to restore ring time (0 to 12 minutes or Infinite) if
applicable.
23 Click OK.
24 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
When changing the protection scheme from 1+1 linear (OTN), 1+1 Port TPT,
or 1+1/MSP linear to unprotected, any 1WAY or 2WAY transponder or path
cross-connects that were provisioned exist only against the working facility.
If any existing path cross-connects are required to form part of new UPSR/
SNCP cross-connects, delete the 1WAY or 2WAY path cross-connects and
create 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR path cross-connects as required. Refer to the
“Deleting path connections” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth
and Data Services, 323-1851-320 and Procedure 1-11, Adding a path
connection on page 1-202.
25 Connect the protection Tx fiber to the TPT tray if 1+1 Port TPT is provisioned.
26 Change the working (or east) and protection (or west) slot facilities back to
the in-service state if applicable.

Step Action
27 Repeat this procedure to provision the same protection scheme on the

remaining nodes in the protection configuration if it has not been done.
28 Run the protection exerciser to detect potential protection misconfigurations.
Refer to the “Running/inhibiting the exerciser” procedure in Part 2 of
Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.
—end—
Procedure 1-8
Creating ring configurations
Use this procedure to create configurations for BLSR/MS-SPRing rings for
OC-192/STM-64 facilities on 40G XCIF circuit packs.
You can save the configurations as ring configuration files to provide a starting
point or template for creating additional ring configurations. Refer to “Ring
APS configuration editor parameters” on page 1-269 for details on ring
parameters.
Note: This is a general procedure to create a ring configuration for the

40G XCIF circuit pack. For detailed information on ring configurations and
procedures, refer to "BLSR/MS-SPRing APS configuration files editing" in
Chapter 1, and "BLSR/MS-SPRing APS provisioning" in Chapter 2 in Part
1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
Step Action
1 Select Ring APS Configuration Editor from the Tools menu to open the
Ring APS Configuration Editor application.
The Ring APS Configuration Editor application opens with no data if a
configuration file has not been previously opened with this session of Site
Manager. Otherwise, the latest configuration file will be displayed.
2 Type the name of the new ring in the Ring name field.
Refer to Table 1-59 on page 1-269 for parameter descriptions and options.
3 From the Ring type drop-down list, select the ring type of the new ring to be
2 Fiber.
4 Click on the Add Node tool icon. (Once at least one node has been created,
you can also double click on the Add diamond, the diamond shaped icon on
the facility connecting line directly under the center of the node graphic.)
The Add Node dialog box appears.
5 Select the node type of the new ring from the Node type drop-down list.

Step Action
6 Type a node identifier in the Node field or select a node from the drop-down
list. The drop-down list displays all nodes Site Manager is currently logged in
to that have at least one pair of facilities that are BLSR/MS-SPRing protected.
You can type in any other node identifier, whether or not the node is known
to Site Manager.
When a node is selected from the Node drop-down list, the entries in the
facility drop-down list(s) are updated. You should first define the node, then
the facilities, otherwise the user provided facility data is replaced whenever a
new node is selected. However, the facility entries are not affected if you type
the node name instead of selecting it from the drop down list.
7 Type an APS identifier in the APS ID field or select an APS ID from the drop-
down list.
8 Type a facility identifier in the East facility linked to: Next node field or select
a facility from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays all facilities Site
Manager knows to be an East facility (that is, a BLSR/MS-SPRing working
member of a 2-fiber group) and are associated with the node selected in the
Node field. You can type in any other facility identifier, whether or not it is
known to Site Manager.
Note: “Next node” in the East facility linked to: Next node field changes to
the node name (for example, 6500-1, 6500-2, etc.) after the first node has
been entered. For example; East facility <facility-shelf-slot-port> linked to:
West of 6500-1. If the node is not the first node and the neighbor has no node
name or TID assigned to it but has an APS ID, the label appears as: East
facility <facility-shelf-slot-port> linked to: West of node with APSID<#>.
When you select a value in one of the facility drop-down lists, the other list
automatically adjusts to show the protection group mate facility. If you modify
both facilities, the automatic selection of the mate is disabled, but becomes
re-enabled if you select another node.
When you add the node information to the Nodes area, this facility appears
on the right side of the node and connects the node to the node below it in
the Nodes area. The last node in the Nodes area is connected to the first
node.

Step Action
9 Type a facility identifier in the West facility linked to: Previous node field or
select a facility from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays all
facilities Site Manager knows to be a West facility (that is, a BLSR/MS-
SPRing protection member of the 2-fiber group) and are associated with the
node selected in the Node field. You can type in any other facility identifier,
whether or not it is known to Site Manager.
Refer to Table 1-59 on page 1-269 for parameter disruptions and options.
Note: The “Previous node” in the West facility linked to: Previous node
field changes to the node name (for example, 6500-1, 6500-2, etc.) after the
first node has been entered. For example, West facility <facility-shelf-slot-
port> linked to: East of 6500-2. If the node is not the first node and the
neighbor has no name or TID assigned to it but has an APS ID, the label
appears as: West facility <facility-shelf-slot-port> linked to: East of node
with APSID<#>.
When you add the node information to the Nodes area, this facility appears
on the left side of node and connects the node to the node above it in the
Nodes area. The first node in the Nodes area is connected to the last node.
10 If you want to use the Add Node dialog box information Then go to
to add a new node to the configuration, and want to
add more nodes step 11
close the dialog box step 13
11 Click Apply.
The node appears in the Nodes area of the Ring APS Configuration Editor
application and the Add Node dialog box remains open.
12 If you want to add another node, return to step 6. Otherwise, go to step 14.
13 Click OK.
The Add Node dialog box closes, and the node appears in the Nodes area
of the Ring APS Configuration Editor application.
14 Save the configuration as described in the "Saving a ring configuration file"
procedure in Chapter 1 in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data
Services, 323-1851-320.
15 Apply the configuration information to a node or nodes. Refer to the “Applying
ring configuration files to nodes” procedure in Chapter 1 in Part 1 of
—end—
Procedure 1-9
Adding a new entry in the communications settings
Use this procedure to add a new entry (interface, circuit, router) in the
communications settings. For more information on these parameters and how
they apply to the DCN, refer to Part 4 of Planning, NTRN10DB.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must use an account with a level 3 UPC or
higher.
Step Action

2 Select Comms Setting Management from the Configuration drop-down
menu to open the Comms Setting Management application.
3 Select the required tab.
5 Select the appropriate comms type from the Router type or Interface type
drop-down list.
6 Click Add to open the appropriate add dialog box.
7 Add the parameters as required (if appropriate). See the following for
parameters that can be added:
• Interfaces
— Lower Layer DCC/GCC parameters on page 1-259
• Routers
— IISIS Router parameters on page 1-261
— IISIS Circuit parameters on page 1-263
— OSPF Router parameters on page 1-264
— OSPF Circuit parameters on page 1-266
For the Add IISIS Router Parameters and the Add OSPF Router Parameters
dialogs, you have the option of adding distribution lists. To add a distribution
list, use the Add button in Redistribution section (lower section). A maximum
of 80 distribution lists can be added for each type of list. To delete a
distribution list, select the distribution list in the Redistribution section (lower
section) and select Delete.

Step Action
8 If Then
the dialog allows more than one entry to be click Apply, go
added and you want to add another entry to step 7
otherwise go to step 9
9 Click OK.
—end—
Procedure 1-10
Adding transponder connections
Use this procedure to add a 2WAY transponder connection to a network
element for the following circuit packs:
• 40G OCLD
• Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
• 40G UOCLD
• 40G OCI
• 40G+ CFP OCI
• 40/43G OCI
• 40G MUX OCI
• 40G XCIF
Note: Although this procedure can be used to create an ODU3

transponder connection between 40G XCIF and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD circuit packs by using Cross
Connections: Transponder Connections application from the
Configuration menu (similar to creating ODU3 transponder connections
between 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD
and 40G OCI / 40G+ CFP OCI / 40/43G OCI / 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs), it is recommended that for creating an ODU3 transponder
connection between 40G XCIF and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD circuit packs, the user change the 40G XCIF
equipment mode from MPXC to MXC or vice versa by using Equipment
& Facility Provisioning application from the Configuration menu.
Changing the equipment mode of a 40G XCIF circuit pack from MPXC to
MXC automatically creates the ODU3 transponder connection between
the 40G XCIF and its mate 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
/ 40G UOCLD. For more information, refer to Part 1 of Configuration -
Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.

Prerequisites
Refer to “Transponder connections parameters” on page 1-271 for more
information on transponder connection parameters.
To perform this procedure, you must

• ensure that you have provisioned the equipment and facilities you need for
the planned transponder connections
• review and follow the engineering rules outlined in the “Engineering rules
and considerations for transponder connections” section in Part 1 of
Step Action

2 Select Cross Connections: Transponder Connections from the
Configuration menu.
If this is the initial launch of the Transponder Connections application, no
transponder connections appear until you perform a Retrieve. Subsequent
launches of the Transponder Connections application display transponder
connections based on the last filter criteria.
3 Click Add to display the Add Cross-Connect dialog box.
4 Click once in the Connection ID text field.
5 Type the connection identifier.
Refer to Table 1-60 on page 1-271 for supported options.
6 Select a signal rate from the Rate drop-down list.
Refer to Table 1-60 on page 1-271 for supported rates.
7 Select a connection type from the Type drop-down list.
Refer to Table 1-60 on page 1-271 for supported types.
8 Select the required equipment and facility from the drop-down lists for each
of the following panels:
• From
• To
Site Manager automatically populates the available parameter fields after you
select the Rate and Type.
Refer to Table 1-61 on page 1-272 for equipment and facility parameters for
transponder connections.

Step Action
9 If you Then click

want to provision another transponder connection Apply and go to step 4
for this network element
completed the transponder connection OK (Apply & Close)
provisioning for this network element
—end—
Procedure 1-11
Adding a path connection
Use this procedure to add a 1WAY, 1WAYPR, 2WAY, or 2WAYPR path
connection between a 40G XCIF circuit pack and an OC-n/STM-n circuit pack.
Prerequisites
• have met all specific requirements for bandwidth management for path
connections in a BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration. Refer to the "BLSR/MS-
SPRing/HERS configuration requirements” section in Chapter 3 in Part 1
of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
• have met all specific requirements for bandwidth management for path
connections in a UPSR/SNCP ring configuration. Refer to the “UPSR/
SNCP ring requirements” section in Chapter 3 in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
Step Action

2 Select Cross Connections: Path Connections from the Configuration
menu.
If this is the initial launch of the Path Connections application, no path
connections appear until you perform a Retrieve. Subsequent launches of
the Path Connections application display path connections based on the last
filter criteria.
4 If you Then go to
want to provision a Connection ID step 5
do not want to provision a Connection ID step 7

7 From the Rate drop-down list, select a signal rate.
Refer to Table 1-62 on page 1-275 for supported path connection rates.

Step Action
8 From the Type drop-down list, select the connection type.

Refer to Table 1-63 on page 1-276 for supported path connection types.
9 Select the required equipment, facility, AU3, or AU4 mapping, and payload
parameters from the drop-down lists for each of the following panels:
• From
• To
• Switch Mate (applicable to 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, and 2WAYDPR
connections only)
• Destination Mate (applicable to 2WAYDPR connections only).
Refer to Table 1-64 on page 1-277 for equipment and facility parameters for
path connections and Table 1-63 on page 1-276 for allowable path
connections types between network configurations.
If only AU3 mapping is supported (when the port mode is SONET or an
STS3c/VC4 rate or above is selected), the AU3 and AU4 radio buttons do not
appear in the Add Cross-Connect dialog box.
10 If Then go to
you want to create the connection on BLSR/MS- step 11
SPRing endpoints
otherwise step 12
11 Select the End NE A and End NE Z node from the APSIDs in the drop-down
lists in the BLSR/MS-SPRing Endpoints panel.
12 If you Then click
want to provision other path connections for this Apply
network element
have completed the path connection provisioning for OK (Apply & Close)
this network element
If you are adding a single path connection, the path connection is added. If
the path connection cannot be added, an error message appears. Go to step
13.
If you are adding multiple path connections, the Multiple Cross Connect
Add Confirmation dialog box appears. Check that the multiple path
connections are correct, and then click Yes. If the path connections cannot be
added, an error message appears.

Step Action
13 If in step 12 you selected Then

Apply go to step 4
OK (Apply & Close) the Add Cross-Connect dialog box closes and
you have completed this procedure.
When adding an add/drop connection to/from a
BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration, if you
provision the From endpoint on the add/drop
port and the To endpoint on the BLSR/MS-
SPRing add/drop port, the From and To
endpoints automatically swap. Click Refresh to
display the updated information.
—end—
Procedure 1-12
Changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode
Use this procedure to change the 40G XCIF equipment mode from its default
MPXC to MXC or vice versa. Changing the equipment mode from MPXC to
MXC automatically creates the ODU3 transponder connection between the
40G XCIF and its mate 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD.
You must delete any existing OC192/STM64 facilities on the 40G XCIF before
you can change the equipment mode from MXC to MPXC.
Prerequisites
• ensure there are no OC192/STM64 facilities provisioned on the 40G XCIF
if you are changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode from MXC to MPXC.
• use an account with a level 3 or higher UPC.
Step Action

4 In the Equipment area, select the 40GXCIF equipment that you want to
change the equipment mode.
5 Click Edit in the Equipment area to open the Edit Equipment dialog box.
6 Select the required equipment mode from the Equipment Mode drop-down
list.
7 Click OK.
—end—
Procedure 1-13
Changing the primary state of a facility
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a facility.
CAUTION
Risk of service interruption
If you place a facility out-of-service, you can cause a loss of
traffic.
You cannot change the facility state of protection equipment to out-of-service

if the working facilities are still in-service.
Note that the facilities in brackets in Table 1-33 on page 1-179 are facilities
auto-created on the same port as the main facility or equipment. These
facilities inherit the primary state of the main facility/equipment. To change the
primary state of these facilities, you must change the primary state of the main
facility or equipment.
The primary state of the ADJ facility is not editable.
On the ISS circuit packs, the primary state of ADJ and ADJ-FIBER facilities
follows the circuit pack primary state.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action

select the circuit pack/port whose facility state you want to change.
5 Select the appropriate facility from the Facility Type drop-down list.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility whose state you want to change.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit facility dialog box.

Step Action
8 Select OOS or IS from the Primary state drop-down list.

CAUTION
loss of traffic.
9 Click OK.
10 If changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog box.
—end—
Procedure 1-14
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
to in-service or out-of-service. You must change the primary state of any
related facilities to out-of-service before changing the primary state of a circuit
pack or pluggable to out-of-service. See Procedure 1-13, Changing the
primary state of a facility on page 1-206.
You cannot change the primary state of a pluggable to IS if the associated

circuit pack is OOS.
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack automatically changes the

primary state of any provisioned pluggables on that circuit pack to the same
state.
Prerequisites
• when the 40G MUX OCI is used in 1+1 ETS protected configurations,
before putting the OTM3 facility on the mate 40G OCLD OOS, switch
traffic away from the 40G OCLD using the ETS user switch commands to
ensure that the switch time is within specification
Step Action

4 If you are changing the primary state to Then go to
OOS step 5
IS step 6
5 Ensure any related facilities are out-of-service. See Procedure 1-13,

Changing the primary state of a facility on page 1-206.
CAUTION
loss of traffic.

Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
Step Action
6 Select the circuit pack or pluggable in the Equipment area.

8 Select IS or OOS from the Primary state drop-down list.
9 Click OK.
10 If you are changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog
box.
—end—
Procedure 1-15
Deleting a facility from an equipment
Use this procedure to delete a facility.
CAUTION
If you delete a facility, you can cause a loss of traffic.
Facilities that are auto-created (facilities in brackets in Table 1-33 on page

1-179) when the main facility is created will be auto-deleted when the main
facility is deleted.
All facilities on the ISS circuit pack are auto-deleted when the circuit pack is
deleted. They cannot be manually deleted.
You cannot delete an OTM3 facility in a 40G MUX OCI or 40G XCIF circuit
pack.
Prerequisites
• ensure the end-to-end service to be deleted is not carrying traffic
• ensure the facility to be deleted is out-of-service and is not in maintenance
state
• delete the sub-network connection if provisioned on this facility. Refer to
the “Deleting a sub-network connection” procedure in Configuration -
Control Plane, 323-1851-330.
• delete the cross-connects of the entire path. Refer to the “Deleting
transponder connections” and “Deleting path connections” procedures in
Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
• delete the IISIS circuit or OSPF circuit and then the GCC link if provisioned
on the OTM3 facility to be deleted. See the “Deleting an entry in the
communications settings” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
• delete the IISIS circuit or OSPF circuit and then the DCC link if provisioned
on the 40G XCIF OC192/STM64 facility to be deleted. See the “Deleting
an entry in the communications settings” procedure in Part 1 of
Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.

• ensure that the protection switching scheme on the facility to be deleted is

provisioned as unprotected. Refer to Procedure 1-7, Changing the
protection scheme for a pair of facilities on page 1-185.
• ensure that no loopback exists on the facility. See the “Operating/releasing
a loopback” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and
Operating, 323-1851-310 to release a loopback if it exists.
Step Action

select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to delete.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to delete.
7 Click Delete in the Facility area.
8 Click Yes in the warning dialog box.
—end—
Procedure 1-16
Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable
Use this procedure to delete a circuit pack or pluggable equipment from the
list of provisioned equipment in the Equipment and Facility Provisioning
application. Deleting a circuit pack automatically deletes any provisioned
pluggables on that circuit pack.
Prerequisites
• delete all cross-connects provisioned through the equipment. Refer to the
“Deleting transponder connections” and “Deleting path connections”
procedures in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-
1851-320, for details.
To delete the ODU3 transponder connection on a 40G XCIF circuit pack,
the associated OCn/STMn facility must be deleted first.
• delete all facilities on the circuit pack and its associate pluggables, see
Procedure 1-15, Deleting a facility from an equipment on page 1-210.
• put the circuit pack or pluggable out-of-service, see Procedure 1-14,
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable on page 1-208.
• set the Equipment Mode to ‘MP’ on 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, 40G UOCLD, and 40G OCI circuit
packs by removing protection. To change the protection scheme, refer to
Procedure 1-7, Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities on
page 1-185.
Step Action

4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment (circuit pack or pluggable) you
want to delete.
5 Click Delete in the Equipment area.
—end—
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters

Equipment and facility primary and secondary states
Table 1-34 to Table 1-37 on page 1-215 provide information on equipment and
facility primary and secondary states.
Table 1-34
Equipment and facility primary states
Primary State Description
IS In-service; no failure detected
IS-ANR In-service - abnormal; failure exists but entity is still capable of performing
some of its provisioned functions (that is partial failure)
OOS-AU Out-of-service - autonomous; failure detected
OOS-MA Out-of-service - maintenance; no failure detected (OOS for maintenance

for provisioning memory administration)
OOS-AUMA Out-of-service autonomous maintenance; failure detected
OOS-MAANR Out-of-service - maintenance - abnormal; partial failure detected
Table 1-35
Equipment secondary states
Secondary State Description
Active Equipment has connections established to the facilities it supports and the
connected facilities are in-service
Fault detected Equipment failure detected
Idle No connections established to facilities supported on this equipment, all

connected facilities are out-of-service, or in-service connected facilities are
not on the active traffic path in a protected connection
Mismatched eqp. attribute Mismatched or unknown equipment detected in a provisioned slot
Supporting entity outage Supporting equipment has a failure (applicable to pluggables when
associated circuit pack is missing or has failed or is mismatched)
Unequipped Equipment is missing
Unknown Equipment cannot be identified
AINS Auto in-service is enabled.
Table 1-36
Facility secondary states
<null> Active, working state for a facility
Working receiver Active OCn/STMn facility in the specified direction

Working
transmitter
Protected Optical line in a BLSR/MS-SPRing/HERS protection scheme is protected
Hot standby Inactive facility in both directions (Hot standby)
Protection switch Protection switch inhibited. Lockout command issued on a line.

inhibited
Disconnected Facility has no connections established
Fault detected Facility failure detected
Supporting entity Supporting equipment (XFP or circuit pack):

outage • has a failure, or
• is missing, or
• is mismatched, or
• has an associated connection which is failed.
Loopback active Loopback active on facility
Maintenance State Maintenance State is enabled. When in Maintenance State, a facility continues to
carry traffic if it can, but does not raise alarms, SNMP traps or Performance
Monitoring Threshold Crossing Alerts (PM TCAs).
Applies to facilities that support maintenance state. See Table 1-38 on page 1-215.
Maintenance state is applicable to these facilities only if they are in out-of-service
state.
Auto in-service AINS is enabled. Applies to facilities that support AINS. See Table 1-37 on page
1-215.
Table 1-37
Facilities that support automatic in-service (AINS)
Equipment Facility type Default value Note
40GOCLD OTM3 Disabled
40GUOCLD OTM3 Disabled
40GOCI OC768/STM256 Enabled child facility (Note): OTM3
OTM3 Disabled
ETH40G Enabled child facility (Note): OTM3
40GMUX OTM3 Disabled Port 100
OTM2 Disabled
OC192/STM64 Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2
ETH10G Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2 or WAN
FLEX Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2 or WAN/OTM2
SLIC IDLER Disabled
OPTMON Enabled
Note: The child facility follows the AINS state of its parent facility. The AINS state of the TCM facility is
independent of the parent OTMn facility.
Table 1-38
Facilities that support maintenance state
Equipment Facility type Note
40GOCLD OTM3
40GUOCLD OTM3
40GOCI OC768/STM256 child facility (Note): OTM3
OTM3
ETH40G child facility (Note): OTM3
40GMUX OTM3 port 100
OTM2
OC192/STM64 child facility (Note): OTM2
ETH10G child facility (Note): OTM2/WAN (GFPSTD/GFPMACTR mapping),

OTM2 (PROP237/PROP238 mapping)

SLIC IDLER
OPTMON
Note: The child facility follows the Maintenance state of its parent facility. The maintenance state of the
TCM facility is independent of the parent OTMn facility.
OC192/768/STM64/256 facility parameters

Table 1-39 provides a list of the OC192/768/STM64/256 facility parameters.
Table 1-39
Parameters Options Description
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and port
number for the selected facility. Read-only
Primary state See “Equipment and Sets the primary state of the facility. Default reflects
facility primary states” primary state of associated equipment.
on page 1-213 Note: IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary State See “Facility Displays the facility operational state.

secondary states” on The AINS state is editable. For more information, see
page 1-214 “Facilities that support automatic in-service (AINS)” on
page 1-215.
The Maintenance state is editable for supported circuit
packs. For more information, see Table 1-38 on page
1-215.
Signal degrade • 1x10^-5 Sets the signal degrade threshold. Applicable to 40G
threshold • 1x10^-6 (default) MUX OCI (NTK525CFE5) and 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJ) only.
• 1x10^-7
• 1x10^-8
• 1x10^-9
Excessive bit error • 1x10^-3 (default) Sets the client receive BER threshold that triggers a
threshold • 1x10^-4 signal fail (SF) condition.
• 1x10^-5, Editable for 40G XCIF, 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CFE5)

and 40G+ CFP OCI (NTK529SJ) only. Read-only for all
other 40G circuit packs.

Laser Off Far End Fail • Disabled Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines type
• Enabled of signal conditioning towards subtending equipment.
When Enabled, client transmitter laser is shutoff when
line faults or head-end client faults are detected. When
Disabled, line/multiplex section AIS is sent to
subtending equipment when line faults or head-end
client faults are detected.
Default setting is determined by the setting of the
system laser off far end fail parameter in the Node
Information application.
Not applicable to 40G XCIF.
Tx Wavelength (nm) 1528.38 (0) to Sets the required line transmit wavelength.
1568.77 at 50 GHz Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility is
spacing (default 0) OOS, except when changing from 0 to a valid
wavelength, which can be IS. Editing to 0 is supported.
Provisionable on tunable pluggables only.
The number in brackets is the channel ID.
Applicable to the OC192/STM64 facility on the PXFP
variants of NTK583AA/AB and NTK587Ex to
NTK587Hx on 40G MUX OCI circuit packs only.
TX Actual Power • TX optical power Displays the actual transmit optical input power. Read-
(dBm) • Unknown (if circuit only
pack not present) When the outgoing transmit optical power level for the
monitored port is out of range, the Tx Actual Power
parameter displays "OOR". The corresponding OPT-
OCH/OCH-OPT value in the Site Manager
Performance Monitoring application does not display
"OOR" when out of range; the lowest reading is
-45 dBm. Refer to Fault Management - Performance
Monitoring, 323-1851-520 for more information about
OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT values.

Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power Displays the actual receive optical input power. Read-
(dBm) • Unknown (if circuit only
pack not present) When the incoming receive optical power level for the
monitored port is out of range, the Rx Actual Power
parameter displays "OOR". The corresponding OPR-
OCH/OCH-OPR value in the Site Manager
OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR values.
Tx Actual High Power • Tx optical power high Displays the highest measured transmit optical power of
(dBm) value the CFP multiple optical channels. Read-only.
• Unknown (if CFP not Applicable only to the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
present)
Tx Actual Low Power • Tx optical power low Displays the lowest measured transmit optical power of
present)
Rx Actual High Power • Rx optical power Displays the highest measured received optical power
(dBm) high value of the CFP multiple optical channels. Read-only.
present)
Rx Actual Low Power • Rx optical power low Displays the lowest measured received optical power of
present)
Port Mode • SONET (default for Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or SDH).
SONET mode) Read-only
• SDH (default for
SDH mode)
Signal mode • SONET (default for Sets the signal mode (SS bits).
SONET port mode) Only applicable to 40G XCIF circuit packs.
SDH port mode)

Signal degrade • 1x10^-5 Sets the signal degrade threshold.

threshold • 1x10^-6 (default) Only applicable to 40G XCIF circuit packs.
• 1x10^-7
• 1x10^-8
• 1x10^-9
Used as timing • Yes Displays whether the facility is being used as a timing
reference • No reference. Read-only
Only applicable to 40G XCIF circuit packs.
Data communication • Yes Displays whether the facility is using a data

channel • No communications channel (DCC). Read-only
DUS Override • Disabled (default for Select the do not use for synchronization (DUS)
SONET and SDH) override status. Set to Enabled if you want to ignore
• Enabled received synchronization status messages (SSM) when
facility is used as a timing reference port.
Unequip mode • STS1 Select the unequip mode.

• VC3 The only valid unequip mode for SONET port mode is
• VC4 STS1. The valid unequip modes for SDH port modes
are VC3 and VC4.
The default unequip mode for SDH port mode is VC4.
Customer Defined string of up to 64 Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same as

Facility Identifier characters the Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI). The
provisioned value appears in the facility alarm report if
the SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters

Table 1-40 provides a list of the ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters.
ETH10G is applicable to 40G MUX OCI circuit packs only. ETH40G is
applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs only.
Table 1-40
Parameter Options Description
40GMUX ETH10G
Primary State See “Equipment and Sets the primary state of the facility. Default reflects
facility primary states” on primary state of associated equipment.
page 1-213 Note: IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary State See “Facility secondary Indicates the operational state of the facility. The
states” on page 1-214 secondary state can be a combination of one or more
states.
The AINS state is editable. For more information, see
“Facilities that support automatic in-service (AINS)” on
page 1-215.
The Maintenance state is editable for supported circuit
packs. For more information, see Table 1-38 on page
1-215.

Packet Mapping See description Displays the mapping layer OTM2 OTURATE and client
mapping.
Not-editable (to change the Packet Mapping, the user
must delete the ETH10G facility and re-create the
ETH10G facility with the new Packet Mapping).
• 10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)
This packet mapping provides mapping of 10GE LAN
PHY (10G-BASE-R) signal to 10.709G OTU2 signal, via
GFP-F, asynchronous, standard WAN.
• 10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)
(default)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble and MAC transparent
WAN.
• 10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ Ordered Set/ MAC
transparent)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble, Ordered Set
transparent, and MAC transparent WAN.
• 11.05G - OPU1e (PCS transparent)
PHY (10G-BASE-R) to a proportionally wrapped
11.049G OTU1e signal, synchronous, CBR10G.
This mapping is not supported on 40G MUX (NTK525CF)
when used in 40G client card back-to-back
configurations.
This mapping is not supported on 40G MUX (NTK525CF)
configurations.

Laser Off Far • Disabled Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines type
End Fail • Enabled of signal conditioning towards subtending equipment.
Disabled, local fault (LF) is sent to subtending equipment
when line faults or head-end client faults are detected.
Default setting is determined by the setting of the system
laser off far end fail parameter in the Node Information
application.
Tx Wavelength 1528.38 (0) to 1568.77 at Sets the required line transmit wavelength.
(nm) 50 GHz spacing (default Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility is
0) OOS, except when changing from 0 to a valid
wavelength, which can be IS. Editing to 0 is supported.
Provisionable on tunable pluggables only.
The number in brackets is the channel ID.
Applicable to the ETH10G facility on the PXFP variants of
NTK583AA/AB and NTK587Ex to NTK587Hx only.
Maximum • 9600(default) Sets the maximum Transfer Unit (MTU).

Ethernet Frame • 1600
Size
Tx Actual Power • Tx optical power Displays the measured line transmitter optical power.
(dBm) • Unknown (if circuit pack Read-only.
not present) When the outgoing transmit optical power level for the
OCH/OCH-OPT value in the Site Manager Performance
Monitoring application does not display "OOR" when out
of range; the lowest reading is

Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power Displays the measured line receiver optical power. Read-
(dBm) • Unknown (if circuit pack only.
not present) When the incoming receive optical power level for the
OCH/OCH-OPR value in the Site Manager Performance
of range; the lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
Management - Performance Monitoring, 323-1851-520
for more information about OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR values.
Holdoff Timer 0 to 1000 in increments of Sets the length of time (in ms) before Tx conditioning is
(ms) 100 (default 0) applied to the client. Applicable to 40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CFE5 variant) only when the ETH10G is GFP
mapped.
Customer string of up to 64 Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same as the

Defined Facility characters Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI). The
Identifier provisioned value appears in the facility alarm report if the
SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
40GOCI ETH40G
states. The Auto in-service state is editable.
application.
Packet mapping Proprietary Displays the mapping protocol.

Tx Actual High • Tx optical power high Displays the highest measured transmit optical power of
Power (dBm) value the CFP multiple optical channels. Read-only.
• Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Tx Actual Low • Tx optical power low Displays the lowest measured transmit optical power of
present)
Rx Actual High • Rx optical power high Displays the highest measured received optical power of
present)
Rx Actual Low • Rx optical power low Displays the lowest measured received optical power of
present)

SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
WAN facility parameters

Table 1-41 provides a list of the WAN facility parameters. Applicable to
40G MUX OCI circuit packs only.
Table 1-41
40GMUX WAN
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number,

and port number for the selected facility. Read-only
Primary State See “Equipment and facility Indicates the primary state of the WAN facility,
primary states” on page which follows the ETH10G or FLEX(FC1200)
1-213 primary state. Read-only
states” on page 1-214 secondary state can be a combination of one or
more states. Read-only
Frame Checksum • 0 for ETH10G WAN Displays whether the GFP-F or GFP-T frame
• 32 for FLEX(FC1200) WAN checksum (4 Byte CRC-32) is appended to each
GFP-F or GFP-T frame. Read-only
"32" adds the frame checksum while "0" does not.
Note: To prevent packet loss, the Frame
Checksum must be kept at the default value of "0"
when using the "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/
MAC transparent)" packet mapping.
Packet Mapping • GFP-F for ETH10G WAN Displays the WAN to OPU2 mapping format. Read-
• GFP-T for FLEX(FC1200) only
WAN
Ethernet Preamble • Keep Sets whether the 8 byte Ethernet MAC preamble is
• Discard kept or discarded during GFP-F mapping.
Applicable to ETH10G WAN only. This parameter
is determined by the ETH10G packet mapping as
follows:
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC
transparent)" = Keep
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered Set/
MAC transparent)" = Keep
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)"
= Discard
Read-only

FCS Errored • For ETH10G WAN: Keep Sets whether the LAN FCS errored frames are kept
Frames (default), Discard or discarded at the client ingress. (Note 2)
• For FLEX(FC1200) WAN:
Keep
GFP RFI Enabled Controls the GFP remote failure indication (RFI)
client management frame (CMF) transmission.
When enabled, it allows GFP RFI CMF
transmission upon WAN link down. Read-only
Round trip delay Disable Controls the support (sending of CMFs) of round
Status trip delay calculation.
Read-only
Conditioning type GFP CMF Controls the type of conditioning on the WAN port.
WAN conditioning is triggered by local client
failures on the Ethernet port.
Read-only
User Payload 00 to FF Sets the GFP-F or GFP-T User Payload Identifier

Indicator (Note 1) used for Client Data Frames created in the WAN
Transmitted (In layer during the GFP-F or GFP-T mapping. This
HEX) value is not monitored or alarmed and editing of
this parameter is only provided to potentially
improve interoperability with other equipment.
Transparent • G7041CMF (default) Sets whether legacy client management frame

Ordered Sets • LEGACYCMF (LEGACYCMF) or G7041CMF is used.
• G7041CDF For the "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered

Set/MAC transparent)" mapping, the only option is
G7041CDF.
Note 1: This value can only be provisioned (via the WAN facility) for the proprietary "10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC transparent)" ETH10G packet mapping.
Note 2: When the "FCS Errored Frames" WAN facility parameter is set to "Discard", FCS errored frames
(either GFP or MAC FCS errors) are not discarded at the client egress of the 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs. The only location FCS errored frames are discarded is at the ETH10G client Rx of the 40G MUX
OCI circuit packs. Additionally, the discarded frames are added to the DFR-E PM count and the Ethernet
In Frames Discarded: Total OM count, which do not normally include FCS errored frames.
40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters

Table 1-42 provides a list of the 40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters.
Table 1-42
Parameter Options/ranges Description
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
port number for the selected facility.
page 1-213 IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary State See “Facility secondary Displays the facility operational state.
states” on page 1-214 The AINS state is editable for the OTM2 client facility.
For more information, see “Facilities that support
automatic in-service (AINS)” on page 1-215.
The Maintenance state is editable for the OTM2 client
facility. For more information, see Table 1-38 on page
1-215.
Conditioning Type • OPU_AIS (default) Controls the type of conditioning on the OTM mapping
• ODU_AIS layer facility of a non-OTM client port. OTM mapping
layer facility conditioning is triggered by local client
failures on the non-OTM client port.
Applicable only to the OTM2 mapping layer facility of a
non-OTM2 client facility on the 40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CFE5 variant).
ODU_AIS conditioning is required when interfacing
with an OTN switch (such as the current 6500 OTN
switch) which uses only ODU_AIS as a switch criteria
(and not OPU_AIS).
Rate • 10.7G Displays the facility rate. 10.7G only for 40G XCIF
• 11.05G OTM2 facility.
• 11.09G 11.05G and 11.09G rates are not supported on 40G

MUX (NTK525CF) when used in 40G client card back-
to-back configurations.

Tx Actual Power • Tx optical power Displays the measured line transmit optical power.
(dBm) (Note 1) • Unknown (if circuit pack Read-only
Performance Monitoring application does not
display "OOR" when out of range; the lowest reading
is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault Management - Performance
Tx FEC Format • Off Sets the transmit Tx FEC format setting.

(Note 1) • RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS- RS8 is the OTU FEC mode applied to achieve greater
8) margin on a given link.
Off state allows users to test the product for OTN
compliancy.
The OTM2 Tx FEC Format parameter cannot be
edited unless the facility is OOS.
Laser Off Far End • Disabled Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines
Fail (Note 1) • Enabled type of signal conditioning towards subtending
equipment. When Enabled, client transmitter laser is
shutoff when line faults or head-end client faults are
detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is sent to
Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power Displays the measured line receive optical power.
(dBm) (Note 1) • Unknown (if circuit pack Read-only.
The value may not be accurate if it is outside the
normal operating range.

Rx FEC Format • Off Select the receive Rx FEC format setting.

(Note 1) • RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS- RS8 is the OTU FEC mode applied to achieve greater
8) margin on a given link.
Off state allows users to test the product for OTN
compliancy.
The OTM2 Rx FEC Format parameter cannot be
edited unless the facility is OOS.
Pre-FEC Signal Fail -1.00 to +1.00 dBQ Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (dBQ) (default 0) alarm (applicable only when FEC is On). Can be
provisioned in 0.01 steps. 0 dBQ equates to 1x10^-15
post FEC errors.
This parameter cannot be edited unless the facility is
OOS.
OTU Signal Degrade 1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold (applicable only
Threshold (Note 1) when Rx FEC Mode is Off). Read-only.
Port Mode (Note 1) • SONET (default for Select the mode of the port. Determines if SONET or
SONET NE mode) SDH terminology is used and whether bit (SONET) or
• SDH (default for SDH block (SDH) errors are used for performance
NE mode) monitoring.
You cannot edit the port mode. To change the port
mode you must delete the OTM2 facility and then re-
add it with the correct port mode.
OPU2 + 7 Reserved • Yes (default) Sets whether 7 unused bytes of the OPU2 overhead
Bytes • No are used for payload.
This value can only be changed by deleting the
associated ETH10G facility and re-adding it using a
different Packet Mapping. Read-Only.
Payload Type 00 to FF OPU Payload Type byte expected in the off-ramp

Expected (In HEX) (Note 2) direction for an OTM2 facility associated with an
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility.
Note: If the expected and the received do not match,
an OPU PT Byte mismatch alarm is raised.
Payload Type 00 to FF OPU Payload Type byte transmitted in the on-ramp

Transmitted (In HEX) (Note 2) direction for an OTM2 facility associated with an
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility.
Delay Measurement • Enabled (default) Enables or disables automatic delay measurement.

• Disabled

One Way Latency • numeric value Displays the value of the last valid one way delay
(μs) • Unknown measurement in microseconds.

Note 1: In 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, this field is only visible for the OTM2 client facility.
Note 2: You can provision this value only for ETH10G facilities with packet mappings of "10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)", "11.05G - OPU1e (PCS transparent)", or "11.09G - OPU2e
(PCS transparent)". Achieved via the OTM2 facility associated with the client ETH10G facility for the 40G
MUX OCI circuit pack.
40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters

Table 1-43 provides a list of the 40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters.
Table 1-43
40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters
Unit facility-shelf-slot- Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
port port number for the selected facility.
Secondary State See “Facility secondary Displays the facility operational state. Read-only
states” on page 1-214
Rate 10.7G Displays the facility rate.

Expected (In HEX) direction for an OTM2 facility associated with an
OC192/STM64 client facility.

Transmitted (In HEX) direction for an OTM2 facility associated with an
OC192/STM64 client facility.
Port Mode • SONET (default for Select the mode of the port. Determines if SONET or
SONET NE mode) SDH terminology is used and whether bit (SONET) or
• SDH (default for SDH block (SDH) errors are used for performance
OSIC OTM2 facility parameters

Table 1-44 provides a list of the OSIC OTM2 facility parameters.
Table 1-44
Unit OTM2-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.
Primary State See “Equipment and Sets the primary state of the OTM2 facility.
facility primary states” on IS and OOS are selectable.
page 1-213
Optical System Up to 8 alphanumeric Sets the optical system identifier used by other
Identifier characters (inclusive) applications for network topology building blocks to
The identifier can include build an optical network model including DWDM
any combination of upper transmit/receive elements.
and lower case letters, Setting the optical system identifier overrides the
numbers, and special default setting provisioned in the Node Information
characters. application that is used when OTM2 facilities are
auto-provisioned.
Tx Path Identifier 1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier, which allows two
different transmitters with identical wavelengths in
the same network element to be identified uniquely
in an optical system.
Setting the transmit path identifier overrides the
default setting provisioned in the Node Information
application that is used when OTM2 facilities are
auto-provisioned.
Provisioned Tx Power -7.0 to 3.0 (default -7.0) Sets the required line transmit optical power
(dBm) (provision power with 0.1 incremental range).
Tx Actual Power (dBm) • Tx optical power Displays the measured transmit optical power.
(-6.5 to 3.5) Read-only.
• Unknown (if circuit pack When the outgoing transmit optical power level for
not present) (default) the monitored port is out of range, the Tx Actual
• OOR-LO (if value below Power parameter displays "OOR". The
minimum limit) corresponding OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT value in the
Site Manager Performance Monitoring application
• OOR-HO (if value does not display "OOR" when out of range; the
above maximum limit) lowest reading is -45 dBm. The value may not be
accurate if it is outside the normal operating range.

Rx Actual Power (dBm) • Rx optical power Displays the measured receive optical power.
-7.0 to 3.0 Read-only.
• Unknown (if circuit pack When the incoming receive optical power level for
not present) (default) the monitored port is out of range, the Rx Actual
• OOR-LO (if value below Power parameter displays "OOR". The
minimum limit) corresponding OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR value in the
• OOR-HO (if value does not display "OOR" when out of range; the
above maximum limit) lowest reading is -45 dBm. The value may not be
accurate if it is outside the normal operating range.
Rx Decision Threshold • Auto (default) Sets the Rx decision threshold mode.

Mode • Manual
Rx Decision Threshold 0 to 4095 in ADC units, Sets the Rx decision threshold.

default 100
Tx Wavelength (nm) 1528.77 to 1565.09 Sets the OTM2 transmit wavelength at 50 GHz
(default 0.00) spacing.
Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility
is OOS.
Note: Tx Wavelength must be provisioned to a
non-default value for the OSIC circuit pack to be
able to query repeaters.
Tx SBS Dither On (default), Off Sets the transmit Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
(SBS) dither setting. If On, a dither frequency
applied to transmitter to compensate for the non-
linear effect of Stimulated Brillouin Scattering.
Note: Tx SBS Dither must be provisioned On for
the OSIC circuit pack to be able to query repeaters.
Tx AM Format Idler (default), SC Idler Sets the Analog Maintenance (AM) format.
Note: Tx AM Format must be provisioned to
SC Idler for the OSIC circuit pack to query the
repeaters.
Line Rate 10.7G Displays the line rate. Read-only,
Port Mode • SONET (default for Displays the port mode of the facility. Read-only.
SONET NE mode)
• SDH (default for SDH
NE mode)

Tx Sub-carrier 100.00 to 250.00 Sets the OSIC-specific OTM2 facility Tx sub-

Frequency (kHz) (default 150.00) carrier frequency.
Tx Modulation Depth 20 to 100 (default 50) Sets the peak-to-peak modulation depth target in
(%) percent for the OSIC OTM2 Tx facility, and is used
as the target by the Tx control loop.
Tx ASK Baud Rate • 333.33 (default) Sets the transmit amplitude shift keying modulation
(Baud) • 1667 baud rate or symbols per second rate, and is used
to setup the Tx control loop.
Note: This value changes in step with the
Encoding/Decoding Format parameter, depending
on the Repeater type selected for the repeatered
system.
Tx Message Length (bit) 1 to 64 (default 16) Sets the Tx message length in bits.
Note: Kept at default value for normal use, but
provisionable for future use.
Tx Encoding Format • NRZ Sets the Tx and Rx modulation encoding format.

• 3SB1 (default)
Rx Sub-carrier 4.00 to 63.00 (default Sets the OSIC-specific OTM2 facility Rx sub-
Frequency (kHz) 12.5) carrier frequency.
Note: This value is for information only, and does
not provision a change in hardware or firmware in
this release. However, it is important as a record of
the repeated system that is intended to be queried
using the OSIC OTM2 facility.
Rx Message Length 1 to 64 (default 28) Sets the Rx message length in bits.

(bit) Note: Kept at default value for normal use, but
provisionable for future use.

Rx ASK Baud Rate • 16.67 (default) Sets the receive amplitude shift keying modulation
(Baud) • 83.33 baud rate or symbols per second rate, and is used
to setup the Rx decoder control loop.
Note: This value changes in step with the
Encoding/Decoding Format parameter, depending
on the Repeater type selected for the repeatered
system.
Repeater System Name 64-character string Sets the name of the repeater system associated
(default null) with the OSIC OTM2 facility, which is used to query
the repeatered system.
This Repeater System Name is used in the
Supervisory Channel drop-down list of the Site
Manager SC Query application.
Customer Defined string of up to 64 Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same

Facility Identifier characters as the Common Language Facility Identifier
(CLFI). The provisioned value appears in the
facility alarm report if the SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC
is equipped.
ISS OTM2 facility parameters

Table 1-45 provides a list of the ISS OTM2 facility parameters.
Table 1-45
Unit OTM2-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID. Port can be 2, 3, or 4.
Primary State See Equipment and facility Sets the primary state of the OTM2 facility.
primary states on page 1-213 IS and OOS are selectable.
Defaults to IS for OTM2 on port 2 when the ISS

equipment is provisioned.
Defaults to OOS-MA for OTM2 on ports 3 and 4
when the ISS equipment is provisioned. Can be set
to IS only if the Repeater System Family parameter
on port 3 is set to a valid value.
Secondary State See Facility secondary states Displays the facility operational state. Read only.
on page 1-214
Customer Defined string of up to 64 characters Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same
Facility Identifier as the Common Language Facility Identifier
(CLFI). The provisioned value appears in the
facility alarm report.
Port 2-specific parameters
Rx Actual Power numeric value or Unknown if Displays the measured receive optical power.
(dBm) circuit pack not present Read only.
Tx Actual Power numeric value or Unknown if Displays the measured transmit optical power.
Repeater System • Family A Sets the repeater system family. Port 3 and port 4
Family • Family B must be both OOS to edit this parameter. Can only
be changed from Unknown to a valid value or from
• Family C a valid value to Unknown. Cannot be changed from
• Unknown a valid family to another valid family.
Note: When this parameter is changed from a
valid family to Unknown, all the supervisory
information of the repeaters will be wiped out.

Tx ASK Baud Rate • 150 (default for Family B) Sets the transmit amplitude shift keying modulation
(Baud) • 333.33 baud rate or symbols per second rate, and is used
to setup the Tx control loop.
• 1000 (default for Family C)
Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
• 1667 (default for Family A)
• Unknown
Tx Encoding Format • for Family A and Family C: Sets the Tx modulation encoding format.
3SB1 (default), 3SB2, NRZ
• for Family B: NRZ2 (default),
NRZ, 3SB1, 3SB2
• Unknown
Tx Sub-carrier • for Family A and Family C: Sets the ISS-specific OTM2 facility Tx sub-carrier
Frequency (kHz) 100.00 to 250.00, default frequency.
150.00 Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
• for Family B: 100.00 to
500.50, default 455.00
• Unknown
Tx Modulation • for Family A, Family B, and Sets the peak-to-peak modulation depth target in
Depth (%) Family C: 0.5 to 6, default 2 percent for the ISS OTM2 Tx facility, and is used as
• Unknown the target by the Tx control loop.
Tx Message Length • for Family A and Family C: 1 Sets the Tx message length in bits.
(bit) to 64 in multiples of 4, Kept at default value for normal use, but
default 16 provisionable for future use.
• for Family B: N/A Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
• Unknown
Repeater System 64-character string (default Sets the name of the repeater system associated
Name null) with the ISS OTM2 facility, which is used to query
the repeatered system.
This Repeater System Name is used in the
Supervisory Channel drop-down list of the Site
Manager SC Query application.
Port Mode • SONET (default for SONET Displays the port mode of the facility. Read only.
NE mode)
• SDH (default for SDH NE
mode)

Rx Actual Power numeric value or Unknown if Displays the measured receive optical power.
Rx ASK Baud Rate • for Family A: 16.67, 50, Sets the receiver amplitude shift keying modulation
(Baud) 83.33 (default) baud rate or symbols per second rate, and is used
• for Family B: N/A to setup the Rx decoder control loop.
• for Family C: 16.67, 50 Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.

(default), 83.33
• Unknown
Rx BPSK Baud • for Family A and Family C: N/ Sets the receiver binary phase shift keying
Rate (Baud) A modulation baud rate or symbols per second rate,
• for Family B: 5, 150 (default) and is used to setup the Rx decoder control loop.
• Unknown Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
Rx Decoding • for Family A and Family C: Sets the Rx modulation decoding format.
Format NRZ, 3SB1 (default), 3SB2 Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
• for Family B: NRZ, NRZ2
(default), 3SB1, 3SB2
• Unknown
Rx Sub-carrier • for Family A and Family C: Sets the ISS-specific OTM2 facility Rx sub-carrier
Frequency (kHz) 4.00 to 63.00, default 12.50 frequency.
• for Family B: 4.00 to 63.00, For Family B, facility must be OOS to edit this
default 43.04 parameter.
• Unknown
Rx Message Length • for Family A and Family C: Sets the Rx message length in bits.
(bit) 1 to 64 in multiples of 4, Kept at default value for normal use, but
default 28 provisionable for future use.
• for Family B: N/A Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
• Unknown
Rx Decision • for Family A and Family C: Sets the Rx decision threshold mode.
Threshold Mode Auto (default), Manual
• for Family B: N/A
• Unknown

Rx Decision • for Family A and Family C: 0 Sets the Rx decision threshold.

Threshold to 4095 in ADC units, default
100
• for Family B: N/A
• Unknown
Port Mode • SONET (default for SONET Displays the port mode of the facility. Read only.
NE mode)
mode)

Table 1-46 provides a list of the OTM3 facility parameters. Note that not all
OTM3 facilities support all the parameters. See Table 1-47 on page 1-248 for
applicability.
Table 1-46
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number,

and port number for the selected facility.
Port number is 1 for 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40G OCI
circuit pack and 100 for 40G MUX OCI and
40G XCIF circuit pack in this release.
Primary State See “Equipment and facility Sets the primary state of the facility. Default reflects
primary states” on page 1-213 primary state of associated equipment.
IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary See “Facility secondary states” on Displays the facility operational state.
State page 1-214 The AINS state is editable for supported circuit
packs. For more information, see Facilities that
support automatic in-service (AINS) on page
1-215.
The Maintenance state is editable for supported
circuit packs. For more information, see Table 1-38
on page 1-215.
Optical Up to 8 alphanumeric characters Sets the optical system identifier used by other
System (inclusive) applications for network topology building blocks to
Identifier The identifier can include any build an optical network model including DWDM
combination of upper and lower transmit/receive elements.
case letters, numbers, and special Applicable only to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
characters. Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit pack.
Tx Path 1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier which allows two
Identifier different transmitters with identical wavelengths in
Applicable only to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit pack.

Tx Power • 0 to -11 for 40G OCLD Sets the required line transmit optical power
(dBm) • -3 to -11 for Wavelength- (provision power with 0.1 incremental range). Tx
Selective 40G OCLD power may auto-provision.
• -14.0 to -4.0 for 40G UOCLD Applicable only to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-

Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs.
Tx Actual • Tx optical power Displays the actual transmit optical output power.
Power (dBm) • Unknown (if circuit pack not Read-only.
present) (Note 2) When the outgoing transmit optical power level for
the monitored port is out of range, the Tx Actual
Power parameter displays "OOR". The
corresponding OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT value in the
Site Manager Performance Monitoring
application does not display "OOR" when out of
range; the lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
Management - Performance Monitoring, 323-1851-
520 for more information about OPT-OCH/OCH-
OPT values.
Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40/43G OCI
circuit packs.
Rx Actual • Rx optical power Displays the actual receive optical input power.
Power (dBm) • Unknown (if circuit pack not Read-only.
(Note 3) present) (Note 2) When the incoming receive optical power level for
the monitored port is out of range, the Rx Actual
corresponding OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR value in the
Site Manager Performance Monitoring
application does not display "OOR" when out of
range; the lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
520 for more information about OPR-OCH/OCH-
OPR values.
Only applicable to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40/43G OCI
circuit packs.
Rx Channel • Rx channel optical power Displays the actual client receive channel optical
Actual Power • Unknown (if circuit pack not input power. Read-only.
(dBm) (Note 3) present) (Note 2) Applicable only to Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD circuit packs.

Tx Actual High • Tx optical power high value Displays the highest measured transmit optical
Power (dBm) • Unknown (if CFP not present) power of the CFP multiple optical channels. Read-
only.
Applicable only to 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Tx Actual Low • Tx optical power low value Displays the lowest measured transmit optical
only.
Rx Actual High • Rx optical power high value Displays the highest measured received optical
only.
Rx Actual Low • Rx optical power low value Displays the lowest measured received optical
only.
Laser Off Far • Disabled Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines
End Fail • Enabled type of signal conditioning towards subtending
equipment. When Enabled, client transmitter laser
is shutoff when line faults or head-end client faults
are detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is sent to
Only applicable to the 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP
OCI circuit pack.
Rx FEC • PFEC for 40G OCLD/ Displays the receive Rx FEC format setting.
Format Wavelength-Selective 40G Rx FEC format cannot be edited unless the OTM3
OCLD/40G UOCLD client facility on 40/43G OCI or 40G+ CFP OCI is
• Off or RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8) OOS.
(default) for 40/43G OCI or 40G+
CFP OCI

Tx FEC • PFEC for 40G OCLD/ Displays the transmit Tx FEC format setting.
Format Wavelength-Selective 40G Tx FEC format cannot be edited unless the OTM3
OCLD/40G UOCLD client facility on 40/43G OCI or 40G+ CFP OCI is
• Off or RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8) OOS.
(default) for 40/43G OCI or 40G+
CFP OCI
Tx Wavelength • 1527.60 (0) to 1565.50 (89) Displays the OTM3 transmit wavelength in nm. The
(nm) at 50GHz spacing for C-Band number in brackets is the channel ID. Tx
40G OCLD wavelength may auto-provision.
• 1568.77 to 1608.76 at 50GHz Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility
spacing for L-Band 40G OCLD is OOS.
• 1528.77 (93) to 1566.72 (92) at Wavelength can be re-provisioned to zero when
50GHz spacing for Wavelength- the OTM3 facility is OOS, without deleting the
Selective 40G OCLD facility.
• 1527.99 (0) to 1565.50 (89) at Only applicable to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
50GHz spacing for 40G UOCLD Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs.
Note: 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD, or 40G UOCLD connected together must be
set to the same wavelength on both ends.
Otherwise, a loss of clock alarm will be raised.
Tuning Mode • Performance-Optimized Tuning Sets the wavelength tuning mode.

(default) Performance-Optimized tuning mode includes a
• Accelerated Tuning self-calibration test, which optimizes the
performance, whereas the Accelerated tuning
mode does not.
Performance-Optimized (formerly called Normal)
tuning mode is the tuning mode that is supported in
all releases.
After a circuit pack cold restart, tuning is always
done as Performance-Optimized, regardless of the
tuning mode setting. All subsequent tuning is done
based on the tuning mode setting.

Pre-FEC -1.00 to +1.00 dBQ (default 0) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Signal Fail alarm (applicable only when FEC is On). Can be
Threshold provisioned in 0.01 steps.
(dBQ) This parameter cannot be edited unless the facility
is OOS.
Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40/43G
OCI, and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Pre-FEC • -1.00 to +3.50 dBQ (default 0.5) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal
Signal for 40G OCLD/Wavelength- Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Degrade Selective 40G OCLD/40G Can be provisioned in 0.01 steps. Applicable only
Threshold UOCLD to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/
(dBQ) • -1.00 to +2.00 dBQ (default 0.5) 40G UOCLD, 40/43G OCI, and 40G+ CFP OCI
for 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP circuit packs.
OCI
Pre-FEC numeric value Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Signal Fail Signal Fail alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Threshold Read-only
(BER) Applicable only to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD, 40/43G OCI,
and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Pre-FEC numeric value Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Signal Signal Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC
Degrade is On). Read-only
Threshold Applicable only to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
(BER) Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD, 40/43G OCI,
and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Line Rate • 44.5G Displays the rate. Read-only

• 43.018G The 43.018G rate is only applicable to the 40/43G
OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack.
Port Mode • SONET (default for SONET NE Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or
mode) SDH). Read-only
• SDH (default for SDH NE mode)
OTU Signal 1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold (applicable

Degrade only when Rx FEC Format is Off). Read-only
Threshold Only applicable to the 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP
OCI circuit packs.

Total Rx Link -50,000 to +50,000 ps/nm Display the total link dispersion in the receive
Dispersion direction. Read-only
Supported Supported mean DGD Displays the maximum value of the mean DGD of
Mean DGD any link for which modem performance can be
guaranteed in ps. Read-only
Estimated numeric value Displays the estimated unidirectional latency in µs.

Unidirectional Estimated unidirectional latency includes fiber
Latency (µs) latency and circuit pack latency. Circuit pack
latency is from the backplane to the line interface
port.
Estimated • Estimated instantaneous of DGD Displays an estimate of the present value of the
Instance of measurement differential group delay (DGD) that results from
DGD (Note 1) • Unknown (Note 2) polarization mode dispersion (PMD) present in the
link at the signal wavelength in ps. The maximum
instance of DGD observed over life is 3 times the
mean DGD of the link. Read-only
Estimated • Estimated fiber length Displays an estimate of the fiber length calculated
Fiber Length • Unknown (if no fiber is connected based on the round trip delay. Read-only
(km) to the port) Applicable only to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
(Note 2) Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs.
Reach Reach specification in numeric Displays the reach specification retrieved from a
Specification value 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G
(km) UOCLD circuit pack. Read-only
Echoed Trace TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the echoed trace received from the far-
Rx end transmitter. Read-only

Trace Tx TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the transmitted trace used to determine if

the Tx/Rx fiber pairs are connected correctly.
Read-only.
Associated Far TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the associated far end Rx ID. Read-only.
End Rx ID Only applicable to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-
Sub-Carrier • WIDE20 (default), WIDE25, Sets the sub-carrier spacing.

Spacing MINSPACE20 for NTK539XA Only applicable to 40G UOCLD circuit pack.
• WIDE20, WIDE25 (default),
WIDE50, MINSPACE20 for
NTK539XE
ODU • No Indicates whether the OTM3 facility monitors the

Monitoring • Yes ODU/OPU layers. When enabled, ODU/OPU layer
alarms are monitored and ODU layer PM counts
are monitored.
Customer string of up to 64 characters Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same

Defined as the Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
Facility The provisioned value appears in the facility alarm
Identifier report if the SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is
equipped.
Delay • Enabled Enables or disables automatic delay measurement.

Measurement • Disabled Default is disabled for 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CF
variant) and enabled for 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJ). Cannot enable OTM3 DM on 40G
MUX OCI (NTK525CF variant) if OTM3 GCC1 is
provisioned, and vice versa.
One Way • numeric value Displays the value of the last valid one way delay
Latency (μs) • Unknown measurement in microseconds.
Fast Receiver • Disabled (default) Indicates whether STORM is enabled or disabled.

Recovery • Enabled Editable in the STORM application. Only applicable
to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
circuit packs.

Network • Matched Chromatic Dispersion Indicates the network configuration type. Editable
Configuration (default) in the STORM application. Only applicable to 40G
• Diverse Chromatic Dispersion OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
packs.
Link AUTO or numeric value Indicates the link dispersion for path 1. Displays
Dispersion AUTO when Network Configuration is Matched
Path 1 Chromatic Dispersion. Only applicable to 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
packs.
Link AUTO or numeric value Indicates the link dispersion for path 2. Displays
Dispersion AUTO when Network Configuration is Matched
Path 2 Chromatic Dispersion. Only applicable to 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
packs.
Note 1: For the Mean DGD specification for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD circuit packs, refer to the Technical Specifications section in Part 3 of Planning, NTRN10DB.
Note 2: The value Unknown will be displayed also when the “Circuit Pack Operational Capacity
Exceeded” alarm is present. If this alarm is present, the provisioning of the OTM3 facility, except for the
primary state, will not be sent to the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit
pack.
Note 3: The Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface:
— one for the total input power, that is, the total of all the wavelengths plus the amplifier noise (ASE),
reported as the Rx Actual Power, and
— one for the channel input power (the channel corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned
to), reported as the Rx Channel Actual Power.
When the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD is used in colored Photonic systems, the two Rx interface
detectors will see similar power levels and as such the Rx Actual Power and Rx Channel Actual Power
values will have similar values.
Table 1-47
OTM3 facility parameter applicability
Equipment type 40GMUX 40GOCI 40GOCI 40GOCLD/40GUOCLD
Facility Mux layer Mapping layer Client Line
Unit X X X X
Primary State X X X X
Secondary State X X X X
Optical System Identifier X
Tx Path Identifier X
Tx Power (dBm) X
Tx Actual Power (dBm) X (Note 6) X
Rx Actual Power (dBm) X (Note 6) X
Rx Channel Actual Power X (Note 3)

(dBm)
Tx Actual High Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Tx Actual Low Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Rx Actual High Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Rx Actual Low Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Laser Off Far End Fail X
Rx FEC Format X X
Tx FEC Format X X
Tx Wavelength (nm) X
Tuning Mode X
Pre-FEC Signal Fail X X

Threshold (dBQ)
Pre-FEC Signal Degrade X X

Threshold (dBQ)
Pre-FEC Signal Fail X X

Threshold (BER)
Pre-FEC Signal Degrade X X

Threshold (BER)
Line Rate X X X X

Port Mode X X X X
OTU Signal Degrade X

Threshold
Total Rx Link Dispersion X
Supported Mean DGD X
Round Trip Delay X
Estimated Instance of DGD X
Estimated Fiber Length (km) X
Reach Specification (km) X
Echoed Trace Rx X
Trace Tx X
Associated Far End Rx ID X
Sub-Carrier Spacing X (Note 2)
ODU Monitoring X
Customer Defined Facility X X X

Identifier
Delay Measurement X (Note 7) X (Note 7)
One Way Latency (μs) X (Note 7) X (Note 7)
Fast Receiver Recovery X (Note 4)
Network Configuration X (Note 4)

Link Dispersion Path 1 X (Note 4)
Link Dispersion Path 2 X (Note 4)
Note 1: For 40G XCIF, the only applicable parameters are Unit, Primary state, Secondary state, Rate,
and Port mode.
Note 2: Only applicable to 40G UOCLD.
Note 3: Only applicable to the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD.
Note 4: Only applicable to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD.
Note 5: Only applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI.
Note 6: Only applicable to 40/43G OCI.
Note 7: Supported on the OTM3 Mux layer on the 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CF variant) and the OTM3
mapping layer on the 40G+ CFP OCI (NTK529SJ) only.
FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX (NTK525CFE5 variant)

Table 1-48 provides a list of the FLEX facility parameters.
Table 1-48
FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX
Unit FLEX-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
primary states” on page primary state of associated equipment.
1-213 IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary State See “Facility secondary Displays the facility operational state. The Auto in-
states” on page 1-214 service state is editable.
Protocol • FC800 Displays the FLEX facility protocol.

• FC1200 FC1200 is not supported on 40G MUX (NTK525CF)
configurations.
Conditioning Type • FC800: NOS (default) or Determines type of signal conditioning towards
LOFEF subtending equipment when line faults or head-end
• FC1200: LF (default) or client faults are detected. When set to LOFEF,
LOFEF client transmitter laser is shut off. When set to NOS
for FC800, NOS is sent to subtending equipment.
When set to LF for FC1200, LF is sent to subtending
equipment.
Holdoff Timer 0, 100 (default), 200, ... 1000 Sets the length of time (in ms) before Tx
in 100 increments conditioning is applied to the client.
Before the holdoff timer expires, FC800/FC1200
idles are injected.
Packet Mapping • FC800: ENHCBR: 10.7G - Displays the mapping type.

OPU2 (Enhanced CBR)
• FC1200: TCODEGFPT:
11.09G - OPU2e (GFP-T
Transcoded)

FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX
Tx Actual Power Numeric value Displays the Tx actual power in dBm.

(dBm)
Rx Actual Power Numeric value Displays the Rx actual power in dBm.

(dBm)
Facility Identifier as the Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
The provisioned value appears in the facility alarm
report if the SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is
equipped.
TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters

Table 1-49 provides a list of the TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters.
Table 1-49
Unit • TCMTTP-shelf-slot-port- Displays the AID for the selected facility, where
[ODUk]P[trib]T[level] TCM level = 1 to 6
• TCMCTP-shelf-slot-port- ODUk= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
[ODUk]P[trib]T[level]
trib =1 for an ODUk within an ODUk, 1 to 2 for an ODU0
within an ODU1, 1 to 4 for an ODU1 within an ODU2, 1 to
8 for an ODU0 within an ODU2
Secondary State See Facility secondary Indicates the operational state of the facility. The
states on page 1-214 secondary state can be a combination of one or more
states.
The Auto in-service state and the Maintenance state are
editable and independent of the parent or sibling AINS
and MT state.
Supporting TP • OTMn-shelf-slot-port Displays the supporting TP. Read-only
TCM mode • Monitor Sets the mode of the TCM. TCMTTP is always
• Terminated Terminated. TCMCTP can be Monitor or Terminated.
Owner USER Displays the entity which created the facility. Read-only

Measurement • Disabled (default) Applicable to TTP or terminated-CTP only.
Cannot enable DM on port 100 TCMCTP of 40G MUX
OCI (NTK525CF variant) if OTM3 GCC1 is provisioned,
and vice versa.
Latency (μs) • Unknown measurement in microseconds. Applicable to TTP or
terminated-CTP only.

Defined Facility characters Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
Identifier
Auto In-Service hh-mm Displays the time left for the auto in-service timer. Read-
Time Left (hh- only
mm)
Signal Degrade 1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold. Read-only

Threshold
OPTMON facility parameters

Table 1-50 provides a list of the OPTMON facility parameters.
Table 1-50
OPTMON facility parameters
Unit OPTMON-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number,

and port number for the selected facility.
Primary State See Equipment and facility Sets the primary state of the facility. IS and OOS
primary states on page 1-213 are selectable.
Secondary See Facility secondary states on Sets the facility operational state.
State page 1-214 The Auto in-service state is editable.
The Maintenance state is editable.
LOS Threshold N/A Not applicable to the SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit

(dBm) pack.
IDLER facility parameters

Table 1-51 provides a list of the IDLER facility parameters.
Table 1-51
Unit IDLER-shelf-slot- Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number,

port-ch port number, and channel number for the selected
facility.
Primary State See Equipment and Sets the primary state of the facility. IS and OOS
facility primary states on are selectable.
page 1-213
Secondary State See Facility secondary Sets the facility operational state.
states on page 1-214 The Auto in-service state is editable.
Wavelength for the first wavelength on 50 GHz Sets the wavelength for the channel.
laser in the IDLER ITU grid (default 0)
facility (nm)
Wavelength for the wavelength on 50 GHz Sets the wavelength for the channel.
second laser in the ITU grid (default 0)
IDLER facility (nm)
Frequency offset for the -12.5 for NTK554HA Displays the frequency offset. Read only for
first laser in the IDLER -25 to 25 (default -12.5) NTK554HA. Editable in 0.1 GHz increments for
facility (GHz) for NTK554HC NTK554HC only.
Frequency offset for the 12.5 for NTK554HA Displays the frequency offset. Read only for
second laser in the -25 to 25 (default 12.5) for NTK554HA. Editable in 0.1 GHz increments for
IDLER facility (GHz) NTK554HC NTK554HC only.
Frequency for the first 191.32500 to 196.12500 Sets the frequency for the channel in Flexible Grid
laser in the IDLER (default 0.0) mode. Editable in 0.0001 THz (100 MHz)
facility (THz) increments. Applicable to NTK554HC in Flexible
Grid mode only.
Frequency for the 191.32500 to 196.12500 Sets the frequency for the channel in Flexible Grid
second laser in the (default 0.0) mode. Editable in 0.0001 THz (100 MHz)
IDLER facility (THz) increments. Applicable to NTK554HC in Flexible
Grid mode only.
Output power for the -2.4 (default) to +6.0 Sets the target output power.
first laser in the IDLER
facility (dBm)

Output power for the -2.4 (default) to +6.0 Sets the target output power.
second laser in the
IDLER facility (dBm)
SBS dither for the first • ON Enables or disables the SBS dither.
laser in the IDLER • OFF (default)
facility
SBS dither for the • ON Enables or disables the SBS dither.

second laser in the • OFF (default)
IDLER facility
Measured output power numeric value Displays the power reading. Read-only
for the first laser in the
IDLER facility (dBm)
Measured output power numeric value Displays the power reading. Read-only
for the second laser in
the IDLER facility (dBm)
Minimum provisionable numeric value Displays the power reading. Read-only

power for the first laser
in the IDLER facility
(dBm)
Minimum provisionable numeric value Displays the power reading. Read-only

power for the second
laser in the IDLER
facility (dBm)
Maximum provisionable numeric value Displays the power reading. Read-only

power for the first laser
in the IDLER facility
(dBm)
Maximum provisionable numeric value Displays the power reading. Read-only

power for the second
laser in the IDLER
facility (dBm)
ADJ facility parameters

Table 1-52 provides a list of the ADJ facility parameters.
Table 1-52
ADJ
Unit ADJ-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and port
number for the selected facility.
Primary State See “Equipment and Displays the primary state of the facility. Read-only.
facility primary states” on
page 1-213
Adjacency Type TXRX Sets the type of the adjacency.
Status • Unverified Displays current status of the adjacency facility.

• Derived • Unverified - The far end address is user- provisioned
• Reliable but not discovered or verified.
• Unreliable • Derived - the system has derived the value of the

provisioned far end address based on provisioning of
other parameters in the system.
Note: Adjacencies with the Derived status cannot be
altered by the user.
• Reliable - The actual far end address is detected and it
matches the provisioned far end address.
• Unreliable - The actual far end address is detected and
it does not match the provisioned far end address or the
discovery validation has detected a mis-fibering.
Actual Far End string format Displays the actual far end address which is the detected
Address TID, shelf, slot, and port of the far end of the fiber. Read-
only
Actual Far End See Note 2 Displays the option that each field of the far end address
Address Format represents. Read-only
Expected Far End TID-shelf-slot-port Sets the provisioned far end address of the fiber
Address (Note 1) connection.

Expected Far End See Note 2 Sets the expected far end line receive and client receive
Address Format addresses format reported by the adjacency.

Note 1: The Expected Far End Address is controlled by the Expected Far End Address Format
selection. If the Expected Far End Address Format is set to ‘NULL’, then the Expected Far End
Address is disabled; otherwise, it is enabled.
Note 2: The Far End Address Format options are:
• NULL
• TID-SH-SL-PRT
• TID-SH-SL-SBSL-PRT
Comms setting parameters

DCC/GCC support and parameters
Table 1-53 on page 1-260 provides information on GCC support on 40G circuit
packs, and Table 1-54 on page 1-260 provides a list of the Lower Layer DCC/
GCC parameters.
Lower Layer DCC/GCC parameters

The Lower Layer DCC/GCC option provides a single table which displays the
DCC/GCC parameters for any OCn/STMn/OTMn facilities which have a lower
layer DCC/GCC provisioned.
For more information on GCC support on the circuit packs, refer to “GCC
support on circuit packs” on page 1-260.
Use the Add button to provision new DCC/GCC circuits and the Delete button
to delete existing DCC/GCC circuits. The Edit button is only enabled for editing
the LAPD parameters. When adding a DCC/GCC circuit, consider the
following:
• Each end of the DCC/GCC circuit must be provisioned with the same
options.
• When adding a DCC circuit, the L2 Frame Size and L2 Side Role fields
only become available when the LAPD option is selected.
• Once a new DCC/GCC circuit has been added, an IISIS or OSPF circuit
must be added for this port. See IISIS Circuit parameters on page 1-263
and OSPF Circuit parameters on page 1-266.
• You must delete the IISIS or OSPF circuit for the DCC/GCC circuit before
deleting the DCC/GCC circuit.
• For OTM2 ports, a GCC0 or GCC1 PPP circuit (with IP address of 0.0.0.0)
and an associated IISIS or OSPF circuit are automatically created when
the OTM2 facility is provisioned if the default auto GCC0 mode or GCC1
mode parameter is set to IISIS or OSPF in the System tab of the Node
Information application and if the Shelf IP has been provisioned on the NE.
• For OTM3 ports (except for OTM3 ports on 40G OCI circuit packs), a
GCC0 or GCC1 PPP circuit (with IP address of 0.0.0.0) and an associated
IISIS or OSPF circuit are automatically created when the OTM3 facility is
provisioned if the default auto GCC0 mode or the GCC1 mode parameter
is set to IISIS or OSPF in the System tab of the Node Information
application and if the Shelf IP has been provisioned on the NE.
• Adding or deleting a DCC/GCC entry with its Protocol parameter set to
PPP, automatically adds or deletes an associated PPP circuit with IP
address of 0.0.0.0.
• DCC and associated ISIS or OSPF circuits are only supported for OC192/
STM64 facilities on the 40G XCIF circuit packs.
Table 1-53
GCC support on circuit packs
Circuit Packs GCC0 GCC1
40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD (Note 1) X
40G OCI (Note 2) X X
40G MUX OCI (Note 3) X X
40G ULH OCLD (Note 1) X
40G XCIF (Note 4) X
Note 1: Supported on the OTM3 line facility (port 1).

Note 2: GCC1 supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 1). GCC0 supported on the OTM3
client facility (port 1) on the 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Note 3: GCC1 supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 100) and GCC0 supported on the
OTM2 client facilities (ports 1 to 4). Cannot provision OTM3 GCC1 on 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CF
variant) if DM is enabled on port 100 OTM3 or TCMCTP, and vice versa.
Note 4: Supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 100).
Table 1-54
Parameter Options Description Addable/

Editable
Unit OCn/STMn/OTMn Displays all the provisioned OCn/STMn/OTMn ports Yes

ports and their DCC/GCC settings
OCn/STMn/OTMn Ports are displayed in the
following format: OCn/STMn/OTMn-shelf- slot-port.
Carrier Section/RS, line/MS, Selects the carrier for the Section/ DCC, line DCC Yes
GCC0, GCC1 and GCC circuit, or GCC0 or GCC1
Operation Section/RS, line/MS, Displays the status of the DCC/GCC circuit. No

Carrier GCC0, GCC1,
Disconnected
Protocol LAPD, NDP, PPP, Only PPP or NDP is supported for OTMn GCC ports Yes or No
Transparent and LAPD and Transparent options are disabled. depends
For OC192/STM64 on 40G XCIF, select the LAPD on facility
or PPP radio button to set the protocol of the DCC and carrier
circuit (PPP or LAPD).


Editable
L2 Frame Size 512 to 1492 (default Sets the LAPD frame size (only applicable to LAPD). Yes
1304) CAUTION
Each end of the DCC circuit must be provisioned
with the same LAPD frame size. Defaults on
different equipment types may be different.
L2 Side Role Automatic Displays the LAPD link mode (only applicable to No
LAPD).
Operation L2 Network, User, Displays the availability of L2 side role when adding No
Side Role Disconnected a DCC/GCC circuit (only applicable to LAPD).
FCS Mode 16 bit (default), 32 bit Sets the frame check sequence (FCS) mode. Only Yes
applicable to the PPP protocol when the carrier is
Section/RS or line/MS.
Network MCN (default) Indicates the communications network domain. No

Domain
IISIS parameters
Table 1-55 on page 1-262 provides a list of the IISIS Router parameters and
Table 1-56 on page 1-263 provides a list of the IISIS Circuit parameters.
IISIS Router parameters

The IISIS Router option has two tables.
• The upper Router table displays information about the IISIS router. Use
the Add button to add an IISIS router (only one allowed). Use the Delete
button to delete the existing IISIS router.
• The lower Redistribution table displays information about the redistribution
lists provisioned for the IISIS router. Use the Add button to add IISIS
redistribution list parameters. Use the Delete button to delete a
redistribution list.
ATTENTION
When re-adding an IISIS router, you must perform a cold restart of the shelf
processor (SP) for the changes to be implemented. The cold restart is not
required if adding the IISIS router for the first time.
Table 1-55

Editable
Router table
Router Level Level 1 Sets the IISIS router level. Level 2 not supported in this No
release, option is always disabled.
L1 Priority 1 to 127 Sets the level 1 router priority. The L1 router assigned Yes
(default 64) the highest priority becomes the L1 designated router
for that LAN segment.
L2 Priority 1 to 127 Sets the level 2 router priority. The L2 router assigned No
Not supported in this release, option is disabled.
Route On (default), Off Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On) are Yes
Summarization redistributed.
Redistribution table
Route OSPF Sets the IISIS router distribution list entries for the Yes
Redistribution/ Distribution, selected IISIS router.
List Static Distribution
(default)
IP Subnet Standard dot Sets the IP subnet address of the distribution list entry Yes
notation for the selected IISIS router.
Subnet Mask Standard dot Sets the subnet mask of the distribution list entry for the Yes
notation selected IISIS router.
Metric 1 to 63 Sets the metric (cost) of the distribution list entry for the Yes
selected IISIS router.
Metric Type External (default), Sets the metric type of the distribution list entry for the Yes
Internal selected IISIS router.
IISIS Circuit parameters

The IISIS Circuit option has a single table. Use the Add button to provision
new IISIS circuits and the Delete button to delete existing IISIS circuits. You
must create an IISIS circuit on each provisioned interface you want IISIS to
run on.
When provisioning both GCC0 and GCC1 with default IISIS metrics on a shelf,
Comms over GCC1 is preferred as opposed to GCC0.
Table 1-56
Parameters Options Description Addable/

Editable
Unit OCn/STMn/OTMn Displays the available ports for an IISIS circuit. Yes
ports OCn/STMn/OTMn ports are displayed in the
following format: OCn/STMn/OTMn-shelf-slot-port
Only OCn/STMn/OTMn ports with lower layer DCC/
GCC0/GCC1 provisioned are available for selection.
Carrier Section/RS, line/MS, Displays the DCC channel used, section/RS, line/ Yes
GCC0, GCC1 MS, GCC used, GCC0 or GCC1 (options available
depend on circuit pack type and function).
Circuit 1 to 63 Sets the circuit default metric used to calculate the Yes
Default best route. Default as follows:
Metric • OCn/STMn/OTMn ports with line/MS DCC/GCC0/
GCC1 provisioned: 5
• OCn/STMn ports with Section/RS DCC
provisioned: 6
Select a higher value for a slower circuit.


Editable
Level 2 Only On, Off (default) Sets the status of level 2 only routing on the IISIS No
circuit.
Not supported in this release, On option is always
disabled.
3 Way On, Off (default) Sets the status of 3-way handshaking on the IISIS No
Handshake circuit.
disabled.
Neighbour Off (default), IP, OSI, Select the override for the neighbour router protocols Yes
Protocols IP and OSI (overrides what the router advertises).
Supported Note 1: OSI is only valid if LAPD is selected.
Override
Note 2: When provisioning an IISIS circuit on an
ILAN port, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
supported override parameter is set to Off.
optical DCC port connected to OSI managed
network elements (for example, Optical Metro 3000
and Optical Metro 4000), you must ensure that
neighbour protocol supported override parameter is
set to OSI.
optical DCC port connected to another 6500 network
element, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
Note 5: The “IP” and “IP and OSI” options are not
supported.
OSPF parameters
Table 1-57 on page 1-265 provides a list of the OSPF Router parameters and
Table 1-58 on page 1-266 provides a list of the OSPF Circuit parameters.
OSPF Router parameters

The OSPF Router option has two tables.
• The upper Router table displays information about the OSPF router. Use
the Add button to add an OSPF router. Use the Delete button to delete an
existing OSPF router.
lists provisioned for the OSPF router. Use the Add button to add OSPF
Table 1-57

Editable
Router
OSPF Router Standard dot Sets the router ID for the OSPF. Yes
Id notation It is recommended that the SHELF address (if
provisioned) is used as the OSPF Router Id.
Link State External (default), Sets the type of link state announcement used. Yes
Router, Summary This parameter is not used and can be left at the
default value (External).
Route ON (default), OFF Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On) Yes
Summarization are redistributed.
Autonomous ON, OFF (default) Sets the autonomous system border router (ASBR). Yes
System Border ASBR identifies whether an OSPF router can accept
Router input (route redistribution) from another autonomous
system such as IISIS, or static routes.
Opaque Filter ON, OFF (default) Enables or disables the OSPF Opaque LSA Flooding Yes
Control (OOLFC). OOLFC reduces the number of
Type 11 opaque LSAs containing AR and TR records
in the OSPF database for 6500 shelf that is part of an
OSPF network. Cannot be set to ON if ODBR or
DBRS is ON. And vice versa.
Shelf IP ON, OFF (default) Enables or disables shelf IP redistribution. Shelf IP Yes
Redistribution redistribution provides the ability to redistribute a
route to the local shelf IP into all OSPF areas that the
local shelf participates in. All NEs in these
participating OSPF areas will install the received
route into their local IP routing table. Only supported
in OSPF networks without a backbone.
Redistribution
Route IISIS Distribution, Sets the origin of the route(s) to be redistributed. Yes
Redistribution/ Static Distribution
List (default)
IP Subnet Standard dot Sets the IP subnet address for redistribution. Yes
notation


Editable
Subnet Mask Standard dot Sets the subnet mask for redistribution. Yes
notation
Metric 1 to 65535 Sets the metric for redistribution. Yes
Metric Type External (default), Sets the metric type for redistribution. Yes
Internal
OSPF Circuit parameters

The OSPF Circuit option has two tables:
• The upper table displays information about the OSPF circuit. Use the Add
button to add an OSPF circuit. Use the Delete button to delete an existing
OSPF circuit.
• The lower Area List table displays information about the area lists
provisioned for the OSPF circuit.
Area lists are not supported in this release and the table will always be
empty. The area list fields and the Enter and Delete buttons on the Add
OSPF Circuit Parameters dialog box are disabled.
Table 1-58

Editable
Unit OCn/STMn/OTMn Displays the OCn/STMn/OTMn ports available for Yes

ports OSPF.
Carrier Section/RS, line/MS, Sets the DCC/GCC on the OCn/STMn/OTMn port Yes
GCC0, GCC1 for the OSPF circuit.
Only applicable to OCn/STMn/OTMn ports.
Network Area Standard dot notation Sets the area (defaults to backbone area of 0.0.0.0). Yes
Cost 1 to 65534 Sets the cost of the route (reflects speed of Yes
(default 10) interface). Defaults as follows:
• GCC0/1: 75
• section/RS DCC: 520
• line/MS DCC: 174
Area Default 1 to 16777215 Sets the cost of the route to the next area. No
Cost (default 1) Note: It is not supported in this release.


Editable
Dead Interval 1 to 65535 Sets the interval (in seconds) at which hello packets Yes
(default 40) must not be seen before neighbors declare the
router down.
Hello Interval 1 to 65535 Sets the interval (in seconds) between the hello Yes
(default 10) packets that the router sends on the interface.
Retransmit 1 to 3600 (default 5) Sets the interval (in seconds) required between link- No
Interval state advertisement retransmissions.
Note: It is not supported in this release.
Transmit 1 to 3600 (default 1) Sets the estimated time (in seconds) it takes to No
Delay transmit a link state update packet over this
interface.
Priority 0 to 255 (default 1) Sets the router priority value used in multi-access Yes
networks for the election of the designated router (0
indicates that router is not eligible to become
designated router).
Area Off (default), NSSA, Sets whether the router is in a not so stubby area Yes
Stub (NSSA) or stub area. NSSA and Stub not supported
in this release.
Opaque Link On (default), Off Sets whether opaque link state advertisement Yes
State performs on the OSPF circuit.
Advertisement
Passive OSPF On, Off (default) Determines whether OSPF adjacency loss should Yes
Circuit be detected. If set to On, OSPF adjacency loss will
be ignored.
Authentication Null (default), Simple Sets the authentication type. Null means no Yes
Type Password, MD5 authentication.
Simple string of up to 8 Sets the password if authentication type is simple Yes

Password characters password.
Status Accepting, Rejecting Displays the status of the simple password No

authentication.
MD5 Identifier 0 to 255 Sets the identifier for the first MD5 key. Must be Yes
1 unique on an OSPF interface.
MD5 Key 1 string of up to 16 Sets the password for the first MD5 key. Yes
characters


Editable
Status 1 Accepting, Rejecting Displays the status of the authentication using MD5 No
Key 1.
MD5 Identifier 0 to 255 Sets the identifier for the second MD5 key. Must be Yes
MD5 Key 2 string of up to 16 Sets the password for the second MD5 key. Yes
characters
Key 2.
Area List
IP Subnet Standard dot notation Sets the IP subnet address of the OSPF area. No
Not supported in this release, field is disabled.
Subnet Mask Standard dot notation Sets the subnet mask of the OSPF area. No
Result Displays the OPSF areas entered in the area list. Up No

to 10 OSPF area ranges can be configured.
Ring APS configuration editor parameters

Table 1-59 on page 1-269 details the parameters associated with the Ring
APS configuration editor application for BLSR/MS-SPRing rings for OC-
192/STM-64 facilities on 40G XCIF circuit packs.
Table 1-59
Ring APS configuration editor parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs

Configuration file A character string Displays the name of the configuration file associated with the
name currently displayed ring.
Ring name Up to 40 characters Sets the ring name. The name cannot include the backslash (\)
and double quote (“) characters.
Ring type 2 Fiber Sets the ring type.
Note: Only 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing is supported on
40G XCIF circuit packs.
View ordered as All the nodes in the Sets the order in which the nodes of the selected ring appear in
provisioned data ring the Nodes area. The connections are shown from the point of
on view of the node selected from the drop-down list, with the
selected node at the top of the Nodes area. If a node does not
have a node identifier, only the APS ID appears in the drop-
down list.
The second node is the node connected to the east facility. If
the facility AIDs is not specified for the first node, then the
second node can be any of the two nodes connected to the first
node (a warning message appears at the bottom of the window
indicating that the list of nodes may not correspond to the order
that will be used at provisioning time). Both AIDs must be
specified before the node can be considered for provisioning.
Nodes Displays a selectable graphical representation of the nodes
configured in the ring with their facility interconnections. The
nodes in the Nodes area are organized as set using the View
ordered as provisioned data on drop-down list.
The grey blocks in the center column of the Nodes area
represent the nodes in the ring. Each rectangular block includes
the node type, node name, and automatic protection switch
identifier (APS ID) associated with the protection group on the
node.
The facility identifiers for the facilities used by each node for ring
connectivity are depicted by white blocks on either side of node
and include the port orientation and facility identifier. The first
node in the Nodes area is connected to the last node.

Ring APS configuration editor parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs

Node type • DX Sets the node type.
• HDX
• OM3500
• 6100
• 6500
• Unknown
Node Up to 20 Sets the node name.
alphanumeric
characters
APS ID • 0 to 15 for 16- Sets the APS identifier.
node rings 24-node 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing configurations are
• 0 to 23 for 24- supported only on the following circuit packs: 1xOC-192/STM-
node rings 64 DWDM AM1/AM2, (2+8)xOC-n/STM-n (OC-192/STM-64
line rate only), and 40G XCIF.
24-node 4-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing/HERS configurations are
supported only at the OC-192/STM-64 line rate, and only on the
following circuit packs: 1xOC-192/STM-64 DWDM AM1/AM2
and (2+8)xOC-n/STM-n.
East facility Alphanumeric Sets the East facility (BLSR/MS-SPRing working member of a
linked to: string 2-fiber group) linked to the next node (appears on the right side
of node in Node area).
When there is no node in the configuration, the linked to: field
shows “Next node”.
Note: Applicable when the Ring type selected is 2 Fiber.
West facility Alphanumeric Sets the West facility (BLSR/MS-SPRing protection member of
linked to: string a 2-fiber group) linked to the “previous node” (appears on the
left side of node in Node area).
When there is no node in the configuration, the “linked to:” field
shows “Previous node”.
Note: Applicable when the Ring type selected is 2 Fiber.
Transponder connections parameters

The following tables detail the 40G and 40G ULH circuit pack parameters
associated with the Transponder Connections Site Manager application.
Table 1-60
Transponder Connections application parameters for 40G and 40G ULH circuit packs
Parameter Description
Connection ID The connection identifier string is used to identify a provisioned transponder

connection. The transponder connection ID can contain a maximum of 64
characters, with the exception of the \, “, and % characters.
This release only supports a connection identifier for:
• ODU2 connections on 40G MUX OCI circuit packs
• ODU3 connections on 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD,
40G UOCLD, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40/43G OCI, and 40G MUX OCI
circuit packs
Rate Select the rate as ODU3 for all 40G and 40G ULH circuit packs. (This is the
only connection rate supported on 40G and 40G ULH circuit packs when
manually adding connections.)
Type Select the connection type as 2WAY (Bidirectional) for all 40G and 40G ULH
circuit packs. (This is the only connection type supported on 40G and 40G ULH
circuit packs.)
From and To panels Select the Equipment and Facility for the From and To endpoints as
required. Refer to Table 1-61 on page 1-272 for details.
Table 1-61
Equipment and facility parameters for transponder connections for 40G and 40G ULH circuit
packs
Rate Equipment Facility/channel Parameter values
40G OCLD (C-Band and L-Band) and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs
ODU3 40GOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1 to 2 for 2-slot Optical
Type 2 shelf (40G OCLD C-Band
and L-Band only)
slot# = 1 to 7 for 7-slot shelf
(except in slots 7 and 8 of the 14-
slot packet-optical shelf)
slot# = 1 to 6 for 6500-7 packet-
optical shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and 31-
38 for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
40G UOCLD circuit packs
ODU3 40GUOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5 for 7-slot shelf
(MOTRs and non-mixed regens)
slot# = 2, 3, 5, 9, 10, 11, 13 for 14-
slot shelf (MOTRs and non-mixed
regens)
slot# = 2, 3, 5 for 6500-7 packet-
optical shelf (MOTRs and non-
mixed regens)
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14, 15,
17, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27, 31, 33, 34,
35, 37 for 32-slot shelf (MOTRs
and non-mixed regens)
port# = 1

packs
40G OCI and 40/43G OCI circuit packs
ODU3 40GOCI-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
optical shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and 31-
port# = 1
40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs
ODU3 PCFP-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
Type 2 shelf
optical shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and 31-
port# = 1
40G MUX OCI circuit packs
ODU3 40GMUX-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
Type 2 shelf
optical shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and 31-
port# = 100

packs
40G XCIF circuit packs
ODU3 40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
14-slot shelf when mated with
40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 9, and 14 for 14-slot
shelf when mated with
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
for 32-slot shelf when mated with
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33 and
38 for 32-slot shelf when mated
with 40G UOCLD
port# = 100
Path connections parameters

Table 1-62, Table 1-63, and Table 1-64 detail the 40G XCIF circuit pack
parameters associated with the Path Connections Site Manager application.
Table 1-62
Path Connections application parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs
Selectable parameters
Connection ID Enter the connection identifier string used to identify a provisioned path
connection. The path connection ID can contain a maximum of 64 characters,
with the exception of the \, “, and % characters.
Note: Support for 64 characters connection IDs is only supported from ONM
Release 6.0 onwards.
Rate Select the rate as defined as follows:

• SONET: STS1, STS3c, STS12c, STS24c, STS48c, or STS192c.
• SDH: VC3, VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, or VC4-64c
Type Select the type as defined as follows:

• 1WAY (Unidirectional)
• 1WAYPR (Unidirectional Path Ring)
• 2WAY (Bidirectional)
• 2WAYPR (Bidirectional Path Ring)
• 2WAYDPR (Dual Bidirectional Path Ring)
Refer to Table 1-63 on page 1-276.
From and To panels Select the Equipment and Facility for the From or To panels as required. Refer
to Table 1-64 on page 1-277.
BLSR/MSSPRing Select the starting endpoint (End NE A) and finishing endpoint (End NE Z) of the
Endpoints path for BLSR/MS-SPRing connections.
Note: Only applicable to OC-192/STM-64 ports.
Switch Mate Select the Switch Mate when creating 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYDPR
connections. Refer to Table 1-63 on page 1-276.
Destination Mate Select the Destination Mate when making 2WAYDPR connections. Refer to
The 2WAYDPR connection type is used for interconnecting UPSR/SNCP traffic.
The From and Switch Mate parameters apply to one UPSR/SNCP endpoint, and
the To and Destination Mate parameters apply to the other UPSR/SNCP
endpoint(s).

Path Connections application parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs
AU3 and/or AU4 For VC3 connection rates on SDH ports, you must select the type of connection
mapping radio mapping as AU3 or AU4 to determine the High Order container.
buttons
Timeslot numbers Each signal type requires that you assign a timeslot number to each parameter in
(STS/VC) that signal type. You must enter a time slot number for the STS/VC.
Site Manager automatically populates the available STS/VC parameter fields
when you select the Rate and Type.
Table 1-63
Path connection types for 40G XCIF circuit packs—supported From, To, Switch Mate, and
Destination Mate instances
Path connection type From, Switch Mate To, Destination Mate

1WAY OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
1WAYPR OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
2WAY OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
2WAYPR OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
2WAYDPR OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
Table 1-64
Equipment and facility parameters for path connections for 40G XCIF circuit packs
40G XCIF circuit packs (Note)
STS1/VC3 40GXCIF-shelf#- OC192-shelf#-slot#-port#- shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# sts# slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
STM64-shelf#-slot#-port#- 14-slot shelf when mated with
J#-K# 40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
and 38 for 32-slot shelf when
mated with 40G UOCLD
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1 to 192
J# (AU4) = 1 to 64
K# (TUG-3) = 1 to 3
STS3c/VC4 40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OC192-shelf#-slot#-port#- shelf# = 1 to 254
sts# slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
J# 40G OCLD or Wavelength-
Selective 40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 190
J# (AU4) = 1 to 64

STS12c/ 40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OC192-shelf#-slot#-port#- shelf# = 1 to 254
VC4-4c sts# slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
Selective 40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... ,181
J# (AU4) = 1, 5, 9, 13, ..., 61
Selective 40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 25, 49, 73, ..., 169
J# (AU4) = 1, 9, 17, 25, ..., 57

Selective 40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 49, 97, 145
J# (AU4) = 1, 17, 33, 49
STS192c/ 40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OC192-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
VC4-64c STM64-shelf#-slot#-port# slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
14-slot shelf when mated with
Selective 40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
Selective 40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
Note: For 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, you can provision channels (STS#/J#) 1 to 96 (SONET) or 1 to 32
(SDH) for OC-192/STM-64 facilities only as working channels. Channels 97 to 192 (SONET) or 33 to 64
(SDH) for OC-192/STM-64 facilities are protection channels or can be used to carry extra traffic.
2-1
OCLD (100G, WaveLogic 3, Flex2, Flex3)

and 100G (OCI, MUX, and OTR) circuit
packs 2-
This chapter provides an overview of the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500)

OCLD (WaveLogic 3, Flex2, Flex3), OCI, MUX, and OTR circuit packs and
their associated procedures. See Table 2-1 for different circuit packs covered
in this chapter.
Table 2-1
OCLD (WaveLogic 3, Flex2, Flex3), OCI, MUX, and OTR circuit packs in this
chapter
Topic Page
OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5, NTK539Ux, NTK539Bx, 2-2
NTK539Qx) circuit packs
100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5 and NTK529AC) 2-98
100G MUX circuit packs (NTK529BAE5 and NTK529BBE5) 2-137
100G MUX Multi-Protocol 2xQSFP+/2xSFP+ circuit packs 2-178
(NTK529EA)
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 C-band LR4 Multirate circuit packs 2-203
(NTK538Ux)
2-2 OCLD (100G, WaveLogic 3, Flex2, Flex3) and 100G (OCI, MUX, and OTR) circuit packs
OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5, NTK539Ux, NTK539Bx, NTK539Qx)

circuit packs
Overview
This release of 6500 supports the following variants of the OCLD circuit packs:
• eDC100G OCLD C-Band 1xOTU4 DWDM (NTK539TxE5) circuit packs
(also referred to as 100G OCLD circuit packs).
• 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band (NTK539Ux) circuit
packs (also referred to as 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
• Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band (NTK539Bx) circuit
packs (also referred to as Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
• Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band Type 2
(NTK539BN) circuit pack (also referred to as Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs).
• Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band (NTK539Qx)
circuit packs (also referred to as Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
The OCLD circuit packs are used to implement mapping/wrapping
functionality to a G.709 DWDM line and include a single 100G C-band tunable
OTU4 DWDM line interface.
Also the combination of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD

or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs and 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit
packs (NTK665AA) provides PKT/OTN mapping (OTU4 to ODU3, ODU2,
ODU2e, ODU1, or ODU0), (OTU4 to ODU2 to ODU1), and (OTU4 to ODU2 to
ODU0).
Table 2-2 on page 2-3 shows 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack variants and
some of their functions.
OCLD (100G, WaveLogic 3, Flex2, Flex3) and 100G (OCI, MUX, and OTR) circuit packs 2-3
Table 2-2
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs
Circuit pack variant PEC Reach PMD Mode of

operation
(Note 1)
100G OCLD circuit packs
eDC100G OCLD Enh PMD Extended Reach NTK539TJE5 1600+ Km 20 ps PMD DP-QPSK
C-Band 1xOTU4 DWDM (Note 2) limit
eDC100G OCLD Enh PMD C-Band 1xOTU4 NTK539TAE5 1000+ Km 20 ps PMD DP-QPSK
DWDM (Note 2) limit
eDC100G OCLD C-Band 1xOTU4 DWDM NTK539TBE5 1000+ Km 10 ps PMD DP-QPSK

limit
eDC100G OCLD Regional C-Band 1xOTU4 NTK539TCE5 up to 600 Km 8 ps PMD DP-QPSK

DWDM limit
eDC100G OCLD Metro C-Band 1xOTU4 NTK539TDE5 up to 300 Km 8 ps PMD DP-QPSK

DWDM limit
eDC100G OCLD Submarine C-Band 1xOTU4 NTK539TEE5 Submarine 20 ps PMD DP-QPSK

DWDM reach limit
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (Note 3)
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Enh PMD with NTK539UA up to 1800 Km 30 ps PMD DP-QPSK
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band limit
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Long Haul with NTK539UB application- 10 ps PMD DP-QPSK
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band specific reach limit
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Regional with NTK539UC up to 1000 Km 10 ps PMD DP-QPSK

EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band limit
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Metro with EDFA NTK539UD up to 300 Km 10 ps PMD DP-QPSK
1xOTU4 C-Band limit
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with NTK539UE Submarine 150 ps PMD DP-QPSK
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band reach limit
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Premium Long Haul NTK539UH application- 150 ps PMD DP-QPSK
with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band specific reach limit
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs

(Note 4, Note 5, and Note 6)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Long Haul with NTK539BB application- 10 ps PMD • DP-BPSK
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band specific reach limit • DP-QPSK
Table 2-2
circuit packs (continued)

operation
(Note 1)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with NTK539BE Submarine 150 ps PMD • DP-BPSK
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band reach limit • DP-QPSK
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Premium Long Haul NTK539BH application- 150 ps PMD • DP-BPSK
with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band specific reach limit • DP-QPSK
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with NTK539BN Submarine 150 ps PMD • DP-BPSK
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band Type 2 reach limit • DP-QPSK
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (Note 7, Note 8, and Note 9)
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Premium with NTK539QJ Premium 150 ps PMD • DP-BPSK
EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band Type 2 reach limit • DP-QPSK
• DP-16QAM
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Enhanced with NTK539QK Enhanced 150 ps PMD • DP-BPSK
EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band Type 2 reach (up to limit • DP-QPSK
1800 Km)
• DP-16QAM
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Standard with NTK539QL Standard 150 ps PMD • DP-QPSK
EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band Type 2 reach (up to limit • DP-16QAM
1000 Km)
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Basic with EDFA NTK539QM Basic reach 150 ps PMD • DP-QPSK
NxOTU4 C-Band Type 2 (up to 300 limit • DP-16QAM
Km)
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with NTK539QN Submarine 150 ps PMD • DP-BPSK
EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band Type 2 reach limit • DP-QPSK
• DP-16QAM
Table 2-2
circuit packs (continued)

operation
(Note 1)
Note 1: Modes of operation:

— DP-QPSK: Dual polarization (DP) quadrature phase-shift keying (QPSK)
— DP-BPSK: Dual polarization (DP) binary phase shift keying (BPSK)
— DP-16QAM: Dual polarization (DP)16 quadrature amplitude modulation (16QAM)
Note 2: The NTK539TJE5 is a high performance version of the NTK539TAE5 circuit pack providing in
excess of 50% increase in reach. The performance improvement comes from lower Rx OSNR and enhanced
system level control via sub-carrier power imbalance control to equalize performance of the two sub-carriers.
The control loop monitors the Rx for each sub-carrier and tries to achieve equal performance for both
sub-carriers by adjusting the Tx power of each of the sub-carriers.
Note 3: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux) support similar features provided by the
100G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5) and also provide increased reach, PMD robustness, higher shelf
density, lower latency, and colorless networking support.
Note 4: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx) support similar features provided by the
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux) and add the support for provisionable modulation
format allowing DP-QPSK and DP-BPSK modes of operation (versus 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
which only allow DP-QPSK mode of operation). Leveraging the extra coding gain of the Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD DP-BPSK modulation format, a line complex consisting of side-by-side mated Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs running in DP-BPSK modulation format is able to provide a 100G line (2x50G channels,
also referred to as 2C-BPSK) with distance reach beyond
6000 km for submarine and terrestrial applications.
Note 5: Two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with Equipment Profile set to 2xBPSK100G form a
100G 2C-BPSK Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit pack group to provide a 100G BPSK OCLD interface. The left slot
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack is called the Prime circuit pack, the right slot Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack is called the Member circuit pack.
Note 6: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx) only operate with Release 9.21 or later
software loads. The exception is NTK539BN where it only operates with Release 10.11 or later software
loads.
Note 7: N=1 when Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack is provisioned in DP-QPSK or DP-BPSK mode.
N=2 when Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack is provisioned in DP-16QAM mode.
Note 8: The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx) support similar features provided by the
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx) and add the support for an extra provisionable
modulation format allowing DP-QPSK, DP-BPSK, and DP-16QAM modes of operation (versus Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs which did not allow DP-16QAM mode of operation). Leveraging the
DP-16QAM modulation scheme, FLEX3 OCLD is able to provide 200G line interface, and together with
Ciena 100G client cards, the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can provide a rich metro/regional
solutions including but not limited to 200G MOTR, 200G OTR, 200G mixed clients, and 200G Regen services
for unprotected and protected configurations.
Note 9: The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx) only operate with Release 10.1 or later
software loads. The exception is NTK539QN where it only operates with Release 10.11 or later software
loads.
• Figure 2-1 on page 2-6 shows the faceplate of a 100G OCLD circuit pack.
• Figure 2-2 on page 2-7 shows the faceplate of a 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
• Figure 2-3 on page 2-8 shows the faceplate of a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
• Figure 2-4 on page 2-9 shows the faceplate of a Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
• Figure 2-5 on page 2-10 shows the functional block diagram of a
100G OCLD circuit pack.
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (NTK539Bx variants).
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (NTK539Qx variants).
Figure 2-1
100G OCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

eDC100G OCLD
Enh PMD C-Band
1xOTU4 DWDM

Yellow circle (LOS)

Figure 2-2
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Yellow circle (LOS)

Figure 2-3
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Yellow circle (LOS)

Figure 2-4
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Yellow circle (LOS)

Figure 2-5
100G OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539TxE5)
Left
Mate Transmit Line 100G E/O DP-QPSK
Mapper and Tx
Deskew Subsystem
Backplane
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Backplane
Interface
100G O/E
Receive DP-QPSK
Equalizer and Rx EDFA
Demapper Subsystem VOA
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Legend
EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
DP-QPSK Dual Polarization Quad Phase Shift Keying
Figure 2-6
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539Ux)
Left
Mate Transmit Line
100G E/O DP-QPSK Tx EDFA
Mapper and
Subsystem
Deskew
Backplane
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Backplane
Interface
100G O/E
Receive DP-QPSK
Equalizer and Balanced Pin
Demapper Coherent VOA
Rx Subsystem
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Legend
DP-QPSK Dual Polarization Quad Phase Shift Keying
Figure 2-7
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539Bx)
Left
Mate Transmit Line
E/O Flex2 Tx EDFA
Mapper and
Subsystem
Deskew
Backplane
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Backplane
Interface
O/E Flex2
Receive Balanced Pin
Equalizer and Coherent
Demapper Rx Subsystem VOA
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Legend
Figure 2-8
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539Qx)
Left
Mate Transmit Line
E/O Flex3 Tx EDFA
Mapper and
Subsystem
Deskew
Backplane
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Backplane
Interface
O/E Flex3
Receive Balanced Pin
Equalizer and Coherent
Demapper Rx Subsystem VOA
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Legend
Examples on Figure 2-9 on page 2-15 to Figure 2-25 on page 2-31 show
which configurations can be formed using 100G OCLD,
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs in conjunction with 10x10G MUX, 10x10GE MUX,
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 100GE OCI, 100G OCI, or another
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack:
• unprotected optical muxponders (unprotected 100G MOTRs,
200G MOTRs, or 200G mixed clients) for various service aggregations
(Figure 2-9 on page 2-15 to Figure 2-17 on page 2-23)
• unprotected optical transponders (100G OTRs, 200G OTRs, or
200G mixed clients) (Figure 2-18 on page 2-24 to Figure 2-20 on page
2-26) (not supported for Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs when mating with 100GE OCI
circuit packs)
• regenerators (Figure 2-21 on page 2-27 to Figure 2-23 on page 2-29)
• 1+1 TPT client-side protected optical muxponders
(protected 100G MOTRs) (Figure 2-24 on page 2-30)
• 1+1 TPT client-side protected optical transponders
(protected 100G OTRs) (Figure 2-25 on page 2-31)
Figure 2-9
100G MOTR configurations using 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with 10x10GE MUX circuit packs (Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in QPSK modulation format)
10G service aggregation GbE aggregation
Up to 10 times
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
10GbE LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
10x10GE MUX/
or
100G OCLD
10x10GE MUX/
or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
Various service aggregation
Up to 10 times
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in
QPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-10
100G MOTR configurations using Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs with 10x10GE MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack in BPSK modulation format)
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
OTU4 (prime)
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
10GbE LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
OTU4 (member)
OTU4 (member)
10x10GE MUX/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
10x10GE MUX/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 10x10GE MUX/
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
10x10GE MUX/ Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Up to 10 times OTU4 (prime)

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4 (member)
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
BPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-11
200G MOTR or 200G mixed clients configurations using Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
with 10x10GE MUX circuit packs (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in 16QAM modulation
format)
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4
10GbE
LAN PHY
10GbE LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4
10G Client
10G Client
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
OTU4
OTU4
10x10GE MUX/
10x10GE MUX/ Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ 10x10GE MUX
10x10GE MUX
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line
OTU4
10G Client
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4
10x10GE MUX/
10x10GE MUX
Note 1: The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in 16QAM modulation format.
Note 2: Mixed clients are also supported where the two 100G client circuit packs do not need to be
the same. For example, in above 3-card 200G configuration, one 100G client circuit pack
can be 10x10GE MUX circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10G MUX ,
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100G OCI circuit pack.
Figure 2-12
100G MOTR configurations using 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with 10x10G MUX circuit packs (Flex2
OTU2 (10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G),

Up to 10 times
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
10GbE WAN PHY,
10GbE LAN PHY,
10G Client
OC192/STM64,
FC800/FC1200
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
10x10G MUX/ 10x10G MUX/

100G OCLD
100G OCLD
or
or
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
or
or
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
or
or
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
10GbE LAN PHY, 2.5G/2.7G service aggregation

Various service aggregation OTU2 (10.7G),
or OTU2 (11.09G)
OTU4
Up to 10 times
Up to 10 times
(10.7G)
OTU2
OTU4
OC48/STM16/OTM1
G.709 OTU4 Line

10G Client
G.709 OTU4 Line
2.5G MOTR
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
10x10G MUX/ or
100G OCLD 10x10G MUX/
or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
10x10G MUX/ or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 10x10G MUX/
or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
10x10G MUX/ or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
2.5G or lower rate service aggregation
Up to 10 times
OTU4
OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
(10.7G)
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line

OC48/STM16, GbE,
100BT, 1000BT,
FC100/200/400
10G Client
SuperMux
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
Figure 2-13
packs with 10x10G MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack in BPSK modulation format)

OTU2 (10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G),
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
OTU4 (prime)
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
10GbE WAN PHY,
10GbE LAN PHY,
10G Client
OC192/STM64,
FC800/FC1200
10G Client
L2 MOTR
OTU4 (member)
GbE
OTU4 (member)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or or

or OTU2 (11.09G)
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
(10.7G)
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

OC48/STM16/OTM1
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
2.5G MOTR
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4 (member)
OTU4 (member)
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
or
or
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
(10.7G)
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

OC48/STM16, GbE,
100BT, 1000BT,
FC100/200/400
10G Client
SuperMux
OTU4 (member)
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
Figure 2-14
with 10x10G MUX circuit packs (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in 16QAM modulation
format)

OTU2 (10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G),
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4
10GbE
LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
OTU4
10GbE WAN PHY,
10GbE LAN PHY,
10G Client
OC192/STM64,
10G Client
FC800/FC1200
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
OTU4
OTU4
10x10G MUX/ 10x10GE MUX/

Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ Flex3 WaveLoic 3 OCLD/
10x10G MUX 10x10G MUX

or OTU2 (11.09G)
Up to 10 times
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

(10.7G)
OTU4
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line
OC48/STM16/OTM1
OTU4
10G Client
10G Client
2.5G MOTR
10G Client
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4
OTU4
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/ Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ 10x10G MUX
10x10G MUX
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

(10.7G)
OTU4
OTU2
OC48/STM16, GbE,
10G Client
10G Client
100BT, 1000BT,
FC100/200/400
SuperMux
OTU4
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX
can be 10x10G MUX circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10GE MUX ,
Figure 2-15
100G MOTR configurations using 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs (Flex2
10G and/or 40G service aggregation
10GbE LAN PHY
OTU4
10G and 40G Clients
G.709 OTU4 Line

40GbE LAN PHY
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX/

or
or
Figure 2-16
packs with 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in BPSK modulation format)
10GbE LAN PHY
OTU4 (prime)
10G and 40G Clients
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
OTU4 (member)
40GbE LAN PHY

or
Figure 2-17
with 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in 16QAM
modulation format)
10GbE LAN PHY
OTU4
10G and 40G Clients
10G and 40G Clients
G.709 OTU4 Line
40GbE LAN PHY
OTU4

100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX
can be 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10GE MUX,
10x10G MUX, or 100G OCI circuit pack.
Figure 2-18
100G OTR configurations using 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs (Flex2
Optical Transponder Optical Transponder

100GbE
100GbE
OTU4
OTU4
OTU4
100G Client (ETH100G)
100G Client (ETH100G

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

or OTU4)
100GE OCI/100G OCLD 100G OCI/100G OCLD
or or
100GE OCI/ 100G OCI/
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or
100G OCI/
or
100G OCI/
Note 1: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
cannot be mated with 100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G OTR.
must be in QPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-19
100G OTR configuration using Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
with 100G OCI circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
in BPSK modulation format)
Optical Transponder
OTU4 (prime)
100GbE
OTU4

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

or OTU4)
OTU4 (member)
100G OCI/
Flex2 WaveLogic3 OCLD/
Flex2 WaveLogic3 OCLD
or
100G OCI/
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be
in BPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-20
200G OTR or 200G mixed clients configuration using Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with
100G OCI circuit packs (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in 16QAM modulation format)
Optical Transponder
100GbE
100GbE

OTU4
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line
or OTU4)
or OTU4)
OTU4
100G OCI/
100G OCI
can be 100G OCI circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10G MUX
or 10x10GE MUX circuit pack.
Figure 2-21
100G Regen configurations using 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (QPSK mode), Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (QPSK mode), and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
Regenerator Some 10G signals

are passed through
OTU4
OTU4
using patch cords
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10G Client
10G Client
100G OCLD/100G OCLD
or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Other 10G signals
are added/dropped
or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Back-to-back 100G Regen with
or 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Note 1: Both G.709 OTU4 Lines in Back-to-Back 100G Regen configuration can be either
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
Note 2: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in
Figure 2-22
100G Regen configurations using 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (BPSK
mode) or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (BPSK mode) circuit packs
OTU4 (prime)
Regenerator
OTU4 (prime)
Regenerator
OTU4 (prime)
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4 (member)
OTU4 (member)
OTU4 (member)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK modulation format
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or
or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK modulation format
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
must be in BPSK modulation format. Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
Some 10G signals
are passed through
using patch cords
OTU4 (prime)
OTU4 (prime)
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10G Client
10G Client
OTU4 (member)
OTU4 (member)
Other 10G signals

are added/dropped
Back-to-back 100G Regen with

10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX
Note 1: The G.709 OTU4 Lines in Back-to-Back
100G Regen configuration must be
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
Note 2: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or

Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
must be in BPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-23
200G Regen configurations using Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
Regenerator
Regenerator
OTU4
OTU4
OTU4
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM modulation format/ Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK modulation format/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM modulation format Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM modulation format/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK modulation format
OTU4 (prime)
Regenerator
OTU4 (prime)
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4 (member)
OTU4
OTU4 (member)

Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM modulation format/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format
Figure 2-24
1+1 TPT client-side protected optical muxponders (protected 100G MOTRs)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or

100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD,
10x10G MUX
TPT
100G OCLD,
Note 2: For 1+1 TPT support, the working and protection OCLD circuit pack
must be the same (i.e. both must be either 100G OCLD,
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
Note 3: Refer to Part 2 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310
for more information.
Figure 2-25
1+1 TPT client-side protected optical transponders (protected 100G OTRs)

100G OCI
100G OCI
TPT
100G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5), 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Ux), Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx), and Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx) provide the following
functionality:
Line support
• one fixed OTU4 line interface (port 1) on 100G OCLD (NTK539TxE5),
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux), and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs (NTK539Bx)
• one fixed 1xOTU4 line interface (port 1) on Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs (NTK539Qx) when the circuit pack is on QPSK or BPSK
mode. One fixed 2xOTU4 line interface (port 1) on Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx) when the circuit pack is on 16QAM
mode.
• Coherent Optical Frequency Division Multiplexing (CoFDM) dual

polarization QPSK modulation for 100G OCLD circuit packs
(NTK539TxE5)
• WaveLogic 3 dual polarization (QPSK modulation) for 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux)
• WaveLogic 3 Flex2 (QPSK and BPSK modulations) for Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx)
• WaveLogic 3 Flex3 (QPSK, BPSK, and 16QAM modulations) for Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx)
1565.50 nm) for NTK539TxE5 variants
1566.72 nm) for NTK539Ux variants
1566.72 nm) for NTK539Bx variants
1566.72 nm) for NTK539Qx variants
• flexible grid support on the line interface OTM4 facility (applies to 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 (NTK539Bx), and
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx) circuit packs). This
allows the provisioning of OCLD transmitter frequency within 6.25 GHz
spacing when in Flex-grid mode. This feature is not supported for PTP
facility when the OCLD circuit pack is used in POTS mode.
• wide dynamic range receiver with automatic VOA and EDFA control on the
line interface receiver for 100G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5)
• wide dynamic range receiver with automatic VOA control on the line
interface receiver for 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux),
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx), and Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx)
• GCC0 data communication channels between Broadband interfaces
clocking is used)
• the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Bx), Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Qx) and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR (NTK538Ux) circuit packs do not interwork with any
variant of 100G OCLD (NTK539TxE5) circuit packs. Line interworking
between different OCLD variants are shown in the Table 2-3.
Table 2-3
Line interworking with 100G OCLD variant
100G OCLD
NTK539TA NTK539TB NTK539TC NTK539TD NTK539TE NTK539TJ
100G NTK539TA Same Partial Partial Partial No Partial

OCLD
NTK539TB Same Partial Partial No Partial
NTK539TC Same Partial No Partial
NTK539TD Same No Partial
NTK539TE Same No
NTK539TJ Same
Note: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance specification. For
Example, the NTK539TJ can interwork with the NTK539TD but the link will only support 8 ps mean DGD and the
reach will be limited to 300 Km.
• line interworking between different 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants are

shown in the Table 2-4.
Table 2-4
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux)
UA UB UC UD UE UH
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux) UA Same Partial Partial Partial No Partial
UB Same Partial Partial No Partial
UC Same Partial No Partial
UD Same No Partial
UE Same No
UH Same
Note: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance
specification. For Example, the NTK539UH can interwork with the NTK539UD but the link will only
support 10 ps mean DGD and the reach will be limited to 300 Km.
• Line interworking between different Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants are

shown in the Table 2-5 on page 2-34.
Table 2-5
Line interworking with Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD variant
NTK539BB NTK539BE NTK539BH NTK539BN
Flex2 NTK539BB Same No Partial No

WaveLogic 3
OCLD NTK539BE Same No Yes (Note 2)
NTK539BH Same No
NTK539BN Same
Note 1: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance
specification. For Example, the NTK539BH can interwork with the NTK539BB but the link will only
support 10 ps mean DGD.
Note 2: Sparing of NTK539BE by NTK539BN is only supported in pairs (2xNTK539BE can be spared
by 2xNTK539BN)
• for line interworking between 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and Flex2

WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants contact Ciena representative for more
information.
• line interworking between 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, and Flex3 OCLD variants are shown below.
Table 2-6
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Bx), and Flex3 OCLD (NTK539Qx) variant in QPSK mode
Tx UH UB UC UD UE BH BB BE BN QJ QK QL QM QN
Rx Note 2 Note 2
UH Yes Yes* Yes* Yes* No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No
UB Yes Yes* Yes* No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No
UC Yes Yes* No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No
UD Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No
UE Yes No No Yes No No No No No Yes
BH Yes Yes* No No Yes Yes No No No
BB Yes No No Yes Yes No No No
BE Yes Yes No No No No Yes
BN Yes No No No No No
QJ Yes Yes Yes* Yes* No
QK Yes Yes Yes No

Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Bx), and Flex3 OCLD (NTK539Qx) variant in QPSK mode
Tx UH UB UC UD UE BH BB BE BN QJ QK QL QM QN
Rx Note 2 Note 2
QL Yes Yes* No
QM Yes No
QN Yes
Note 1: “Yes* means that due to incompatible Tx power/PreCompensation/PMD/Reach or other factors, “Circuit
pack operational capability exceeded - reach violation” alarm or “Circuit pack operational capability exceeded -
PMD violation” alarm can be raised if the reach or the PMD tolerance limits are exceeded on the lower
performance circuit pack.
Note 2: The only QPSK encoding option on QL/QM in Site Manager is Soft Differential, which the UH/UB/UC/
UD/BH/BE do not support.
Table 2-7
Line interworking with Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539BX) and Flex3 OCLD (NTK539Qx)
variants in BPSK mode
Tx BH BB BE BN QJ QK QN
Rx
BH Yes Yes* No No Yes Yes No
BB Yes No No Yes Yes No
BE Yes Yes No No Yes
BN Yes No No No
QJ Yes Yes No
QK Yes No
QN Yes
Note 1: “Yes*” means that due to incompatible Tx power/PreCompensation/PMD/Reach or other

factors, “Circuit pack operational capability exceeded - reach violation” alarm or “Circuit pack operational
capability exceeded - PMD violation” alarm can be raised if the reach or the PMD tolerance limits are
exceeded on the lower performance circuit pack.
Note 2: Sparing of NTK539BE by NTK539BN in BPSK mode is only supported in pairs (2xNTK539BE
can be spared by 2xNTK539BN).
Table 2-8
Line interworking with Flex3 OCLD (NTK539Qx) variants in 16QAM mode
Tx QJ QK QL QM QN
Rx
QJ Yes Yes Yes Yes No
QK Yes Yes Yes No
QL Yes Yes No
QM Yes No
QN Yes
Note: “Yes*” means that due to incompatible Tx power/PreCompensation/PMD/Reach or other factors,

“Circuit pack operational capability exceeded - reach violation” alarm or “Circuit pack operational capability
exceeded - PMD violation” alarm can be raised if the reach or the PMD tolerance limits are exceeded on
the lower performance circuit pack.
Table 2-9
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR (NTK538Ux) variants in QPSK mode
Tx UJ UK UL UM UN
Rx
UJ Yes Yes* Yes* Yes* No
UK Yes Yes* Yes* No
UL Yes Yes* No
UM Yes No
UN Yes
Note: “Yes*” means that due to incompatible Tx power/PreCompensation/PMD/Reach or other

factors, “Circuit pack operational capability exceeded - reach violation” alarm or “Circuit pack
operational capability exceeded - PMD violation” alarm can be raised if the reach or the PMD tolerance
limits are exceeded on the lower performance circuit pack.
Table 2-10
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR (NTK538Ux) and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Ux) variant in QPSK mode
Tx 539UH 539UB 539UC 539UD 539UE 538UJ 538UK 538UL 538UM 538UN
Rx
539UH Yes Yes* Yes* Yes* No Yes Yes* No No No
539UB Yes Yes* Yes* No Yes Yes No No No
539UC Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No
539UD Yes No Yes Yes No No No
539UE Yes No No No No Yes
538UJ Yes Yes Yes Yes No
538UK Yes Yes Yes No
538UL Yes Yes No
538UM Yes No
538UN Yes
Note: “Yes*” means that due to incompatible Tx power/PreCompensation/PMD/Reach or other factors,

“Circuit pack operational capability exceeded - reach violation” alarm or “Circuit pack operational capability
exceeded - PMD violation” alarm can be raised if the reach or the PMD tolerance limits are exceeded on the
lower performance circuit pack.
Table 2-11
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR (NTK538Ux) and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Bx) variant in QPSK mode
Tx BH BB BE BN UJ UK UL UM UN
Rx
BH Yes Yes* No No Yes Yes* No No No
BB Yes No No Yes* Yes No No No
BE Yes Yes No No No No No
UJ Yes Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes
UK Yes Yes* Yes* No
UL Yes Yes* No

Rx
UM Yes No
UN Yes
Note: “Yes*” means that due to incompatible Tx power/PreCompensation/PMD/Reach or other

factors, “Circuit pack operational capability exceeded - reach violation” alarm or “Circuit pack
operational capability exceeded - PMD violation” alarm can be raised if the reach or the PMD tolerance
limits are exceeded on the lower performance circuit pack.
• 100 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs do not interwork with 100G OCLD
circuit packs.
• Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs do not interwork with 100G OCLD
circuit packs.
• Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs do not interwork with 100G OCLD
circuit packs.
• any variant of the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA circuit packs
(NTK539Ux) can be used in colorless systems.
• any variant of the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA circuit packs
(NTK539Bx) can be used in colorless systems.
• any variant of the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA circuit packs
(NTK539Qx) can be used in colorless systems.
• supports Short Term Optical Recovery Mechanism (STORM) for
NTK539Ux variants of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in colored
323-1851-310.
NTK539Bx variants of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (supported
for QPSK modulation format; not supported for BPSK modulation format)
in colored Photonic systems (not supported in Photonic colorless
systems) to enable fast signal recovery from short term outages. For more
information on STORM, refer to Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and
Operating, 323-1851-310.
NTK539Qx variants of Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (supported
for QPSK and 16QAM modulation formats; not supported for BPSK
modulation format) in colored Photonic systems (not supported in
Photonic colorless systems) to enable fast signal recovery from short term
outages. For more information on STORM, refer to Part 1 of Configuration
- Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.
• supports facility and terminal loopbacks on the line facility. Facility
(away from the loopback). Terminal loopback causes ODU LCK
conditioning to be sent out the line port. Terminal loopback is not
supported on the OTMC2 line facility on the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack in 16QAM mode.
ATTENTION
— The 100G OCLD can be carried over the following Photonic systems:
Ciena Common Photonic Layer Release 4.0 or higher, Ciena 6500
Photonic Layer Release 7.0 or higher, and foreign Photonic line systems.
The 100G OCLD is not compatible with the Common Photonic Layer
Filtered Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux (SCMD8) module (NTT861AA-
AH, AJ). The 100G OCLD over the 565, 5100 and 5200 Advanced
Services Platform is not supported in this release.
— The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD can be carried over the following
Photonic systems: Ciena Common Photonic Layer Release 5.0 or
higher, Ciena 6500 Photonic Layer Release 9.0 or higher, and foreign
Photonic line systems. The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD is not compatible
with the Common Photonic Layer Filtered Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux
(SCMD8) module (NTT861AA-AH, AJ). The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
over the 565, 5100 and 5200 Advanced Services Platform is not
— The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD can be carried over the following
Photonic line systems. The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD is not compatible
(SCMD8) module (NTT861AA-AH, AJ). The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
— The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD can be carried over the following
Photonic line systems. The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD is not compatible
(SCMD8) module (NTT861AA-AH, AJ). The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Table 2-12
100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
supported wavelengths (for 50 GHz C-Band spacing)
# (nm) # (nm) # (nm)
1 196.20 1527.99 0 30 194.75 1539.37 24 59 193.30 1550.92 53
(Note 1)
2 196.15 1528.38 0 31 194.70 1539.77 25 60 193.25 1551.32 54
(Note 1)
3 196.10 1528.77 93 32 194.65 1540.16 26 61 193.20 1551.72 55
4 196.05 1529.16 94 33 194.60 1540.56 27 62 193.15 1552.12 56
5 196.00 1529.55 95 34 194.55 1540.95 28 63 193.10 1552.52 57
6 195.95 1529.94 96 35 194.50 1541.35 29 64 193.05 1552.93 58
7 195.90 1530.33 1 36 194.45 1541.75 30 65 193.00 1553.33 59
8 195.85 1530.72 2 37 194.40 1542.14 31 66 192.95 1553.73 60
9 195.80 1531.12 3 38 194.35 1542.54 32 67 192.90 1554.13 61
10 195.75 1531.51 4 39 194.30 1542.94 33 68 192.85 1554.54 62
11 195.70 1531.90 5 40 194.25 1543.33 34 69 192.80 1554.94 63
12 195.65 1532.29 6 41 194.20 1543.73 35 70 192.75 1555.34 64
13 195.60 1532.68 7 42 194.15 1544.13 36 71 192.70 1555.75 65
14 195.55 1533.07 8 43 194.10 1544.53 37 72 192.65 1556.15 66
15 195.50 1533.47 9 44 194.05 1544.92 38 73 192.60 1556.55 67
16 195.45 1533.86 10 45 194.00 1545.32 39 74 192.55 1556.96 68
17 195.40 1534.25 11 46 193.95 1545.72 40 75 192.50 1557.36 69
18 195.35 1534.64 12 47 193.90 1546.12 41 76 192.45 1557.77 70
19 195.30 1535.04 13 48 193.85 1546.52 42 77 192.40 1558.17 71
20 195.25 1535.43 14 49 193.80 1546.92 43 78 192.35 1558.58 72
21 195.20 1535.82 15 50 193.75 1547.32 44 79 192.30 1558.98 73
22 195.15 1536.22 16 51 193.70 1547.72 45 80 192.25 1559.39 74
23 195.10 1536.61 17 52 193.65 1548.11 46 81 192.20 1559.79 75
24 195.05 1537.00 18 53 193.60 1548.51 47 82 192.15 1560.20 76
25 195.00 1537.40 19 54 193.55 1548.91 48 83 192.10 1560.61 77
26 194.95 1537.79 20 55 193.50 1549.32 49 84 192.05 1561.01 78
27 194.90 1538.19 21 56 193.45 1549.72 50 85 192.00 1561.42 79
28 194.85 1538.58 22 57 193.40 1550.12 51 86 191.95 1561.83 80
29 194.80 1538.98 23 58 193.35 1550.52 52 87 191.90 1562.23 81
Table 2-12
100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
supported wavelengths (for 50 GHz C-Band spacing) (continued)
# (nm) # (nm) # (nm)
88 191.85 1562.64 82 91 191.70 1563.86 85 94 191.55 1565.09 88
89 191.80 1563.05 83 92 191.65 1564.27 86 95 191.50 1565.50 89
90 191.75 1563.45 84 93 191.60 1564.68 87 96 191.45 1565.90 90
(Note 2)
97 191.40 1566.31 91
(Note 2)
98 191.35 1566.72 92
(Note 2)
Note 1: This wavelength is only applicable to 100G OCLD circuit packs (not applicable to
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
Note 2: This wavelength is only applicable to 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (not applicable to 100G OCLD circuit packs).
• for Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack

carrier skew management when in BPSK modulation format, the following
recommendations apply:
— wavelength offset between prime and member wavelengths must be
kept within 200 GHz to avoid a reduced reach impact due to the skew
introduced by accumulated relative dispersion of the wavelengths.
The default wavelength offset is 50 GHz between prime and member
wavelengths.
— fiber patch cords between the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs and the line mux/demux equipment,
including at any regens, must be matched in nominal length to
minimize skew. The 2x Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or 2xFlex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD BPSK carrier skew is eliminated at the offramp
client circuit pack. With <200 GHz wavelength offset between carriers
and nominally matched optical patch cords, the +/-2usec deskew
range of the client circuit pack can support >15,000 km fiber length of
the line fiber carrying both BPSK carriers. An alarm is provided on the
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in
BPSK modulation format to indicate when the client deskew range has
been exceeded by the two BPSK carriers. Also the deskew value is
reported for providing feedback regarding actions that improve the
skew.
• for Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (NTK539QN variant), 8D-2QAM

modulation is supported for additional system gain and robustness against
non-linear impairments, giving extra reach and/or capacity in submarine
and GeoMesh Deployments compared to BPSK. This modulation scheme
is enabled by selecting “XD differential encoding”.
Client support
There are no client ports on the 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
The 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs support the 2WAY (Bidirectional)
transponder cross-connection type. In addition, the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs support
the OTN cross-connection type when mated with the 100G PKT/OTN XCIF
circuit pack.
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs support the ODU4 transponder
cross-connection rate. In addition, the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs support the
OTN cross-connection rate when mated with the 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit
pack.
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs support the following monitored
entities:
Note: PMs are not supported on the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD and Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs when it is used as member card in
BPSK mode.
The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack additionally support the following
monitored entities:
• OTMC2 line interface
— PM collection for OTUC2 layer
— PM collection for OTUC2 layer

• ODU4 interface
— PM collection for Physical layer for OTM4 facilities
The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G

WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs support the following monitored entities
when mated with a 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit pack:

520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
• Circuit pack Operational Capability exceeded - reach violation
• Circuit pack Operational Capability exceeded - PMD violation
OTM facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Circuit Pack Unknown
• Loss of Channel
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Rx Channel Power Out Of Range
• OCH Link Data Retrieval In Progress
• OCH Link Data Save In Progress
• OTU Skew Out Of Range
• OTU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU BDI
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
OTM facility alarms (FLEX3 OCLD in QPSK, BPSK, or 16QAM)
• OTU Loss Of Signal
• OTU Loss Of Frame

• OTU Loss Of Clock
• OTU Loss Of Multiframe
• OTU TTI Mismatch
• OTU Loss of Channel
• OTU Skew Out of Range (BPSK mode only)
• ODU Signal Fail
• OTU BDI
• ODU AIS (only when the OTM4 is in protection scheme or is not
connected)
• ODU BDI (only when the OTM4 is in protection scheme or is not
connected)
• ODU LCK (only when the OTM4 is in protection scheme or is not
connected)
• ODU OCI (not for 16QAM)(only when the OTM4 is in protection scheme
or is not connected)
• GCC OSPF Adjacency Loss
• Frequency Provisioning Mismatch
PTP facility alarms

• Loss of Channel
Photonic alarms

Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs:
• 100G OCLD: occupies two slots (identified by the left-hand slot number of
the two occupied slots) and offers one 100G (OTU4) line port.
• 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD: occupies one slot and offers one 100G (OTU4)
line port.
• Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(in QPSK mode): occupies one slot and offers one 100G (OTU4) line port.
• Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs (in BPSK mode) or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
(in BPSK mode): occupy two slots and offer one 100G (OTU4) line port.
• Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM mode): occupy one slot and offer
2x100G (OTU4) line ports.
• can be equipped in the 14-slot converged optical, 14-slot packet-optical,
converged optical/front electrical, or 14-slot converged optical/rear
electrical shelf as shown in Table 2-13.
Note: Any mix of configurations is supported as long as there is no
overlap in equipped slots.
Table 2-13
allowable slots (14-slot shelf)
Configuration 10x10GE MUX 100GE OCI 100G OCLD 100G Flex2

or or WaveLogic 3 WaveLogic 3
10x10G MUX 100G OCI OCLD OCLD
or or
100G Flex3
(2xQSFP+/ WaveLogic 3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, Note 3, Note 4, Note 5, and Note 6)
100G MOTR
Unprotected optical 1 N/A 2/3 N/A N/A
muxponder with 10x10GE
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
MUX or 10x10G MUX to the
left of 100G OCLD 9 N/A 10/11 N/A N/A
12 N/A 13/14 N/A N/A
Unprotected optical 3 N/A N/A 4 N/A
muxponder with 100G
9 N/A N/A 10 N/A
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX,
10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G 13 N/A N/A 14 N/A
MUX to the left of 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Table 2-13
allowable slots (14-slot shelf) (continued)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 3 N/A N/A N/A 4
muxponder with 100G
9 N/A N/A N/A 10
10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G 13 N/A N/A N/A 14
MUX to the left of Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK
mode
Unprotected optical 4 N/A N/A N/A 5 and 6
muxponder with 100G
12 N/A N/A N/A 13 and 14
10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G
MUX to the left of two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK
mode
muxponder with 100G
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
MUX to the right of 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
muxponder with 100G
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
MUX to the right of Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3
mode
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
muxponder with 100G
11 N/A N/A N/A 9 and 10
MUX to the right of two Flex2
mode
100G OTR
Unprotected optical N/A 3/4 5/6 N/A N/A
transponder with 100GE OCI
N/A 9/10 11/12 N/A N/A
to the left of 100G OCLD
Unprotected optical N/A 1 2/3 N/A N/A
transponder with 100G OCI to
N/A 4 5/6 N/A N/A
the left of 100G OCLD
N/A 9 10/11 N/A N/A
N/A 12 13/14 N/A N/A
Unprotected optical N/A 4/5 N/A 6 N/A
N/A 12/13 N/A 14 N/A
to the left of
transponder with 100GE OCI (not (not
to the right of supported supported if
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD if using using version
version 1 of 1 of 14-slot
14-slot converged
converged shelves)
shelves)
N/A 10/11 N/A 9 N/A
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical N/A 3 N/A 4 N/A
N/A 9 N/A 10 N/A
the left of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD N/A 13 N/A 14 N/A
muxponder with 100G OCI to
N/A 6 N/A 5 N/A
the right of
Unprotected optical N/A 3 N/A N/A 4
N/A 9 N/A N/A 10
the left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 N/A 13 N/A N/A 14
OCLD in QPSK mode (see
Note 7)
N/A 6 N/A N/A 5
the right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 N/A 12 N/A N/A 11
Note 7)
Unprotected optical N/A 4 N/A N/A 5 and 6
N/A 12 N/A N/A 13 and 14
the left of two Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLDs or Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLDs in BPSK mode (see
Note 7)
N/A 11 N/A N/A 9 and 10
the right of two Flex2
mode (see Note 7)
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
200G MOTR, 200G OTR, or 200G mixed clients
Unprotected optical 200G 1 and 3 N/A N/A N/A 2
mixed clients with one Flex3
4 and 6 N/A N/A N/A 5
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM
mode between two 100G 9 and 11 N/A N/A N/A 10
clients (10x10GE MUX,
12 and 14 N/A N/A N/A 13
10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or N/A 1 and 3 N/A N/A 2
100G OCI)
N/A 4 and 6 N/A N/A 5
(see Note 7)
N/A 9 and 11 N/A N/A 10
N/A 12 and 14 N/A N/A 13
1 3 N/A N/A 2
4 6 N/A N/A 5
9 11 N/A N/A 10
12 14 N/A N/A 13
3 1 N/A N/A 2
6 4 N/A N/A 5
11 9 N/A N/A 10
14 12 N/A N/A 13
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G Regen
Regen with two100G OCLDs N/A N/A 3/4 and 5/6 N/A N/A
N/A N/A 9/10 and 11/ N/A N/A
12
Regen with two N/A N/A N/A 1 and 2 N/A
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
N/A N/A N/A 3 and 4 N/A
Regen with two N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 and 2
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or
N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 and 4
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
QPSK mode N/A N/A N/A N/A 5 and 6
Regen with a 100G OCLD to N/A N/A 4/5 6 N/A
the left of 100G WaveLogic 3
N/A N/A 12/13 14 N/A
OCLD
the right of 100G WaveLogic 3 (not (not
OCLD supported if supported if
using using version
14-slot converged
converged shelves)
shelves)
N/A N/A 10/11 9 N/A
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Regen with a Flex2 WaveLogic N/A N/A N/A 1 2
3 OCLD in QPSK mode to the
N/A N/A N/A 3 4
right of 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD N/A N/A N/A 5 6
N/A N/A N/A 9 10
N/A N/A N/A 11 12
N/A N/A N/A 13 14
Regen with a Flex2 WaveLogic N/A N/A N/A 2 1
3 OCLD in QPSK mode to the
N/A N/A N/A 4 3
left of 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD N/A N/A N/A 6 5
N/A N/A N/A 10 9
N/A N/A N/A 12 11
N/A N/A N/A 14 13
Regen with four N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 and 4
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or &
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in 5 and 6
BPSK mode
&
11 and 12
Regen with one N/A N/A N/A N/A 4
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or &
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 5 and 6
QPSK mode to the left of two
N/A N/A N/A N/A 12
&
13 and 14
BPSK mode
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Regen with one N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 and 2
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 3
QPSK mode to the right of two
&
11
BPSK mode
200G Regen
Regen with two Flex3 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 and 2
mode
Regen with one Flex3 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1, 2, and 3
N/A N/A N/A N/A 4, 5, and 6
mode between two
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in N/A N/A N/A N/A 9, 10, and 11
QPSK mode
N/A N/A N/A N/A 12, 13, and
14
Regen with one Flex3 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1, 2, 3, 4, and
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM 5
mode between four
N/A N/A N/A N/A 9, 10, 11, 12,
and 13
BPSK mode
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit
packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line applications only. However,
take note of the 1+1 TPT protection slotting rules in case you need to provision 1+1 TPT protection in the
future.
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Note 2: The following MOTR and mixed clients configurations are supported:
— 100G MOTR consists of:
– one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and one 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode), or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) circuit
pack.
– one 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack and one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode), or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) circuit pack.
– one 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and two Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
– two 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G MUX circuit packs and one Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM mode) circuit pack.
— 200G mixed clients consists of:
– two 100G clients that do not need to be the same; two 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE
MUX, 10x10G MUX, or 100G OCI client circuit packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM
mode) circuit pack.
Note 3: The following OTR configurations are supported:
— 100G OTR consists of:
– one 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack and one 100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) or Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) circuit pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) or Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
– two 100G OCI packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM mode) circuit pack.
mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Note 4: The following regen configurations are supported:
— 100G regen consists of:
– two 100G OCLD circuit packs, two 100G WaveLogic 3 circuit packs, two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 circuit
packs (in QPSK mode), or two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs (in QPSK mode).
– one 100G OCLD circuit pack and one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
– one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in QPSK
mode) or one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in QPSK mode).
– four Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs (in BPSK mode) or four Flex3 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs (in
BPSK mode).
– one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in QPSK mode) and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs (in BPSK mode).
– two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs (in 16QAM mode).
– two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (in QPSK mode) and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs (in 16QAM mode).
– four Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (in BPSK mode) and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Table 2-13

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Note 5: Mixing of different 100G and 200G groups (100G MOTR, 200G MOTR, 100G OTR, 200G OTR,
200G mixed clients, 200G Regen, and 100G Regen) is allowed and all 100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf
can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is adequately powered. However, for specific
feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and some or all of the
remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf power
capacity. Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider power
budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
Note 6: Slots 7 and 8 are excluded as there is no mate-to-mate tracking available to support the required
5.5 Gbps rate.
Note 7: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can only be mated with 100G OCI circuit packs
(NTK529AC) to form a 100G OTR. The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with
100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G OTR. The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
can only be mated with 100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AC) to form a 100G OTR or 200G OTR. The Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with 100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form
a 100G OTR or 200G OTR.
• can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in Table 2-14

on page 2-58.
Table 2-14
allowable slots (32-slot shelf)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, Note 3, Note 4, and Note 5)
100G MOTR
Unprotected optical
left of 100G OCLD:
Option 1 (see Note 6) 2 N/A 3/4 N/A N/A
6 N/A 7/8 N/A N/A
12 N/A 13/14 N/A N/A
16 N/A 17/18 N/A N/A
22 N/A 23/24 N/A N/A
26 N/A 27/28 N/A N/A
32 N/A 33/34 N/A N/A
36 N/A 37/38 N/A N/A
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
13 N/A 14/15 N/A N/A
16 N/A 17/18 N/A N/A
21 N/A 22/23 N/A N/A
24 N/A 25/26 N/A N/A
33 N/A 34/35 N/A N/A
36 N/A 37/38 N/A N/A
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
muxponder with 100G
7 N/A N/A 8 N/A
17 N/A N/A 18 N/A
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
23 N/A N/A 24 N/A
27 N/A N/A 28 N/A
33 N/A N/A 34 N/A
37 N/A N/A 38 N/A
muxponder with 100G
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
16 N/A N/A 15 N/A
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
22 N/A N/A 21 N/A
26 N/A N/A 25 N/A
32 N/A N/A 31 N/A
36 N/A N/A 35 N/A
muxponder with 100G
7 N/A N/A N/A 8
17 N/A N/A N/A 18
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 23 N/A N/A N/A 24
QPSK mode
27 N/A N/A N/A 28
33 N/A N/A N/A 34
37 N/A N/A N/A 38
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
muxponder with 100G
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
16 N/A N/A N/A 15
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode 22 N/A N/A N/A 21
26 N/A N/A N/A 25
32 N/A N/A N/A 31
36 N/A N/A N/A 35
muxponder with 100G
14 N/A N/A N/A 15 and 16
10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G 26 N/A N/A N/A 27 and 28
34 N/A N/A N/A 35 and 36
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
BPSK mode
muxponder with 100G
13 N/A N/A N/A 11 and 12
10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G 25 N/A N/A N/A 23 and 24
MUX to the right of two
33 N/A N/A N/A 31 and 32
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G OTR
transponder with 100GE
N/A 5/6 7/8 N/A N/A
OCI to the left of 100G
OCLD N/A 11/12 13/14 N/A N/A
N/A 15/16 17/18 N/A N/A
N/A 21/22 23/24 N/A N/A
N/A 25/26 27/28 N/A N/A
N/A 31/32 33/34 N/A N/A
N/A 35/36 37/38 N/A N/A
transponder with 100G OCI
N/A 4 5/6 N/A N/A
N/A 13 14/15 N/A N/A
N/A 16 17/18 N/A N/A
N/A 21 22/23 N/A N/A
N/A 24 25/26 N/A N/A
N/A 33 34/35 N/A N/A
N/A 36 37/38 N/A N/A
N/A 14/15 N/A 16 N/A
OCI to the left of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD N/A 26/27 N/A 28 N/A
N/A 34/35 N/A 36 N/A
N/A 12/13 N/A 11 N/A
OCI to the right of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD N/A 24/25 N/A 23 N/A
N/A 32/33 N/A 31 N/A
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
N/A 7 N/A 8 N/A
to the left of
N/A 17 N/A 18 N/A
N/A 23 N/A 24 N/A
N/A 27 N/A 28 N/A
N/A 33 N/A 34 N/A
N/A 37 N/A 38 N/A
N/A 6 N/A 5 N/A
to the right of
N/A 16 N/A 15 N/A
N/A 22 N/A 21 N/A
N/A 26 N/A 25 N/A
N/A 32 N/A 31 N/A
N/A 36 N/A 35 N/A
N/A 7 N/A N/A 8
to the left of
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD N/A 13 N/A N/A 14
N/A 17 N/A N/A 18
Note 8) N/A 23 N/A N/A 24
N/A 27 N/A N/A 28
N/A 33 N/A N/A 34
N/A 37 N/A N/A 38
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
N/A 6 N/A N/A 5
to the right of
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD N/A 12 N/A N/A 11
N/A 16 N/A N/A 15
Note 8) N/A 22 N/A N/A 21
N/A 26 N/A N/A 25
N/A 32 N/A N/A 31
N/A 36 N/A N/A 35
N/A 14 N/A N/A 15 and 16
to the left of two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or N/A 26 N/A N/A 27 and 28
N/A 34 N/A N/A 35 and 36
in BPSK mode (see Note 8)
N/A 13 N/A N/A 11 and 12
to the right of two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or N/A 25 N/A N/A 23 and 24
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
N/A 33 N/A N/A 31 and 32
BPSK mode (see Note 8)
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
16QAM mode between two 11 and 13 N/A N/A N/A 12
100G clients (10x10GE
14 and 16 N/A N/A N/A 15
MUX, 10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 23 and 25 N/A N/A N/A 24
or 100G OCI) (see Note 8)
26 and 28 N/A N/A N/A 27
31 and 33 N/A N/A N/A 32
34 and 36 N/A N/A N/A 35
N/A 11 and 13 N/A N/A 12
N/A 14 and 16 N/A N/A 15
N/A 23 and 25 N/A N/A 24
N/A 26 and 28 N/A N/A 27
N/A 31 and 33 N/A N/A 32
N/A 34 and 36 N/A N/A 35
3 5 N/A N/A 4
6 8 N/A N/A 7
11 13 N/A N/A 12
14 16 N/A N/A 15
23 25 N/A N/A 24
26 28 N/A N/A 27
31 33 N/A N/A 32
34 36 N/A N/A 35
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 200G 5 3 N/A N/A 4
8 6 N/A N/A 7
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
16QAM mode between two 13 11 N/A N/A 12
16 14 N/A N/A 15
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 25 23 N/A N/A 24
28 26 N/A N/A 27
(Continued)
33 31 N/A N/A 32
36 34 N/A N/A 35
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G Regen
Regen with two 100G N/A N/A 1/2 and 3/4 N/A N/A
OCLDs
N/A N/A 5/6 and 7/8 N/A N/A
N/A N/A 11/12 and N/A N/A
13/14
17/18
23/24
27/28
33/34
37/38
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
OCLDs in QPSK mode N/A N/A N/A N/A 5 and 6
the left of 100G WaveLogic
N/A N/A 14/15 16 N/A
3 OCLD
N/A N/A 26/27 28 N/A
N/A N/A 34/35 36 N/A
the right of 100G WaveLogic
N/A N/A 12/13 11 N/A
3 OCLD
N/A N/A 24/25 23 N/A
N/A N/A 32/33 31 N/A
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Regen with a Flex2 N/A N/A N/A 1 2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
N/A N/A N/A 3 4
QPSK mode to the right of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD N/A N/A N/A 5 6
N/A N/A N/A 7 8
N/A N/A N/A 11 12
N/A N/A N/A 13 14
N/A N/A N/A 15 16
N/A N/A N/A 17 18
N/A N/A N/A 21 22
N/A N/A N/A 23 24
N/A N/A N/A 25 26
N/A N/A N/A 27 28
N/A N/A N/A 31 32
N/A N/A N/A 33 34
N/A N/A N/A 35 36
N/A N/A N/A 37 38
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Regen with a Flex2 N/A N/A N/A 2 1
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
N/A N/A N/A 4 3
QPSK mode to the left of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD N/A N/A N/A 6 5
N/A N/A N/A 8 7
N/A N/A N/A 12 11
N/A N/A N/A 14 13
N/A N/A N/A 16 15
N/A N/A N/A 18 17
N/A N/A N/A 22 21
N/A N/A N/A 24 23
N/A N/A N/A 26 25
N/A N/A N/A 28 27
N/A N/A N/A 32 31
N/A N/A N/A 34 33
N/A N/A N/A 36 35
N/A N/A N/A 38 37
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs &
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 3 and 4
OCLDs in BPSK mode
&
7 and 8
&
13 and 14
&
17 and 18
&
23 and 24
&
27 and 28
&
33 and 34
&
37 and 38
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD &
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 7 and 8
OCLD in QPSK mode to the
N/A N/A N/A N/A 14
left of two Flex2 WaveLogic
&
3 OCLDs or Flex3
15 and 16
BPSK mode N/A N/A N/A N/A 26
&
27 and 28
N/A N/A N/A N/A 34
&
35 and 36
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD &
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 5
OCLD in QPSK mode to the
right of two Flex2
&
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or
13
in BPSK mode N/A N/A N/A N/A 23 and 24
&
25
&
33
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Regen with one N/A N/A N/A 3 4 and 5
and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
N/A N/A N/A 8 6 and 7
OCLDs in BPSK mode
N/A N/A N/A 11 12 and 13
N/A N/A N/A 16 14 and 15
N/A N/A N/A 23 24 and 25
N/A N/A N/A 28 26 and 27
N/A N/A N/A 31 32 and 33
N/A N/A N/A 36 34 and 35
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
200G Regen
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
16QAM mode
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
16QAM mode between two
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs N/A N/A N/A N/A 11, 12, and
in QPSK mode 13
16
25
28
33
36
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 8
16QAM mode between four
N/A N/A N/A N/A 11, 12, 13,
14, and 15
in BPSK mode
N/A N/A N/A N/A 24, 25, 26,
27, and 28
N/A N/A N/A N/A 31, 32, 33,
34, and 35
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100GE OCI/
100G OCI circuit packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line
applications only. However, take note of the 1+1 TPT protection slotting rules in case you need to
provision 1+1 TPT protection in the future.
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
– one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and one 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode), or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode)
circuit pack.
– two 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G MUX circuit packs and one
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM mode) circuit pack.
MUX, 10x10G MUX, or 100G OCI client circuit packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in
16QAM mode) circuit pack.
– one 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack and one 100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) circuit pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
MUX, 10x10G MUX, or 100G OCI client circuit packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in
16QAM mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
– two 100G OCLD circuit packs, two 100G WaveLogic 3 circuit packs, two Flex3 WaveLogic 3
circuit packs (in QPSK mode), or two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs (in QPSK mode).
– one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in
QPSK mode) or one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in QPSK mode).
BPSK mode).
– one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (in
BPSK mode) or two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (in BPSK mode).
Table 2-14

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
200G mixed clients, 200G Regen, and 100G Regen) is allowed and all 100G-capable slots in a 6500
shelf can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is adequately powered. However, for
specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and some or all of
the remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf power
Note 6: This configuration partitions the shelf into 4-slot ranges each of which can support a 100G
MOTR, 100G regen, or a 100G OTR. The 100G circuit pack group in each of these 4-slot ranges can
be changed (for example from a MOTR to a regen) without affecting any of the other 4-slot ranges in the
shelf. This slot usage allows the 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX to be the swapped out for a 100GE
OCI or 100G OCI without needing to move the existing 100G OCLD circuit packs. This slot usage also
allows the 100GE OCI or 100G OCI to be swapped out for a 100G OCLD without needing to move the
existing 100G OCLD if reconfiguring from 100G MOTR/100G OTR to 100G Regen.
Note 7: This configuration provides the maximum number of contiguous slots in the shelf (that is, slots
7-8, 11-12, 27-28, 31-32), available for other 6500 circuit pack groups (for example, a
100G MOTR/100G OTR group).
100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G OTR. The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs can only be mated with 100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AC) to form a 100G OTR or 200G OTR.
The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with 100GE OCI circuit packs
(NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G OTR or 200G OTR.
• can be equipped in the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf (NTK503RA) and

7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or NTK503KA) as shown in Table 2-15
on page 2-79.
Table 2-15
allowable slots (7-slot shelf and 6500-7 packet-optical shelf)
Configuration 10x10GE MUX 100GE 100G OCLD 100G Flex2

or OCI WaveLogic 3 WaveLogic 3
10x10G MUX or OCLD OCLD
or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G MOTR
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
MUX or 10x10G MUX below
100G OCLD
muxponder with 100G
MUX below 100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD
muxponder with 100G
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
MUX above 100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD
muxponder with 100G
MUX below Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
muxponder with 100G
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
MUX above Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
Table 2-15
allowable slots (7-slot shelf and 6500-7 packet-optical shelf) (continued)

or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
muxponder with 100G
MUX below two Flex2
mode
muxponder with 100G
MUX above two Flex2
mode
100G OTR
below 100G OCLD
N/A 4 5/6 N/A N/A
below 100G OCLD
below
above
Table 2-15

or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
below
N/A 6 N/A 5 N/A
above
below
QPSK mode (see Note 6)
N/A 6 N/A N/A 5
above
below two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode (see
Note 6)
above two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
Note 6)
Table 2-15

or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
mode between two 100G N/A 1 and 3 N/A N/A 2
10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 1 3 N/A N/A 2
100G OCI) (see Note 6)
4 6 N/A N/A 5
3 1 N/A N/A 2
6 4 N/A N/A 5
100G Regen
Regen with two 100G OCLDs N/A N/A 1/2 and 3/4 N/A N/A
QPSK mode N/A N/A N/A N/A 5 and 6
Regen with a 100G OCLD N/A N/A 4/5 6 N/A
below 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Regen with a 100G OCLD N/A N/A 2/3 1 N/A
above 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Regen with a 100G N/A N/A N/A 1 2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD below
N/A N/A N/A 3 4
QPSK mode N/A N/A N/A 5 6
Table 2-15

or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Regen with a 100G N/A N/A N/A 2 1
WaveLogic 3 OCL above
N/A N/A N/A 4 3
QPSK mode N/A N/A N/A 6 5
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or &
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in 3 and 4
BPSK mode
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 5 and 6
QPSK mode below two Flex2
mode
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 3
QPSK mode above two Flex2
mode
200G Regen
mode
mode between two
QPSK mode below
Table 2-15

or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM 5
mode between four
BPSK mode
Note: This regen
configuration is only supported
in 6500-7 shelf type
(NTK503RA) and not
supported in 7-slot shelf types
(NTK503PAE5 and
NTK503KA)
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit
future.
pack.
– two 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G MUX circuit packs and one Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM mode) circuit pack.
mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-15

or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) or Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) circuit pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) or Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-15

or 100G OCI or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
– two 100G OCLD circuit packs, two 100G WaveLogic 3 circuit packs, two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 circuit
packs (in QPSK mode), or two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs (in QPSK mode).
– one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in QPSK
mode) or one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in QPSK mode).
BPSK mode).
– Flex3 WaveLogic 3one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (in QPSK mode) and two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (in BPSK mode).
200G mixed clients, 200G Regen, and 100G Regen) is allowed and all 100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf
can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is adequately powered. However, for specific feeder
ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and some or all of the remaining slots
may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf power capacity. Before
equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider power budgeting and power
feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 8).
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with 100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form
a 100G OTR or 200G OTR.

• two 100G MOTR groups (10x10G MUX/100G OCLD or
10x10G MUX/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10G MUX/Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLD, or 10x10G MUX/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD) provisioned in
consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT:
— For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G OCLD circuit pack, the
mate 100G OCLD circuit pack must be provisioned in the adjacent slot
to the right. The valid protection group slots are described below:
– {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}
– {9, 10/11} and {12, 13/14}
– {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}
– {13, 14/15} and {16, 17/18}
– {21, 22/23} and {24, 25/26}
– {33, 34/35} and {36, 37/38}
c. in a 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf:
– {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}
— for 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack when in QPSK mode, the 10x10G MUX circuit packs must
be in between the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection
group slots are described below (o stands for 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack and m stands for 10x10G MUX circuit pack):
– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
– {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o}
– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
– {5o, 6m} and {7m, 8o}
– {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o}
– {15o, 16m} and {17m, 18o}
– {21o, 22m} and {23m, 24o}
– {25o, 26m} and {27m, 28o}
– {31o, 32m} and {33m, 34o}
– {35o, 36m} and {37m, 38o}

– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
ATTENTION
The slot positions of the circuit packs in a TPT configuration are not
interchangeable.
• two 100G OTR groups (100G OCI/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,

100G OCI/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or 100G OCI/Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD) provisioned in consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1
protection using TPT:
— for 100G OCI circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack when in QPSK mode, the 100G OCI circuit packs must be in
between the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection group
slots are described below (where o stands for 100G WaveLogic 3
pack and i stands for 100G OCI circuit pack):
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
– {11o, 12i} and {13i, 14o}
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
– {5o, 6i} and {7i, 8o}
– {11o, 12i} and {13i, 14o}
– {15o, 16i} and {17i, 18o}
– {21o, 22i} and {23i, 24o}
– {25o, 26i} and {27i, 28o}
– {31o, 32i} and {33i, 34o}
– {35o, 36i} and {37i, 38o}
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
Note: The slot positions of the circuit packs in a TPT configuration are not
interchangeable.
• the maximum number of back-to-back 100G OCLD/100G OCLD

regenerator sites is eight.
• the maximum number of back-to-back 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/100G

WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator sites is 16.
• the maximum number of back-to-back Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2
• the maximum number of back-to-back Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex3
• the maximum number of back-to-back 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD regenerator sites is 1.
• at a regen site and when the regen circuit packs are the same type, those
circuit packs can be mix of different ordering codes.
• any adjacent two-slot combination of (100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G
PKT/OTN XCIF) or (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF) is possible as long as 100G
PKT/OTN XCIF circuit pack is in even slot (for example, 100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack on left
side of 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit pack). The exception is slot 8 for the
14-slot shelf type, slot 8 for 6500-7 packet-optical shelf type, and slot 10
for the 32-slot shelf type. Adjacent three-slot combination of (Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK mode, Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK mode, 100G
PKT/OTN XCIF) is also supported.
• two 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs and two 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode)
circuit packs form a 100G TR protected group. The protection group circuit
packs provide
1+1 OTN protection with support from a PKT/OTN cross-connect circuit
pack where signals are exchanged between the (100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF) or (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF) pairs and the shelf PKT/OTN
cross-connect over the backplane. The valid protection group slots for
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD and 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs are described below:
– {1,2,3,4}
– {3,4,5,6}
– {9,10,11,12}
– {11,12,13,14}
– {1,2,3,4}
– {5,6,7,8}
– {11,12,13,14}
– {15,16,17,18}
– {21,22,23,24}
– {25,26,27,28}
– {31,32,33,34}
– {35,36,37,38}
– {1,2,3,4}
– {3,4,5,6}
The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs are equipped in odd slots and the 100G
PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even slots.
The working (100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF) or (Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF)
pair must be the two lower slot numbers of the 100G TR protected group.
The protection (100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF) or
(Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G PKT/OTN
XCIF) pair must be the two higher slot numbers of the 100G TR protected
group. Protection can be configured between ODU TTP or TCM TTP
facilities on working and protection 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs.
• two 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs and four Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs form a 100G
TR protected group. The protection group circuit packs provide 1+1 OTN
protection with support from a PKT/OTN cross-connect circuit pack where
signals are exchanged between the (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF) circuit packs and the shelf
PKT/OTN cross-connect over the backplane. The Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in between the
100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs. The valid protection group slots are
described below (where o stands for Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack and m stands for 100G PKT/OTN XCIF
circuit pack):
– {1m, 2o/3o/4o/5o, 6m}
– {9m, 10o/11o/12o/13o, 14m}
– {1m, 2o/3o/4o/5o, 6m}
– {13m, 14o/15o/16o/17o, 18m}
– {21m, 22o/23o/24o/25o, 26m}
– {33m, 34o/35o/36o/37o, 38m}
Protection can be configured between ODU TTP or TCM TTP facilities on

working and protection 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs.
• when equipping in a 14-slot shelf with front-exhaust fans (NTK507LDE5 or
NTK507LS) that is currently equipped with an air deflector grill
(NTK509FA/NTK509FAE6), the air deflector grill must be removed.
• when equipped in a shelf that is equipped in the same rack as one or more
other shelves configured for front exhaust, refer to “Front exhaust
considerations” in the Bay/rack configurations section in Part 1 of
Planning, NTRN10DB.
(NTK505YA).
• requires that the 6500 shelf is equipped with the
— SP-2 shelf processor (NTK555EAE5 or NTK555FAE5) for 32-slot shelf
types.
— SP-2 shelf processor (NTK555CAE5, NTK555EAE5, or
NTK555FAE5) for 14-slot, 7-slot, and 6500-7 shelf types.
— SPAP-2 w/2xOSC shelf processor (NTK555NA) for
7-slot optical Type 2 shelf type.
Otherwise the equipment does not provision.
Table 2-16 on page 2-92 lists the weight, power consumption, transmitter, and
receiver specifications for the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD optical interface circuit
packs.
Table 2-16
Technical specifications for 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD optical interface circuit packs (100G line interface)
Parameter 100G OCLD 100G WaveLogic 3 Flex2 WaveLogic 3 Flex3 WaveLogic 3

(NTK539TAE5/ OCLD (NTK539UA/ OCLD (NTK539BB/ OCLD (NTK539QJ/
NTK539TBE5/ NTK539UB/ NTK539BE/ NTK539QL/
NTK539TCE5/ NTK539UC/ NTK539BH/ NTK539QN/
NTK539TDE5/ NTK539UD/ NTK539BN) NTK539QK/
NTK539TEE5/ NTK539UE/ NTK539QM)
NTK539TJE5) NTK539UH)
Weight (estimated) 2.9 kg (6.4 lb) 1.9 kg (4.1 lb) 1.9 kg (4.1 lb) 2.0 kg (4.5 lb)
except for
NTK539BN
2.0 kg (4.5 lb) for
NTK539BN
Power consumption Typical (W): 285 Typical (W): 170 Typical (W): 185 Typical (W): 200
(see Note 1) (see Note 1) (see Note 1) (see Note 1 and
Power Budget Power Budget (W): Power Budget (W): Note 4)
(W): 316 (see 191 (see Note 2) 203 (see Note 2 and Power Budget (W):
Note 2 and Note 3) 215 (see Note 2 and
Note 6) Note 5)
Transmitter
Connector type LC LC LC LC
Laser modulation eDC100 CoFDM WaveLogic 3 dual • WaveLogic 3 dual • WaveLogic 3 dual
dual-polarization polarization QPSK polarization QPSK polarization QPSK
QPSK modulation modulation modulation modulation
• WaveLogic 3 dual • WaveLogic 3 dual
polarization BPSK polarization BPSK
modulation modulation
• WaveLogic 3 dual
polarization
16QAM
modulation
Laser spectral width < 1 MHz < 1 MHz < 1 MHz < 1 MHz
Table 2-16
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD optical interface circuit packs (100G line interface) (continued)

Line rate 116.4 Gbit/s 137.85 Gbit/s • 137.85 Gbit/s • 137.85 Gbit/s
(carried as 14.55 (carried as 34.46 (carried as 34.46 (carried as 34.46
Gbaud CoFDM Gbaud dual Gbaud dual Gbaud dual
dual-polarization polarized QPSK) polarized QPSK) polarized QPSK)
QPSK) • 69.21 Gbit/s • 69.21 Gbit/s
(carried as 34.61 (carried as 34.61
Gbaud dual Gbaud dual
polarized BPSK) polarized BPSK)
• 275.50 Gbits/s
(carried as 34.46
Gbaud dual
polarization
16QAM)
Tunable wavelength 1527.99 nm to 1528.77 nm to 1528.77 nm to 1528.77 nm to
range 1565.50 nm 1566.72 nm 1566.72 nm 1566.72 nm
(see Table 2-12 (see Table 2-12 on (see Table 2-12 on (see Table 2-12 on
on page 2-41 for page 2-41 for a list page 2-41 for a list page 2-41 for a list
a list of supported of supported of supported of supported
wavelengths) wavelengths) wavelengths) wavelengths)
Tunable wavelength 50 GHz 50 GHz 50 GHz 50 GHz
spacing
Central wavelength +/- 2.5 GHz +/- 2.5 GHz +/- 2.5 GHz +/- 2.5 GHz
accuracy
Transmit output power • -11 to -1 dBm for • -11 to +4 dBm for • -11 to +4 dBm for -11 to +4 dBm for all
NTK539TAE5, all variants all variants variants
NTK539TBE5,
NTK539TCE5,
NTK539TDE5,
NTK539TEE5
variants
• -11 to -2 dBm for
NTK539TJE5
variant
Tx power monitor +/- 0.8 dB +/- 0.8 dB +/- 0.8 dB +/- 0.8 dB
accuracy
Table 2-16

Receiver
Receiver type Pin Coherent Balanced Pin Balanced Pin Balanced Pin
Coherent Coherent Coherent
Connector type LC LC LC LC
Receiver Back-to- -26 dBm (see -28 dBm (per -28 dBm (per -28 dBm (per
Back sensitivity Note 8) channel) (see channel) (see channel) (see
(minimum EOL) (see Note 9 and Note 10) Note 9 and Note 10) Note 9 and Note 10)
Note 7)
Loss of Signal Alarm -29 dBm -28 dBm -28 dBm (for all -28 dBm (for all
Clear modulation formats) modulation formats)
Loss of Channel Alarm N/A -27 dBm -27 dBm (for all -27 dBm (for all
Clear modulation formats) modulation formats)
Receiver overload +7 dBm +5 dBm (per +5 dBm (per +5 dBm (per
(see Note 11) channel) (see Note channel) (see Note channel) (see Note
10 and Note 12) 10 and Note 12) 10 and Note 12)
+5 dBm (total +5 dBm (total +5 dBm (total
power) (see Note 10 power) (see Note 10 power) (see Note 10
and Note 13) and Note 13) and Note 13)
Receiver damage +16 dBm +17 dBm (total +17 dBm (total +17 dBm (total
level power) (see Note power) (see Note power) (see Note
10) 10) 10)
Rx power monitor +/- 0.5 dB at +/- 0.5 dB (total +/- 0.5 dB (total +/- 0.5 dB (total
accuracy power levels >= - power) at power power) at power power) at power
10 dBm levels >= -10 dBm levels >= -10 dBm levels >= -10 dBm
FEC coding gain at 9.2 dB (using 11.7 dB (using 11.7 dB (using 11.7 dB (using
1E-15 Ciena proprietary Ciena proprietary Ciena proprietary Ciena proprietary
FEC) FEC) (see Note 14) FEC) (see Note 14) FEC) (see Note 14)
Table 2-16

Polarization Mode • 20 ps [mean • 150 ps [mean • 150 ps [mean 150 ps [mean DGD]
Dispersion (PMD) DGD] for DGD] for DGD] for for all variants
tolerance NTK539TAE5 NTK539UE, NTK539BE,
• 20 ps [mean NTK539UH NTK539BH,
DGD] for • 30 ps [mean DGD] NTK539BN
NTK539TJE5 for NTK539UA • 10 ps [mean DGD]
• 10 ps [mean • 10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539BB
DGD] for for NTK539UB,
NTK539TBE5 NTK539UC,
• 8 ps [mean NTK539UD
DGD] for
NTK539TCE5
• 8 ps [mean
DGD] for
NTK539TDE5
• 20 ps [mean
DGD] for
NTK539TEE5
Polarization 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB
dependent loss (PDL)
ROADM support Up to 10 Up to 16 (estimate) Up to 16 (estimate) Up to 16 (estimate)
(estimate)
Chromatic dispersion +/- 32000 ps/nm • +/- 80000 ps/nm • +/- 80000 ps/nm • - 90000 ps/nm to
tolerance for NTK539UB, except for +135000 for
NTK539UE, NTK539BN NTK539QJ
NTK539UH • - 90000 ps/nm to • +/- 90000 ps/nm
• +/- 40000 ps/nm +280000 for for NTK539QK
for NTK539UA, NTK539BN • +/- 50000 ps/nm
NTK539UC, for NTK539QL,
NTK539UD NTK539QM
• - 90000 ps/nm to
+280000 for
NTK539QN
Table 2-16

Reach (see Note 15) • 1000+ km for • Up to 1800 km for Application-specific • Up to 1800 km for
NTK539TAE5 NTK539UA NTK539QK
• 1600+ km for • Application- • Up to 1000 km for
NTK539TJE5 specific for NTK539QL
• 1000+ km for NTK539UB, • Up to 300 km for
NTK539TBE5 NTK539UH NTK539QM
• Up to 600 km for • Submarine reach • Application-
NTK539TCE5 for NTK539UE specific for
• Up to 300 km for • Up to 1000 km for NTK539QJ
NTK539TDE5 NTK539UC • Submarine reach
• Submarine • Up to 300 km for NTK539QN
reach for NTK539UD
NTK539TEE5
Note 1: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature of 25 (+/
-3oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V).
temperature range from 5oC to 40oC at a voltage of 40 V dc (+/-2.5 V). These values must be used in sizing
feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.
Note 3: For NTK539BN circuit pack in release 10.11, the shelf processor uses 225W as the power budget
when reporting the “Calculated shelf power” and “Calculated shelf zone power” parameters.
Note 4: The typical power for this circuit pack is based on a 200G configuration in DP-16QAM mode. For all
other modes of operation, typical power is 178W.
Note 5: For this circuit pack in release 10.1, the shelf processor uses 210W as the power budget when
reporting the “Calculated shelf power” and “Calculated shelf zone power” parameters.
Note 6: This circuit pack occupies two slots in the shelf and half the power is drawn from each slot. In a 32-
slot shelf, the software assumes that the power budget applies to the zone associated with the left-most slot
even if the circuit pack occupies two slots which are in different power zones.
Note 7: Back-to-back sensitivity is defined as the Rx power for which the FEC BER threshold is not
exceeded in Tx-to-Rx fiber loopback through fiber patch cords <10m total length and a variable optical
attentuator (VOA), where Tx precompensation = 0 ps/nm.
Note 8: The minimum received power level is -28 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Table 2-16

Note 9: The minimum per channel received power level is -28 dBm which does not take into account any
Rx power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 10: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One for total
input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when, connected to the CCMD12 or
CCMD8x16 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]) and one for channel input power (the channel
corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). When the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD is used in
colored Photonic systems, the two 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Rx interface detectors see similar power levels.
In colored line systems, the total input power monitor is the preferred monitor for channel power since it is
more accurate.
Note 11: The maximum received power level is +7.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Note 12: The maximum per channel received power level is +5 dBm, which does not take into account any
Rx power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 13: The maximum received power level is +5.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Note 14: FEC coding gain is 11.7 dB when the OTM4 facility Performance Optimized Mode parameter is set
to OptimizationMode1 (for best reach performance). FEC coding gain is 11.1 dB when the OTM4 facility
Performance Optimized Mode parameter is set to OptimizationMode2 (for best latency).
Note 15: Maximum allowed reach is subject to appropriate link engineering analysis. You must follow the
normal link engineering rules.
Latency
Refer to the following tables for 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD latency values:
100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5 and NTK529AC)

Overview
This release of 6500 supports two variants of the 100G OCI circuit packs:
• 100G OCI 100GE 1xCFP (NTK529AAE5) circuit pack (also referred to as
100GE OCI)
The 100GE OCI circuit pack must be equipped with a 100G CFP based
client interface that support ETH100G (100GBASE-R). The CFP module
has a larger form-factor than a SFP, SFP+, or XFP module and supports
much higher data rates.
The 100GE OCI circuit pack is used to transparently map a 100GE client
onto an adjacent 100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD line interface
circuit pack (OPU4/ODU4 frame interface) at 104.8 Gbit/s via the
backplane.
Figure 2-26 shows the faceplate of a 100GE OCI circuit pack and Figure
2-27 shows the functional block diagram of a 100GE OCI circuit pack.
Figure 2-26
100GE OCI circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

100G OCI
100GE
1xCFP - Card not failed = LED off, Card failed = LED on
Fail
Ready
In Use

T
1
R
Yellow circle (LOS)

1
Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 2-27
100GE OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529AAE5)
Left
Mate
Backplane
OTU4 PHY
Backplane Mapper 100G CFP 1
Interface
Right
Mate

Module Supply
Legend
PHY Physical layer adapter
As shown in Figure 2-28 on page 2-100, 100GE OCI and 100G OCLD or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can form an optical transponder (100G
OTR).
Figure 2-28
100GE OCI circuit packs functions (100G OTR)
Optical Transponder
100GbE
OTU4
100G Client (ETH100G)
G.709 OTU4 Line

100GE OCI/100G OCLD
or
100GE OCI/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
• 100G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP (NTK529AC) circuit pack (also referred to

as 100G OCI)
The 100G OCI circuit pack is equipped with a 100G CFP based client
interface that support ETH100G or OTU4 (100GBASE-R or OTU4). The
CFP module has a larger form-factor than a SFP, SFP+, or XFP module
and supports much higher data rates.
— The 100G OCI circuit pack is used to transparently map a 100GE
client onto an adjacent 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD line interface
circuit pack (OPU4/ODU4 frame interface) at 104.8 Gbit/s via the
backplane. Unlike 100GE OCI circuit pack, the 100G OCI circuit pack
can also support OTU4 client rate. This is called an OTR configuration.
— A 100G OCI circuit pack can be also used for network interface
between a 10G network (Ethernet/OTN/etc.) and a 100G OTN network
via interworking with a 10x10G MUX circuit pack where
– an OTM4 facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the
100G OCI circuit pack and various 10G services (all client
protocols and mappings supported by the 10x10G MUX OCI) are
provisioned on the client port of the 10x10G MUX circuit pack
(network interface between a 10G service network and a
configuration.
— A 100G OCI circuit pack can be also used for network interface
between 100G networks (Ethernet/OTN/etc.) via interworking with
another 100G OCI circuit pack where
– an ETH100G facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the
first 100G OCI circuit pack and an OTM4 facility is provisioned on
the CFP client port of the second 100G OCI circuit pack (network
interface between a 100G Ethernet network and a
configuration.
– an OTM4 facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the first
100G OCI circuit pack and another OTM4 facility is provisioned on
the CFP client port of the second 100G OCI circuit pack (network
interface between two 100G OTN networks). This is called a 100G
client card back-to-back configuration.
– an ETH100G facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the
first 100G OCI circuit pack and another ETH100G facility is
provisioned on the CFP client port of the second 100G OCI circuit
pack (network interface between two 100G Ethernet networks).
This is called a 100G client card back-to-back configuration.
— The combination of a 100G OCI circuit pack and a
100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK665AA) provides PKT/OTN
mapping (OTU4 to ODU3, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1, or ODU0).
Figure 2-29 on page 2-102 shows the faceplate of a 100G OCI circuit pack
and Figure 2-30 on page 2-103 shows the functional block diagram of a
100G OCI circuit pack.
Figure 2-29
100G OCI circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)

100G OCI
Multi-Protocol
1xCFP
Fail
Ready
In Use

T
1
R
Yellow circle (LOS)

1
Hazard
level:
R99
EEEEE99999
S/N NT030MEE9999E
NTUD99EE
Type A
Figure 2-30
100G OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529AC)
Left
Mate
Backplane
OTU4
Backplane 100G CFP 1
Mapper
Interface
Right
Mate

Module Supply
As shown in the following figures:

• 100G OCI and 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can
form an optical transponder (100G OTR, 200G OTRs, or 200G mixed
clients) (see Figure 2-31 on page 2-104 to Figure 2-33 on page 2-106).
• 100G OCI and 10x10G MUX circuit packs can form a 100G client card
back-to-back configuration (see Figure 2-34 on page 2-106).
• 100G OCI circuit packs can form 100G TPT protected OTR groups (see
Figure 2-31
100G OCI circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack in QPSK modulation format) (100G OTR)
Optical Transponder
100GbE
OTU4
OTU4

G.709 OTU4 Line
or OTU4)
100G OCI/100G OCLD
or
100G OCI/
100G WaveLogic3 OCLD
or
100G OCI/
or
100G OCI/
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must be
in QPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-32
100G OCI circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack in BPSK modulation format) (100G OTR)
Optical Transponder
OTU4 (prime)
100GbE
OTU4

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

or OTU4)
OTU4 (member)
100G OCI/
or
100G OCI/
in BPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-33
100G OCI clients circuit packs functions (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in 16QAM
modulation format) (200G OTR or 200G mixed clients)
Optical Transponder
100GbE
100GbE

OTU4
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line
or OTU4)
or OTU4)
OTU4
100G OCI/
100G OCI
can be 100G OCI circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10G MUX
or 10x10GE MUX circuit pack.
Figure 2-34
100G OCI circuit packs functions (100G client card back-to-back configuration)
100G client card back-to-back configurations

(NTK529BBE5)
10x10G MUX
(NTK529AC)
(NTK529AC)
(NTK529AC)
100G OCI
100G OCI
100G OCI
Figure 2-35
1+1 TPT client-side protected optical transponders (protected 100G OTRs)

100G OCI
100G OCI
TPT
The 100GE OCI circuit pack (NTK529AAE5) and 100G OCI (NTK529AC)
circuit pack provide the following functionality:
Line support
In transponder applications, there are no line ports on the 100GE OCI or
100G OCI circuit pack. A virtual aggregate OTM4 facility (port 1) is
automatically provisioned on the circuit pack when the client is ETH100G. The
OTM4 facility can be used as line or add/drop port in OTN switching and OTN
Control Plane applications when the NTK529AC circuit pack is mated with
100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit pack.
Client support
• one 100GE (ETH100G) CFP client interface (port 1) on 100GE OCI circuit
pack supporting ETH100G client rate.
— one 100GE (ETH100G/OTM4) CFP client interface (port 1) on 100G
OCI circuit pack supporting the following client rates:
– 100GBASE-R (103.125 Gbit/s)
– OTU4 (111.8 Gbit/s)
• a virtual OTM4 mapping facility is auto-created (virtual port 1) when
ETH100G client is provisioned
• same form and fit as 100G OCLD, all physical attributes (including LEDs)
are at parity with 100G OCLD
• facilitates client-side interworking at ETH100G/OTM4 signal rates
• when 100G OCI (NTK529AC) is mated with the 100G PKT/OTN XCIF
circuit pack, the 100G OCI supports a pluggable CFP OTM4 client
interface (port 1) offering 100 Gbit/s rate to facilitate client-side or line-side
interworking at OTU4 signal rate. The following PKT/OTN mappings are
supported for OTN switching applications:
— OTU4 to ODU3, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1, or ODU0
• full transparency for ETH100G clients
— ODU4 transparency on the OTU4 client of the 100G OCI circuit pack
variant
• 100GE OCI circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its
ETH100G client facility. Facility loopback causes ODU LCK conditioning to
be sent towards the backplane (away from the loopback). Terminal
loopback on the 100GE OCI turns off the transmit laser.
• 100G OCI circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its client
facility (ETH100G or OTM4). Facility loopback causes ODU LCK
conditioning to be sent towards the backplane (away from the loopback).
Terminal loopback on the 100G OCI turns off the transmit laser.
• GCC1/GCC0 data communications channels between 100GE OCI and/or
100G OCI OTM4 mapping facilities
— supports client side GCC0 data communications channels on the
100G OCI circuit pack variant when it is provisioned for ETH100G
client
— interworking between 100GE OCI circuit pack variant and 100G OCI
circuit pack variant is supported if the client port in 100G OCI circuit
pack variant is also provisioned as ETH100G

clocking is used)
• client protocols and mappings on 100GE OCI circuit pack are shown in
Table 2-17:
Table 2-17
Client protocols and mapping for 100GE OCI circuit pack (NTK529AAE5)

(rate)
100GBASE-R OPU4 Proprietary Asynchronous Data and timing transparent
(103.125G±100ppm) (104.356G±20ppm) Mapping Procedure,
PT= 0x8B
100GBASE-R OPU4 Generic Mapping Data and timing transparent
(103.125G±100ppm) (104.356G±20ppm) Procedure (GMP),
PT= 0x07
Note: OTU4 rate is OPU4 rate x 255/238 = 111.810G ± 20 ppm.
• client protocols and mappings on 100G OCI circuit pack are shown in
Table 2-18:
Table 2-18
Client protocols and mapping for 100G OCI circuit pack (NTK529AC)

(rate)
PT= 0x07
(111.810G±20ppm) timing transparent
The 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs support the 2WAY (Bidirectional)
transponder cross-connection type. In addition, the 100G OCI circuit pack
supports the OTN cross-connection type when mated with the 100G PKT/
OTN XCIF circuit pack.
The 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs support the ODU4 transponder
cross-connection rate. In addition, the 100G OCI circuit pack supports the
OTN cross-connection rate when mated with the 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit
pack.
Supported CFPs
Table 2-19 on page 2-110 provides a list of the CFPs that are supported on
the 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs.
Table 2-19
Supported CFP modules for the 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit pack
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in a CFP may be supported by the 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack.
Refer to Table 2-52 on page 2-288 to find out which facility types can be supported by 100GE OCI or
100G OCI circuit packs.
100G OCI 100GE 1xCFP • PCFP

(NTK529AAE5) — 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(see Note 1 and Note 3) (NTTA01BJE6)
— 100GBASE-LR4,4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km SC CFP
(NTTA01FJE6)
— 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA03BJE6)
(NTTA03GJ)
— 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G WDM, SMF, 1550 nm, 2km CFP
(NTTA03HE)
100G OCI Multi-Protocol • PCFP

1xCFP (NTK529AC) — 100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(see Note 2 and Note 3) (NTTA01BJE6)
— 100GBASE-LR4,4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km SC CFP
(NTTA01FJE6)
(NTTA03BJE6)
— 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP
(NTTA03AA) (see Note 4)
(NTTA03GJ)
— 103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G WDM, SMF, 1550 nm, 2km CFP
(NTTA03HE)
— 103.1G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP (160-9113-900)
— 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
(160-9114-900)
— 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP
(160-9115-900)
Table 2-19
Supported CFP modules for the 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit pack (continued)
Note 1: On the 100GE OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the client interface (ETH100G). There are no line
ports on 100GE OCI circuit packs. A virtual OTM4 port 100 is also provisioned by software internally
on the circuit pack. This is a mapping port used to demarcate the ODU4 layer but does not have a
physical connection.
Note 2: On the 100G OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the client interface (ETH100G or OTM4). There are
no line ports on 100G OCI circuit packs. A virtual OTM4 port 1 is provisioned by software internally on
the circuit pack when the client interface is set to ETH100G. This is a mapping port used to demarcate
the ODU4 layer but does not have a physical connection.
Note 3: The CFP module has a larger form-factor than a SFP, SFP+, or XFP module and supports
much higher data rates.
The 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored
entities:
— PM collection for OTU4 layer (100G OCI circuit pack only)
— PM collection for ODU4 layer (100G OCI circuit pack only)
— PM collection for TCMTTP and TCMCTP facilities (100G OCI circuit
pack only)
— PM collection for ETH100G facilities
— PM collection of Physical layer for OTM4 (100G OCI circuit pack only)
— PM collection of Physical layer for ETH100G facilities
— operational measurements for ETH100G facilities
The 100G OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored entities when
mated with a 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit pack:

520.
Alarms
Note: Some of the alarms listed below do not apply to both the 100GE
OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs.
Equipment alarms
Pluggable alarms
• Client Circuit Pack Missing - Pluggable
• Client Circuit Pack Failed - Pluggable
• Client Circuit Pack Unknown - Pluggable
OTM facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• OTU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• ODU BDI
• OPU AIS
• Laser Off Far End failure triggered
• Event Log Full
• Lockout active

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame

• Local Fault
• Remote Fault
• Laser Off Far End failure triggered
• Event Log Full
TCM Facility alarms (100G OCI)

• ODU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
WAN alarms
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit
packs:
• 100GE OCI (NTK529AAE5) occupies two slots, and offers one 100GE
client port.
• 100G OCI (NTK529AC) occupies one slot, and offers one 100G client
port.
• 100GE OCI (NTK529AAE5) is identified by the left-hand slot number of
the two occupied slots.
• 100G OCI (NTK529AC) is identified by the slot number of the occupied
slot.

Table 2-20
100GE OCI and 100G OCI allowable slots (14-slot shelf)
Configuration 100GE OCI 100G OCLD 100G Flex2 10x10GE MUX

or WaveLogic 3 WaveLogic 3 or
100G OCI OCLD OCLD 10x10G MUX
or or
Flex3 100G
WaveLogic 3 (2xQSFP+/
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, Note 3, Note 4, Note 5)
100G OTR
Unprotected optical 3/4 5/6 N/A N/A N/A
9/10 11/12 N/A N/A N/A
Unprotected optical 1 2/3 N/A N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A N/A
9 10/11 N/A N/A N/A
12 13/14 N/A N/A N/A
Unprotected optical 4/5 N/A 6 N/A N/A
12/13 N/A 14 N/A N/A
to the left of
transponder with 100GE OCI (not (not
to the right of supported supported if
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD if using using version
14-slot converged
converged shelves)
shelves)
10/11 N/A 9 N/A N/A
Unprotected optical 3 N/A 4 N/A N/A
9 N/A 10 N/A N/A
the left of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 13 N/A 14 N/A N/A
Table 2-20
100GE OCI and 100G OCI allowable slots (14-slot shelf) (continued)

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX

6 N/A 5 N/A N/A
the right of
9 N/A N/A 10 N/A
the left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 13 N/A N/A 14 N/A
Note 6)
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
the right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 12 N/A N/A 11 N/A
Note 6)
Unprotected optical 4 N/A N/A 5 and 6 N/A
12 N/A N/A 13 and 14 N/A
the left of two Flex2
mode (see Note 6)
11 N/A N/A 9 and 10 N/A
mode (see Note 6)
Table 2-20

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
100G client card back-to-back

Unprotected client cards back- 2 N/A N/A N/A 1
to-back with 100G OCI to the
4 N/A N/A N/A 3
right of 10x10GE MUX or
10x10G MUX (see Note 7) 6 N/A N/A N/A 5
10 N/A N/A N/A 9
12 N/A N/A N/A 11
14 N/A N/A N/A 13
Unprotected client cards back- 1 and 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A
to-back with two 100G OCIs
3 and 4 N/A N/A N/A N/A
(see Note 8)
Table 2-20

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
200G OTR or 200G mixed clients

Unprotected optical 200G 1 and 3 N/A N/A 2 N/A
4 and 6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
mode between two 100G 9 and 11 N/A N/A 10 N/A
12 and 14 N/A N/A 13 N/A
10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or N/A N/A N/A 2 1 and 3
N/A N/A N/A 10 9 and 11
N/A N/A N/A 13 12 and 14
1 N/A N/A 2 3
4 N/A N/A 5 6
9 N/A N/A 10 11
12 N/A N/A 13 14
3 N/A N/A 2 1
6 N/A N/A 5 4
11 N/A N/A 10 9
14 N/A N/A 13 12
Table 2-20

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
Note 1: The slot positions of the 10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit
future.
pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) circuit pack.
– one 100G OCI circuit pack and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-20

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
Note 3: Supported 100G client card back-to-back configuration consists of:

— one 100G OCI circuit pack and one 10x10G MUX circuit pack.
— two 100G OCI circuit packs.
Note 4: Mixing of different 100G and 200G groups (100G client cards back-to-back, 100G MOTR,
200G MOTR, 100G OTR, 200G OTR, 200G mixed clients, 200G Regen, and 100G Regen) is allowed and
all 100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is adequately
powered. However, for specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible
and some or all of the remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding
the shelf power capacity. Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider
power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
5.5 Gbps rate.
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with 100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a
100G OTR or 200G OTR.
Note 7: The 10x10G MUX circuit packs can only be mated with 100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AC) to
form a 100G client card back-to-back configuration. The 10x10G MUX circuit packs cannot be mated with
100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G client card back-to-back configuration.
Note 8: The two 100G OCI circuit packs must be NTK529AC variant to form a 100G client card back-to-
back configuration. The NTK529AAE5 variant (100GE OCI) cannot form a 100G client card back-to-back
configuration.
• can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in Table 2-21

on page 2-121.
Table 2-21
100GE OCI and 100G OCI allowable slots (32-slot shelf)

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, Note 3, and Note 4)
100G OTR
5/6 7/8 N/A N/A N/A
11/12 13/14 N/A N/A N/A
15/16 17/18 N/A N/A N/A
21/22 23/24 N/A N/A N/A
25/26 27/28 N/A N/A N/A
31/32 33/34 N/A N/A N/A
35/36 37/38 N/A N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A N/A
13 14/15 N/A N/A N/A
16 17/18 N/A N/A N/A
21 22/23 N/A N/A N/A
24 25/26 N/A N/A N/A
33 34/35 N/A N/A N/A
36 37/38 N/A N/A N/A
14/15 N/A 16 N/A N/A
to the left of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 26/27 N/A 28 N/A N/A
34/35 N/A 36 N/A N/A
Table 2-21

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX

12/13 N/A 11 N/A N/A
to the right of
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 24/25 N/A 23 N/A N/A
32/33 N/A 31 N/A N/A
7 N/A 8 N/A N/A
the left of
17 N/A 18 N/A N/A
23 N/A 24 N/A N/A
27 N/A 28 N/A N/A
33 N/A 34 N/A N/A
37 N/A 38 N/A N/A
6 N/A 5 N/A N/A
the right of
16 N/A 15 N/A N/A
22 N/A 21 N/A N/A
26 N/A 25 N/A N/A
32 N/A 31 N/A N/A
36 N/A 35 N/A N/A
Table 2-21

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX

7 N/A N/A 8 N/A
the left of
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or 13 N/A N/A 14 N/A
17 N/A N/A 18 N/A
23 N/A N/A 24 N/A
27 N/A N/A 28 N/A
33 N/A N/A 34 N/A
37 N/A N/A 38 N/A
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
the right of
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or 12 N/A N/A 11 N/A
16 N/A N/A 15 N/A
22 N/A N/A 21 N/A
26 N/A N/A 25 N/A
32 N/A N/A 31 N/A
36 N/A N/A 35 N/A
14 N/A N/A 15 and 16 N/A
the left of two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or Flex3 26 N/A N/A 27 and 28 N/A
34 N/A N/A 35 and 36 N/A
mode (see Note 5)
13 N/A N/A 11 and 12 N/A
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or Flex3 25 N/A N/A 23 and 24 N/A
33 N/A N/A 31 and 32 N/A
mode (see Note 5)
Table 2-21

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX

to-back with 100G OCI to the
4 N/A N/A N/A 3
right of 10x10GE MUX or
10x10G MUX (see Note 6) 6 N/A N/A N/A 5
8 N/A N/A N/A 7
12 N/A N/A N/A 11
14 N/A N/A N/A 13
16 N/A N/A N/A 15
18 N/A N/A N/A 17
22 N/A N/A N/A 21
24 N/A N/A N/A 23
26 N/A N/A N/A 25
28 N/A N/A N/A 27
32 N/A N/A N/A 31
34 N/A N/A N/A 33
36 N/A N/A N/A 35
38 N/A N/A N/A 37
Table 2-21

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
Unprotected client cards 1 and 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A

back-to-back with two 100G
OCIs (see Note 7)
Table 2-21

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX

mode between two 100G 11 and 13 N/A N/A 12 N/A
14 and 16 N/A N/A 15 N/A
10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 23 and 25 N/A N/A 24 N/A
26 and 28 N/A N/A 27 N/A
31 and 33 N/A N/A 32 N/A
34 and 36 N/A N/A 35 N/A
N/A N/A N/A 12 11 and 13
N/A N/A N/A 15 14 and 16
N/A N/A N/A 24 23 and 25
N/A N/A N/A 27 26 and 28
N/A N/A N/A 32 31 and 33
N/A N/A N/A 35 34 and 36
3 N/A N/A 4 5
6 N/A N/A 7 8
11 N/A N/A 12 13
14 N/A N/A 15 16
23 N/A N/A 24 25
26 N/A N/A 27 28
31 N/A N/A 32 33
34 N/A N/A 35 36
Table 2-21

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX
Unprotected optical 200G 5 N/A N/A 4 3

8 N/A N/A 7 6
mode between two 100G 13 N/A N/A 12 11
16 N/A N/A 15 14
10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 25 N/A N/A 24 23
28 N/A N/A 27 26
(Continued)
33 N/A N/A 32 31
36 N/A N/A 35 34
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or 100GE OCI/100G OCI
circuit packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line applications only.
However, take note of the 1+1 TPT protection slotting rules in case you need to provision 1+1 TPT
protection in the future.
pack.
– two 100G clients that do not need to be the same; two 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX,
10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, or 100G OCI client circuit packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(in 16QAM mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-21

or or
Flex3 100G
OCLD 2xSFP+) MUX

all 100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is
adequately powered. However, for specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may
not be possible and some or all of the remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to
avoid exceeding the shelf power capacity. Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you
must always consider power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in
Part 3 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 8).
configuration.

7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or NTK503KA) as shown in Table 2-22
on page 2-129.
Table 2-22
100GE OCI and 100G OCI allowable slots (6500-7 packet-optical shelf and 7-slot shelf)
Configuration 100GE OCI 100G OCLD 100G Flex2 10x10GE

or WaveLogic 3 WaveLogic 3 MUX
100G OCI OCLD OCLD or
or 10x10G MUX
Flex3 or
WaveLogic 3 100G
OCLD (2xQSFP+/
2xSFP+)
MUX
100G OTR
below 100G OCLD
4 5/6 N/A N/A N/A
below 100G OCLD
below
above
below
6 N/A 5 N/A N/A
above
below
Table 2-22
100GE OCI and 100G OCI allowable slots (6500-7 packet-optical shelf and 7-slot shelf) (continued)

or 10x10G MUX
Flex3 or
WaveLogic 3 100G
OCLD (2xQSFP+/
2xSFP+)
MUX
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
above
below two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
Note 5)
above two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
Note 5)
Table 2-22

or 10x10G MUX
Flex3 or
WaveLogic 3 100G
OCLD (2xQSFP+/
2xSFP+)
MUX
to-back with 100G OCI above
4 N/A N/A N/A 3
10x10G MUX (see Note 6)
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
Unprotected client cards 1 and 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A
back-to-back with two 100G
OCIs (see Note 7)
mode between two 100G N/A N/A N/A 2 1 and 3
10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 1 N/A N/A 2 3
4 N/A N/A 5 6
3 N/A N/A 2 1
6 N/A N/A 5 4
Table 2-22

or 10x10G MUX
Flex3 or
WaveLogic 3 100G
OCLD (2xQSFP+/
2xSFP+)
MUX
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or 100GE OCI/100G OCI
circuit packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line applications only.
However, take note of the 1+1 TPT protection slotting rules in case you need to provision 1+1 TPT
protection in the future.
– one 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack and one 100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
Table 2-22

or 10x10G MUX
Flex3 or
WaveLogic 3 100G
OCLD (2xQSFP+/
2xSFP+)
MUX
200G MOTR, 100G OTR, 200G OTR, 200G mixed clients, 200G Regen, and 100G Regen) is allowed
and all 100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is
adequately powered. However, for specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may
not be possible and some or all of the remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to
avoid exceeding the shelf power capacity. Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you
must always consider power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in
Part 3 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 8).
configuration.

• two 100G OTR groups (100G OCI/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
100G OCI/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or 100G OCI/Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD) provisioned in consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1
protection using TPT:
— For 100G OCI circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack when in QPSK mode, the 100G OCI circuit packs must be in
between the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection group

slots are described below (where o stands for 100G WaveLogic 3
pack and i stands for 100G OCI circuit pack):
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
– {11o, 12i} and {13i, 14o}
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
– {5o, 6i} and {7i, 8o}
– {11o, 12i} and {13i, 14o}
– {15o, 16i} and {17i, 18o}
– {21o, 22i} and {23i, 24o}
– {25o, 26i} and {27i, 28o}
– {31o, 32i} and {33i, 34o}
– {35o, 36i} and {37i, 38o}
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
ATTENTION
The CFPs equipped on the 100G OCI that are connected to the TPT must
be 160-9113-900 or 160-9114-900.
ATTENTION
The slot positions of the circuit packs in a TPT configuration are not
interchangeable.
• any adjacent two-slot combination of (100G OCI, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF)

is possible as long as 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit pack is in even slot (for
example, 100G OCI circuit pack on left side of 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit
pack). The exception is slot 8 for the 14-slot shelf type, slot 8 for 6500-7
packet-optical shelf type, and slot 10 for the 32-slot shelf type.
• two 100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs and two 100G OCI circuit packs
form a 100G TR protected group. The protection group circuit packs
provide 1+1 OTN protection with support from a PKT/OTN cross-connect
circuit pack where signals are exchanged between the (100G OCI, 100G
PKT/OTN XCIF) pairs and the shelf PKT/OTN cross-connect over the
backplane. The valid protection group slots for 100G OCI and 100G PKT/
OTN XCIF circuit packs are described below:
– {1,2,3,4}
– {3,4,5,6}
– {9,10,11,12}
– {11,12,13,14}
– {1,2,3,4}
– {5,6,7,8}
– {11,12,13,14}
– {15,16,17,18}
– {21,22,23,24}
– {25,26,27,28}
– {31,32,33,34}
– {35,36,37,38}
– {1,2,3,4}
– {3,4,5,6}
The 100G OCI circuit packs are equipped in odd slots and the
100G PKT/OTN XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even slots.
The working (100G OCI, 100G PKT/OTN XCIF) pair must be the two lower
slot numbers of the 100G TR protected group. The protection (100G OCI,
100G PKT/OTN XCIF) pair must be the two higher slot numbers of the
100G TR protected group. Protection can be configured between ODU
TTP or TCM TTP facilities on working and protection 100G PKT/OTN
XCIF circuit packs.
(NTK505YA).
types.
Table 2-23 lists the weight, power consumption, and CFP specifications for the
100GE OCI and 100G OCI optical interface circuit pack.
Table 2-23
Technical specifications for 100GE OCI and 100G OCI optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 100GE OCI (NTK529AAE5) 100G OCI (NTK529AC)

Power consumption Typical (W): 78 (see Note 1 and Typical (W): 85 (see Note 1,
Note 3) Note 3, and Note 4)
Power Budget (W): 94 (see Power Budget (W): 95 (see
Note 2 and Note 3) Note 2 and Note 3)
CFP specifications (see Note 5)
Note 3: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with CFP, the power values published in this table
do not include CFP power values. You must add CFP power value to typical or power budget values
per CFP.
Note 4: The power values for this circuit pack are based on operation with an OTU4 client protocol.
When operating at 100GE (ETH100G) rates, the typical power is 9W less than stated.
Note 5: For optical CFP client specifications, see the following section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10DB (Chapter 8): “CFP optical specifications”.
Latency
Refer to the following tables for 100GE OCI and 100G OCI latency values:
(only applicable to 100G OCI circuit pack).
100G MUX circuit packs (NTK529BAE5 and NTK529BBE5)

Overview
This release of 6500 supports two variants of the 100G MUX circuit packs:
• 10x10G MUX 10GE 10xSFP+ (NTK529BAE5) circuit pack (also referred
to as 10x10GE MUX)
The 10x10GE MUX can be equipped with ten 10G SFP+ based client
interfaces that support ETH10G (10GBASE-LR). Each 10GE client is
independently configurable and independently operated. The SFP+
module has the same form-factor as a conventional SFP module but
supports higher data rates.
— The 10x10GE MUX circuit pack is used for transparent aggregation of
up to ten 10GE client channels for handoff across the backplane to the
adjacent 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack. Each 10GE client is
asynchronously multiplexed, and then transmitted (as OTU4) to the
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD via the backplane. This is called an OTR
configuration.
Figure 2-36 on page 2-138 shows the faceplate of a 10x10GE MUX circuit
pack, and Figure 2-37 on page 2-139 shows the functional block diagram
of a 10x10GE MUX circuit pack.
Figure 2-36
10x10GE MUX circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Card OK = LED on; 10x10G MUX
10GE
10xSFP+

Red/yellow bi-color circle (Fail/LOS) Transmit/receive

- Used to communicate Rx Loss SFP+ dual LC
of Signal/optical module (SFP+) fail connector
Yellow = Rx Loss of Signal
Figure 2-37
10x10GE MUX circuit pack block diagram (NTK529BAE5)
10G
PHY SFP+ 1
Client Monitor
Left 10G
PHY SFP+ 2
Mate OTN Mapper
10G
PHY SFP+ 3
OTN Mapper
10G
PHY SFP+ 4
OTN Mapper
Backplane
10G
OTU4 PHY SFP+ 5
OTN Mapper
Backplane Mapper/
Interface Demapper
10G
PHY SFP+ 6
OTN Mapper
10G 7
PHY SFP+
OTN Mapper
10G 8
PHY SFP+
OTN Mapper
Right
10G
Mate PHY SFP+ 9
OTN Mapper
10G
PHY SFP+ 10
OTN Mapper
Processor Power
Sync Supply
Module
Legend
PHY Physical layer adapter

• 10x10GE MUX circuit packs can form unprotected optical muxponders
(100G MOTRs, 200G MOTRs, or 200G mixed clients) for 10G service
aggregation (when used in conjunction with a 100G OCLD, 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD) and various service aggregations (when used

in conjunction with a 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD and another type
of circuit pack such as L2 MOTR or FLEX MOTR circuit pack).
Back-to-back regenerator is also supported (Figure 2-38 on page 2-141 to
Figure 2-38
10x10GE MUX circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack in QPSK modulation format) (100G MOTR)
Up to 10 times
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
10GbE LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
10x10GE MUX/
or
100G OCLD
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
Up to 10 times
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
Figure 2-39
10x10GE MUX circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack in BPSK modulation format) (100G MOTR)
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
OTU4 (prime)
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
10GbE LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
OTU4 (member)
OTU4 (member)
10x10GE MUX/
10x10GE MUX/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 10x10GE MUX/
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
10x10GE MUX/ Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Up to 10 times OTU4 (prime)

G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4 (member)
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
Figure 2-40
10x10GE MUX circuit packs functions (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in 16QAM
modulation format) (200G MOTR or 200G mixed clients)
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4
10GbE
LAN PHY
10GbE LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4
10G Client
10G Client
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
OTU4
OTU4
10x10GE MUX/
10x10GE MUX/ Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ 10x10GE MUX
10x10GE MUX
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line
OTU4
10G Client
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4
10x10GE MUX/
10x10GE MUX
can be 10x10GE MUX circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10G MUX ,
• 10x10G MUX Multi-Protocol 10xXFP (NTK529BBE5) circuit pack (also

referred to as 10x10G MUX)
The 10x10G MUX can be equipped with ten 10G XFP-based client interfaces
that support 10G client rates. Each 10G client is independently configurable
and independently operated. Non-OTU2 clients are first mapped into an
ODU2 before multiplexing. OTU2 clients have the OTU2 layer terminated on
ingress, resulting in an ODU2 as well. The ten resulting ODU2 signals are then
multiplexed into an OTU4 frame structure and this OTU4 is then transmitted to
the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD via the backplane.
— The 10x10G MUX circuit pack is used for transparent aggregation of
up to ten 10G client channels for handoff across the backplane to the
adjacent 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack. Each 10G client is
asynchronously multiplexed, and then transmitted (as OTU4) to the
configuration.
— A 10x10G MUX circuit pack can be also used for network interface
between a 10G network (Ethernet/OTN/etc.) and a 100G OTN network
via interworking with a 100G OCI circuit pack (NTK529AC) where an
OTM4 facility is provisioned on the CFP client port of the 100G OCI
circuit pack and various 10G services (all client protocols and
mappings supported by the 10x10G MUX OCI) are provisioned on the
10x10G MUX circuit pack client ports. This is called a 100G client card
back-to-back configuration.
Figure 2-41 on page 2-145 shows the faceplate of a 10x10G MUX circuit
pack, and Figure 2-42 on page 2-146 shows the functional block diagram
of a 10x10G MUX circuit pack.
Figure 2-41
10x10G MUX circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Card OK = LED on;

Red/yellow bi-color circle (Fail/LOS) Transmit/receive

- Used to communicate Rx Loss XPF dual LC
of Signal/optical module (XFP) fail connector
Figure 2-42
10x10G MUX circuit pack block diagram (NTK529BBE5)
10G
XFP 1
OTN Mapper
Left 10G
XFP 2
Mate OTN Mapper
10G
XFP 3
OTN Mapper
10G
XFP 4
OTN Mapper
Backplane
10G
OTU4 XFP 5
OTN Mapper
Backplane Mapper/
Interface Demapper
10G
XFP 6
OTN Mapper
10G 7
XFP
OTN Mapper
10G 8
XFP
OTN Mapper
Right
10G 9
Mate XFP
OTN Mapper
10G
XFP 10
OTN Mapper
Processor Power
Sync Supply
Module

• 10x10G MUX circuit packs can form unprotected optical muxponders
(100G MOTRs, 200G MOTRs, or 200G mixed clients) for 10G service
aggregation (when used in conjunction with a 100G OCLD, 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD) and various service aggregations (when used in conjunction with
a 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD and another type of circuit pack such as L2
MOTR, FLEX MOTR, SuperMux, or 2.5G MOTR circuit pack)

(see Figure 2-43 on page 2-148 to Figure 2-45 on page 2-150).
Back-to-back regenerator is also supported.
• 10x10G MUX circuit packs can form 100G client card back-to-back
configurations with 100G OCI circuit pack (see Figure 2-46 on page
2-151).
• 10x10G MUX circuit packs can also form 10x10G TPT protected MOTR
groups (see Figure 2-47 on page 2-151).
Figure 2-43
10x10G MUX circuit packs functions (example) (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit pack in QPSK modulation format) (100G MOTR)

OTU2 (10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G), Up to 10 times
OTU4
OTU4
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
10GbE WAN PHY,
10GbE LAN PHY,
10G Client
OC192/STM64,
FC800/FC1200
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
10x10G MUX/
or
100G OCLD
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
or OTU2 (11.09G)
Up to 10 times
OTU4
Up to 10 times
(10.7G)
OTU4
OTU2
OC48/STM16/OTM1
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10G Client
2.5G MOTR
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
10x10G MUX/ or
100G OCLD 10x10G MUX/
or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
10x10G MUX/ or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/ or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
Up to 10 times
OTU4
(10.7G)
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line

OC48/STM16, GbE,
100BT, 1000BT,
FC100/200/400
10G Client
SuperMux
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
Figure 2-44
10x10G MUX circuit packs functions (example) (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit pack in BPSK modulation format) (100G MOTR)

OTU2 (10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G),
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
OTU4 (prime)
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

10GbE
LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
10GbE WAN PHY,
10GbE LAN PHY,
10G Client
OC192/STM64,
FC800/FC1200
10G Client
L2 MOTR
OTU4 (member)
GbE
OTU4 (member)
or or

or OTU2 (11.09G)
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times (10.7G)
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

OC48/STM16/OTM1
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
10G Client
2.5G MOTR
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4 (member)
OTU4 (member)
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
or
or
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/
OTU4 (prime)
Up to 10 times
(10.7G)
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line

OC48/STM16, GbE,
100BT, 1000BT,
FC100/200/400
10G Client
SuperMux
OTU4 (member)
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
Figure 2-45
10x10G MUX circuit packs functions (example) (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in 16QAM
modulation format) (200G MOTR or 200G mixed clients)

OTU2 (10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G),
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

OTU4
10GbE
LAN PHY
G.709 OTU4 Line
OTU4
10GbE WAN PHY,
10GbE LAN PHY,
10G Client
OC192/STM64,
10G Client
FC800/FC1200
10G Client
10G Client
L2 MOTR
GbE
OTU4
OTU4
10x10G MUX/ 10x10GE MUX/

Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ Flex3 WaveLoic 3 OCLD/
10x10G MUX 10x10G MUX

or OTU2 (11.09G)
Up to 10 times
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

(10.7G)
OTU4
OTU2
G.709 OTU4 Line
OC48/STM16/OTM1
OTU4
10G Client
10G Client
2.5G MOTR
10G Client
10G Client
FLEX MOTR
Various
OTU4
OTU4
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX/ Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/ 10x10G MUX
10x10G MUX
Up to 10 times
G.709 OTU4 Line

(10.7G)
OTU4
OTU2
OC48/STM16, GbE,
10G Client
10G Client
100BT, 1000BT,
FC100/200/400
SuperMux
OTU4
10x10G MUX/
10x10G MUX
can be 10x10G MUX circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10GE MUX ,
Figure 2-46
10x10G MUX circuit packs functions (100G client card back-to-back configuration)
100G client card back-to-back configuration
(NTK529BBE5)
10x10G MUX
(NTK529AC)
100G OCI
Figure 2-47
1+1 TPT client-side protected optical muxponders (protected 100G MOTRs)
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD,
10x10G MUX
TPT
100G OCLD,
The 10x10GE MUX circuit pack (NTK529BAE5) and 10x10G MUX circuit
pack (NTK529BBE5) provide the following functionality:
Line support
There are no line ports on the 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack. A
virtual aggregate OTM4 facility (port 100) is automatically provisioned on the
circuit pack.
Client support
• up to ten 10GE (ETH10G) SFP+ client interfaces (ports 1 to 10) on
10x10GE MUX circuit pack supporting ETH10G client rate. The OTN
digital wrappers enable full PCS transparency for
10GBASE-R (10.3125 Gbit/s) clients.
• up to ten 10G XFP client interfaces (ports 1 to 10) on 10x10G MUX circuit
pack supporting the following client rates:
— OC-192/STM-64/10G-BASE-W (9.95328 Gbit/s)
— 10G-BASE-R (10.3125 Gbit/s)
— OTU2 (10.709 Gbit/s)
— OTU1e (11.05 Gbit/s)
— OTU2e (11.09 Gbit/s)
— FC800 (8.5 Gbit/s)
— FC1200 (10.51875 Gbit/s)
• an OTM2 layer facility corresponding to each ETH10G client facility is
auto-created
• an OTM4 layer facility corresponding to all client facilities is auto-created
(virtual port 100)
• each client port supports optical power monitoring with 2 dB accuracy and
threshold crossings alerts (TCA) based on Rx Power High and Rx Power
Low
• 10x10GE MUX circuit pack supports facility loopbacks and terminal
loopbacks on its ETH10G client facilities. Facility loopback causes ODU
LCK conditioning to be sent towards the backplane (away from the
loopback). Terminal loopback on the 10x10GE MUX is bridged, that is,
provisioned traffic will be sent on the client egress.
• 10x10G MUX circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its
ETH10G, OTM2, and OC192/STM64 client facilities. Facility loopback
causes ODU LCK conditioning to be sent towards the backplane (away
from the loopback). Terminal loopback on the 10x10G MUX turns off the
transmit laser.
• GCC1 data communications channels between 10x10GE MUX OTM4 or

10x10G MUX OTM4 facilities (port 100)
• supports G.7041 compliant Client Management Frames (CMF) and
Ordered Set Transparency on 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BBE5).
This feature provides compliance to G.7041 Sub-clause 7.9.2.2, which
provides a mapping mode that preserves the Ordered Set information of
the 10GBase-R client signal by mapping Ordered Sets into their own
GFP-F frames (Client Data Frame). Consequently, this mapping mode
does not require the GFP Client Management Frames (CMF) to
communicate local faults, remote faults, all clears, and other PCS layer
ordered set information. Therefore, this feature allows 6500 systems to
better interop with other vendors’ products when using 10GE GFP
mapping.
• client protocols and mappings on 10x10GE MUX circuit pack are shown
in Table 2-24.
Table 2-24
Client protocols and mapping for 10x10GE MUX circuit pack (NTK529BAE5)

(rate)
10GBASE-R OPU2e Bit-synchronous Mapping Data and timing transparent
(10.313G±100ppm) (10.356G±100ppm) Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
Note: OTU2e rate is OPU2e rate x 255/238 = 11.096G ± 100 ppm.
• client protocols and mappings on 10x10G MUX circuit pack are shown in
Table 2-25.
Table 2-25
Client protocols and mapping for 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BBE5)

(rate)
OC-192/STM-64 OPU2 Bit-synchronous Mapping Data and timing transparent
PT= 0x03
10GBASE-W OPU2 Bit-synchronous Mapping Data and timing transparent
PT= 0x03

Client protocols and mapping for 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BBE5) (continued)

(rate)
(10.313G ± 100 (9.995G ± 20 ppm) transparent
ppm)
(10.000G ± 20 ppm) transparency, preamble and ordered sets
PT= 0x09 transparent
Extended OPU2 GFP-F, PT= 0x08F (default) Ethernet MAC and
(10.000G ± 20 ppm) preamble transparent
PT= 0x03
PT= 0x03
FC800 OPU2 Proprietary enhanced CBR Data and timing transparent
(8.500G ± 100 ppm) (9.995G ± 20 ppm) mapping,
PT= 0x81 (default)
FC1200 OPU2e Proprietary Transcode + MAC transparent
(10.519G ± 100 (10.356G ± 100 ppm) GFP-T, PT= 0x08
ppm)
The 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit pack supports only the 2WAY
(Bidirectional) transponder cross-connection type.
The 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit pack supports only the ODU4
transponder cross-connection rate.
Supported SFP+s/XFPs
Table 2-26 on page 2-155 provides a list of the SFP+s that are supported on
the 10x10GE MUX circuit pack and also a list of the XFPs that are supported
on the 10x10G MUX circuit pack.
Table 2-26
Supported SFP+/XFP modules for the 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported SFP+/XFP module
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in an SFP+/XFP may be supported by the 10x10GE MUX or
10x10G MUX circuit pack. Refer to Table 2-52 on page 2-288 to find out which facility types can be
supported by 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit packs.
10x10G MUX 10GE • PSFP

10xSFP+ (NTK529BAE5) — 10GBASE-LR/FC1200-SM-L,1310nm, SFP+ (NTTP30CFE6)
(see Note 1 and Note 3) — FC800/10GE/FC1200, 850nm SFP+ (160-9111-900)
— 10GBASE-ER/FC1200, 1550nm, 40km, SFP+ (160-9104-900)
— 10GBASE-ZR/FC1200, 1550nm, 80km, SFP+ (160-9105-900)
10x10G MUX Multi-Protocol • P10GEL

10xXFP (NTK529BBE5) — 10GBASE-SR/SW, 850 nm, 30-300 m, MMF (NTTP81AA) (see Note
(see Note 2 and Note 3) 4)
• P10GSEL
— OC192/STM64 IR-2 / S-64.2 / 10GBase-ER,EW (NTTP80DA)
• P10GSOEL
— OC192/STM64 SR-1/ I-64.1 / 10GBase-LR,LW / OTU2 / 10G
FC1200 (NTTP84BA)
— 8.5G-10.52G multi-rate, 850nm MMF (NTTP86AA)
— 5G-11.09G multirate 1310 nm (NTTP86BAE6)
— Multirate 15xx.yy nm EML DWDM 1600 ps/nm XFP (NTK587Ax to
NTK587Dx, where x= see Note 5)
— 9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP84AAE6)
— 9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP81KAE6)
— Multirate LongHaul ITU CWDM XFP (NTTP84Hx, where x= A, B, C,
D, E, F, G, or H)
• PXFP
— Multirate 15xx.yy nm EML DWDM 800 ps/nm XFP (NTK587Ex to
NTK587Hx, where x= see Note 5)
— Multirate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable DWDM
XFP (NTK583AAE6)
— Multirate 1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm (1-88) 50GHz Tunable Type 2
DWDM XFP (NTK583AB)
— Multirate 15xx.yy – 15xx.yy Tunable Dispersion Tolerant DWDM
3200 ps/nm XFP (NTK589xxE6 where xx= see Note 5)
Table 2-26
Supported SFP+/XFP modules for the 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX circuit pack (continued)
Interface circuit pack Supported SFP+/XFP module
Note 1: On the 10x10GE MUX circuit packs, port 1 to 10 are the client interfaces (ETH10G). There are
no line ports on 10x10GE MUX circuit packs. A virtual OTM4 port 100 is also provisioned by software
internally on the circuit pack. This is a mux/mapping port used to demarcate the ODU4 layer but does
not have a physical connection.
Note 2: On the 10x10G MUX circuit packs, port 1 to 10 are the client interfaces (FC800, FC1200,
ETH10G, 10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G, or OTM4). There are no line ports on 10x10G MUX circuit packs. A
virtual OTM4 port 100 is also provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack. This is a mux/
mapping port used to demarcate the ODU4 layer but does not have a physical connection.
Note 3: SFP+ modules have the same form-factor as conventional SFP modules, but support higher
data rates. Follow the listed recommendations below if you use the shelf front cover. These rules apply
to all circuit packs that have 90 degree SFP+/SFPs:
— use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm flexible strain relief boots (NTTC50++V6 Ciena supplied
patchcords, Corning, or equivalent).
— do not use in-line plug attenuators on the circuit pack faceplate (recommend installing at the patch
panel or far-end termination).
— use standard MSA compliant SFP+s (with standard body length) (NTTP30CFE6).
Note 5: Refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, Chapter 3: Table “Multirate DWDM/
CWDM pluggable optics modules (XFP)”, for the complete list of ordering codes.
The 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit pack supports the following
monitored entities:
• OTM4 mapping layer interface (10x10GE MUX circuit pack)
• OTM2 mapping layer interface (10x10G MUX circuit pack)
• 10x10GE MUX client interfaces
— PM collection of Physical layer for ETH10G facilities
• 10x10G MUX client interfaces

facilities
— PM collection for TCMTTP, TCMCTP, ETH10G, FLEX (supported
protocols), and WAN facilities
— PM collection of Physical layer for ETH10G and facilities
— operational measurements for ETH10G, FLEX (supported protocols),
and WAN facilities

520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Pluggable alarms
• provisioning Incompatible - Pluggable

OTM facility alarms
• OTU Trace Identifier Mismatch (OTM2 only)
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• ODU BDI
• OPU AIS
• GCC1 Link Fail (OTM3 only)
• Multiplex Rate Mismatch
• Event Log Full
OCn/STMn facility alarms (applicable to 10x10G MUX)

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• AIS
• Signal Fail
• RFI
• Event Log Full

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Local Fault
• Remote Fault
• Integrated Test Set Configured (for Ethernet facilities only)
• Integrated Test Set Data Save In Progress (for Ethernet facilities only)
• Event Log Full (for Ethernet facilities only)
TCM Facility alarms (10x10G MUX)

• ODU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
WAN alarms
• Link Down

Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX
circuit packs:
• occupies a single slot, and offers 10 client ports.
Table 2-27
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, and 10x10G MUX allowable slots (14-slot shelf)
Configuration 10x10GE MUX 100G OCI 100G OCLD 100G Flex2

or WaveLogic 3 WaveLogic 3
10x10G MUX OCLD OCLD or
or 100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G MOTR
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
left of 100G OCLD 9 N/A 10/11 N/A N/A
12 N/A 13/14 N/A N/A
9 N/A N/A 10 N/A
left of 100G WaveLogic 3 13 N/A N/A 14 N/A
OCLD
9 N/A N/A N/A 10
left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 13 N/A N/A N/A 14
OCLD or Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
right of 100G WaveLogic 3 12 N/A N/A 11 N/A
OCLD
Table 2-27

or 100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 12 N/A N/A N/A 11
OCLD in QPSK mode
12 N/A N/A N/A 13 and 14
left of two Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLDs or Flex3
BPSK mode
11 N/A N/A N/A 9 and 10
right of two Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLDs or Flex3
BPSK mode
Unprotected client cards 1 2 N/A N/A N/A
back-to-back with 100G OCI
3 4 N/A N/A N/A
to the right of 10x10G MUX
(see Note 6) 5 6 N/A N/A N/A
9 10 N/A N/A N/A
11 12 N/A N/A N/A
13 14 N/A N/A N/A
Table 2-27

or 100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
200G MOTR or 200G mixed clients
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
16QAM mode between two 9 and 11 N/A N/A N/A 10
12 and 14 N/A N/A N/A 13
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, N/A 1 and 3 N/A N/A 2
N/A 9 and 11 N/A N/A 10
N/A 12 and 14 N/A N/A 13
1 3 N/A N/A 2
4 6 N/A N/A 5
9 11 N/A N/A 10
12 14 N/A N/A 13
3 1 N/A N/A 2
6 4 N/A N/A 5
11 9 N/A N/A 10
14 12 N/A N/A 13
Table 2-27

or 100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G OCI, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs are
interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line applications only. However, take note of
the 1+1 TPT protection slotting rules in case you need to provision 1+1 TPT protection in the future.
pack.
– one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK
mode) or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
– two 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM
mode) circuit pack.
mode) circuit pack.
Note 4: Mixing of different 100G and 200G groups (100G client cards back-to-back, 100G MOTR, 200G
MOTR, 100G OTR, 200G OTR, 200G mixed clients, 200G Regen, and 100G Regen) is allowed and all
100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is adequately
powered. However, for specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be
possible and some or all of the remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid
exceeding the shelf power capacity. Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must
always consider power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3
of 6500 Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 8).
5.5 Gbps rate.
(NTK529AC) to form a 100G OTR or 200G OTR. The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be
mated with 100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G OTR or 200G OTR.
• can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in

Table 2-28.
Table 2-28

10x10G MUX OCLD OCLD
or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G MOTR
Unprotected optical muxponder
with 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G
MUX to the left of 100G OCLD:
6 N/A 7/8 N/A N/A
12 N/A 13/14 N/A N/A
16 N/A 17/18 N/A N/A
22 N/A 23/24 N/A N/A
26 N/A 27/28 N/A N/A
32 N/A 33/34 N/A N/A
36 N/A 37/38 N/A N/A
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
13 N/A 14/15 N/A N/A
16 N/A 17/18 N/A N/A
21 N/A 22/23 N/A N/A
24 N/A 25/26 N/A N/A
33 N/A 34/35 N/A N/A
36 N/A 37/38 N/A N/A
Table 2-28

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical muxponder 3 N/A N/A 4 N/A
7 N/A N/A 8 N/A
WaveLogic 3 OCLD 13 N/A N/A 14 N/A
17 N/A N/A 18 N/A
23 N/A N/A 24 N/A
27 N/A N/A 28 N/A
33 N/A N/A 34 N/A
37 N/A N/A 38 N/A
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
WaveLogic 3 OCLD 12 N/A N/A 11 N/A
16 N/A N/A 15 N/A
22 N/A N/A 21 N/A
26 N/A N/A 25 N/A
32 N/A N/A 31 N/A
36 N/A N/A 35 N/A
Unprotected optical muxponder 3 N/A N/A N/A 4
7 N/A N/A N/A 8
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 13 N/A N/A N/A 14
17 N/A N/A N/A 18
mode
23 N/A N/A N/A 24
27 N/A N/A N/A 28
33 N/A N/A N/A 34
37 N/A N/A N/A 38
Table 2-28

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical muxponder 2 N/A N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3 12 N/A N/A N/A 11
16 N/A N/A N/A 15
mode
22 N/A N/A N/A 21
26 N/A N/A N/A 25
32 N/A N/A N/A 31
36 N/A N/A N/A 35
Unprotected optical muxponder 6 N/A N/A N/A 7 and 8
14 N/A N/A N/A 15 and 16
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or Flex3 26 N/A N/A N/A 27 and 28
34 N/A N/A N/A 35 and 36
mode
13 N/A N/A N/A 11 and 12
MUX to the right of two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or Flex3 25 N/A N/A N/A 23 and 24
33 N/A N/A N/A 31 and 32
mode
Table 2-28

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected client cards back-to- 1 2 N/A N/A N/A
back with 100G OCI to the right
3 4 N/A N/A N/A
of 10x10G MUX (see Note 7)
5 6 N/A N/A N/A
7 8 N/A N/A N/A
11 12 N/A N/A N/A
13 14 N/A N/A N/A
15 16 N/A N/A N/A
17 18 N/A N/A N/A
21 22 N/A N/A N/A
23 24 N/A N/A N/A
25 26 N/A N/A N/A
27 28 N/A N/A N/A
31 32 N/A N/A N/A
33 34 N/A N/A N/A
35 36 N/A N/A N/A
37 38 N/A N/A N/A
Table 2-28

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 200G mixed 3 and 5 N/A N/A N/A 4
clients with one Flex3
mode between two 100G clients 11 and 13 N/A N/A N/A 12
(10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX,
14 and 16 N/A N/A N/A 15
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX,
or 100G OCI) (see Note 8) 23 and 25 N/A N/A N/A 24
26 and 28 N/A N/A N/A 27
31 and 33 N/A N/A N/A 32
34 and 36 N/A N/A N/A 35
N/A 11 and 13 N/A N/A 12
N/A 14 and 16 N/A N/A 15
N/A 23 and 25 N/A N/A 24
N/A 26 and 28 N/A N/A 27
N/A 31 and 33 N/A N/A 32
N/A 34 and 36 N/A N/A 35
3 5 N/A N/A 4
6 8 N/A N/A 7
11 13 N/A N/A 12
14 16 N/A N/A 15
23 25 N/A N/A 24
26 28 N/A N/A 27
31 33 N/A N/A 32
34 36 N/A N/A 35
Table 2-28

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 200G mixed 5 3 N/A N/A 4
clients with one Flex3
8 6 N/A N/A 7
mode between two 100G clients 13 11 N/A N/A 12
(10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX,
16 14 N/A N/A 15
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX,
or 100G OCI) (see Note 8) 25 23 N/A N/A 24
(Continued) 28 26 N/A N/A 27
33 31 N/A N/A 32
36 34 N/A N/A 35
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G OCI, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or
100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line
applications only. However, take note of the 1+1 TPT protection slotting rules in case you need to provision
1+1 TPT protection in the future.
pack.
– one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode)
or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-28

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Note 5: This configuration partitions the shelf into 4-slot ranges each of which can support a 100G MOTR,
100G regen, or a 100G OTR. The 100G circuit pack group in each of these 4-slot ranges can be changed
(for example from a MOTR to a regen) without affecting any of the other 4-slot ranges in the shelf. This slot
usage allows the 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX to be the swapped out for a 100GE OCI or 100G OCI
without needing to move the existing 100G OCLD circuit packs. This slot usage also allows the 100GE OCI
or 100G OCI to be swapped out for a 100G OCLD without needing to move the existing 100G OCLD if
reconfiguring from 100G MOTR/100G OTR to 100G Regen.
Note 6: This configuration provides the maximum number of contiguous slots in the shelf (that is, slots
7-8, 11-12, 27-28, 31-32), available for other 6500 circuit pack groups (for example, a
100G MOTR/100G OTR group).

7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or NTK503KA) as shown in Table 2-29.
Table 2-29
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, and 10x10G MUX allowable slots (6500-7 packet-
optical shelf and 7-slot shelf)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G MOTR
Unprotected optical muxponder 1 N/A 2/3 N/A N/A
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
MUX below 100G OCLD
MUX below 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
MUX above 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Unprotected optical muxponder 3 4 N/A N/A 4
MUX below Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
Unprotected optical muxponder 2 1 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
MUX above Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
MUX below two Flex2
mode
Table 2-29
optical shelf and 7-slot shelf) (continued)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
MUX above two Flex2
mode
Unprotected client cards back- 1 2 N/A N/A N/A
to-back with 100G OCI above
3 4 N/A N/A N/A
10x10G MUX (see Note 5)
5 6 N/A N/A N/A
Unprotected optical 200G N/A 1 and 3 N/A N/A 2
mode between two 100G 1 and 3 N/A N/A N/A 2
10x10G MUX, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 3 1 N/A N/A 2
6 4 N/A N/A 5
1 3 N/A N/A 2
4 6 N/A N/A 5
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G OCI, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or
100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line
applications only. However, take note of the 1+1 TPT protection slotting rules in case you need to provision
1+1 TPT protection in the future.
Table 2-29
optical shelf and 7-slot shelf) (continued)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
pack.
– one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode)
or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK mode) circuit packs.
mode) circuit pack.
mode) circuit pack.
• two 100G MOTR groups (10x10G MUX/100G OCLD,

10x10G MUX/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10G MUX/Flex3 WaveLogic
3 OCLD, or 10x10G MUX/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD) provisioned in
consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT:
— for 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G OCLD circuit pack, the
mate 100G OCLD circuit pack must be provisioned in the adjacent slot
to the right. The valid protection group slots are described below:
– {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}
– {9, 10/11} and {12, 13/14}
– {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}
– {13, 14/15} and {16, 17/18}
– {21, 22/23} and {24, 25/26}
– {33, 34/35} and {36, 37/38}
– {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}
— for 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack when in QPSK mode, the 10x10G MUX circuit packs must
be in between the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection
group slots are described below (where o stands for 100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack and m stands for 10x10G MUX circuit pack):
– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
– {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o}
– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
– {5o, 6m} and {7m, 8o}
– {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o}
– {15o, 16m} and {17m, 18o}
– {21o, 22m} and {23m, 24o}
– {25o, 26m} and {27m, 28o}
– {31o, 32m} and {33m, 34o}
– {35o, 36m} and {37m, 38o}

– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
Note: The slot positions of the circuit packs in a TPT configuration are not
interchangeable.
• the maximum number of back-to-back 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX

"daisy chain/ loopback" XFP connections can exceed these limits for idle
test set soaks (no fiber pulls, card re-seats, protection switching, etc.) at
ambient temperature with nominal clock frequencies.
(NTK505YA).
types.
Table 2-30 lists the weight, power consumption, and SFP+/XFP specifications
for the 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX optical interface circuit pack.
Table 2-30
Technical specifications for 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 10x10GE MUX (NTK529BAE5) 10x10G MUX (NTK529BBE5)

Power consumption Typical (W): 76 Typical (W): 103
Power Budget (W): 83 Power Budget (W): 115
SFP+ specifications (see Note 5)
XFP specifications (see Note 6)
Note 1: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature of 25
(+/-3 oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V).
Note 3: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with SFP+s, the power values published in this table
do not include SFP+s power values. You must add 1 W to typical or power budget values per SFP+.
Note 4: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with XFPs, the power values published in this table
do not include XFPs power values. You must
• 2 W to typical power value and 3 W to power budget for each XFP module with reach less than IR-2/
S-64.2b.
• 3 W to typical power value and 4 W to power budget for each XFP module with IR-2/S-64.2b reach or
greater.
Note 5: For optical SFP+ client specifications, see the following section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
• “SFP+ optical specifications”
Note 6: For optical XFP client specifications, see the following sections in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
• “Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for SONET/SDH applications”
• “Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for 10G Ethernet application”
• “XFP transmitter, receiver, and link specifications for OTU2 applications”
• “Multirate DWDM/CWDM XFP optical specifications”
• “Multirate Tunable DWDM XFP optical specifications”
Latency
Refer to the following tables for 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX latency
values:
(only applicable to 10x10G MUX circuit pack).
100G MUX Multi-Protocol 2xQSFP+/2xSFP+ circuit packs (NTK529EA)

Overview
The 100G MUX Multi-Protocol 2xQSFP+/2xSFP+ circuit pack (also referred to
as 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX) can be equipped with up to two 10G
SFP+ client interfaces (where each client interface supports one 10G client
rate) and up to two 40G QSFP+ client interfaces (where each client interface
supports one 40G client rate or four independent 10G client rates). Each 10G
or 40G client is independently configurable and independently operated.
The 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX is used for transparent aggregation of

10G and/or 40G client channels (two 10G clients and two 40G clients or up to
ten 10G clients if both QSFP+ ports are used as 10Gs with no 40G capability
or six 10G clients and one 40G client) for handoff across the backplane to the
adjacent 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
The 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX is used for transparent aggregation of

10G and/or 40G client channels for handoff across the backplane to the
adjacent 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack. The supported clients combinations are:
• two 10G clients and two 40G clients, or
• up to ten 10G clients if both QSFP+ ports are used as 10Gs with no 40G
capability, or
• six 10G clients and one 40G client.
Each 10G or 40G client is asynchronously multiplexed, and then transmitted
(as OTU4) to the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
configuration.
For 10G clients, non-OTU2 clients are first mapped into an ODU2 before
multiplexing. The two resulting ODU2 signals are then multiplexed into an
OTU4 frame structure and this OTU4 is then transmitted to the 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
via the backplane.
For 40G clients, non-OTU3 clients are first mapped into an ODU3 before
multiplexing. The two resulting ODU3 signals are then multiplexed into an
OTU4 frame structure and this OTU4 is then transmitted to the 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
via the backplane.
Figure 2-48 on page 2-179 shows the faceplate of a 100G (2xQSFP+/

2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack and Figure 2-49 on page 2-180 shows the
functional block diagram of a 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack.
Figure 2-48
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Card OK = LED on;

Transmit/receive
SFP+ dual LC
connector
Red/yellow bi-color circle (Fail/LOS)

of Signal/optical module (SFP+) fail
Transmit/receive
QSFP+ dual LC
connector
Figure 2-49
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack block diagram (NTK529EA)
10G
SFP+ 1
OTN Mapper
Left 10G
SFP+ 2
Mate OTN Mapper
40G
QSFP+
Backplane
OTN Mapper
OTU4
Backplane Mapper/
Interface Demapper
40G QSFP+
OTN Mapper
Right
Mate
Processor Power
Sync Supply
Module
The 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs can form unprotected

optical muxponders (100G MOTRs, 200G MOTRs, or 200G mixed clients) for
10G and 40G service aggregation (when used in conjunction with a 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD)
(see Figure 2-50 on page 2-181 to Figure 2-52 on page 2-183).
Figure 2-50
100G MOTR configurations using 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs (Flex2
10GbE LAN PHY
OTU4
10G and 40G Clients
G.709 OTU4 Line

40GbE LAN PHY

or
or
Figure 2-51
packs with 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in BPSK modulation format)
10GbE LAN PHY
OTU4 (prime)
10G and 40G Clients
G.709 OTU4 Line
G.709 OTU4 Line
OTU4 (member)
40GbE LAN PHY

or
Figure 2-52
with 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs (Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in 16QAM
modulation format)
10GbE LAN PHY
OTU4
10G and 40G Clients
10G and 40G Clients
G.709 OTU4 Line
40GbE LAN PHY
OTU4

100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX
can be 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack and another 100G client circuit pack can be 10x10GE MUX,
10x10G MUX, or 100G OCI circuit pack.
The 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack (NTK529EA) provides the
Line support
There are no line ports on the 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack. A
virtual aggregate OTM4 facility (port 100) is automatically provisioned on the
circuit pack.
Client support
• up to two 10G SFP+ client interfaces (ports 1 and 2) each supporting one
10G-BASE-R (10.3125 Gbit/s) client rate and up to two 40G QSFP+ client
interfaces (ports 3 and 4) each supporting one 40G-BASE-R (41.3 Gbit/s)
or four independent 10G-BASE-R (10.3125 Gbit/s) client rates.

auto-created.
auto-created.
• supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its ETH10G and ETH40G
client facilities. Facility loopback causes ODU LCK conditioning to be sent
towards the backplane (away from the loopback). Terminal loopback on
the 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack turns off the transmit
laser.
• GCC1 data communications OTM4 facilities (port 100)
• clients protocols and mappings on 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit
pack are shown in Table 2-31.
Table 2-31
Client protocols and mapping for 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack (NTK529EA)
Client protocol OPUk (rate) Mapping procedure Transparency

(rate)
(10.313G ± 100 (9.995G ± 20 ppm) transparent
ppm)
(10.000G ± 20 ppm) transparency, preamble and ordered sets
PT= 0x09 transparent
PT= 0x03
40GBASE-R Proprietary OPU3+ Transcode + GMP Mapping Data and timing transparent
(41.250G ± 100 Procedure,
ppm) PT= 0x7
The 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack supports only the 2WAY
The 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack supports only the ODU4
transponder cross-connection rate.
Note: ODU2 and ODU3 rates associated with client port connections are
automatically created and deleted by the system upon provisioning of the
client ports. The ODU4 connection to port 100 of the circuit pack is the
only connection that can be provisioned.
Supported SFP+s/QSFP+s
Table 2-32 provides a list of the SFP+s/QSFP+s that are supported on the
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack.
Table 2-32
Supported SFP+/QSFP+ modules for the 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported SFP+/QSFP+ module
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in an SFP+/QSFP+ may be supported by the 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+)
MUX circuit pack. Refer to Table 2-52 on page 2-288 to find out which facility types can be supported
by 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs.
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) • PSFP

MUX (NTK529EA) — 10GBASE-LR/FC1200-SM-L,1310nm, SFP+ (NTTP30CFE6)
(see Note 1 and Note 2) — FC800/10GE/FC1200, 850nm SFP+ (160-9111-900)
— 10GBASE-ER/FC1200, 1550nm, 40km, SFP+ (160-9104-900)
— 10GBASE-ZR/FC1200, 1550nm, 80km, SFP+ (160-9105-900)
• PQSFP
— 40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km QSFP+ (160-
9501-900)
Note 1: On the 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs, port 1 to 4 are the client interfaces
(ETH10G or ETH40G). There are no line ports on 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs. A
virtual OTM4 port 100 is also provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack. This is a mux/
mapping port used to demarcate the ODU4 layer but does not have a physical connection.
Note 2: SFP+ modules have the same form-factor as conventional SFP modules, but support higher
data rates. QSFP+ modules have the same form-factor as conventional XFP modules with higher data
rates comparing to SFP or SFP+. Follow the listed recommendations below if you use the shelf front
cover. These rules apply to all circuit packs that have 90 degree SFP+/QSFP+/SFPs:
— use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm flexible strain relief boots (NTTC50++V6 Ciena supplied
patchcords, Corning, or equivalent).
— do not use in-line plug attenuators on the circuit pack faceplate (recommend installing at the patch
panel or far-end termination).
— use standard MSA compliant SFP+s (with standard body length) (NTTP30CFE6).
The 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack supports the following
monitored entities:
• client interfaces
— PM collection for ETH10G and ETH40G facilities
— PM collection of Physical layer for ETH10G and ETH40G facilities
— operational measurements for ETH10G and ETH40G facilities

520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
• Circuit pack Unknown
Pluggable alarms
• provisioning Incompatible - Pluggable
• Circuit pack 3rd Party - Pluggable
OTM2/OTM3 Client facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• MSI Mismatch
• OTU Signal Fail
• OTU BDI
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU BDI
• ODU OCI
• OPU AIS
• GCC0 Link Fail
• GCC1 Link Fail
• Multiplex Rate Mismatch (OTM2 only)
OTM2/OTM3 Mapping Layer facility alarms

• MSI Mismatch
• ODU Signal Fail
• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU BDI
• ODU OCI
• OPU AIS
• Multiplex Rate Mismatch

• ODU AIS
• ODU LCK
• ODU BDI
• ODU OCI
Ethernet10G and Ethernet40G facility on the client port alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Local Fault
• Remote Fault
• Loss of data Synch (Ethernet40G only)
WAN alarms
• Link Down
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit
packs:
• occupies a single slot and offers four client ports.
electrical shelf as shown in Table 2-33 on page 2-189.
Table 2-33
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX allowable slots (14-slot shelf)
Configuration 10x10GE MUX 100G OCI 100G Flex2

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G MOTR
Unprotected optical muxponder with 3 N/A 4 N/A
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX to the
9 N/A 10 N/A
left of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
13 N/A 14 N/A
Unprotected optical muxponder with 3 N/A N/A 4
9 N/A N/A 10
left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK 13 N/A N/A 14
mode
6 N/A 5 N/A
right of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
12 N/A 11 N/A
Table 2-33
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX allowable slots (14-slot shelf) (continued)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical muxponder with 2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK 12 N/A N/A 11
mode
Unprotected optical muxponder with 4 N/A N/A 5 and 6
12 N/A N/A 13 and 14
left of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK
mode
11 N/A N/A 9 and 10
right of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
or Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK
mode
Table 2-33

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 200G mixed clients 1 and 3 N/A N/A 2
with one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
4 and 6 N/A N/A 5
16QAM mode between two 100G clients
(10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, 100G 9 and 11 N/A N/A 10
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100G
12 and 14 N/A N/A 13
OCI) (see Note 5)
N/A 1 and 3 N/A 2
N/A 4 and 6 N/A 5
N/A 9 and 11 N/A 10
N/A 12 and 14 N/A 13
1 3 N/A 2
4 6 N/A 5
9 11 N/A 10
12 14 N/A 13
3 1 N/A 2
6 4 N/A 5
11 9 N/A 10
14 12 N/A 13
Table 2-33

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit
packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line applications only.
– one 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit pack and two Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in BPSK
– two 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in 16QAM
mode) circuit pack.
10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, or 100G OCI client circuit packs and one Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (in 16QAM mode) circuit pack.
Note 4: Slots 7 and 8 are excluded as there is no mate-to-mate tracking available to support the
required 5.5 Gbps rate.
(NTK529AC) to form a 100G OTR or 200G OTR. The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot
be mated with 100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G OTR or 200G OTR.
• can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in

Table 2-34.
Table 2-34
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX allowable slots (32-slot shelf)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, and Note 3)
100G MOTR
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G 3 N/A 4 N/A
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX to the left of
7 N/A 8 N/A
13 N/A 14 N/A
17 N/A 18 N/A
23 N/A 24 N/A
27 N/A 28 N/A
33 N/A 34 N/A
37 N/A 38 N/A
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G 2 N/A 1 N/A
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX to the right of
6 N/A 5 N/A
12 N/A 11 N/A
16 N/A 15 N/A
22 N/A 21 N/A
26 N/A 25 N/A
32 N/A 31 N/A
36 N/A 35 N/A
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G 3 N/A N/A 4
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX to the left of
7 N/A N/A 8
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK mode 13 N/A N/A 14
17 N/A N/A 18
23 N/A N/A 24
27 N/A N/A 28
33 N/A N/A 34
37 N/A N/A 38
Table 2-34

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G 2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK mode 12 N/A N/A 11
16 N/A N/A 15
22 N/A N/A 21
26 N/A N/A 25
32 N/A N/A 31
36 N/A N/A 35
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G 6 N/A N/A 7 and 8
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX to the left of two
14 N/A N/A 15 and 16
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK mode 26 N/A N/A 27 and 28
34 N/A N/A 35 and 36
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G 5 N/A N/A 3 and 4
13 N/A N/A 11 and 12
two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs or Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK mode 25 N/A N/A 23 and 24
33 N/A N/A 31 and 32
Table 2-34

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 200G mixed clients 3 and 5 N/A N/A 4
6 and 8 N/A N/A 7
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100G OCI)
14 and 16 N/A N/A 15
(see Note 4)
23 and 25 N/A N/A 24
26 and 28 N/A N/A 27
31 and 33 N/A N/A 32
34 and 36 N/A N/A 35
N/A 3 and 5 N/A 4
N/A 6 and 8 N/A 7
N/A 11 and 13 N/A 12
N/A 14 and 16 N/A 15
N/A 23 and 25 N/A 24
N/A 26 and 28 N/A 27
N/A 31 and 33 N/A 32
N/A 34 and 36 N/A 35
3 5 N/A 4
6 8 N/A 7
11 13 N/A 12
14 16 N/A 15
23 25 N/A 24
26 28 N/A 27
31 33 N/A 32
34 36 N/A 35
Table 2-34

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 200G mixed clients 5 3 N/A 4
8 6 N/A 7
(10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, 100G 13 11 N/A 12
16 14 N/A 15
(see Note 8)
(Continued) 25 23 N/A 24
28 26 N/A 27
33 31 N/A 32
36 34 N/A 35
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100GE
OCI/100G OCI circuit packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line
applications only.
mode) circuit pack.
Table 2-34

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Note 3: Mixing of different 100G and 200G groups (100G MOTR, 200G MOTR, 100G OTR, 200G
OTR, 200G mixed clients, 200G Regen, and 100G Regen) is allowed and all 100G-capable slots in a
6500 shelf can be equipped with 100G or 200G groups if the shelf is adequately powered. However,
for specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and some or
all of the remaining slots may have to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf
power capacity. Before equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider
power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500
Planning, NTRN10DB (Chapter 8).
• can be equipped in the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf (NTK503RA) and 7-

slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5 or NTK503KA) as shown in Table 2-35.
Table 2-35
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX allowable slots (6500-7 packet-optical shelf and 7-slot shelf)

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
100G MOTR
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX below
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX above
6 N/A 5 N/A
Table 2-35

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical muxponder with 3 4 N/A 4
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK mode
Unprotected optical muxponder with 2 1 N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK mode
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK mode
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK mode
Table 2-35

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Unprotected optical 200G mixed clients N/A 1 and 3 N/A 2
N/A 4 and 6 N/A 5
4 and 6 N/A N/A 5
(see Note 4)
3 1 N/A 2
6 4 N/A 5
1 3 N/A 2
4 6 N/A 5
Table 2-35

or or
100G Flex3
2xSFP+) MUX OCLD
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, or 100GE
OCI/100G OCI circuit packs are interchangeable across an odd-even slot boundary for QPSK line
applications only.
mode) circuit pack.
Note 3: Mixing of different 100G and 200G groups 100G MOTR, 200G MOTR, 100G OTR, 200G OTR,

• TPT is not supported.
• the maximum number of back-to-back 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX
"daisy chain/ loopback" SFP+/QSFP+ connections can exceed these
limits for idle test set soaks (no fiber pulls, card re-seats, protection
switching, etc.) at ambient temperature with nominal clock frequencies.
(NTK505YA).
types.
Table 2-36 lists the weight, power consumption, and SFP+/QSFP+
specifications for the 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX optical interface circuit
pack.
Table 2-36
Technical specifications for 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX (NTK529EA)

Power consumption Typical (W): 108(see Note 1, Note 3, and Note 4)
Power Budget (W): 125 (see Note 2, Note 3, and Note 4)
SFP+ specifications (see Note 5)
QSFP+ specifications (see Note 6)
Note 1: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature
of 25 (+/-3 oC) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V).
temperature range from 5oC to 40oC at a voltage of 40 V dc (+/-2.5 V). These values must be used
in sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.
Note 3: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with SFP+s, the power values published in this
table do not include SFP+s power values. You must add 1 W to typical or power budget values per
SFP+.
Note 4: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with QSFP+s, the power values published in this
table do not include QSFP+s power values. You must add QSFP+ power value to typical or power
budget values per QSFP+.
Note 5: For optical SFP+ client specifications, see the following section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
• “SFP+ optical specifications”
Note 6: For optical QSFP+ client specifications, see the following section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
• “QSFP+ optical specifications”
Latency
Refer to the following table for 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX latency values:
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 C-band LR4 Multirate circuit packs

(NTK538Ux)
The 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack (also referred
to as 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR) is an optical transponder and service channel
interface that combine a 100G client and a 100G line interface together on a
single-slot circuit pack to enhances Ciena 100G portfolio with higher density
offering and lower solution cost.
The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs cannot be mated with any other
100G OCLD, OCI, MUX, Flex2, or Flex3 circuit packs described in this
chapter.
Table 2-37 shows 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack variants and some of
their functions.
Table 2-37
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs

operation
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Premium C-band NTK538UJ Premium 150 ps PMD DP-QPSK
LR4 Multirate reach limit
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Enhanced C-band NTK538UK Enhanced 150 ps PMD DP-QPSK
LR4 Multirate reach (up to limit
1800 Km)
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Standard C-band NTK538UL Standard 150 ps PMD DP-QPSK
LR4 Multirate reach (up to limit
1000 Km)
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Basic C-band LR4 NTK538UM Basic reach 150 ps PMD DP-QPSK
Multirate (up to 300 limit
Km)
100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Submarine C-band NTK538UN Submarine 150 ps PMD DP-QPSK
LR4 Multirate reach limit
Note: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs (NTK538Ux) only operate with Release 10.1 or later
software loads. The exception is NTK538UN where it only operates with Release 10.11 or later software
loads.
Figure 2-53 on page 2-204 shows the faceplate of a 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR
circuit pack. Figure 2-54 on page 2-205 shows the functional block diagram of
a 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack.
Figure 2-53
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)


Card OK = LED on;
One fixed 1xOTU4 line interface (port 1)
(on->no pull, off->can be pulled) One fixed 100G (ETH100G/OTM4) client interface (port 2)
- Equipment in-service = LED on; one fixed 1xOTU4 line interface (port 1)
Yellow uni-color circle (LOS)

of Signal
- Yellow = Rx Loss of Signal
Figure 2-54
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack block diagram (NTK538Ux)
Transmit Line 100G E/O DP-QPSK Tx

Mapper and Subsystem EDFA
Deskew
Ciena FEC EOC Laser

1
100G O/E
Receive DP-QPSK
Equalizer and Balanced Pin
Demapper Coherent VOA
Backplane
Rx Subsystem
100G LR4
OTU4 Mapper Optics 2

Module Supply
Legend
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs (NTK538Ux) provide the following
functionality:
Line support
The line interface on a 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack offers the same
functionality as the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Qx) when
the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack is on QPSK mode:
• one fixed 1xOTU4 line interface (port 1)
• WaveLogic 3 Flex3 (QPSK modulation)
1566.72 nm)
• flexible grid support on the line interface OTM4 facility. This allows the
provisioning of 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR transmitter frequency within 6.25
GHz spacing when in Flex-grid mode
• wide dynamic range receiver with automatic VOA control on the line
interface receiver
• supports GCC0 on OTU4 line and GCC1 on OTU4 mapping layer facility
associated to the ETH100G client port
clocking is used)
• any variant of the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs (NTK538Ux) can
be used in colorless systems.
• supports Short Term Optical Recovery Mechanism (STORM) in colored
323-1851-310.
• supports facility loopback on its line facility. Facility loopback causes ODU
LCK conditioning to be sent towards the backplane (away from the
loopback). Terminal loopback is not supported on the line facility.
ATTENTION
The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR can be carried over the following Photonic
systems: Ciena Common Photonic Layer Release 10.1 or higher, Ciena
6500 Photonic Layer Release 10.1 or higher, and foreign Photonic line
systems. The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR is not compatible with the Common
Photonic Layer Filtered Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux (SCMD8) module
(NTT861AA-AH, AJ). The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR over the 565, 5100 and
5200 Advanced Services Platform is not supported in this release.
Note: Submarine variants of 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR or any 100G

WaveLogic 3 OCLD does not Line inter-op with any terrestrial variant of
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. “Loss
of Clock” alarm will be raised on the OTM4 line facility against both end
100G circuit packs.
Table 2-38
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR supported wavelengths (for 50 GHz C-Band spacing)
# (nm) # (nm) # (nm)
1 196.20 1527.99 0 30 194.75 1539.37 24 59 193.30 1550.92 53
(Note)
2 196.15 1528.3 0 31 194.70 1539.77 25 60 193.25 1551.32 54
(Note)
3 196.10 1528.77 93 32 194.65 1540.16 26 61 193.20 1551.72 55
4 196.05 1529.16 94 33 194.60 1540.56 27 62 193.15 1552.12 56
5 196.00 1529.55 95 34 194.55 1540.95 28 63 193.10 1552.52 57
6 195.95 1529.94 96 35 194.50 1541.35 29 64 193.05 1552.93 58
7 195.90 1530.33 1 36 194.45 1541.75 30 65 193.00 1553.33 59
8 195.85 1530.72 2 37 194.40 1542.14 31 66 192.95 1553.73 60
9 195.80 1531.12 3 38 194.35 1542.54 32 67 192.90 1554.13 61
10 195.75 1531.51 4 39 194.30 1542.94 33 68 192.85 1554.54 62
11 195.70 1531.90 5 40 194.25 1543.33 34 69 192.80 1554.94 63
12 195.65 1532.29 6 41 194.20 1543.73 35 70 192.75 1555.34 64
13 195.60 1532.68 7 42 194.15 1544.13 36 71 192.70 1555.75 65
14 195.55 1533.07 8 43 194.10 1544.53 37 72 192.65 1556.15 66
15 195.50 1533.47 9 44 194.05 1544.92 38 73 192.60 1556.55 67
16 195.45 1533.86 10 45 194.00 1545.32 39 74 192.55 1556.96 68
17 195.40 1534.25 11 46 193.95 1545.72 40 75 192.50 1557.36 69
18 195.35 1534.64 12 47 193.90 1546.12 41 76 192.45 1557.77 70
19 195.30 1535.04 13 48 193.85 1546.52 42 77 192.40 1558.17 71
20 195.25 1535.43 14 49 193.80 1546.92 43 78 192.35 1558.58 72
21 195.20 1535.82 15 50 193.75 1547.32 44 79 192.30 1558.98 73
22 195.15 1536.22 16 51 193.70 1547.72 45 80 192.25 1559.39 74
23 195.10 1536.61 17 52 193.65 1548.11 46 81 192.20 1559.79 75
24 195.05 1537.00 18 53 193.60 1548.51 47 82 192.15 1560.20 76
25 195.00 1537.40 19 54 193.55 1548.91 48 83 192.10 1560.61 77
26 194.95 1537.79 20 55 193.50 1549.32 49 84 192.05 1561.01 78
27 194.90 1538.19 21 56 193.45 1549.72 50 85 192.00 1561.42 79
28 194.85 1538.58 22 57 193.40 1550.12 51 86 191.95 1561.83 80
29 194.80 1538.98 23 58 193.35 1550.52 52 87 191.90 1562.23 81
Table 2-38
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR supported wavelengths (for 50 GHz C-Band spacing) (continued)
# (nm) # (nm) # (nm)
88 191.85 1562.64 82 91 191.70 1563.86 85 94 191.55 1565.09 88
89 191.80 1563.05 83 92 191.65 1564.27 86 95 191.50 1565.50 89
90 191.75 1563.45 84 93 191.60 1564.68 87 96 191.45 1565.90 90
97 191.40 1566.31 91
98 191.35 1566.72 92
Note: This wavelength is not applicable to 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs.
• line interworking between different 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR variants are

shown in the Table 2-39 on page 2-209, Table 2-40 on page 2-209, and
Table 2-39
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR (NTK538Ux) variants in QPSK mode
Tx UJ UK UL UM UN
Rx
UK Yes Yes* Yes* No
UL Yes Yes* No
UM Yes No
UN Yes
Note: “Yes* means that due to incompatible PreCompensation/ROSNR/Reach or

other factors “Circuit pack operational capability exceeded” alarm can be raised if the
reach or the RSONR tolerance limits are exceeded on the lower performance circuit
pack.
Table 2-40
Rx
539UH Yes Yes* Yes* Yes* No Yes Yes* No No No
539UB Yes Yes* Yes* No Yes* Yes No No No

Rx
539UC Yes Yes* No Yes* Yes* No No No
539UD Yes No Yes* Yes* No No No
539UE Yes No No No No Yes
538UJ Yes Yes* Yes* Yes* No
538UK Yes Yes* Yes* No
538UL Yes Yes* No
538UM Yes No
538UN Yes
Note: “Yes* means that due to incompatible PreCompensation/ROSNR/Reach or other factors “Circuit pack
operational capability exceeded” alarm can be raised if the reach or the RSONR tolerance limits are exceeded
on the lower performance circuit pack.
Table 2-41
Rx
BH Yes Yes* No No Yes Yes* No No No
BB Yes No No Yes* Yes No No No
BE Yes Yes No No No No Yes
UK Yes Yes* Yes* No
UL Yes Yes* No
UM Yes No
UN Yes

Rx
Note 1: “Yes* means that due to incompatible PreCompensation/ROSNR/Reach or other factors “Circuit pack
operational capability exceeded” alarm can be raised if the reach or the RSONR tolerance limits are exceeded
on the lower performance circuit pack.
Note 2: The NTK538UL and NTK538UM variants of the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs only support soft
differential encoding for QPSK modulation format.
Table 2-42
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR (NTK538Ux) and Flex3 OCLD (NTK539Qx) variant
in QPSK mode
Tx QJ QK QL QM QN UJ UK UL UM UN
Rx
QJ Yes Yes Yes* Yes* No Yes Yes* Yes* Yes* No
QK Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No
QL Yes Yes* No Yes* Yes* Yes Yes* No
QM Yes No Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes No
QN Yes No No No No Yes
UK Yes Yes* Yes* No
UL Yes Yes* No
UM Yes No
UN Yes
Note: “Yes* means due to incompatible PreCompensation/ROSNR/Reach or other factors “Circuit pack
operational capability exceeded” alarm can be raised if the reach or the RSONR tolerance limits are
exceeded on the lower performance circuit pack.
Client support
The client interface on a 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack offers the same
functionality as the 100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AC):
• one fixed 100G (ETH100G/OTM4) client interface (port 2) supporting the
following client rates:
– 100GBASE-R (103.125 Gbit/s)
– OTU4 (111.8 Gbit/s)
• a virtual OTM4 mapping facility is auto-created (virtual port 1) when
ETH100G client is provisioned
• facilitates client-side interworking at ETH100G/OTM4 signal rates
• full transparency for ETH100G clients
— ODU4 transparency on the OTU4 client
• supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its client facility (ETH100G or
OTM4). Facility loopback causes ODU LCK conditioning to be sent
towards the backplane (away from the loopback). Terminal loopback on
the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack turns off the transmit laser.
• supports OTM4 client side GCC0 data communications channels
clocking is used)
• clients protocols and mappings on 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack
are shown in Table 2-43.
Table 2-43
Client protocols and mapping for 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack (NTK538Ux)

(rate)
PT= 0x07
The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack supports only the 2WAY
The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack supports only the ODU4 transponder
cross-connection rate.
The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack supports the following monitored
entities:
• client interfaces
— PM collection for ODU4 layer (mapping)
— PM collection of Physical layer for OTM4 and ETH100G facilities

520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms

• Software Subsystem Failed
OTM4 line facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Channel
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• ODU AIS
• ODU BDI
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• Optimization Scanning In Progress
• OTU BDI
• OTU Skew Out of Range
OTM4 client facility alarms
• Loss Of Signal
• Loss of Channel
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss Of Frame
• Event Log Full
• Integrated Test Set Data Retrieval Failed: Disk Full
• Integrated Test Set Data Retrieval Failed: Error
• Integrated Test Set Data Retrieval Failed: Time Out
• Integrated Test Set Data Save Completed
• Integrated Test Set Data Save Failed: FTP Access Denied
• Integrated Test Set Data Save Failed: FTP Error
• OTL Skew Out of Range
• ODU AIS
• ODU BDI
• ODU LCK
• ODU OCI
• OTU BDI
• ODU Signal Fail
• OTU Signal Fail
ETH100G client facility alarms

• Loss Of Signal
• Loss Of Frame
• Loss Of Clock
• Loss of Data Sync
• Local Fault
• Remote Fault
• Event Log Full
Photonic alarms

Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs:
• occupies one slot and offers one 100G line port and one 100G client port.
14-slot converged optical, converged optical/front electrical, or 14-slot
converged optical/rear electrical shelf.
NTK503KA).

circuit packs are provisioned in slots 7 and 8) of the 6500-7 packet-optical
shelf (NTK503RA). Unlike other Broadband circuit packs, the
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs can be equipped in slots 7 and 8 of
a 6500-7 packet-optical shelf.
• can be equipped in slot 1 of the NTK503LA variant of 2-slot shelf when the
shelf is equipped with SPAP-2 w/2xOSC (NTK555NA).
• two 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs provisioned in consecutive slots
can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without any cross-
connect). The odd number slot is working and the even number slot is
protection.
— For the 7-slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}.
— For the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}.
— For the 14-slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}, {9,10},
{11,12}, {13,14}.
— For the 32-Slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}, {11,12},
{13,14}, {15,16}, {17,18}, {21,22}, {23,24}, {25,26}, {27,28}, {31,32},
{33,34}, {35,36}, {37,38}.
• the maximum number of back-to-back 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR/
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR regenerator sites is eight.
• cannot be mated with any other type of 100G/Flex circuit pack.
(NTK505YA).
types.
7-slot optical Type 2 and NTK503LA variant of 2-slot shelf types.
specifications for the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR optical line interface circuit
packs.
Client interface on the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack supports the same
functionality and specifications as the 100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AC)
when equipped with 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA03BJE6) or 103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
(160-9114-900). For optical LR4 specifications of the client interface on the
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs, see Table 2-45 on page 2-221.
Table 2-44
Technical specifications for 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR optical interface circuit packs (100G line
interface)
Parameter 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR (NTK538UJ/

NTK538UK/NTK538UL/NTK538UM/NTK538UN)
Power consumption Typical (W): 195
(see Note 1)
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation WaveLogic 3 dual polarization
Line rate 137.85 Gbit/s (carried as 34.46 Gbaud dual
polarized QPSK)
(see Table 2-38 on page 2-208 for a list of
supported wavelengths)
Central wavelength accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -11 to +4 dBm for all variants
Receiver
Receiver type Balanced Pin Coherent
Connector type LC
Receiver Back-to-Back sensitivity (minimum -28 dBm (per channel) (see Note 4 and Note 5)
EOL) (see Note 3)
Table 2-44
interface) (continued)

Receiver overload +5 dBm (per channel) (see Note 5 and Note 6)
+5 dBm (total power) (see Note 5 and Note 7)
Receiver damage level +17 dBm (total power) (see Note 10)
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.5 dB (total power) at power levels >= -10 dBm
(see Note 5)
FEC coding gain at 1E-15 11.7 dB (using Ciena proprietary FEC) (see Note 8)
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) tolerance 150 ps [mean DGD] for all variants
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) 2 dB
ROADM support Up to 16 (estimate)
Chromatic dispersion tolerance • - 90000 ps/nm to +135000 for NTK538UJ
• +/- 90000 for NTK538UK
• +/- 50000 ps/nm for NTK538UL, NTK538UM
• - 90000 ps/nm to +280000 for NTK538UN
Reach (see Note 9) • Up to 1800 km for NTK538UK
• Up to 1000 km for NTK538UL
• Up to 300 km for NTK538UM
• Application-specific for NTK538UJ
• Submarine reach for NTK538UN
Table 2-44
interface) (continued)

Note 3: Back-to-back sensitivity is defined as the Rx power for which the FEC BER threshold is not
exceeded in Tx-to-Rx fiber loopback through fiber patch cords <10m total length and a variable optical
attentuator (VOA), where Tx precompensation = 0 ps/nm.
Note 4: The minimum per channel received power level is -28 dBm which does not take into account
Note 5: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One for total
input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when, connected to the CCMD12 or
CCMD8x16 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]) and one for channel input power (the channel
corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). When the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR is used
in colored Photonic systems, the two 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR Rx interface detectors see similar power
levels. In colored line systems, the total input power monitor is the preferred monitor for channel power
since it is more accurate.
Note 6: The maximum per channel received power level is +5 dBm, which does not take into account
Note 7: The maximum received power level is +5.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx
Note 8: FEC coding gain is 11.7 dB when the OTM4 facility Performance Optimized Mode parameter
is set to OptimizationMode1 (for best reach performance). FEC coding gain is 11.1 dB when the OTM4
facility Performance Optimized Mode parameter is set to OptimizationMode2 (for best latency).
Note 9: Maximum allowed reach is subject to appropriate link engineering analysis. You must follow
the normal link engineering rules.
Table 2-45
Technical specifications for 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR optical interface circuit packs (100G client
interface)
Classification 100GBASE-LR4
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Nominal wavelength 1295 nm, 1300 nm,
1305 nm, and
1310 nm
Launch power minimum in OMA minus TDP (per lane) -2.3 dBm
Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA), each lane -1.3 to 4.5 dBm
Transmitter dispersion penalty per lane, TDP (max) 2.2 dB
Transmit average output power (Note 1) (each lane) +4.5 dBm to
-4.3 dBm
Tx average power monitor accuracy (Note 2) +/- 2 dB
Receiver
Connector type LC
Wavelength range 1294.53 nm to
1310.19 nm
Average Rx power range (Note 1 and Note 3) (per lane) 4.5 dBm to
-10.6 dBm
Receiver sensitivity in OMA (max) (each lane) -8.6 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (max), BER not worse than 1E-12 (each -6.8 dBm
lane)
Receiver overload +4.5 dBm
Receiver damage level +5.5 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy (Note 2) +/- 2 dB
Optical path
Maximum channel insertion loss 6.3 dB
Nominal reach per standard 10 km
Note 1: Average power is informative and not the principal indicator of signal strength.
Note 2: Power monitor accuracy stated applies to nominal operating power range.
Note 3: A received power below this value cannot be compliant; however, a received power above the
value listed does not ensure compliance.
Latency
Refer to Table 2-46 for latency values.
Table 2-46
Latency specifications for 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs
DWDM line/client circuit pack Typical unidirectional end-to-end

latency (µs) (Note)
Description PEC Client mapping
100G NTK538UJ/ 100GE with G.709 GMP mapped • 100GE client:
WaveLogic 3 NTK538UK/ into OPU4 — Performance optimized mode: 29
OTR NTK538UL/
NTK538UM/ — Latency optimized mode: 19
NTK538UN • OTU4 client:
— Performance optimized mode: 31
— Latency optimized mode: 21
Note: The latency reported in this table is an estimate of the latency for the entire
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR datapath, including the line modem and client functions and the client FEC.
The latency of the line modem function only is reported in Site manager as the Estimated Unidirectional
Latency. The latency of the line and client functions excluding the client FEC is also reported in Site
Manager as Estimated Client Latency. The 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs cannot be mated with
any other 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, OCI, MUX, Flex2, or Flex3 circuit packs.
Latency specifications for 100G/Flex circuit packs

Table 2-47 on page 2-224 to Table 2-50 on page 2-247 provide typical
unidirectional end-to-end latency for different 100G/Flex circuit packs.
In 6500 Release 10.1, the latency in QPSK Performance optimized mode is

significantly improved relative to previous releases for all variants of
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD). Following an upgrade to
Release 10.1, this improved latency will not be observed until after a re-
acquisition of the signal by the receiver.
Table 2-47
Latency specifications for 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 10x10G MUX/10x10GE MUX/100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs
(MOTR configuration)
DWDM circuit pack Client circuit pack Typical unidirectional

end-to-end latency
Description PEC Description PEC Client mapping
(µs) (Note 1 and Note
2)
100G MOTRs
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OC-192/STM-64 71
NTK539TBE5/ with synchronous
NTK539TCE5/ CBR10G
NTK539TDE5/
ETH10G with 71
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5 • 10.7G - GFP/
OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
• 10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
ETH10G with 70
• 11.05G -
OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
• 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Table 2-47
(MOTR configuration) (continued)

end-to-end latency
2)
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OTU2 10.7G 77
(Continued) NTK539TBE5/ (with RS8 FEC)
NTK539TCE5/ ODU2
NTK539TDE5/ transparent regen
NTK539TEE5/
OTU2 10.7G 72
NTK539TJE5
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2
transparent regen
• OTU1e 11.05G 76
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
• OTU1e 11.05G 70
(with FEC OFF)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
FC800 72
10.7G – OPU2
(Enhanced CBR)
FC1200 72
11.09G – OPU2e
(GFP-T
Transcoded)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 Add for all 2
(Continued) NTK539TBE5/ ETH10G GFP-F
NTK539TCE5/ mappings with
NTK539TDE5/ 1518 byte
NTK539TEE5/ packets
NTK539TJE5
Add for all 15
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
9600 byte
packets
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 10x10GE NTK529BAE5 ETH10G with 65
NTK539TBE5/ MUX 11.09G - OPU2e
NTK539TCE5/ (PCS
NTK539TDE5/ transparent)
NTK539TEE5/ packet mapping
NTK539TJE5 (any packet size)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
100G NTK539UA/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OC-192/STM-64 • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ with synchronous optimized mode: 38
OCLD NTK539UC/ CBR10G • Latency optimized
or NTK539UD/ mode: 24 (see Note 3)
NTK539UE/
Flex2 NTK539UH ETH10G with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 optimized mode: 38
or • 10.7G - GFP/
OCLD when in
OPU2 • Latency optimized
QPSK NTK539BB/
(standard/MAC mode: 24 (see Note 3)
modulation NTK539BE/
transparent), or
format NTK539BH/
NTK539BN • 10.7G - GFP/
or
OPU2+7
Flex3 or
(preamble/MAC
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QJ/ transparent)
OCLD when in NTK539QL/
packet mapping
QPSK NTK539QN/
(with 64 byte
modulation NTK539QK/
packets)
format NTK539QM
ETH10G with • Performance
• 11.05G - optimized mode: 37
OPU1e (PCS • Latency optimized
transparent), or mode: 23 (see Note 3)
• 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
100G NTK539UA/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OTU2 10.7G • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ (with RS8 FEC) optimized mode: 44
OCLD NTK539UC/ ODU2 • Latency optimized
or NTK539UD/ transparent regen mode: 30 (see Note 3)
NTK539UE/
Flex2 NTK539UH OTU2 10.7G • Performance
WaveLogic 3 (with FEC OFF) optimized mode: 39
OCLD when in or
ODU2 • Latency optimized
QPSK NTK539BB/ transparent regen mode: 24 (see Note 3)
format NTK539BH/ • OTU1e 11.05G • Performance
or NTK539BN (with RS8 FEC) optimized mode: 43
or ODU1e • Latency optimized
Flex3 transparent
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QJ/ mode: 29 (see Note 3)
regen, or
QPSK NTK539QN/ • OTU2e 11.09G
modulation NTK539QK/ (with RS8 FEC)
format NTK539QM ODU2e
transparent
(Continued) regen
• OTU1e 11.05G • Performance
(with FEC OFF) optimized mode: 38
ODU1e • Latency optimized
transparent mode: 23 (see Note 3)
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
FC800 • Performance
10.7G – OPU2 optimized mode: 39
(Enhanced CBR) • Latency optimized
mode: 25 (see Note 3)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
100G NTK539UA/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 FC1200 • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ 11.09G – OPU2e optimized mode: 39
OCLD NTK539UC/ (GFP-T • Latency optimized
or NTK539UD/ Transcoded) mode: 25 (see Note 3)
NTK539UE/
Flex2 NTK539UH Add for all 2
WaveLogic 3 ETH10G GFP-F
OCLD when in or
mappings with
QPSK NTK539BB/ 1518 byte
modulation NTK539BE/ packets
format NTK539BH/
NTK539BN Add for all 15
or ETH10G GFP-F
Flex3 or mappings with
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QJ/ 9600 byte
OCLD when in NTK539QL/ packets
QPSK NTK539QN/
format NTK539QM
(Continued)
100G NTK539UA/ 10x10GE NTK529BAE5 ETH10G with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ MUX 11.09G - OPU2e optimized mode: 32
OCLD NTK539UC/ (PCS • Latency optimized
or NTK539UD/ transparent) mode: 18 (see Note 3)
NTK539UE/ packet mapping
Flex2 NTK539UH (any packet size)
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in or
QPSK NTK539BB/
format NTK539BH/
or NTK539BN
Flex3 or
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QJ/
QPSK NTK539QN/
format NTK539QM
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
Flex2 NTK539BB/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OC-192/STM-64 • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ with synchronous optimized mode: 47
OCLD when in NTK539BH/ CBR10G • Latency optimized
BPSK NTK539BN mode: 29 (see Note 3)
modulation or
format ETH10G with • Performance
NTK539QJ/ optimized mode: 47
or • 10.7G - GFP/
NTK539QL/
Flex3 NTK539QN/
(standard/MAC mode: 29 (see Note 3)
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QK/
transparent), or
OCLD when in NTK539QM
BPSK • 10.7G - GFP/
modulation OPU2+7
format (preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
transparent), or mode: 28 (see Note 3)
• 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
Flex2 NTK539BB/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OTU2 10.7G • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ (with RS8 FEC) optimized mode: 53
OCLD when in NTK539BH/ ODU2 • Latency optimized
BPSK NTK539BN transparent regen mode: 35 (see Note 3)
modulation or
format OTU2 10.7G • Performance
NTK539QJ/ (with FEC OFF) optimized mode: 48
or NTK539QL/ ODU2 • Latency optimized
Flex3 NTK539QN/ transparent regen mode: 29 (see Note 3)
OCLD when in NTK539QM • OTU1e 11.05G • Performance
BPSK (with RS8 FEC) optimized mode: 52
modulation ODU1e • Latency optimized
format transparent mode: 34 (see Note 3)
(Continued) regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
transparent mode: 28 (see Note 3)
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
mode: 30 (see Note 3)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
Flex2 NTK539BB/ 10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 FC1200 • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ 11.09G – OPU2e optimized mode: 48
OCLD when in NTK539BH/ (GFP-T • Latency optimized
BPSK NTK539BN Transcoded) mode: 30 (see Note 3)
modulation or
format Add for all • For Performance
NTK539QJ/ ETH10G GFP-F optimized mode, add:
or NTK539QL/ mappings with 5
Flex3 NTK539QN/ 1518 byte • For Latency optimized
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QK/ packets mode, add: 2 (see
Note 3)
BPSK
modulation Add for all • For Performance
format ETH10G GFP-F optimized mode, add:
(Continued) mappings with 18
9600 byte • For Latency optimized
packets mode, add: 15 (see
Note 3)
Flex2 NTK539BB/ 10x10GE NTK529BAE5 ETH10G with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ MUX 11.09G - OPU2e optimized mode: 41
OCLD when in NTK539BH/ (PCS • Latency optimized
BPSK NTK539BN transparent) mode: 23 (see Note 3)
modulation or packet mapping
format (any packet size)
NTK539QJ/
or NTK539QL/
Flex3 NTK539QN/
BPSK
modulation
format
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
100G NTK539UA/ 100G NTK529EA ETH10G with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ (2xQSFP+/ • 10.7G - GFP/ optimized mode: 47
OCLD NTK539UC/ 2xSFP+) MUX OPU2 • Latency optimized
or NTK539UD/ (standard/MAC mode: 32 (see Note 3)
NTK539UE/ transparent), or
Flex2 NTK539UH
WaveLogic 3 • 10.7G - GFP/
OCLD when in or OPU2+7
QPSK NTK539BB/ (preamble/MAC
modulation NTK539BE/ transparent)
format NTK539BH/ packet mapping
or NTK539BN (with 64 byte
Flex3 or packets)
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QJ/ ETH10G with • Performance
OCLD when in NTK539QL/ optimized mode: 46
• 11.09G -
QPSK NTK539QN/
transparent) mode: 31 (see Note 3)
format NTK539QM
packet mapping
(any packet size)
40GE Performance optimized
mode: 53
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
Flex2 NTK539BB/ 100G NTK529EA ETH10G with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ (2xQSFP+/ • 10.7G - GFP/ optimized mode: 55
OCLD when in NTK539BH/ 2xSFP+) MUX OPU2 • Latency optimized
BPSK NTK539BN (standard/MAC mode: 27 (see Note 3)
modulation or transparent), or
format
NTK539QJ/ • 10.7G - GFP/
or NTK539QL/ OPU2+7
Flex3 NTK539QN/ (preamble/MAC
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QK/ transparent)
OCLD when in NTK539QM packet mapping
BPSK (with 64 byte
modulation packets)
format
transparent) mode: 52 (see Note 3)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
200G MOTRs
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Two 10x10G NTK529BBE5 OC-192/STM-64 • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ MUXs with synchronous optimized mode: 30
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ CBR10G • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ mode: 24
modulation NTK539QM
format ETH10G with • Performance
• 10.7G - GFP/ optimized mode: 30
(standard/MAC mode: 24
transparent), or
• 10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
transparent), or mode: 23
• 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Two 10x10G NTK529BBE5 OTU2 10.7G • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ MUXs (with RS8 FEC) optimized mode: 36
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ ODU2 • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ transparent regen mode: 30
modulation NTK539QM
format OTU2 10.7G • Performance
(Continued)
ODU2 • Latency optimized
transparent regen mode: 25

(with RS8 FEC) optimized mode: 35
transparent mode: 29
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
transparent mode: 24
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
mode: 25
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Two 10x10G NTK529BBE5 FC1200 • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ MUXs 11.09G – OPU2e optimized mode: 31
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ (GFP-T • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ Transcoded) mode: 25
modulation NTK539QM
format Add for all 2
ETH10G GFP-F
(Continued)
mappings with
1518 byte
packets
Add for all 15
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
9600 byte
packets
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Two 10x10GE NTK529BAE5 ETH10G with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ MUXs 11.09G - OPU2e optimized mode: 24
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ (PCS • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ transparent) mode: 18
modulation NTK539QM packet mapping
format (any packet size)
Table 2-47

end-to-end latency
2)
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Two 100G NTK529EA ETH10G with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ (2xQSFP+/ • 10.7G - GFP/ optimized mode: 38
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ 2xSFP+) OPU2 • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ MUXs (standard/MAC mode: 32
modulation NTK539QM transparent), or
format
• 10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
transparent) mode: 47
packet mapping
(any packet size)
40GE Performance optimized
mode: 44
Note 1: The unidirectional, end-to-end latency is an estimate for one direction (input to output) with line FEC
enabled (FEC cannot be turned off on 100G OCLD or WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs). For example, for a
path from a client 10x10GE MUX input to a far-end client 10x10GE MUX output through two 100G OCLDs
when client mapping is ETH10G with 11.09G, the total latency is 65 µs (not 2 x 65 = 130 µs).
Note 2: Soft or hard differential encoding with QPSK modulation adds two microseconds to the latency in
latency optimized mode.
Note 3: For the latency values of QPSK and BPSK modulation formats in Latency optimized mode, it is
assumed that ENM=Standard mode.
Table 2-48
WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit packs (OTR configuration)
DWDM circuit pack Client circuit pack Typical

unidirectional end-
to-end latency (µs)
(Note 1 and Note 2)
100G OTRs
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 100GE OCI NTK529AAE5 100GE with bit 65
NTK539TBE5/ and clock
NTK539TCE5/ transparent
NTK539TDE5/ mapping into
NTK539TEE5/ ODU4
NTK539TJE5
100GE with 65
G.709 GMP
mapped into
OPU4
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 100G OCI NTK529ABE5 100GE with 65
NTK539TBE5/ NTK529AC G.709 GMP
NTK539TCE5/ mapped into
NTK539TDE5/ OPU4
NTK539TEE5/
OTU4 with ODU4 63
NTK539TJE5
transparent regen
(with FEC OFF)
OTU4 with ODU4 65
transparent regen
(with RS8 FEC)
100G NTK539UA/ 100GE OCI NTK529AAE5 100GE with bit • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ and clock optimized mode: 34
OCLD NTK539UC/ transparent • Latency optimized
NTK539UD/ mapping into mode: 19 (see Note
NTK539UE/ ODU4 3)
NTK539UH
100GE with • Performance
G.709 GMP optimized mode: 34
mapped into • Latency optimized
OPU4 mode: 19 (see Note
3)
Table 2-48
WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit packs (OTR configuration) (continued)

unidirectional end-
(Note 1 and Note 2)
100G NTK539UA/ 100G OCI NTK529ABE5 100GE with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ NTK529AC G.709 GMP optimized mode: 32
OCLD NTK539UC/ mapped into • Latency optimized
or NTK539UD/ OPU4 mode: 18 (see Note
NTK539UE/ 3)
Flex2 NTK539UH
WaveLogic 3 OTU4 with ODU4 • Performance
OCLD when in or
transparent regen optimized mode: 30
QPSK NTK539BB/ (with FEC OFF) • Latency optimized
mode: 16 (see Note
format NTK539BH/
3)
or NTK539BN
or OTU4 with ODU4 • Performance
Flex3 transparent regen optimized mode: 33
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QJ/ (with RS8 FEC) • Latency optimized
QPSK NTK539QN/ mode: 18 (see Note
modulation NTK539QK/ 3)
format NTK539QM
Flex2 NTK539BB/ 100G OCI NTK529ABE5 100GE with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ NTK529AC G.709 GMP optimized mode: 41
OCLD when in NTK539BH/ mapped into • Latency optimized
BPSK NTK539BN OPU4 mode: 23 (see Note
modulation or 3)
format
NTK539QJ/ OTU4 with ODU4 • Performance
or NTK539QL/ transparent regen optimized mode: 39
Flex3 NTK539QN/ (with FEC OFF) • Latency optimized
mode: 21 (see Note
3)
BPSK
modulation OTU4 with ODU4 • Performance
format transparent regen optimized mode: 42
(with RS8 FEC) • Latency optimized
mode: 23 (see Note
3)
Table 2-48
WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit packs (OTR configuration) (continued)

unidirectional end-
(Note 1 and Note 2)
200G OTRs
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ 100G OCI NTK529AC 100GE with • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ G.709 GMP optimized mode: 24
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ mapped into • Latency optimized
QPSK NTK539QK/ OPU4 mode: 18
modulation NTK539QM
format OTU4 with ODU4 • Performance
(with FEC OFF) • Latency optimized
mode: 16
OTU4 with ODU4 • Performance
(with RS8 FEC) • Latency optimized
mode: 19
Note 1: The unidirectional, end-to-end latency is an estimate for one direction (input to output) with line
FEC enabled (FEC cannot be turned off on 100G OCLD or WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
Note 2: Soft or hard differential encoding with QPSK modulation adds two microseconds to the latency
in latency optimized mode.
Table 2-49
Latency specifications for 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (regen)
DWDM circuit pack DWDM circuit pack Typical

unidirectional end-
(Note 1 and Note 5)
100G Regens
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 100G OCLD 56
NTK539TBE5/ NTK539TBE5/ regen, ODU4
NTK539TCE5/ NTK539TCE5/ transparent (see
NTK539TDE5/ NTK539TDE5/ Note 2)
NTK539TEE5/ NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5 NTK539TJE5
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 100G NTK539UA/ 100G OCLD/ See Note 3
NTK539TBE5/ WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ 100G WaveLogic
NTK539TCE5/ OCLD NTK539UC/ 3 OCLD
NTK539TDE5/ NTK539UD/ regen, ODU4
NTK539TEE5/ NTK539UE/ transparent (see
NTK539TJE5 NTK539UH Note 2)
100G NTK539UA/ 100G NTK539UA/ 100G • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ WaveLogic 3 optimized mode: 24
OCLD NTK539UC/ OCLD NTK539UC/ OCLD • Latency optimized
NTK539UD/ NTK539UD/ regen, ODU4 mode: 9 (see Note
NTK539UE/ NTK539UE/ transparent (see 6)
NTK539UH NTK539UH Note 2)
100G NTK539UA/ 100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/ 100G See Note 3
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ NTK539TBE5/ WaveLogic 3
OCLD NTK539UC/ NTK539TCE5/ OCLD/
NTK539UD/ NTK539TDE5/ 100G OCLD
NTK539UE/ NTK539TEE5/ regen, ODU4
NTK539UH NTK539TJE5 transparent (see
Note 2)
Table 2-49
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (regen) (continued)

unidirectional end-
(Note 1 and Note 5)
Flex2 NTK539BB/ Flex2 NTK539BB/ Flex2/Flex2 or • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ Flex3/Flex2 optimized mode: 24
OCLD when in NTK539BH/ OCLD when in NTK539BH/ WaveLogic 3 • Latency optimized
QPSK NTK539BN QPSK NTK539BN OCLD mode: 9 (see Note
modulation or modulation regen, ODU4 6)
format format transparent (see
NTK539QJ/ Note 2)
or NTK539QL/
Flex3 NTK539QN/
QPSK
modulation
format
BPSK NTK539BN QPSK NTK539BN OCLD mode: 14 (see Note
NTK539QJ/ Note 2) (see Note 4)
or NTK539QL/
Flex3 NTK539QN/
BPSK
modulation
format
Table 2-49

unidirectional end-
(Note 1 and Note 5)
BPSK NTK539BN BPSK NTK539BN OCLD mode: 14 (see Note
NTK539QJ/ Note 2)
or NTK539QL/
Flex3 NTK539QN/
BPSK
modulation
format
100G NTK539UA/ Flex2 NTK539BB/ 100G WaveLogic • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ 3 OCLD/Flex2 optimized mode: 24
OCLD NTK539UC/ OCLD when in NTK539BH/ WaveLogic 3 • Latency optimized
NTK539UD/ QPSK NTK539BN OCLD mode: 9 (see Note
NTK539UE/ modulation regen, ODU4 6)
NTK539UH format transparent (see
Note 4)
100G NTK539UA/ Flex2 NTK539BB/ 100G WaveLogic • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539UB/ WaveLogic 3 NTK539BE/ 3 OCLD/Flex2 optimized mode: 39
OCLD NTK539UC/ OCLDs when NTK539BH/ WaveLogic 3 • Latency optimized
NTK539UD/ in BPSK NTK539BN OCLD mode: 14 (see Note
NTK539UE/ modulation regen, ODU4 6)
NTK539UH format transparent (see
Note 4)
Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Flex3 WaveLogic • Performance
WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ WaveLogic 3 NTK539QL/ 3 OCLD/Flex3 optimized mode: 24
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ OCLD when in NTK539QN/ WaveLogic 3 • Latency optimized
QPSK NTK539QK/ QPSK NTK539QK/ OCLD mode: 9 (see Note
modulation NTK539QM modulation NTK539QM regen, ODU4 6)
Note 4)
Table 2-49

unidirectional end-
(Note 1 and Note 5)
200G Regens
Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Flex3 WaveLogic • Performance
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ OCLD when in NTK539QN/ WaveLogic 3 • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ 16QAM NTK539QK/ OCLD mode: 18
modulation NTK539QM modulation NTK539QM regen, ODU4
format format transparent
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Two Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Flex3 WaveLogic • Performance
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ OCLDs when NTK539QN/ WaveLogic 3 • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ in QPSK NTK539QK/ OCLD mode: 18
One Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Four Flex3 NTK539QJ/ Flex3 WaveLogic • Performance
OCLD when in NTK539QN/ OCLDs when NTK539QN/ WaveLogic 3 • Latency optimized
16QAM NTK539QK/ in BPSK NTK539QK/ OCLD mode: 24
Table 2-49

unidirectional end-
(Note 1 and Note 5)
Note 1: The unidirectional, end-to-end latency is an estimate for one direction (input to output) with line
FEC enabled (FEC cannot be turned off on 100G OCLD or WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs). For
example, for a path from a client 10x10GE MUX input to a far-end client 10x10GE MUX output through
two 100G OCLDs when client mapping is ETH10G with 11.09G, the total latency is 65 µs (not 2 x 65 =
130 µs).
Note 2: For supported regen configurations in different shelf types, refer to 40G, 100G, OSIC, ISS, and
SLIC10 Circuit Packs and 200G Services, 323-1851-102.4 (Chapter 2). The regen latency value is
measured from the line-side Rx port of one 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD, and/or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack forming the regen pair to the line-side Tx port of the
other 100G OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD and/or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack forming the regen pair.
Note 3: The latency of the 100G OCLD/ 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Regen by itself is not measurable
because the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G OCLD lines must always be bookended. For
100G OCI/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD to 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/100G OCLD Regen to 100G OCLD /
100G OCI, total unidirectional latency excluding 100G OCIs is 94 µs without Latency optimized mode and
64 µs with Latency optimized mode.
Note 4: The latencies in the two directions through this hybrid regen type are not equal. The larger of the
two latencies is listed for performance optimized and latency optimized.
Note 5: Soft or hard differential encoding with QPSK modulation adds two microseconds to the latency
in latency optimized mode.
Table 2-50
Latency specifications for 100G OCI and 10x10G MUX circuit packs (100G client card back-to-
back configuration)
Client circuit pack Client circuit pack Typical

unidirectional end-
Description Client mapping Description and Client mapping
and (PEC) (PEC)
100G OCI 100GE with 100G OCI 100GE with 10
(NTK529AC) G.709 GMP (NTK529AC) G.709 GMP
100GE with OTU4 (with RS8 11
G.709 GMP FEC)
100GE with OTU4 (with FEC 10
G.709 GMP OFF)
OTU4 (with RS8 OTU4 (with RS8 11
FEC) FEC)
OTU4 (with RS8 OTU4 (with FEC 11
FEC) OFF)
OTU4 (with FEC OTU4 (with FEC 8
OFF) OFF)
10x10G MUX OC-192/STM-64 100G OCI OTU4 (with RS8 16
(NTK529BBE5) with synchronous (NTK529AC) FEC)
CBR10G
OC-192/STM-64 OTU4 (with FEC 16
with synchronous OFF)
CBR10G
Table 2-50
back configuration) (continued)

unidirectional end-
and (PEC) (PEC)
10x10G MUX ETH10G with 100G OCI OTU4 (with RS8 16
(NTK529BBE5) • 10.7G - GFP/ (NTK529AC) FEC)
(Continued) OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
• 10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
ETH10G with OTU4 (with FEC 16
• 10.7G - GFP/ OFF)
OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
• 10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
Table 2-50

unidirectional end-
and (PEC) (PEC)
10x10G MUX ETH10G with 100G OCI OTU4 (with RS8 15
(NTK529BBE5) • 11.05G - (NTK529AC) FEC)
(Continued) OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
• 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
ETH10G with OTU4 (with FEC 15
• 11.05G - OFF)
OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
• 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
OTU2 10.7G OTU4 (with RS8 22
(with RS8 FEC) FEC)
ODU2
transparent
regen
OTU2 10.7G OTU4 (with FEC 22
(with RS8 FEC) OFF)
ODU2
transparent
regen
OTU2 10.7G OTU4 (with FEC 17
(with FEC OFF) OFF)
ODU2
transparent
regen
Table 2-50

unidirectional end-
and (PEC) (PEC)
10x10G MUX • OTU1e 11.05G 100G OCI OTU4 (with RS8 21
(NTK529BBE5) (with RS8 FEC) (NTK529AC) FEC)
(Continued) ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
• OTU1e 11.05G OTU4 (with FEC 21
(with RS8 FEC) OFF)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
• OTU1e 11.05G OTU4 (with FEC 16
(with FEC OFF) OFF)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
• OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
FC800 OTU4 (with RS8 17
10.7G – OPU2 FEC)
(Enhanced CBR)
FC800 OTU4 (with FEC 17
10.7G – OPU2 OFF)
(Enhanced CBR)
Table 2-50

unidirectional end-
and (PEC) (PEC)
10x10G MUX FC1200 100G OCI OTU4 (with RS8 17
(NTK529BBE5) 11.09G – OPU2e (NTK529AC) FEC)
(Continued) (GFP-T
Transcoded)
FC1200 OTU4 (with FEC 17
11.09G – OPU2e OFF)
(GFP-T
Transcoded)
Add for all OTU4 (with RS8 2
ETH10G GFP-F FEC)
mappings with
1518 byte
packets
Add for all OTU4 (with FEC 2
ETH10G GFP-F OFF)
mappings with
1518 byte
packets
Add for all OTU4 (with RS8 15
ETH10G GFP-F FEC)
mappings with
9600 byte
packets
Add for all OTU4 (with FEC 15
ETH10G GFP-F OFF)
mappings with
9600 byte
packets
100G circuit packs provisioning procedures

The following flowcharts provide the various steps/procedures that must be
performed in order to have the 100G circuit packs ready to carry traffic.
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX / 100GE OCI and 100G OCLD/100G

WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Install OCLD and

10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/
100GE OCI circuit packs,
and install client pluggable(s)
Note 1: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Fiber client and line 323-1851-102.6.
side ports
Note 2: 1+1 Port TPT is supported on 10x10G MUX
Procedures 2-3 and 2-4 (NTK529BB) only.
Edit OCLD line

facility parameters
(Tx Wavelength and Tx Power)
Procedure 2-6
Add client facility if applicable
Procedure 2-5
Edit client facility parameters
Procedure 2-6
Provision ODU4 transponder

cross-connection between the
10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100GE OCI
and the OCLD
Procedure 2-9
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
Change protection Photonic Layer Guide
Is client side Yes scheme to NTRN15DA
Procedure 2-7
No Yes
Is GCC0 or GCC1 Yes Provision GCC0/GCC1 Is this to be carried End

required? over a Procedure
Procedure 2-8 Photonic Layer? No
No
100G OCI and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Install OCLD and

100G OCI circuit packs Note: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Procedure 2-1
323-1851-102.6.
Change the 100G OCI
equipment profile if required
Procedures 2-10
Install client pluggable(s)
Procedure 2-2

side ports
Edit OCLD
line facility parameters
Procedure 2-6
Add client facility if applicable
Procedure 2-5
Procedure 2-6

100G OCI and the OCLD
Procedure 2-9
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
Procedure 2-7
No Yes

No
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator
Install OCLD
circuit packs
Procedure 2-1 layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
Fiber line 323-1851-102.6.
side ports
Edit OCLD line

facility parameters
Procedure 2-6
See "Photonic
Network SLAT"
Provision ODU4 transponder in the Photonic
cross-connection Layer Guide
between the OCLDs NTRN15DA
Procedure 2-9
Yes
Is GCC0 Yes Provision GCC0 Is this to be carried End

Required? over a Procedure
No
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX and Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Install OCLD and MUX

circuit packs, and install client
pluggable(s)

Note 1: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Fiber client and line layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
side ports provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
323-1851-102.6.
Note 2: 1+1 Port TPT is supported on 10x10G MUX
Change the OCLD (NTK529BB) only.
equipment profile
Procedures 2-10
Add line facility on OCLD(s)

and client facilities on MUX(es)
Procedure 2-5
Edit line facility parameters

Procedure 2-6
Procedure 2-6

MUX(es) and the OCLD(s)
Procedure 2-9
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
Procedure 2-7
No Yes

No
100G OCI and Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Install OCLD and OCI

circuit packs
Procedure 2-1 Note: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Change the OCLD provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
equipment profile 323-1851-102.6.
Procedures 2-10
Change the OCI

equipment profile if required
Procedures 2-10
Install client pluggable(s)
Procedure 2-2

side ports
Add line facility on

OCLD(s)
Procedure 2-5

Procedure 2-6
Procedure 2-6

OCI(s) and the OCLD(s)
Procedure 2-9
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
Procedure 2-7
No Yes

No
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2

WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Install OCLD and MUX

circuit packs and client
pluggable(s)
Note : To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
323-1851-102.6.
side ports
Change the OCLD equipment

profile if applicable
Procedures 2-10
Add line facilities on OCLD(s)

and client facilities on MUX(es)
Procedure 2-5

Procedure 2-6
Procedure 2-6
Refer to "Photonic
Provision ODU4 transponder network SLAT" in
cross-connection(s) between Photonic Layer Guide
the MUX(es) and the OCLD(s) NTRN15DA
Procedure 2-9
Yes

No
Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator
Install OCLD circuit packs

Procedure 2-1
Fiber line 323-1851-102.6.
side ports
Change the OCLD

equipment profile
Procedures 2-10
Add line facility on

OCLDs
Procedure 2-5

Procedure 2-6
See "Photonic
Network SLAT"
Provision ODU4 transponder in the Photonic
cross-connection between Layer Guide
the OCLDs NTRN15DA
Procedure 2-9
Yes
Is GCC0 Yes Provision GCC0 Is this to be carried End

Required? over a Procedure
No
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX and 100G OCI
Install 100G OCI and

10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX
circuit packs, and install
pluggables
Connect fibers to layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
circuit packs provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
323-1851-102.6.
Add and edit OTM4 facility

on 100G OCI
Procedure 2-5
Add and edit 10G client facilities

on 10x10GE MUX or
10x10G MUX
Procedure 2-6

100G OCI and 10x10GE MUX
or 10x10G MUX
Procedure 2-9
Is GCC0 or GCC1 Yes Provision GCC0/GCC1

required?
Procedure 2-8
No

over a Procedure
Photonic Layer? No
Yes
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
NTRN15DA
100G OCI and 100G OCI
Install 100G OCI

circuit packs and install
pluggables

Connect fibers to layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
circuit packs provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
323-1851-102.6.
Add and edit 100G facilities

on 100G OCI
Procedure 2-5

two 100G OCI
Procedure 2-9
Is GCC0 or GCC1 Yes Provision GCC0/GCC1

required?
Procedure 2-8
No

over a Procedure
Photonic Layer? No
Yes
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
NTRN15DA
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR
Install 100G WaveLogic 3

OTR circuit pack Note : To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Procedures 2-1 provisioning procedures" in Photonics Equipment,
323-1851-102.6.
Fiber line and client ports
Delete the client facility

Equipment profile Yes
change required? Procedure 2-13
No
Edit line facility and Change the equipment
client facility if required profile2
Procedure 2-6 Procedure 2-10
Change protection
Is client side Yes scheme to
Procedure 2-7
No
Yes Provision GCC0/GCC1

Is GCC0 or GCC1
required? Procedures 2-8
No
Is this to be carried Yes See "Photonic Network

over a SLAT" in the Photonic
Photonic Layer? Layer Guide, NTRN15DA
No
End
Procedure
In the following sections, WaveLogic 3 OCLD refers to the 100G WaveLogic 3

OCLD, the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
unless specified otherwise.
Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit

packs
General rules:
• Auto-provisioning a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack sets the
equipment profile to None. The OTM4 facility is not created.
Rules for editing the equipment profile:

• The equipment profile can be edited only if no facility exists.
• The equipment profile can be edited from None to QPSK100G or
2xBPSK100G, or from QPSK100G or 2xBPSK100G to None.
• Editing the equipment profile directly from QPSK100G to 2xBPSK100G,

or vice versa, is not supported.
• You can also set the equipment profile to QPSK100G or 2xBPSK100G
when you manually provision a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
• Successful editing of the equipment profile to QPSK100G or
2xBPSK100G auto-creates the OTM4 facility (or facilities) if the
provisioning mode is set to TRNSPNDR. Otherwise, facilities must be
QPSK mode:
• In QPSK mode (equipment profile set to QPSK100G), one Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack provides a 100G QPSK OCLD interface.
• Provisioning a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack manually with the
equipment profile set to QPSK100G auto-creates the OTM4 facility if the
provisioning mode is set to TRNSPNDR. Otherwise, facilities must be
BPSK mode:
• In BPSK mode (equipment profile set to 2xBPSK100G), two adjacent
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs form a 100G BPSK circuit pack
group to provide a 100G BPSK OCLD interface. The left slot OCLD is
called the prime circuit pack. The right slot OCLD is called the member
circuit pack. The following pairings are supported:
— NTK539BH + NTK539BH
— NTK539BH + NTK539BB
— NTK539BB + NTK539BB
— NTK539BE + NTK539BE
— NTK539BN + NTK539BN
• Before you can provision the BPSK mode, the two adjacent slots to be part
of the 100G BPSK circuit pack group must be either unprovisioned or
provisioned with compatible Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with
the equipment profile set to None.
• Manually editing the equipment profile from None to 2xBPSK100G is
supported on the prime circuit pack only. Successful editing
— auto-creates the member equipment (if not already existing) in the
right slot with the same PEC as the prime
— sets the equipment profile to 2xBPSK100G on both the prime and
member equipment
— auto-creates the OTM4 facility on both the prime and member
equipment if the provisioning mode is set to TRNSPNDR. Otherwise,
facilities must be manually provisioned.
• Manually editing the equipment profile on the member circuit pack is not
supported.
• The member OTM4 or PTP facility, which is auto-created/deleted with the
prime OTM4 or PTP facility, cannot be manually added/deleted.
• The member circuit pack cannot be manually deleted until the equipment
profile is changed to None on the prime circuit pack.
• In 7-slot shelves and 14-slot converged shelves (NTK503ADE5,
NTK503BDE5, NTK503CDE5), the prime circuit pack must be in an odd
slot.
• Manual provisioning of Broadband facilities is possible when the
provisioning mode is TRNSPNDR.
• Manual provisioning of POTS facilities is possible when the provisioning
mode is POTS. PTP provisioning triggers equipment mating with the 100G
PKT/OTN XCIF.
• See OTN I/F, and PKT I/F, and PKT/OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-
102.8, for more information about the POTS facilities.
Provisioning rules summary for the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit

packs
General rule:
• Auto-provisioning a Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack sets the
equipment profile to None. No facility can be created when the equipment
profile is None.
Rules for editing the equipment profile:

• The equipment profile can be edited only if no facility exists.
• The equipment profile can be edited from None to QPSK100G,
2xBPSK100G, or 16QAM200G, or from QPSK100G, 2xBPSK100G, or
16QAM200G to None.
• Editing the equipment profile directly between QPSK100G, 2xBPSK100G,
or 16QAM200G is not supported.
• You can also set the equipment profile to QPSK100G, 2xBPSK100G, or
16QAM200G when you manually provision a Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
• Successful editing of the equipment profile to QPSK100G or
2xBPSK100G auto-creates the OTM4 facility (or facilities).
• Successful editing of the equipment profile to 16QAM200G auto-creates
the OTMC2 facility.
QPSK mode:
• In QPSK mode (equipment profile set to QPSK100G), one Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack provides a 100G QPSK OCLD interface.
equipment profile set to QPSK100G auto-creates the OTM4 facility.
BPSK mode:
• In BPSK mode (equipment profile set to 2xBPSK100G), two adjacent
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs form a 100G BPSK circuit pack
group to provide a 100G BPSK OCLD interface. The left slot OCLD is
called the prime circuit pack. The right slot OCLD is called the member
circuit pack. The following pairings are supported:
— NTK539QJ + NTK539QJ
— NTK539QJ + NTK539QK
— NTK539QK + NTK539QK
— NTK539QN + NTK539QN
• Pairing of Flex3 and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in BPSK
mode is not supported.
• Before you can provision the BPSK mode, the two adjacent slots to be part
of the 100G BPSK circuit pack group must be either unprovisioned or
provisioned with compatible Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with
the equipment profile set to None.
• Manually editing the equipment profile from None to 2xBPSK100G is
supported on the prime circuit pack only. Successful editing
— auto-creates the member equipment (if not already existing) in the
right slot with the same PEC as the prime
— sets the equipment profile to 2xBPSK100G on both the prime and
member equipment
— auto-creates the OTM4 facility on both the prime and member
equipment.
• Manually editing the equipment profile on the member circuit pack is not
supported.
• The member OTM4, which is auto-created/deleted with the prime OTM4,
cannot be manually added/deleted.
• The member circuit pack cannot be manually deleted until the equipment
profile is changed to None on the prime circuit pack.
• In 7-slot shelves and 14-slot converged shelves (NTK503AD, NTK503BD,
NTK503CD), the prime circuit pack must be in an odd slot.
16QAM mode:
• In 16QAM mode (equipment profile set to 16QAM200G), one Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack provides a 200G 16QAM OCLD interface.
equipment profile set to 16QAM200G auto-creates the OTMC2 facility
• In a 200G triplet configuration, the left client of the near-end node is
bookended to the left client of the far-end node, and the right client of the
near-end node is bookended to the right client of the far-end node.
Provisioning rules summary for the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G
OCI circuit packs
supports the Broadband facilities only.
• If a PKT/OTN cross-connect is provisioned in the shelf, the facilities that
can be provisioned depends on the provisioning mode.
• Manual provisioning of Broadband facilities is possible when the
provisioning mode is TRNSPNDR.
• Manual provisioning of POTS facilities is possible when the provisioning
mode is POTS. PTP provisioning triggers equipment mating with the 100G
PKT/OTN XCIF.
• See OTN I/F, and PKT I/F, and PKT/OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-
102.8, for more information about the POTS facilities.
Table 2-51 provides references to different procedures covered in this chapter.
Table 2-51
Topic Page
Procedure 2-1‚ Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 2-267
Procedure 2-2‚ Provisioning a pluggable automatically 2-269
Procedure 2-3‚ Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 2-270
Procedure 2-4‚ Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables to 2-280
circuit packs
Procedure 2-5‚ Adding a facility to an equipment 2-287
Procedure 2-6‚ Editing facility parameters 2-292
Procedure 2-7‚ Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 2-294
Procedure 2-8‚ Adding a new entry in the communications settings 2-300
Procedure 2-9‚ Adding a transponder connection 2-302
Procedure 2-10‚ Changing the equipment profile 2-304

Procedure 2-11‚ Changing the primary state of a facility 2-307
Procedure 2-12‚ Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or 2-309
pluggable
Procedure 2-13‚ Deleting a facility from an equipment 2-311
Procedure 2-14‚ Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 2-313
Procedure 2-1
If automatic equipping is enabled, a 100G circuit pack and any pluggables
present auto-provision when inserted in the shelf. The circuit pack and
pluggables default to in-service.
Facilities may or may not auto-provision, depending on the circuit pack or

pluggable type. See Table 2-52 on page 2-288 for details. The primary state
of an auto-created facility defaults to the primary state of its parent equipment.

301.
See the Equipping rules sections for supported slots for 100G WaveLogic 3
OTR, 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100GE OCI, 100G OCI, 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+)
MUX, and 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX circuit packs. If a circuit pack is
inserted in an unsupported slot, an Autoprovisioning Mismatch alarm is
raised.
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Risk of circuit pack damage
Do not force a circuit pack all the way to the back of its slot if it
resists insertion. Before installing a circuit pack, make sure
you know the detailed procedure for inserting the circuit packs.
CAUTION
Risk of incorrect installation
Make sure that the circuit pack lock/eject latches are locked in
position. If the lock covers are not locked, the latch sensors on
the circuit pack do not allow the shelf to identify the circuit
pack, and do not allow the circuit pack to autoprovision.

If a 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR, 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2

WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100GE OCI, 100G OCI, 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, or 10x10G MUX circuit pack is
inserted in a 14-slot shelf, high flow fan requirement must be met before the
card can be provisioned. For more information on the shelf actual cooling
capacity, see node information in Administration and Security, 323-1851-301.
Prerequisites
• To provision equipment for an empty equipment slot, ensure the last
equipment that occupied the slot and its related facilities and cross-
connects have been deleted.
• Ensure the plastic pin protector on the circuit pack has been removed.
Step Action

ground point.
2 Insert the circuit pack in the correct slot in the shelf.
If you are logged in to Site Manager when you automatically provision a circuit
pack, the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application will auto-refresh to
display the circuit pack in the list of available equipment. You can also click
the Refresh button to do the manual refresh.
—end—
Procedure 2-2
Provisioning a pluggable automatically
Use this procedure to provision pluggables automatically on supported circuit
packs.
If automatic equipping is enabled, when inserted in the circuit pack, a

pluggable is automatically provisioned. Facilities may or may not auto-
provision, depending on the pluggable type. See Table 2-52 on page 2-288 for
details. The primary state of an auto-created facility defaults to the primary
state of its parent equipment.

301.
CAUTION
packs.
Prerequisites
• To provision a pluggable for an empty circuit pack port, ensure the last
pluggable that occupied the circuit pack port and its related facilities and
cross-connects have been deleted.
• Ensure the plastic pluggable port protector has been removed.
Step Action

ground point.
2 Insert the pluggable in the correct circuit pack port in the shelf.
—end—
Procedure 2-3
Use this procedure to route fiber-optic cables onto the 7-slot, 6500-7 packet-
optical, 14-slot or 32-slot 6500 shelf, as applicable.
In order to prevent congestion in the shelf fiber manager and minimize

interference between fiber patch cords and a shelf front cover, you must
consider the recommendations detailed in “Some operational considerations”
in 323-1851-151, Planning - Ordering Information, if any of the following apply:
• using fiber patch cords with a boot length greater than 42.5 mm (not
recommended, but using an extended depth cover solution will provide
additional space in front of the circuit packs)
• using in-line optical attenuators (fixed pads) (not recommended, but using
an extended depth cover solution will provide additional space in front of
the circuit packs)
• using fiber patch cords with a 2.0 mm diameter when more than 192 fibers
are required per side in a 14-slot shelf or per quadrant in a 32-slot shelf
(using bend-insensitive optical patch cords with 1.6 mm diameter is
recommended when fiber manager congestion is a concern)
• using bend-insensitive optical patch cords with a 1.6 mm diameter when
more than 256 fibers are required per quadrant in a 32-slot packet-optical
shelf.
The fiber manager in each quadrant of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf

accommodates 256 1.6 mm fiber patch cords. With Release 10 or higher
of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf, for any slot that uses only 1.6 mm bend-
insensitive fiber, it is possible to further reduce fiber congestion by
converting the slot’s fiber routing guide from a bend radius of 25 mm to
10 mm by snapping off the removable part of the slot fiber guide. When
the 25 mm snap-off/on feature is removed, the fiber bend radius is 10 mm,
which requires the use of bend-insensitive fiber.
Figure 2-55 on page 2-271 shows examples of fiber managers and related
slot fiber guides based on the version of 32-slot packet-optical shelf.

Figure 2-55
Example of fiber managers and slot fiber guides—32-slot packet-optical shelves
Pre-Release 10 of a
32-slot packet-optical shelf
Example showing one
quadrant with fixed
slot fiber guides
Release 10 or higher
of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf
Example showing one

quadrant with slot fiber
guides with and without
the 25 mm bend radius
snap-off/on feature

starting from the outer slot in a quadrant and working towards the center of the
shelf. When all the fiber guides in a quadrant are converted from a bend radius
of 25 mm to 10 mm, 384 1.6 mm fiber patch cords can be accommodated. For
details, see Figure 2-56 on page 2-272.

Figure 2-56
32-slot packet-optical shelf—(Release 10 and higher)—preparing fiber managers for a high
density of 1.6 mm bend-insensitive fiber in a quadrant
Slot fiber guides

in the fiber manager
of a quadrant
Fixed part of a
slot fiber guide

Removable part of the slot fiber guide

(25 mm bend radius snap-off/on feature)
Hole
Pin
starting from the outer slot in a quadrant and working towards the center of the shelf.
To disengage the snap-off/on part of the slot fiber guide,

flex the triangular part of the fixed slot fiber guide forward
while pushing down the front of the snap-off/on part to be removed (as shown).
The pin of the snap-off/on part disengages from the hole in the fixed part.
Then remove the snap-off/on part. Repeat for all the slot fiber guides in the quadrant.
To re-install the 25 mm bend radius snap-off/on feature,

angle the removable part and insert it so that it engages with the clips at the rear
of the fixed part of the slot fiber guide. Push the removable part such that the
pin aligns with the hole in the fixed triangular part, flexing the fixed part of the slot
fiber guide as required.

Examples of fiber routing on various shelves follow:

• 6500-7 packet-optical shelf—Figure 2-58 on page 2-275
• 32-slot packet-optical shelves—Figure 2-60 on page 2-277
Some figures show power cables and communication cables as well as fiber-
optic cables. Before routing fiber-optic cables, connect power cables to the
power input cards and communication cables to the access panel. (For
details, see the Installation technical publication specific to the respective
6500 shelf type.) For certain shelves, the fiber-optic cables overlap with power
cables and/or communication cables. For such shelves, a right side view of the
shelf is also provided to show the placement of each type of cable.

Figure 2-57
Example of fiber routing for a 7-slot optical shelf (NTK503PAE5)

Figure 2-58
Example of fiber routing for a 6500-7 packet-optical shelf (NTK503RA)

Figure 2-59
Example of fiber routing for a 14-slot shelf

Figure 2-60
Example of fiber routing for a 32-slot packet-optical shelf
Prerequisites
• Make sure that you have hook and loop cables ties (such as VELCRO).
• Make sure that you have removed the snap-off/on part of the fiber routing
guides of a 32-slot packet-optical shelf (Release 10 or higher), for all slots
that will be equipped with a high density of 1.6 mm bend-insensitive fiber
patch cords (see Figure 2-56 on page 2-272).

CAUTION
Risk of fiber-optic cable damage
The minimum bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 1.5 in.
(3.8 cm). Observe this limit at all times to avoid low fiber-optic
cable performance or damage.
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

ground point.
If the shelf cover is Then
installed on the card cage remove the shelf cover (refer to the
appropriate procedure in the Installation
technical publication specific to the
respective 6500 shelf type). Then go to step
3.
not installed on the card cage go to step 3
3 Flip down the fiber channel door (if applicable).

4 Route the optical fibers or cables through the fiber channel.
• For the 7-slot shelf or the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf, route optical fibers
that terminate on slot 1 to 4 toward the bottom of the rack through the
appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide, and route optical fibers that
terminate on slot 5 to 7 (slot 5 and 6 of the 6500-7 packet-optical shelf)
toward the top of the rack through the appropriate channel of the fiber
routing guide.
• Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 1 to 7 of 14-slot shelf
or slot 1 to 8 and 21 to 28 of 32-slot shelf to the left side of the rack
through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 8 to 14 of 14-slot
shelf or slot 11 to 18 and 31 to 38 of 32-slot shelf to the right side of the
rack through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.

Step Action
Use external fiber management drawers to store excess fiber cable. Fiber
slack storage is not provided for fibers leaving the 6500 shelf.
5 Close the fiber channel door (if applicable).
6 If you have removed the shelf cover to route optical fibers and cables,
re-install the shelf cover (refer to the appropriate procedure in the Installation
technical publication specific to the respective 6500 shelf type).
—end—
Procedure 2-4
Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables to
circuit packs
Use this procedure to connect or disconnect fiber-optic cables to circuit packs.
Prerequisites
• Make sure you have the appropriate patch cords before connecting
fiber-optic cables.
• Make sure you have the correct tool to disconnect the connector.
— Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)
— LC fiber tool kit (174-0099-900).
Although optional, this tool assists in installing and removing LC fibers
or removing pluggables (SFP/SFP+/XFP) when space is restricted.
When not in use, this tool can be stored in its container or inside into
the shelf front cover (applies to shelf front covers NTK509CCE6,
NTK509DCE6, and NTK509CD for the 14-slot shelf types).
• If you are using fixed attenuators for the optical interfaces and the shelf is
equipped with a front cover, do not add the attenuators on the optical
interface. Instead, add the required attenuators to the patch panel or
inside a fiber storage tray.
• For 6500 circuit packs such as SMUX that the fiber connection is coming
out from faceplate at 90 degrees, use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm
flexible strain relief boots, NTTC50xxV6 Ciena-supplied patchcords or
equivalent with Telcordia GR-326 compliant, short flexible LC strain relief
boot (Corning or equivalent).
Do not install in-line plug attenuators at the 6500 circuit pack faceplate on
ports that are perpendicular to the faceplate (also not recommended on
angled ports). See Figure 2-61 on page 2-281.

Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs
Figure 2-61
6500 optical fiber boot length
Example of
incorrect boot length
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury
When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack
emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
the optical interface circuit packs capped when they are not
connected to optical fiber cables. Never look directly into the
end of an optical fiber.

Step Action

cord to the ESD jack on the shelf installed in a grounded rack/cabinet or clip
to a suitable ground point.
If Then go to
connecting fiber-optic cables to a circuit pack step 3
disconnecting fiber-optic cables from a circuit pack step 11
For the Universal fiber tool (NTK458TC), see Figure 2-62.

Figure 2-62
Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)
For the LC fiber tool (174-009-900), see Figure 2-63 on page 2-283.

Step Action
Figure 2-63
LC fiber tool—two views
Connecting fiber-optic cables

3 Inspect and clean connectors and adaptors on patch cords. See the chapter
on cleaning connectors in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.
Make sure the two connectors to be mated are clean.
If you are using the Then go to
LC fiber tool (174-009-900) step 8
Universal fiber tool (NTK458TC) step 5
5 Connect the fiber-optic patch cord to the circuit pack port.

7 Making sure not to violate the fiber-optic cable minimum bend radius, place
any slack fiber-optic cable in external fiber management drawers.
You have completed this procedure.
Using the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)
8 If you are using the LC fiber tool (Figure 2-63 on page 2-283), connect the LC
fiber-optic patch cord to the SFP/SFP+/XFP pluggable module using the LC
fiber tool as follows.
(Figure 2-64 on page 2-284 provides an illustration of the following steps.)
a. Attach the cradle of the LC fiber tool to the boot of the LC fiber.
b. Holding the LC fiber tool, slide the LC connector into the pluggable
module.
An audible click indicates that the LC connector is fully inserted.
c. Carefully remove the LC fiber tool from the boot of the LC fiber.

Step Action
10 Make sure not to violate the fiber-optic cable minimum bend radius. Place any
slack fiber-optic cable in external fiber management drawers.
Figure 2-64
Connecting fiber-optic cables using the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)
Disconnecting fiber-optic cables

If you are using the Then go to
LC fiber tool (174-009-900) step 15
Universal fiber tool (NTK458TC) step 12

Step Action
Using the Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)

12 Disconnect the patch cord from the circuit pack using the Universal fiber
(Figure 2-62 on page 2-282) as follows:
a. Position the Universal fiber tool on the fiber-optic cable so that the fiber-
optic cable is inside and parallel to the tool.
CAUTION
Risk of breaking the connector sleeve
Do not try to rotate the removal tool.
b. Slide the Universal fiber tool toward the connector until it holds the plug
retainer.
c. Slowly pull out the connector with the Universal fiber tool.
d. Hold the Universal fiber tool in a fixed position and slide the connector
away from the Universal fiber tool.
13 Protect unused pluggable modules with the appropriate dust cover.
Using the LC fiber tool
15 Disconnect the patch cord from the SFP/SFP+/XFP pluggable module using
the LC fiber tool as follows.
(Figure 2-65 on page 2-286 provides an illustration of the following steps.)
a. Hold the LC fiber tool with the hook end pointing up and press down on
the LC connector trigger.
An audible click indicates that the LC connector is ready to be
disengaged.
b. With the hook end of the LC fiber tool pointing down, carefully disengage
the LC connector from the latch of the pluggable module.
c. Grip the boot (of the LC fiber) between your thumb and index finger
or use the cradle end of the LC fiber tool to grip the boot.
Then remove the LC fiber from the pluggable module.
16 Protect unused pluggable modules with the appropriate dust cover.
—end—
Figure 2-65
Disconnecting fiber-optic cables using the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)
Procedure 2-5
Use this procedure to:
• add a facility that was manually deleted
• add a facility which is not auto-created
• add child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facilities to an OTM facility
See Table 2-52 on page 2-288 for facility support on 100G circuit packs and
pluggable equipment.
The member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group is auto-created
when the prime OTM4 facility is added.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action

4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment or pluggable that will support the
facility.
5 If adding a client facility on the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR, select the facility type
from the Facility Type drop-down list.
A client facility can be manually added on the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR after
the line facility has been created with the Create Client Facility checkbox
unchecked.
6 Click Add in the Facility area to open the Add facility dialog box.
7 Select the facility type from the Facility Type drop-down list if applicable.
Selecting the OC192 or STM64 facility type automatically sets the port mode
to the appropriate mode.
When adding the OTM4 line facility on the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit
pack, the Create Client Facility checkbox is checked by default, which allows
a client facility to be created automatically according to the provisioned
Equipment Profile2. You can uncheck the checkbox to disable the auto-
provisioning of a client facility and then add the client facility manually once
the OTM4 line facility is created.

Step Action
8 If adding a child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facility, click the Add Child button in
the parent OTM facility area.
• Table 2-58 on page 2-317 for OC192 /STM64 facility parameters
• Table 2-59 on page 2-319 for ETH10G, ETH40G, and ETH100G facility
parameters
• Table 2-64 on page 2-347 for OTMC2 facility parameters
• Table 2-66 on page 2-354 for FLEX facility parameters
Note: On a100G OCI (NTK529AC) or 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack,
if you add an ETH100G facility after deleting an OTM4 client facility, or add an
OTM4 client facility after deleting an ETH100G facility, a “Software Auto-
Upgrade In Progress” alarm will be raised. Wait until this alarm clears before
editing equipment or facility parameters on this circuit pack.
10 Click OK to add the facility and close the Add facility dialog box.
If the circuit pack or pluggable is in-service, the new facility defaults to in-
service. If the circuit pack or pluggable is out-of-service, the new facility
defaults to out-of-service.
—end—
Table 2-52
Facilities supported on 100G circuit packs (Note 1)

10x10GE MUX OTM4 (auto) • PSFP • ETH10G (OTM2) (auto)

(100GMUX)
(Note 3)
NTK529BA


10x10G MUX OTM4 (auto), • P10GEL • ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2, ADJ)
(100GMUX) TCMCTP (auto), TCMCTP
(Note 3 and Note 4)
NTK529BB • P10GSEL • ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2, ADJ),
TCM CTP
TCMCTP
• P10GSOEL • ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2, ADJ),

TCM CTP
TCMCTP
• OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP
• FLEX (OTM2, ADJ, WAN Note 6)
(Note 7), TCM CTP
• PXFP • OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP

TCMCTP
• ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2, ADJ),
TCMCTP
100G (2xQSFP+/ OTM4 (auto) • PSFP • ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2, ADJ)
2xSFP+) MUX (auto)
(100GMUX)
(Note 4 and • PQSFP • ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2)
Note 3) • ETH40G (OTM3)
NTK529EA
100GE OCI N/A • PCFP • ETH100G (OTM4) (auto)

(100GOCI)
NTK529AA
100G OCI (100GOCI) N/A • PCFP • ETH100G (OTM4) (auto), TCM CTP
NTK529AC in or
TRNSPNDR mode • OTM4 (ADJ) (auto), TCM TTP, TCM
CTP depending on the Equipment
Profile


100G WaveLogic 3 • line (port 1): OTM4 N/A N/A

OTR (OTR) (ADJ) (auto)
NTK538Ux (Note 10)
• client (port 2):
ETH100G (OTM4)
(auto) or OTM4
(ADJ) (auto),
depending on
Equipment Profile2
100G OCLD/100G OTM4 (ADJ) (auto) N/A N/A

WaveLogic 3 OCLD (Note 10)
(100GOCLD) (Note
8) NTK539Tx/Ux in
TRNSPNDR mode
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OTM4 (ADJ) (Note 9 N/A N/A

OCLD (100GOCLD) and Note 10)
(Note 8) NTK539Bx in
TRNSPNDR mode
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 • OTM4 (ADJ) N/A N/A

OCLD (100GOCLD) (Note 12 and
(Note 11) NTK539Qx Note 10)
in TRNSPNDR mode • OTMC2 (ODU4,
ADJ) (Note 12 and
Note 10)
Note 1: Refer to Table 2-19 on page 2-110 and Table 2-26 on page 2-155 for the supported pluggable
modules in this release.
Note 2: The (auto) means the facility is auto-provisioned upon equipment/pluggable equipment
creation. The facilities in brackets are facilities auto-created on the same port as the main facility. These
facilities inherit the primary state of the main facility and are auto-deleted when the main facility is
deleted.
Note 3: On the 100GMUX, ports 1 to 10 or ports 1 to 4 for 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX are the client
interfaces. There are no line ports. A virtual aggregate OTM4 facility (port 100) is auto-provisioned on
100GMUX. On the 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, PSFP is supported on ports 1 and 2, and PQSFP
is supported on ports 3 and 4. The PQSFP port supports one ETH40G or up to four independent
ETH10G. If ETH10G is provisioned on a PQSFP port, ETH40G provisioning is blocked on that port. And
vice versa.
Note 4: All Broadband circuit packs that support transparent OC192/STM64 transport can similarly
support transparent 10GE WAN transport through the use of the OC192/STM64 facility type. Make sure
the selected XFP supports OC192/STM64 facility type. XFPs that do not support OC192/STM64 facility
type (such as NTTP81xx) cannot be used to support the 10GE WAN protocol on these circuit packs.


Note 5: The WAN facility is auto-created only when the ETH10G packet mapping is 10.7G GFP.
Note 6: The WAN facility is auto-created only with the FC1200 FLEX facility.
Note 7: The FLEX facility is only supported on the NTTP84BA, NTTP86AA, or NTTP86BA XFP. FC800
is supported on NTTP86AA and NTTP86BA only while FC1200 is supported on NTTP84BA,
NTTP86AA, and NTTP86BA.
Note 8: On the 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs, port 1
is the OTM4 line interface (100G). There are no client ports.
Note 9: See “Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs” on page 2-261
for more information on the rules related to this circuit pack.
Note 11: On the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs, port 1 is the OTM4 (100G) or OTMC2 (200G)
line interface. There are no client ports. Two ODU4 facilities are auto-created/deleted with the OTMC2
facility.
Note 12: See “Provisioning rules summary for the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs” on page
2-263 for more information on the rules related to this circuit pack.
Procedure 2-6
Use this procedure to edit the facility parameters for a facility.
The Tx Compensation Mode and Tx Dispersion Provisioned parameters

of the member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group follow that of
the prime OTM4 facility. Editing these parameters may cause a loss in traffic.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action

select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to edit.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to edit.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit Facility dialog box.
• Table 2-58 on page 2-317 for OC192 /STM64 facility parameters
• Table 2-59 on page 2-319 for ETH10G, ETH40G, and ETH100G facility
parameters
• Table 2-60 on page 2-325 for WAN facility parameters
• Table 2-64 on page 2-347 for OTMC2 facility parameters
• Table 2-65 on page 2-353 for ODU facility parameters
• Table 2-66 on page 2-354 for FLEX facility parameters
• Table 2-68 on page 2-357 for ADJ facility parameters

Step Action
9 Click OK.
10 If a confirmation message appears, click Yes to confirm the change.
—end—
Procedure 2-7
Use this procedure to change the protection scheme for a pair of facilities:
• from 1+1 Port TPT to unprotected (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 10x10G MUX, OTM4 client or mapping facilities on 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR, or OTM4 client or mapping facilities on 100G OCI)
• from unprotected to 1+1 Port TPT (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 10x10G MUX, OTM4 client or mapping facilities on 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR, or OTM4 client or mapping facilities on 100G OCI)
CAUTION
Changing the protection scheme is a service impacting
procedure.
The following apply when changing the protection scheme:

• For 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR, the two circuit packs forming the protection
pair must be equipped in consecutive slots. The working circuit pack must
be in the odd slot and the protection circuit pack must be in the adjacent
higher numbered even slot. For example, if the working circuit pack is in
slot 3, the protection circuit pack must be in slot 4.
• In both the working and protection 100G MOTR group, the 10x10G MUX
and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD must be mated (ODU4 transponder connection).
• The working and protection 100G OCLDs can be different variants. For
example, the working 100G OCLD can be NTK539TA and the protection
100G OCLD can be NTK539TB.
• The working and protection 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can be
different variants, for example, NTK539UC being working and NTK539UD
being protection.
• The working and protection Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
can be different variants, both in QPSK mode. For example, NTK539BB
being working and NTK539BH being protection.
• If the 10x10G MUX does not have the FPGA load which supports 1+1 Port
TPT protection, you must perform a cold restart of the circuit pack to
upgrade the FPGA load before provisioning the 1+1 Port TPT protection.
• The OTM2 facility can be the OTM2 client or the OTM2 mapping facility of
a non-OTM2 client. Protection can be provisioned between working and
protection OTM2 mapping facilities or between OTM2 client facilities.

• When the working and protection OTM2 facilities are OTM2 layer facilities,
their parent client facilities must be the same type. For example, both are
OC192 client facilities.
• The XFPs equipped on the 10x10G MUX circuit pack that is connected to
the TPT must be NTTP84BA or NTTP86BA. For 1550 nm applications, the
NTTP84AA XFP can be used, but only with the 10-channel TPT
(NT0H59ACE5), which is the only qualified variant for 1550 nm
applications. Performance is not guaranteed for other XFP types.
• For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G OCLD, the mate 100G
OCLD must be provisioned in the adjacent slot to the right. The valid
protection group slots are described below:
— in a 14-slot shelf:
– {1, 2-3} and {4, 5-6}
– {9, 10-11} and {12, 13-14}
– {1, 2-3} and {4, 5-6}
– {13, 14-15} and {16, 17-18}
– {21, 22-23} and {24, 25-26}
– {33, 34-35} and {36, 37-38}
— in a 6500-7 packet-optical or 7-slot shelf:
– {1, 2-3} and {4, 5-6}
• For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, the
10x10G MUX circuit packs must be in between the 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection group slots are described below
(where o stands for 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and m stands for 10x10G
MUX):
– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
– {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o}
– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o},
– {5o, 6m} and {7m, 8o},
– {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o},
– {15o, 16m} and {17m, 18o},

– {21o, 22m} and {23m, 24o}

– {25o, 26m} and {27m, 28o}
– {31o, 32m} and {33m, 34o}
– {35o, 36m} and {37m, 38o}
– {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}
• For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
in QPSK mode, the 10x10G MUX circuit packs must be in between the
Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection group
slots are the same as those for the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD.
• The port on which working and protection facilities are provisioned must
be the same. For example, if the working client facility is provisioned on
port 1 of the working 10x10G MUX, the protection client facility must be
provisioned on port 1 of the protection 10x10G MUX.
• In both the working and protection 100G OTR group (100G OCI mated
with OCLD), the 100G OCI and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2/Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD must be mated (ODU4 transponder connection). The
mate 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can be different variants, for
example, NTK539UC being working and NTK539UD being protection.
The mate Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can be different
variants, both in QPSK mode. For example, NTK539BB being working and
NTK539BH being protection.
• The OTM4 facility on the 100G OCI can be the OTM4 client or the OTM4
mapping facility of a non-OTM4 client. Protection can be provisioned
between working and protection OTM4 mapping facilities or between
OTM4 client facilities.
• For 100G OCI circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, the 100G
OCI circuit packs must be in between the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs. The valid protection group slots are described below (where o
stands for 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and i stands for 100G OCI):
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
– {11o, 12i} and {13i, 14o}
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
– {5o, 6i} and {7i, 8o}

– {11o, 12i} and {13i, 14o}

– {15o, 16i} and {17i, 18o}
– {21o, 22i} and {23i, 24o}
– {25o, 26i} and {27i, 28o}
– {31o, 32i} and {33i, 34o}
– {35o, 36i} and {37i, 38o}
– {1o, 2i} and {3i, 4o}
• For 100G OCI circuit pack mated with Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode, the 100G OCI circuit packs must be in between the Flex2/
Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection group slots
are the same as those for the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD.
• The CFPs equipped on the 100G OCI that are connected to the TPT must
be 160-9113-900 or 160-9114-900.
• The LOFEF client port parameter can be enabled or disabled or the
conditioning type parameter can be LOFEF when 1+1 Port TPT is
provisioned.
Prerequisites
• ensure you have all the documentation relating to deleting transponder
connections and changing a facility state. Refer to the “Deleting
transponder connections” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320, and Procedure 2-11,
“Changing the primary state of a facility” on page 2-307 for details.
Step Action

3 Change the protection facility to be to the out-of-service state. See

Procedure 2-11, “Changing the primary state of a facility” on page 2-307.

Step Action
4
CAUTION
You must provision the TPT protection group before
connecting the Tx fiber of the protection circuit pack to
the TPT tray. Otherwise, traffic can be impacted.
Ensure that the Tx fiber for the protection facility to be is not connected to the
TPT tray. For in-service protection scheme change from unprotected to 1+1
TPT protected, Tx/Rx fibers for the working facility should already be
connected to the TPT tray.
Go to step 6.
5 Ensure to disconnect the protection card fibers from the TPT tray. Change the
protection facility to the out-of-service state. See Procedure 2-11, “Changing
the primary state of a facility” on page 2-307.
6 Select Protection Provisioning from the Protection drop-down menu to
open the Protection Provisioning application.
7 Select the appropriate equipment or facility type and shelf from the Type and
Shelf drop-down lists.
The provisioning data table opens.
8 Select an entry from the table.
When changing the protection scheme, provisioning the protection scheme
for one of the facilities/circuit packs in a pair automatically provisions the
protection scheme for the other facility/circuit packs in the pair.
9 Click Edit to open the Edit protection provisioning dialog box.
10 Select the radio button of the new protection scheme (Unprotected, 1+1
Port TPT).
12 Select the OTN G.873.1 remote standard if applicable.

You can change the Switch mode (Unidirectional or Bidirectional), Revertive
mode (Yes or No) and Wait to restore time (if Revertive mode is Yes). See the
310.
13 Click OK.
14 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

Step Action
15 If 1+1 Port TPT is provisioned, connect the protection Tx fiber to the TPT tray.
Connect the protection Rx fiber to the TPT tray if it’s not already connected.
16 Change the working and protection slot facilities back to the in-service state
if applicable.
17 Repeat this procedure to provision the same protection scheme on the node
at the other end in the protection configuration if it has not been done.
18 Run the protection exerciser to detect potential protection misconfigurations
if 1+1 Port TPT has been provisioned. Refer to the “Running/inhibiting the
exerciser” procedure in Part 2 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating,
323-1851-310.
—end—
Procedure 2-8
Use this procedure to add a new entry (interface, circuit, router) in the
communications settings. For more information on these parameters and how
they apply to the DCN, refer to Part 4 of Planning, NTRN10DB.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must use an account with a level 3 UPC or
higher.
Step Action

2 Select Comms Setting Management from the Configuration drop-down
menu to open the Comms Setting Management application.
3 Select the required tab.
5 Select the appropriate comms type from the Router type or Interface type
drop-down list.
6 Click Add to open the appropriate add dialog box.
7 Add the parameters as required (if appropriate). See the following for
parameters that can be added:
• Interfaces
— “Lower Layer DCC/GCC parameters” on page 2-359
• Routers
— “IISIS Router parameters” on page 2-360
— “IISIS Circuit parameters” on page 2-361
— “OSPF Router parameters” on page 2-363
— “OSPF Circuit parameters” on page 2-364
For the Add IISIS Router Parameters and the Add OSPF Router Parameters
dialogs, you have the option of adding distribution lists. To add a distribution
list, use the Add button in Redistribution section (lower section). A maximum
of 80 distribution lists can be added for each type of list. To delete a
distribution list, select the distribution list in the Redistribution section (lower
section) and select Delete.

Step Action
8 If Then
the dialog allows more than one entry to be click Apply, go
added and you want to add another entry to step 7
otherwise go to step 9
9 Click OK.
—end—
Procedure 2-9
Adding a transponder connection
Use this procedure to add 2WAY transponder connections to a network
element for 100G circuit packs.
For the 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BA), the “OPU Payload Type
Mismatch” alarm is raised if a new ODU4 transponder connection is added in
Release 9.0 and above, and the 10x10G MUX circuit pack at the remote end
of the connection has an ODU4 transponder connection that was created pre-
Release 9.0. To clear the alarm, delete and re-add the ODU4 transponder
connection associated with the remote 10x10G MUX circuit pack. Refer to the
“OPU Payload Type Mismatch” alarm clearing procedure in Part 2 of Fault
Management - Alarm Clearing, 323-1851-543, for further details.
Refer to “Transponder connections parameters” on page 2-367 for more

information on transponder connection parameters.
Prerequisites
• have provisioned the equipment and facilities you need for the planned
transponder connections
• review and follow the engineering rules outlined in the “Engineering rules
and considerations for transponder connections” section in Part 1 of
Step Action

2 Select Cross Connections: Transponder Connections from the
Configuration menu.
If this is the initial launch of the Transponder Connections application, no
transponder connections appear until you perform a Retrieve. Subsequent
launches of the Transponder Connections application display transponder
connections based on the last filter criteria.
4 Select a signal rate from the Rate drop-down list. Refer to Table 2-75 on page
2-367 for supported rates.
5 Select a connection type from the Type drop-down list. Refer to Table 2-75 on
page 2-367 for supported types.

Adding a transponder connection
Step Action
6 Select the required equipment and facility from the drop-down lists for each
of the following panels:
• From
• To
Refer to Table 2-76 on page 2-368 for the supported equipment and facility
parameters for transponder connections.
Note: For Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in BPSK mode, the
connection must be provisioned between the prime OTM4 facilities. You
cannot use member OTM4 facilities to create an ODU4 transponder
connection.
9 If you Then click
want to provision another transponder Apply and go to step 4
connection for this network element
have completed the transponder connection OK (Apply & Close)
provisioning for this network element
—end—
Procedure 2-10
Changing the equipment profile
Use this procedure to change the 100G OCI equipment profile from
ETH100G_GMP (default) to OTU4 (NTK529AC variant) or
ETH100G_PROPRIETARY (NTK529AA variant), or vice versa, which
determines the client facility auto-provisioned when the client pluggable is
provisioned.
Note: To change the 100G OCI equipment profile, the 100GOCI

equipment must be OOS and there must be no facility provisioned on the
client pluggable or no pluggable provisioned.
Use this procedure to change the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment profile
from None to QPSK100G or 2xBPSK100G, or vice versa. See “Provisioning
rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs” on page 2-261
for more information on the rules related to this circuit pack.
ATTENTION
Changing the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment profile will result in a cold
restart of the OCLD circuit pack(s).
Use this procedure to change the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment profile
from None to QPSK100G, 2xBPSK100G, or 16QAM200G, or vice versa. See
“Provisioning rules summary for the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs”
on page 2-263 for more information on the rules related to this circuit pack.
ATTENTION
Changing the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment profile will result in a cold
restart of the OCLD circuit pack(s).
Use this procedure to change the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR equipment profile2
from ETH100G_GMP (default) to OTU4, or vice versa, which determines the
client type.
ATTENTION
To change the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR equipment profile2, there must be no
client facility provisioned on the circuit pack. Changing the 100G WaveLogic
3 OTR equipment profile2 will result in a warm restart of the 100G WaveLogic
3 OTR circuit pack.

Prerequisites
• ensure the associated equipment or pluggable is out-of-service if
changing the 100G OCI equipment profile. See Procedure 2-12,
“Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable” on page 2-309.
• ensure there are no facility provisioned on the client pluggable or no
pluggable provisioned on the 100G OCI circuit pack.
• ensure there is no client facility provisioned on the 100G WaveLogic 3
OTR circuit pack if you are changing its equipment profile2.
• ensure there is no facility provisioned on the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack and other conditions as outlined in “Provisioning rules
summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs” on page 2-261
are met.
• ensure there is no facility provisioned on the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack if you are changing its equipment profile and other conditions
as outlined in “Provisioning rules summary for the Flex3 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs” on page 2-263 are met.
• use an account with a level 3 or higher UPC.
Step Action

4 If you are changing the Then go to
100G OCI equipment profile step 5
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR equipment profile2 step 12
Flex2/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment step 17
profile
5 In the Equipment area, select the 100GOCI equipment that you want to
change the equipment profile.
6 Ensure the 100GOCI equipment is OOS.
7 Ensure there are no facility provisioned on the client pluggable or no
pluggable provisioned on the 100G OCI circuit pack.

Step Action
9 Select the required equipment profile from the Equipment Profile drop-down
list.
10 Click OK.
11 If required, put the 100GOCI equipment in-service. See Procedure 2-12,
“Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable” on page 2-309.
12 In the Equipment area, select the OTR equipment for which you want to
change the equipment profile.
13 Ensure there are no client facilities provisioned on the circuit pack.
15 Select the required equipment profile from the Equipment Profile2 drop-
down list.
16 Click OK.
17 In the Equipment area, select the 100GOCLD equipment (for Flex2/Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD) for which you want to change the equipment profile. For
the 2xBPSK100G equipment profile, you can only change the equipment
profile on the prime circuit pack.
18 Ensure no facility is provisioned on the 100GOCLD equipment and other
conditions as outlined in “Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs” on page 2-261 or “Provisioning rules
summary for the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs” on page 2-263 are
met.
20 Select the required equipment profile from the Equipment Profile drop-down
list.
21 Click OK.
22 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog.
—end—
Procedure 2-11
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a facility.
CAUTION
If you place a facility out-of-service, you can cause a loss of
traffic.
Note that the facilities in brackets in Table 2-52 on page 2-288 are facilities
auto-created on the same port as the main facility. These facilities inherit the
primary state of the main facility. To change the primary state of these
facilities, you must change the primary state of the main facility.
The primary state of the ADJ facility is not editable.
The primary state of the member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack
group follows the primary state of the prime OTM4 facility. You can only
change the primary state of the prime OTM4 facility.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action

select the circuit pack/port whose facility state you want to change.
5 Select the appropriate facility from the Facility Type drop-down list.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility whose state you want to change.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit facility dialog box.

Step Action
8 Select OOS or IS from the Primary state drop-down list.
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
9 Click OK.
10 If changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog box.
—end—
Procedure 2-12
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
to in-service or out-of-service. You must change the primary state of any
related facilities to out-of-service before changing the primary state of a circuit
pack or pluggable to out-of-service. See Procedure 2-11, “Changing the
primary state of a facility” on page 2-307.
You cannot change the primary state of a pluggable to IS if the associated

circuit pack is OOS.
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack automatically changes the

primary state of any provisioned pluggables on that circuit pack to the same
state.
The primary state of the member equipment in a 100G BPSK circuit pack
group follows the primary state of the prime equipment. You can only change
the primary state of the prime equipment.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action

4 If you are changing the primary state to Then go to
OOS step 5
IS step 6
5 Ensure any related facilities are out-of-service. See Procedure 2-11,

“Changing the primary state of a facility” on page 2-307.
CAUTION
loss of traffic.

Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
Step Action
6 Select the circuit pack or pluggable in the Equipment area.

8 Select IS or OOS from the Primary state drop-down list.
9 Click OK.
10 If you are changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog
box.
—end—
Procedure 2-13
Use this procedure to delete a facility.
CAUTION
If you delete a facility, you can cause a loss of traffic.
Facilities that are auto-created (facilities in brackets in Table 2-52 on page

2-288) when the main facility is created will be auto-deleted when the main
facility is deleted.
You cannot manually delete an OTM4 facility in a 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G

MUX circuit pack.
The member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group is auto-deleted
when the prime OTM4 facility is deleted.
Prerequisites
• ensure the end-to-end service to be deleted is not carrying traffic
• ensure the facility to be deleted is out-of-service and is not in maintenance
state
• delete the connections of the entire path. Refer to the “Deleting
transponder connections” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
• delete the IISIS circuit or OSPF circuit and then the GCC link if provisioned
on the OTM4 facility to be deleted. See the “Deleting an entry in the
communications settings” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
• ensure that no loopback exists on the facility. See the “Operating/releasing
a loopback” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and
Operating, 323-1851-310 to release a loopback if it exists.

Step Action

select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to delete.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to delete.
7 Click Delete in the Facility area.
—end—
Procedure 2-14
Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable
Use this procedure to delete a circuit pack or pluggable equipment from the
list of provisioned equipment in the Equipment and Facility Provisioning
application. Deleting a circuit pack automatically deletes any provisioned
pluggables on that circuit pack.
The member equipment in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group cannot be deleted
until the equipment profile is changed from 2xBPSK100G to None on the
prime equipment.
Prerequisites
• delete all connections provisioned through the equipment. Refer to the
“Deleting transponder connections” procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320, for details.
• delete all facilities on the circuit pack and its associate pluggable, see
Procedure 2-13, “Deleting a facility from an equipment” on page 2-311.
• put the circuit pack or pluggable to be deleted out-of-service, see
Procedure 2-12, “Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable” on page 2-309.
Step Action

4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment (circuit pack or XFP) you want
to delete.
5 Click Delete in the Equipment area.
—end—
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters

Equipment and facility primary and secondary states
Table 2-53 to Table 2-56 on page 2-315 provide information on equipment and
facility primary and secondary states.
Table 2-53
Equipment and facility primary states
Primary State Description

IS In-service; no failure detected
IS-ANR In-service - abnormal; failure exists but entity is still capable of performing
some of its provisioned functions (that is partial failure)
OOS-AU Out-of-service - autonomous; failure detected
OOS-MA Out-of-service - maintenance; no failure detected (OOS for maintenance
for provisioning memory administration)
OOS-AUMA Out-of-service autonomous maintenance; failure detected
OOS-MAANR Out-of-service - maintenance - abnormal; partial failure detected
Table 2-54
Equipment secondary states

Active Equipment has connections established to the facilities it supports and the
connected facilities are in-service
Fault detected Equipment failure detected
Idle No connections established to facilities supported on this equipment, all
connected facilities are out-of-service, or in-service connected facilities are
not on the active traffic path in a protected connection
Mismatched eqp. attribute Mismatched or unknown equipment detected in a provisioned slot
Supporting entity outage Supporting equipment has a failure (applicable to pluggables when
associated circuit pack is missing or has failed or is mismatched)
Unequipped Equipment is missing
Unknown Equipment cannot be identified
AINS Auto in-service is enabled.
Table 2-55
Facility secondary states

<null> Active, working state for a facility
Disconnected Facility has no connections established
Fault detected Facility failure detected
Supporting entity Supporting equipment (pluggable or circuit pack):
outage • has a failure, or
• is missing, or
• is mismatched, or
• has an associated connection which is failed.
Loopback active Loopback active on facility
Maintenance State Maintenance State is enabled. When in Maintenance State, a facility continues to
carry traffic if it can, but does not raise alarms, SNMP traps or Performance
Monitoring Threshold Crossing Alerts (PM TCAs).
Applies to facilities that support maintenance state. See Table 2-57 on page 2-316.
Maintenance state is applicable to these facilities only if they are in out-of-service
state.
Auto in-service AINS is enabled. Applies to facilities that support AINS. See Table 2-56.
Table 2-56
Automatic INService (AINS) support on 100G circuit packs (Note 1)

100GOCLD (√) OTM4 Disabled
(Note 2)
OTMC2 Disabled Applicable to Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
16QAM mode only
100GMUX (√) OTM4 Disabled Port 100
ETH10G Enabled child facility: OTM2 or WAN/OTM2
OTM2 Disable
OC192/STM64 Enabled child facility: OTM2
FLEX Enabled
FC800 child facility: OTM2
FC1200 child facility: OTM2, STSn
ETH40G Enabled child facility: OTM3
100GOCI (√) OTM4 client Enabled
Table 2-56
Automatic INService (AINS) support on 100G circuit packs (Note 1)

100G OTM4 line Disabled
WaveLogic 3
OTM4 client Enabled
OTR (√)
ETH100G Enabled child facility: OTM4
Note 1: √ indicates AINS support on the circuit pack equipment and all pluggables on that circuit pack.
The child facility follows the AINS state of its parent facility. The AINS state of the TCM facility is
independent of the parent OTMn facility.
Note 2: The AINS state of the member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group follows the
AINS state of the prime OTM4 facility.
Table 2-57

100GOCLD OTM4
OTMC2 Applicable to Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in 16QAM mode only
100GMUX OTM4 Port 100
ETH10G child facility (Note): OTM2 or WAN/OTM2
OTM2
OC192/STM64 child facility (Note): OTM2
FLEX
FC800 child facility (Note): OTM2
FC1200 child facility (Note): OTM2, STSn
ETH40G child facility (Note): OTM3
100GOCI ETH100G child facility (Note): OTM4
OTM4 client
Note: The child facility follows the maintenance state of its parent facility. The maintenance state of the
TCM facility is independent of the parent OTMn facility.
OC192/STM64 facility parameters for 100G circuit packs

Table 2-58 provides a list of the OC192/STM64 facility parameters. Applicable
to 10x10G MUX circuit packs only.
Table 2-58
OC192/STM64 facility parameters
number for the selected facility. Read-only.
Primary state See “Equipment and Sets the primary state of the facility. Default reflects
facility primary states” primary state of associated equipment.
on page 2-314 Note: IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary State See “Facility Displays the facility operational state.

secondary states” on The AINS state is editable. For more information, see
page 2-315 Table 2-56 on page 2-315.
The Maintenance state is editable. For more
information, see Table 2-57 on page 2-316.
Signal degrade • 1x10^-5 Sets the signal degrade threshold. Applicable to

threshold • 1x10^-6 (default) 10x10G MUX (NTK529BB) only.
• 1x10^-7
• 1x10^-8
• 1x10^-9
Excessive bit error • 1x10^-3 (default) Sets the client receive BER threshold that triggers a
threshold • 1x10^-4 signal fail (SF) condition. Editable for 10x10G MUX
(NTK529BB) only. Read-only for all other 100G circuit
• 1x10^-5 packs.
Laser Off Far End Fail • Disabled Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines type
• Enabled of signal conditioning towards subtending equipment.
Disabled, line/multiplex section AIS is sent to

OC192/STM64 facility parameters
TX Actual Power • TX optical power Displays the actual client/line transmit optical power.
(dBm) • Unknown (if circuit Read-only.
Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power Displays the actual client/line receive optical power.
Port Mode • SONET (default for Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or SDH).
SONET mode) Read-only.
SDH mode)

the SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
ETH10G, ETH40G, and ETH100G facility parameters

Table 2-59 provides a list of the ETH10G, ETH40G, and ETH100G facility
parameters. Applicable to 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR, 10x10GE MUX, 10x10G
MUX, 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 100G OCI, and 100GE OCI circuit
packs only.
Table 2-59
100GMUX ETH10G
Unit • ETH10G-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.

• ETH10G-shelf-slot-port-
subport
states. Read-only.
The Maintenance state is editable. For more information,
see Table 2-57 on page 2-316.
application.
Tx Actual Power • Tx optical power value Displays the measured line transmitter optical power.
(dBm) • Unknown (if pluggable Read-only.
for more information about OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT values.

Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power value Displays the measured line receiver optical power. Read-
(dBm) • Unknown (if pluggable only.
for more information about OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT values.
Maximum • 9600 (default) Sets the Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) for 10x10G MUX.
Ethernet Frame • 1600 Not applicable to 10x10GE MUX.
Size

Packet Mapping See description Displays the mapping layer OTM2 OTURATE and client
mapping. 10x10GE MUX only supports the 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS transparent) mapping.
• 10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)
GFP-F, asynchronous, standard WAN.
• 10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)
(default)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble and MAC transparent
WAN. Not applicable to 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX.
• 10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ Ordered Set/ MAC
transparent)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble, Ordered Set
transparent, and MAC transparent WAN.
11.049G OTU1e signal, synchronous, CBR10G. Not
applicable to 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX.
To change the Packet Mapping, you must delete the
ETH10G facility and re-create the ETH10G facility with
the new Packet Mapping.

SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.

100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX ETH40G
Unit ETH40G-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.
states. Read-only.
The Maintenance state is editable. For more information,
application.
Packet Mapping GMP Displays the mapping protocol.
Tx Actual High • Tx optical power high Displays the highest measured transmit optical power of
Power (dBm) value the pluggable multiple optical channels. Read-only.
• Unknown (if pluggable
not present)
Tx Actual Low • Tx optical power low Displays the lowest measured transmit optical power of
not present)
Rx Actual High • Rx optical power high Displays the highest measured received optical power of
not present)

Rx Actual Low • Rx optical power low Displays the lowest measured received optical power of
not present)

100GOCI and 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR ETH100G
number for the selected facility. Read-only.
states. The Maintenance state is editable. For more
application.
Tx Power Actual • Tx optical power high Displays the highest measured transmit optical power of
High (dBm) value the multiple optical channels. Read-only.
• Unknown (if equipment
not present)
Tx Power Actual • Tx optical power low Displays the lowest measured transmit optical power of
Low (dBm) value the multiple optical channels. Read-only.
not present)

Rx Power Actual • Rx optical power high Displays the highest measured received optical power of
High (dBm) value the multiple optical channels. Read-only.
not present)
Rx Power Actual • Rx optical power low Displays the lowest measured received optical power of
Low (dBm) value the multiple optical channels. Read-only.
not present)
Packet mapping • GMP Sets the mapping protocol. GMP only for 100G
• Proprietary WaveLogic 3 OTR.


Table 2-60 provides a list of the WAN facility parameters. Applicable to
10x10G MUX circuit packs only.
Table 2-60
100G MUX OCI WAN
Unit WAN-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.

WAN-shelf-slot-port-subport
Primary State See “Equipment and facility Indicates the primary state of the WAN facility,
primary states” on page which follows the ETH10G or FC1200 primary
2-314 state. Read-only.
states” on page 2-315 secondary state can be a combination of one or
more states. Read-only.
Frame Checksum • 0 (default) Displays whether the GFP-F or GFP-T frame

• 32 checksum (4 Byte CRC-32) is appended to each
GFP-F or GFP-T frame.
"32" adds the frame checksum while "0" does not.
Note: To prevent packet loss, the Frame
Checksum must be kept at the default value of "0"
when using the "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/
MAC transparent)" packet mapping.
Packet Mapping • GFP-F for ETH10G WAN Displays the WAN to OPU2 mapping format. Read-
• GFP-T for FC1200 WAN only.
Ethernet Preamble • Keep Sets whether the 8 byte Ethernet MAC preamble is
• Discard kept or discarded during GFP-F mapping.
Applicable to ETH10G WAN only. This parameter
is determined by the ETH10G packet mapping as
follows:
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC
transparent)" = Keep
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)"
= Discard
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered Set/
MAC transparent)" = Keep
Read-only.

FCS Errored • Keep (default for ETH10G Sets whether the LAN FCS errored frames are kept
Frames WAN) or discarded at the client ingress. (Note 3)
• Discard (default for
FC1200 WAN)
GFP RFI Enabled Controls the GFP remote failure indication (RFI)
client management frame (CMF) transmission.
When enabled, it allows GFP RFI CMF
transmission upon WAN link down. Applicable to
ETH10G WAN only. Read-only.
Round trip delay Disable Controls the support (sending of CMFs) of round
Status trip delay calculation. Applicable to ETH10G WAN
only. Read-only.
Conditioning type GFP CMF Controls the type of conditioning on the WAN port.
WAN conditioning is triggered by local client
failures on the Ethernet port. Applicable to
ETH10G WAN only. Read-only.
User Payload 00 to FF (Note 2) Sets the GFP-F or GFP-T User Payload Identifier
Indicator used for Client Data Frames created in the WAN
Transmitted (In layer during the GFP-F or GFP-T mapping. This
HEX) value is not monitored or alarmed and editing of
this parameter is only provided to potentially
improve interoperability with other equipment.
Transparent • G7041CMF (default) Sets whether legacy client management frame

Ordered Sets • LEGACYCMF (LEGACYCMF) or G7041CMF is used.
• G7041CDF For "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered

Set/MAC transparent)" mapping, the only option is
G7041CDF.
LEGACYCMF is not applicable to 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX.
Note 1: Where applicable, the Mapping, Frame checksum, and LAN frame checksum parameters must
always be edited as a group, invalid combinations are rejected.
Note 2: This value can only be provisioned (via the WAN facility) for the proprietary "10.7G - GFP/
OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC transparent)" ETH10G packet mapping.
Note 3: When the "FCS Errored Frames" WAN facility parameter is set to "Discard", FCS errored frames
(either GFP or MAC FCS errors) are not discarded at the client egress of the 10x10G MUX circuit packs.
The only location FCS errored frames are discarded is at the ETH10G client Rx of the 10x10G MUX
circuit packs. Additionally, the discarded frames are added to the DFR-E PM count and the Ethernet In
Frames Discarded: Total OM count, which do not normally include FCS errored frames.

Table 2-61 provides a list of the OTM2 facility parameters. Applicable to 100G
(2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX, 10x10GE MUX, and 10x10G MUX circuit packs
only.
Table 2-61

Unit OTM2-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
OTM2-shelf-slot-port- port number for the selected facility.
subport
Secondary State See “Facility secondary Displays the facility operational state.
states” on page 2-315 The AINS state is editable. For more information, see
Line Rate • 10.7G Displays the facility rate.
• 11.05G
• 11.09G
Conditioning Type • OPU_AIS (default) Controls the type of conditioning on the OTM mapping
• ODU_AIS layer facility of a non-OTM client port. OTM mapping
layer facility conditioning is triggered by local client
• OPU_CSF failures on the non-OTM client port.
Applicable only to the OTM2 mapping layer facility of a
non-OTM2 client facility on the 100G (2xQSFP+/
2xSFP+) MUX.


The identifier can build an optical network model including DWDM
include any combination transmit/receive elements.
of upper and lower case Setting the optical system identifier in this dialog
letters, numbers, and overrides the default setting provisioned in the Node
special characters. Information application which is used when OTM2
facilities are auto-provisioned.
Note: You can use “&” in optical system identifier field
as a special character but if you use only a single “&”
in optical system identifier field, the system dismisses
the single “&” and the field appears blank.
Applicable to the OTM2 client facility on PXFP only.
Tx Path Identifier 1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier which allows two
different transmitters with identical wavelengths in the
same network element to be identified uniquely in an
optical system.
Setting the transmit path identifier in this dialog
overrides the default setting provisioned in the Node
Information application which is used when OTM2
facilities are auto-provisioned.
Applicable to the OTM2 client facility on PXFP only.
Tx Actual Power • Tx optical power Displays the measured line transmit optical power.
Applicable to the OTM2 client facility only.


Tx Wavelength (nm) 1528.77 (93) to Displays the line transmit wavelength. Wavelength is
1565.09 (88), at 50 GHz editable only for tunable transmitters.
spacing (default 0 for Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility is
tunable Tx) OOS.
The number in brackets is the channel ID. Tx
wavelength may auto-provision.
Tx FEC Format • Off Sets the transmit Tx FEC format setting.
• RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS- The OTM2 Tx FEC Format parameter cannot be
8) (default) edited unless the facility is OOS.
Laser Off Far End • Disabled Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines
Fail • Enabled type of signal conditioning towards subtending
equipment. When Enabled, client transmitter laser is
shutoff when line faults or head-end client faults are
detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is sent to
Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power Displays the measured line receive optical power.
Rx FEC Format • Off Select the receive Rx FEC format setting.
• RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS- The OTM2 Rx FEC Format parameter cannot be
8) (default) edited unless the facility is OOS.


Pre-FEC Signal Fail -1.00 to +1.00 dBQ Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (dBQ) (default 0) alarm (applicable only when FEC is On). Can be
provisioned in 0.01 increments. 0 dBQ equates to
1x10^-15 post FEC errors.
OOS.
Pre-FEC Signal Fail numeric value Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Threshold (BER) Signal Fail alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Read-only.
OTU Signal Degrade • 1x10^-6 Sets the OTU post-FEC signal degrade threshold.
Threshold • 1x10^-7 Applicable to OTM2 client facilities on 10x10G MUX
only.
• 1x10^-8
• 1x10^-9 (default)
ODU Signal Fail • 1x10^-6 Sets the ODU post-FEC signal fail threshold.
Threshold • 1x10^-7 Applicable to 10x10G MUX only.
• 1x10^-8 Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
• 1x10^-9
• Disable (default)
ODU Signal Degrade • 1x10^-6 Sets the ODU post-FEC signal degrade threshold.
Threshold • 1x10^-7 Applicable to 10x10G MUX and 100G (2xQSFP+/
2xSFP+) MUX only.
• 1x10^-8
OTU Signal Degrade 1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold (applicable only
Threshold when Rx FEC Format is Off). Read-only.
ODU TTI • Yes (default) Displays whether the trail trace identifier (TTI)
Termination • No message is transmitted at the line transmitter. Editable
through TL1 only.
Applicable to the OTM2 layer facility of an ETH10G
client in 10x10GE MUX only.
OPU2 + 7 Reserved • Yes Displays whether the 7 unused bytes of the OPU2
Bytes • No overhead are used for payload. Read-only.
Applicable to the OTM2 layer facility of a non-OTM2
client only.


Expected (In HEX) (Note) direction for an OTM2 facility associated with an
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility in
10x10G MUX only.
Transmitted (In HEX) (Note) direction for an OTM2 facility associated with an
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility in
10x10G MUX only.
Port Mode • SONET (default for Displays the mode of the port. Determines if SONET
SONET NE mode) or SDH terminology is used and whether bit (SONET)
• SDH (default for SDH or block (SDH) errors are used for performance
Note: You can provision this value only for ETH10G client facilities with packet mappings of "10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)", "11.05G - OPU1e (PCS transparent)", or "11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS transparent)".

Table 2-62 provides a list of the OTM3 mapping facility parameters. Applicable
to 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs only.
Table 2-62
Unit OTM3-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.
Primary State See “Equipment and facility primary Sets the primary state of the facility. Default
states” on page 2-314 reflects primary state of associated equipment.
Secondary See“Facility secondary states” on Displays the facility operational state.

State page 2-315 The Auto in-service state is editable for supported
circuit packs. For more information, see Table
2-56 on page 2-315.
The Maintenance state is editable for supported
circuit packs. For more information, see Table
2-57 on page 2-316.
Line Rate 44.5G Displays the line rate. Read only.
Port Mode • SONET (default for SONET NE Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or
mode) SDH). Read only.
• SDH (default for SDH NE mode)
Conditioning OPUK_CSF Displays the conditioning type.

type
Customer string of up to 64 characters Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the

Defined same as the Common Language Facility Identifier
Facility (CLFI). The provisioned value appears in the
Identifier facility alarm report if the SP2, SPAP, SPAP-2 w/
2xOSC, or the 2-slot integrated SP is equipped.
Not applicable to the OTM3 layer facility on 40G
XCIF.

Auto In- hh-mm Displays the time left for the auto in-service timer.
Service Time Read only. Applicable to circuit packs that support
Left (hh-mm) automatic in-service on the OTM3 facility.
Delay • Enabled Enables or disables automatic delay

Measurement • Disabled measurement.
Default is disabled for 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CF
variant) and enabled for 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJ). Cannot enable OTM3 DM on 40G
MUX OCI (NTK525CF variant) if OTM3 GCC1 is
provisioned, and vice versa.
Latency (μs) • Unknown measurement in microseconds.

Table 2-63 provides a list of the OTM4 facility parameters.
Table 2-63
OTM4 line for 100G OCLD/WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs (Note 1)
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.
Secondary State See “Facility secondary states” Displays the facility operational state.
on page 2-315 The AINS state is editable. For more information,
The identifier can include any build an optical network model including DWDM
case letters, numbers, and
special characters.
Tx Path 1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier which allows two
Identifier different transmitters with identical wavelengths in
Provisioned Tx • -11.0 (default) to -1.0 for Sets the required line transmit optical power
Power (dBm) NTK539Tx (provision power with 0.1 incremental range).
• -11.0 (default) to +4.0 for
NTK538Ux and NTK539Ux/
Bx/Qx

Tx Actual Power • Tx optical power Displays the actual client transmit optical output
(dBm) • Unknown (if circuit pack not power. Read-only.
does not display "OOR" when out of range; the
lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
OPT values.
Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power Displays the actual client receive optical input
(dBm) (Note 4) • Unknown (if circuit pack not power. Read-only.
OPT values.
Rx Channel • Rx channel optical power Displays the actual receive channel optical input
Actual Power • Unknown (if circuit pack not power. Read-only.
(dBm) (Note 4) present) (Note 2) Applicable only to WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs deployed in a
colorless line system.

Tx • Auto Sets the Tx pre-compensation mode.

Compensation • Manual • Off: In this mode, pre-compensation is disabled.
Mode
• Off • Auto: In this mode, the Tx dispersion provisioned
parameter cannot be user-provisioned and defaults
Default value depends on PEC to 30000. The link acquires at a pre-compensation
as follows: value (-30,000) and an appropriate post-
For NTK538UL/UM and compensation value. Firmware then attempts to
NTK539UA/UC/UD/QL/QM: move the pre-compensation/post-compensation
only Off is supported ratio for the link to 50%.
For NTK538UJ/UK and • Manual: In this mode, the pre-compensation is
NKT539UB/UH/BB/BH/QJ/QK: user-controlled using the Tx dispersion provisioned
Auto (default) and Manual are parameter in the range from -40000 to 40000 for
supported NTK538UK and NTK539UB/UH/BB/BH/UE/BE/
QK, -40000 to 85000 for NTK539QJ/NTK538UJ,
For NTK538UN and
and -40000 to 300000 for NTK539/BNQN/
NTK539UE/BE/BN/QN: Auto
NTK538UN. Default value is 30000 for NTK538UJ/
and Manual (default) are
UK and NTK539UB/UH/BB/BH/QJ/QK and 0 for
supported
NTK538UN and NTK539UE/BE/BN/QN.
The Tx Dispersion Provisioned is the dispersion of
the fiber being compensated. The compensating
dispersion has an opposite sign.
Applicable only to WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs.
Tx Dispersion numeric value Displays the provisioned Tx dispersion.

Provisioned (ps/ Applicable only to WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G
nm) WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack.
Tx Actual numeric value Display the actual dispersion pre-compensation in

Dispersion (ps/ the near-to-far direction.
nm)
Rx Dispersion numeric value Display the actual dispersion post-compensation in

Post-compensa the far-to-near direction.
tion
Rx FEC Format • PFEC for NTK539Tx Displays the Rx FEC format setting. Read-only.
• QFEC for NTK538Ux,
NTK539Qx, and NTK539Ux/
Bx

Tx FEC Format • PFEC for NTK539Tx Displays the Tx FEC format setting. Read-only.
• QFEC for NTK538Ux,
NTK539Qx, and NTK539Ux/
Bx
Tx Channel • 50 (default) Sets the transmit channel spacing. If set to 50GHz,

Spacing (GHz) • FlexGrid you provision the Tx wavelength based on the ITU
50GHz wavelength grid. If set to FlexGrid, you can
provision the Tx frequency in increments of 0.0001
THz (100 MHz).
Applicable to WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs only.
Tx Wavelength • 1527.99 (0) to 1565.50 (89) at Displays the OTM4 transmit wavelength in nm. The
(nm) 50GHz spacing for NTK539Tx number in brackets is the channel ID.
• 1528.77 (93) to 1566.72 (92) Can be provisioned only when the Tx channel
at 50GHz spacing for spacing is set to 50GHz. The facility must be OOS to
NTK538Ux and NTK539Ux/ edit this parameter.
Bx/Qx Tx Wavelength can be re-provisioned to zero when
the OTM4 facility is OOS, without deleting the
facility.
The wavelength offset between prime and member
OTM4 facilities on a 100G BPSK circuit pack group
should be kept within 200 GHz to reduce the skew
effect introduced by accumulated relative dispersion
of the wavelengths.
Tx Frequency • 0 (default) Displays the transmit frequency in THz. Can be

(THz) • 191.3500 to 196.1000 provisioned in increments of 0.0001 THz (100 MHz)
only if the Tx channel spacing is set to FlexGrid. The
facility must be OOS to edit this parameter if it is
non-zero.
The frequency offset between prime and member
OTM4 facilities on a 100G BPSK circuit pack group
should be kept within 200 GHz to avoid exceeding
the skew limit of the receiver. Editing prime
frequency to nonzero sets member frequency to
(prime frequency - 100 MHz) automatically. Member
frequency can be edited independently.

Total Tx Link numeric value Display the total link dispersion in the transmit
Dispersion (ps/ direction. Read-only.
nm)
Tuning Mode • Performance Optimized Sets the wavelength tuning mode.

Tuning (default) Performance Optimized Tuning mode includes a
performance, whereas the Accelerated tuning mode
does not.
Performance Optimized Tuning (formerly called
Normal) mode is the tuning mode that is supported
in all releases.
In this release, Site Manager allows setting this
parameter to Accelerated. However, the circuit pack
behaves the same as in Performance Optimized
Tuning mode.
Performance OptimizationMode1 (default) to Sets the performance optimization mode. Facility

Optimization Optimization Mode14 must be OOS to edit this parameter.
mode OptimizationMode1 provides the best reach
performance and OptimizationMode2 provides the
best latency performance. OptimizationMode3 to
OptimizationMode14 are reserved.
Only applicable to the WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs.
Pre-FEC Signal -1.00 to +1.00 (default 0.0) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Fail Threshold alarm (applicable only when FEC is On). Can be
(dBQ) provisioned in 0.01 increments. The 0 dBQ
reference point represents an operating point where
the system may see significant post FEC errors and
become unstable.
OOS.
Note: For QFEC, when the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (dBQ) is set to -1.00 dBQ, the Pre-FEC
Signal Fail alarm is disabled and will not be raised.

Pre-FEC Signal • 1.71E-2 to 3.78E-4 BER Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Fail Threshold (default 3.80E-3) for PFEC Signal Fail alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
(BER) • 6.62E-2 to 9.01E-3 BER
(default 3.00 E-2) for QFEC in
OptimizationMode1
• 5.71E-2 to 6.41E-3 BER
(default 2.40E-2) for QFEC in
OptimizationMode2
Pre-FEC Signal -1.00 to +3.50 dBQ Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade (default 0.5) Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Threshold (dBQ) Can be provisioned in 0.01 increments.
Pre-FEC Signal • 3.8E-3 to 9.06E-10 BER Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Degrade (default 1.36E-3) for PFEC Signal Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is
Threshold • 6.62E-2 to 1.18E-5 BER On).
(BER) (default 1.75E-2) for QFEC in
OptimizationMode1
• 5.71E-2 to 4.30E-6 BER
(default 1.33E-2) for QFEC in
OptimizationMode2
Line Rate 112G Displays the rate. Read-only.
Port Mode • SONET (default for SONET Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or
NE mode) SDH). Read-only.
mode)
Supported Mean numeric value Displays the maximum value of the mean DGD of
DGD (ps) any link for which modem performance can be
guaranteed in ps. Read-only.

Latency (µs) latency and circuit pack latency. Circuit pack latency
is from the backplane to the line interface port.
Estimated Fiber • Estimated fiber length Displays an estimate of the fiber length calculated
Length (km) • Unknown (if no fiber is based on the round trip delay. Read-only.
connected to the port) (Note
2)

Estimated • Estimated instantaneous of Displays an estimate of the present value of the

Instance of DGD DGD measurement differential group delay (DGD) that results from
(ps) (Note 3) • Unknown (Note 2) polarization mode dispersion (PMD) present in the
mean DGD of the link.
Total Rx Link numeric value Display the total link dispersion in the receive
Dispersion (ps/ direction. Read-only.
nm)
Reach • numeric value, PEC Displays the reach specification retrieved from a
Specification dependent 100G OCLD/WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G
(km) • APP-SPECIFIC for WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit pack. Read only.
NTK539UB/UH/BB/BH/
QJ and NTK538UJ
• SUBMARINE for NTK539UE/
BE/BN/QN and NTK538UN

the Tx/Rx fiber pairs are connected correctly. Read-
only.
Associated Far TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the associated far end Rx ID. Read-only.
End Rx ID
Echoed Trace TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the echoed trace received from the far-end
Rx transmitter.
ODU Monitoring • Yes (default if the line port is Indicates whether the OTM4 facility monitors the
not connected) ODU/OPU layers. When enabled, ODU/OPU layer
No (default if the line port is alarms are monitored and ODU layer PM counts are
connected) monitored.

Defined Facility as the Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
Identifier The provisioned value appears in the facility alarm
report if the SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
Auto In-Service hh-mm Displays the time left for the auto in-service timer.
Time Left (hh- Read-only.
mm)
Fast Receiver • Disabled (default) Indicates whether STORM is enabled or disabled.

Recovery • Enabled Editable in the STORM application. Only applicable
to WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode) and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OTR.

Differential • None (default for NTK538UJ/ Sets the differential coding type.
Encoding UK/UN and NTK539QJ// This parameter is used to improved performance for
QKQN) both terrestrial and submarine deployments.
• Soft (default for NTK538UL/ Editable only for Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
UM and NTK539QL/QM) packs in QPSK or BPSK mode and 100G
• Hard WaveLogic 3 OTR.
• XD NTK539QL/QM and NTK538UL/UM in QPSK mode
supports Soft only.
XD is only supported on NTK539QN in BPSK mode.
XD coding enables 8D-2QAM modulation for
improved reach/capacity in submarine applications.
Always None for Flex1 and Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs.
Provisioned • Standard Sets the enhanced nonlinear mitigation (ENM)

ENM mode • Enhanced mode. Default is PEC dependent.
• Compatible Enhanced is recommended for best performance

whenever the circuit packs at both ends of a link
support Enhanced mode. Enhanced is supported on
NTK539QJ/QK/QL/QM/QN/BN and NTK538UJ/UK/
UL/UM/UN.
Standard is required for interworking with the
following circuit packs that support Standard mode
only: NTK539UA/UB/UC/UD/UE/UH/BB/BE/BH.
Compatible is used to automatically convert to
Standard mode when interworking with WaveLogic3
OCLD circuit packs that only support Standard
mode.
Applicable only to OTM4 line on WaveLogic 3
OCLD/OTR circuit packs.

100GOCI and 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR OTM4 client
Secondary State See “Facility secondary states” Displays the facility operational state.
on page 2-315 The Auto in-service state is editable. The
Maintenance state is editable.
Laser Off Far • Disabled Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines
End Fail • Enabled the type of signal conditioning towards subtending
equipment. When Enabled, the client transmitter
laser is shutoff when line faults or head-end client
faults are detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is
sent to subtending equipment when line faults or
head-end client faults are detected.
Tx Actual High • Tx optical power high value Displays the highest measured transmit optical
Power (dBm) • Unknown (if equipment not power of the multiple optical channels. Read-only.
present)
Tx Actual Low • Tx optical power low value Displays the lowest measured transmit optical
present)
Rx Actual High • Rx optical power high value Displays the highest measured received optical
present)
Rx Actual Low • Rx optical power low value Displays the lowest measured received optical
present)
Rx FEC Format • RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8) Displays the receive Rx FEC format setting.
(default)
• Off

Tx FEC Format • RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8) Displays the transmit Tx FEC format setting.
(default)
• Off
Pre-FEC Signal -1.00 to +1.00 dBQ (default 0) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
(dBQ) provisioned in 0.01 increments.
Pre-FEC Signal -1.00 to +2.00 dBQ (default 0.5) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Pre-FEC Signal numeric value Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Fail Threshold Signal Fail alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
(BER) Read-only.
Degrade Signal Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is
Threshold On). Read-only.
(BER)
Threshold • 1x10^-7 Facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
• 1x10^-8
• 1x10^-9
OTU Signal • 1x10^-6 Sets the OTU post-FEC signal degrade threshold.
Degrade • 1x10^-7
Threshold
• 1x10^-8
ODU Signal • 1x10^-6 Sets the ODU post-FEC signal degrade threshold.
Degrade • 1x10^-7
Threshold
• 1x10^-8
mode)


Time Left (hh- Read-only.
mm)
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR, 100GMUX and 100GOCI OTM4 mapping layer
Port number is 100 for 100GMUX and 1 for
100GOCI.
Secondary State See “Facility secondary states” Displays the facility operational state. The AINS
on page 2-315 state is editable for supported circuit packs. For
more information, see “Automatic INService (AINS)
support on 100G circuit packs (Note 1)” on
page 2-315.
mode)
ODU Monitoring Yes Indicates whether the OTM4 facility monitors the
ODU/OPU layers. When enabled, ODU/OPU layer
alarms are monitored and ODU layer PM counts are
monitored. Applicable to 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR
only.
Threshold • 1x10^-7
• 1x10^-8
• 1x10^-9

ODU Signal • 1x10^-6 Sets the ODU post-FEC signal degrade threshold.
Degrade • 1x10^-7
Threshold
• 1x10^-8
Payload Type 07 OPU Payload Type byte expected in the off-ramp

Expected (In direction for an OTM4 facility associated with an
HEX) ETH100G client facility.
Applicable to the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR, 100GE
OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs only.
Payload Type 07 OPU Payload Type byte transmitted in the on-ramp

Transmitted (In direction for an OTM4 facility associated with an
HEX) ETH100G client facility.
Applicable to the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR, 100GE
OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs only.
Delay • Enabled (default) Enables or disables automatic delay measurement.

Measurement • Disabled Supported on the 100G WaveLogic 3 OTR and
100G OCI OTM4 mapping layer only.
Latency (μs) • Unknown measurement in microseconds. Supported on the
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR and 100G OCI OTM4
mapping layer only.

Time Left (hh- Read only.
mm)
Conditioning • OPU_CSF (default) Displays the conditioning type. Applicable to 100G

type • ODU_AIS WaveLogic 3 OTR only.
Note 1: The only independently editable parameters on the member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK
circuit pack group are: Optical system identifier, Tx path identifier, Provisioned Tx Power, Tx wavelength,
SAPI/DAPI TTI, and Customer defined facility identifier. All other parameters are auto-synchronized with
the prime OTM4 facility.
Note 2: The value “Unknown” is also displayed when the “Circuit Pack Operational Capacity Exceeded”
alarm is present. If this alarm is present, the provisioning of the OTM4 facility, except for the primary
state, is not sent to the 100G OCLD/WaveLogic3 OCLD circuit pack.
Note 3: For the Mean DGD specification for the 100G OCLD/WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs, see
Note 4: The WaveLogic 3 OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One for total input
power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when connected to the CCMD12 or
CCMD8x16 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]). And one for channel input power (the channel
corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). Rx Channel Actual Power is used to report
the channel power in dBm and Rx Actual Power is used to report total input power. When the WaveLogic
3 OCLD is used in colored Photonic systems, Rx Actual Power is used to report the total input power
and a dash “-” is displayed for the Rx Channel Actual Power.
OTMC2 facility parameters

Table 2-64 provides a list of the OTMC2 facility parameters.
Table 2-64
Unit OTMC2-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.
Secondary State See“Facility secondary states” Displays the facility operational state.
on page 2-315 The Auto in-service state is editable. For more
The identifier can include any build an optical network model including DWDM
case letters, numbers, and
special characters.
Tx Path Identifier 1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier which allows two
different transmitters with identical wavelengths in
Provisioned Tx -11.0 (default) to +4.0 Sets the required line transmit optical power
Power (dBm) (provision power with 0.1 incremental range).
Tx Actual Power • Tx optical power Displays the actual transmit optical output power.
(dBm) • Unknown (if circuit pack not Read only.
OPT values.

Rx Actual Power • Rx optical power Displays the actual receive optical input power.
(dBm) (Note 3) • Unknown (if circuit pack not Read only.
OPT values.
Rx Channel • Rx channel optical power Displays the actual receive channel optical input
Actual Power • Unknown (if circuit pack not power. Read only.
(dBm) (Note 3) present) (Note 1) Applicable only to Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs deployed in a colorless line system.
Tx Dispersion numeric value Displays the provisioned Tx dispersion.

Provisioned (ps/
nm)
Tx Actual numeric value Display the actual dispersion pre-compensation in

Dispersion (ps/ the near-to-far direction.
nm)
Rx Dispersion numeric value Display the actual dispersion post-compensation in

Post-compensa the far-to-near direction.
tion
Tx • Manual Sets the Tx pre-compensation mode.

Compensation • Off • Off: In this mode, pre-compensation is disabled.
Mode
• Manual: In this mode, the pre-compensation is
Default value depends on PEC
user-controlled using the Tx dispersion provisioned
as follows:
parameter in the range from -40000 to 40000 for
For NTK539QL/QM: only Off is NTK539QK, -40000 to 85000 for NTK539QJ, and -
supported 40000 to 300000 for NTK539QN. Default value is
For NKT539QJ/QK: Off 0.
(default) and Manual are The Tx Dispersion Provisioned is the dispersion of
supported the fiber being compensated. The compensating
For NTK539QN: Off and dispersion has an opposite sign.
Manual (default) are supported
Rx FEC Format QFEC Displays the Rx FEC format setting. Read only.

Tx FEC Format QFEC Displays the Tx FEC format setting. Read only.
Tx Wavelength • 1528.77 (93) to 1566.72 (92) Displays the transmit wavelength in nm. The number
(nm) at 50GHz spacing in brackets is the channel ID.
• default 0.00 (0) Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility is
OOS.
Tx Wavelength can be re-provisioned to zero when
the facility is OOS, without deleting the facility.
Total Rx Link numeric value Display the total link dispersion in the receive
Dispersion (ps/ direction. Read only.
nm)
Total Tx Link numeric value Display the total link dispersion in the transmit
Dispersion (ps/ direction. Read only.
nm)
Tuning Mode • Performance Optimized Sets the wavelength tuning mode.

Tuning (default) Performance Optimized Tuning mode includes a
performance, whereas the Accelerated tuning mode
does not.
Performance Optimized Tuning (formerly called
Normal) mode is the tuning mode that is supported
in all releases.
In this release, Site Manager allows setting this
parameter to Accelerated. However, the circuit pack
behaves the same as in Performance Optimized
Tuning mode.
Performance OptimizationMode1 (default) to Sets the performance optimization mode. Facility

Optimization OptimizationMode14 must be OOS to edit this parameter.
mode OptimizationMode1 provides the best reach
performance and OptimizationMode2 provides the
best latency performance. OptimizationMode3 to
OptimizationMode14 are reserved.

Pre-FEC Signal -1.00 to 1.00 (default 0.0) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
(dBQ) provisioned in 0.01 increments. The 0 dBQ
reference point represents an operating point where
the system may see significant post FEC errors and
become unstable.
OOS.
Note: When the Pre-FEC Signal Fail Threshold
(dBQ) is set to -1.00 dBQ, the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
alarm is disabled and will not be raised.
Fail Threshold Signal Fail alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
(BER)
Pre-FEC Signal -1.00 to 3.50 (default 0.5) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Degrade Signal Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is
Threshold (BER) On).
Line Rate 2xOTU4 Displays the line rate. Read only.
NE mode) SDH). Read only.
mode)
Supported Mean 150 Displays the maximum value of the mean DGD of
DGD (ps) any link for which modem performance can be
guaranteed in ps. Read only.

Latency (µs) latency and circuit pack latency. Circuit pack latency
is from the backplane to the line interface port.
Estimated Fiber • Estimated fiber length Displays an estimate of the fiber length calculated
Length (km) • Unknown (if no fiber is based on the round trip delay. Read only.
connected to the port)
(Note 1)

Estimated • Estimated instantaneous of Displays an estimate of the present value of the

Instance of DGD DGD measurement differential group delay (DGD) that results from
(ps) (Note 2) • Unknown (Note 1) polarization mode dispersion (PMD) present in the
mean DGD of the link.
Reach • numeric value, PEC Displays the reach specification retrieved from a
Specification dependent Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack. Read only.
(km) • APP-SPECIFIC for
NTK539QJ
• SUBMARINE for NTK539QN

the Tx/Rx fiber pairs are connected correctly. Read
only.
Associated Far TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the associated far end Rx ID. Read only.
End Rx ID
Echoed Trace Rx TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the echoed trace received from the far end
transmitter.
ODU Monitoring Yes Indicates whether the facility monitors the ODU/
OPU layers. When enabled, ODU/OPU layer alarms
are monitored and ODU layer PM counts are
monitored.

report if the SP2, SPAP, SPAP-2 w/2xOSC, or the 2-
slot integrated SP is equipped.
Time Left (hh- Read only.
mm)
Fast Receiver • Disabled (default) Not supported in this release. Indicates whether
Recovery • Enabled STORM is enabled or disabled. Editable in the
STORM application.

Tx Channel • 50 (default) Sets the transmit channel spacing. If set to 50GHz,

Spacing (GHz) • FlexGrid you provision the Tx wavelength based on the ITU
50GHz wavelength grid. If set to FlexGrid, you can
provision the Tx frequency in increments of 0.0001
THz (100 MHz).
Differential None Indicates that differential coding is not supported.

Encoding
Tx Frequency • 0 (default) Displays the transmit frequency in THz. Can be

(THz) • 191.3500 to 196.1000 provisioned in increments of 0.0001 THz (100 MHz)
only if the Tx channel spacing is set to FlexGrid. The
facility must be OOS to edit this parameter.
Note 1: The value “Unknown” is also displayed when the “Circuit Pack Operational Capacity Exceeded”
alarm is present. If this alarm is present, the provisioning of the OTM4 facility, except for the primary state,
is not sent to the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
Note 2: For the Mean DGD specification for the Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs, refer to the
Technical Specifications section in Part 3 of Planning, NTRN10DB.
Note 3: The Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One for total
input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when connected to the CCMD12 or
CCMD8x16 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]). And one for channel input power (the channel
corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). Rx Channel Actual Power is used to report
the channel power in dBm and Rx Actual Power is used to report total input power. When the Flex3
WaveLogic 3 OCLD is used in colored Photonic systems, Rx Actual Power is used to report the total input
power and a dash “-” is displayed for the Rx Channel Actual Power.
ODU facility parameters

Table 2-65 provides a list of the ODU facility parameters.
Table 2-65
ODU facility parameters
Unit ODU4-shelf-slot-port- Displays the facility AID. Payload_index = 1 to 2.

payload_index
Primary state See “Equipment and Displays the primary state of the facility.For Flex3
facility primary states” on WaveLogic 3 OCLD, the ODU4 primary state is
page 2-314 editable. Putting ODU4 facility OOS will not trigger the
maintenance signal injection if the parent OTMC2
facility is in service.
Secondary state See“Facility secondary Displays the facility operational state. The AINS state
states” on page 2-315 /MT state follows the AINS state /MT state of its
parent OTMk facility by default. The AINS state /MT
state can be edited independently of its parent.
Port Mode • SONET Displays the mode of the port (SONET or SDH).
• SDH
ODU Monitoring • Yes Indicates whether the ODU layer alarm and PM
• No monitoring is enabled.
Auto In-Service Numeric value Displays the time left on the Auto in-service timer.
Time Left (hh-mm)

provisioned value appears in the facility alarm report
if the SP2, SPAP, SPAP-2 w/2xOSC, or the 2-slot
integrated SP is equipped.
FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX (NTK529BB)

Table 2-66 provides a list of the FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX
circuit packs.
Table 2-66
FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX
Unit FLEX-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
primary states” on page primary state of associated equipment.
2-314 IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary State See “Facility secondary Displays the facility operational state. The Auto in-
states” on page 2-315 service state is editable.
Protocol • FC800 Sets the FLEX facility protocol.

• FC1200
Conditioning Type • FC800: NOS (default) or Determines type of signal conditioning towards
LOFEF subtending equipment when line faults or head-end
• FC1200: LF (default) or client faults are detected. When set to LOFEF,
LOFEF client transmitter laser is shut off. When set to NOS
for FC800, NOS is sent to subtending equipment.
When set to LF for FC1200, LF is sent to subtending
equipment.
Holdoff Timer 0, 100 (default), 200, ... Sets the length of time (in ms) before Tx
1000 in 100 increments conditioning is applied to the client.
Before the holdoff timer expires, FC800/FC1200
idles are injected.
Packet Mapping • FC800: ENHCBR: 10.7G - Displays the mapping type. Read-only.
OPU2 (Enhanced CBR)
• FC1200: TCODEGFPT:
11.09G - OPU2e (GFP-T
Transcoded)
Tx Actual Power Numeric value Displays the Tx actual power in dBm. Read-only.
(dBm)

FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX
Rx Actual Power Numeric value Displays the Rx actual power in dBm. Read-only.
(dBm)
Protocol Rate • 8500 for FC800 Displays the protocol rate. Read-only.
• 10518.75 for FC1200
Facility Identifier as the Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
The provisioned value appears in the facility alarm

Table 2-67 provides a list of the TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters.
Table 2-67
Unit • TCMTTP-shelf-slot-port- Displays the AID for the selected facility, where
[ODUk]P[trib]T[level] TCM level = 1 to 6
• TCMCTP-shelf-slot-port- ODUk= 0, 1, 2, 2E, 3, 3E2, 4
[ODUk]P[trib]T[level]
trib =1 for an ODUk within an ODUk, 1 to 2 for an ODU0
within an ODU1, 1 to 4 for an ODU1 within an ODU2, 1 to
8 for an ODU0 within an ODU2, 1 to 32 for an ODU0
within an ODU3 or ODU3e2, 1 to 80 for an ODU0 within
an ODU4
states.
The Auto in-service state and the Maintenance state are
editable and independent of the parent or sibling AINS
and MT state for a terminated TCMCTP. For the
TCMTTP and monitored TCMCTP, the secondary state
follows their parent facility. TCMTTP, monitor TCMCTP,
and terminated CTP facilities have their own AINS timer,
independent of the parent or sibling facility.
Supporting TP OTMn-shelf-slot-port Displays the supporting TP. Read-only.
TCM mode • Monitor Sets the mode of the TCM. TCMTTP is always
• Terminated Terminated. TCMCTP can be Monitor or Terminated.
Owner USER Displays the entity which created the facility. Read-only.

Measurement • Disabled (default) Applicable to TTP or terminated-CTP only. Supported on
the 100G OCI only.
Latency (μs) • Unknown measurement in microseconds. Applicable to TTP or
terminated-CTP only. Supported on the 100G OCI only.


Defined Facility characters Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
Identifier
Auto In-Service hh-mm Displays the time left for the auto in-service timer. Read-
Time Left (hh- only.
mm)
Signal Degrade 1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold. Read-only.

Threshold

Table 2-68 provides a list of the ADJ facility parameters.
Table 2-68
ADJ
Unit ADJ-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and port
number for the selected facility.
Primary State See “Equipment and Displays the primary state of the facility. Read-only.
facility primary states” on
page 2-314
Adjacency Type TXRX Sets the type of the adjacency.
Status • Unverified Displays current status of the adjacency facility.

• Derived • Unverified - The far end address is user- provisioned
• Reliable but not discovered or verified.
• Unreliable • Derived - the system has derived the value of the

provisioned far end address based on provisioning of
other parameters in the system.
Note: Adjacencies with the Derived status cannot be
altered by the user.
• Reliable - The actual far end address is detected and it
matches the provisioned far end address.
• Unreliable - The actual far end address is detected and
it does not match the provisioned far end address or the
discovery validation has detected a mis-fibering.

Actual Far End string format Displays the actual far end address which is the detected
Address TID, shelf, slot, and port of the far end of the fiber. Read-
only.
Actual Far End See Note 2 Displays the option that each field of the far end address
Address Format represents. Read-only.
Expected Far End TID-shelf-slot-port Sets the provisioned far end address of the fiber
Address (Note 1) connection.
Expected Far End See Note 2 Sets the expected far end line receive and client receive
Address Format addresses format reported by the adjacency.

Note 1: The Expected Far End Address is controlled by the Expected Far End Address Format
selection. If the Expected Far End Address Format is set to ‘NULL’, then the Expected Far End
Address is disabled; Otherwise, it is enabled.
Note 2: The Far End Address Format options are:
• NULL
• TID-SH-SL-PRT
• TID-SH-SL-SBSL-PRT
Comms setting parameters

GCC support and parameters
Table 2-69 provides information on GCC support on 100G circuit packs, and
Table 2-70 on page 2-360 provides a list of the Lower Layer DCC/GCC
parameters.

The Lower Layer DCC/GCC option has a single table which displays all the
provisioned OTM4 ports and their GCC settings.
Use the Add button to provision new GCC circuits and the Delete button to
delete existing GCC circuits. The Edit button is only enabled for editing the
LAPD parameters. When adding a GCC circuit, consider the following:
• Each end of the GCC circuit must be provisioned with the same options.
• Once a new GCC circuit has been added, an IISIS or OSPF circuit must
be added for this port. See “IISIS Circuit parameters” on page 2-361 and
“OSPF Circuit parameters” on page 2-364.
• You must delete the IISIS or OSPF circuit for the GCC circuit before
deleting the GCC circuit.
• Adding or deleting a GCC entry, automatically adds or deletes an
associated PPP circuit with IP address of 0.0.0.0.
For more information on GCC support on the circuit packs, refer to “ GCC
support on circuit packs” on page 2-359.
Table 2-69
100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (Note 1) X
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (Note 2) X
10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, and 100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX (Note 3) X X
100GE OCI (Note 4) X
100G OCI (Note 5) X X
100G WaveLogic 3 OTR (Note 5) X X

Note 1: Supported on the line OTM4 facility (port 1).

Note 2: Supported on the line OTM4/OTMC2 or OTUTTP facility (port 1). When in BPSK mode, GCC0
is provisioned on the prime OTM4 or OTUTTP facility only.
Note 3: GCC1 supported on the virtual aggregate OTM4 facility (port 100). GCC0 supported on the
OTM2 client facility on the 10x10G MUX OCI.
Note 4: Supported on the OTM4 mapping facility.
Note 5: GCC0 supported on the OTM4 client facility. GCC1 supported on the OTM4 mapping facility.
Table 2-70

Editable
Unit OTM4 ports Displays all the provisioned ports and their GCC Yes
settings.
Carrier GCC0, GCC1 Selects the carrier. Yes
Operation GCC0, GCC1, Displays the status of the GCC circuit. No

Carrier Disconnected
Protocol NDP, PPP Only PPP or NDP is supported for OTM4 GCC ports. Yes
IISIS parameters
Table 2-71 on page 2-361 provides a list of the IISIS Router parameters and
Table 2-72 on page 2-362 provides a list of the IISIS Circuit parameters.

The IISIS Router option has two tables.
• The upper Router table displays information about the IISIS router. Use
the Add button to add an IISIS router (only one allowed). Use the Delete
button to delete the existing IISIS router.
lists provisioned for the IISIS router. Use the Add button to add IISIS
ATTENTION
When re-adding an IISIS router, you must perform a cold restart of the shelf
processor (SP) for the changes to be implemented. The cold restart is not
required when adding the IISIS router for the first time.
Table 2-71

Editable
Router table
Router Level Level 1 Sets the IISIS router level. Level 2 not supported in this No
release, option is always disabled.
L1 Priority 1 to 127 Sets the level 1 router priority. The L1 router assigned Yes
L2 Priority 1 to 127 Sets the level 2 router priority. The L2 router assigned No
Not supported in this release, option is disabled.
Route On (default), Off Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On) are Yes
Summarization redistributed.
Redistribution table
Route OSPF Sets the IISIS router distribution list entries for the Yes
Redistribution/ Distribution, selected IISIS router.
List Static Distribution
(default)
IP Subnet Standard dot Sets the IP subnet address of the distribution list entry Yes
notation for the selected IISIS router.
Subnet Mask Standard dot Sets the subnet mask of the distribution list entry for the Yes
notation selected IISIS router.
Metric 1 to 63 Sets the metric (cost) of the distribution list entry for the Yes
selected IISIS router.
Metric Type External (default), Sets the metric type of the distribution list entry for the Yes
Internal selected IISIS router.

The IISIS Circuit option has a single table. Use the Add button to provision
new IISIS circuits and the Delete button to delete existing IISIS circuits. You
must create an IISIS circuit on each provisioned interface you want IISIS to
run on.
When provisioning both GCC0 and GCC1 with default IISIS metrics on a shelf,
Comms over GCC1 is preferred as opposed to GCC0.
Table 2-72

Editable
Unit OTM4 ports Displays the available ports for an IISIS circuit. Yes
OTM4 ports are displayed in the following format:
OTM4-shelf-slot-port
Only OTM4 ports with lower layer DCC/GCC0/GCC1
provisioned are available for selection.
Carrier GCC0, GCC1 Displays the GCC channel used (options available Yes
depend on circuit pack type and function).
Circuit 1 to 63 Sets the circuit default metric used to calculate the Yes
Default best route. Default as follows:
Metric • OTM4 ports with GCC0/GCC1 provisioned: 5
Select a higher value for a slower circuit.
Level 2 Only On, Off (default) Sets the status of level 2 only routing on the IISIS No
circuit.
disabled.
3 Way On, Off (default) Sets the status of 3-way handshaking on the IISIS No
Handshake circuit.
disabled.
Neighbour Off (default), IP, OSI, Select the override for the neighbour router protocols Yes
Protocols IP and OSI (overrides what the router advertises).
Supported Note 1: OSI is only valid if LAPD is selected.
Override
Note 2: When provisioning an IISIS circuit on an ILAN
port, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
optical DCC port connected to OSI managed network
elements (for example, Optical Metro 3000 and
Optical Metro 4000), you must ensure that neighbour
protocol supported override parameter is set to OSI.
optical DCC port connected to another 6500 network
element, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
Note 5: The “IP” and “IP and OSI” options are not
supported.
OSPF parameters
Table 2-73 provides a list of the OSPF Router parameters and Table 2-74 on
page 2-365 provides a list of the OSPF Circuit parameters

The OSPF Router option has two tables.
• The upper Router table displays information about the OSPF router. Use
the Add button to add an OSPF router. Use the Delete button to delete an
existing OSPF router.
lists provisioned for the OSPF router. Use the Add button to add OSPF
Table 2-73

Editable
Router
OSPF Router Standard dot Sets the router ID for the OSPF. Yes
Id notation It is recommended that the SHELF address (if
provisioned) is used as the OSPF Router Id.
Link State External (default), Sets the type of link state announcement used. Yes
Router, Summary This parameter is not used and can be left at the
default value (External).
Route ON (default), OFF Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On) Yes
Summarization are redistributed.
Autonomous ON, OFF (default) Sets the autonomous system border router (ASBR). Yes
System Border ASBR identifies whether an OSPF router can accept
Router input (route redistribution) from another autonomous
system such as IISIS, or static routes.
Opaque Filter ON, OFF (default) Enables or disables the OSPF Opaque LSA Flooding Yes
Control (OOLFC). OOLFC reduces the number of
Type 11 opaque LSAs containing AR and TR records
in the OSPF database for 6500 shelf that is part of an
OSPF network. Cannot be set to ON if ODBR or
DBRS is ON, and vice versa.


Editable
Shelf IP ON, OFF (default) Enables or disables shelf IP redistribution. Shelf IP Yes
Redistribution redistribution provides the ability to redistribute a
route to the local shelf IP into all OSPF areas that the
local shelf participates in. All NEs in these
participating OSPF areas will install the received
route into their local IP routing table. Only supported
in OSPF networks without a backbone.
Redistribution
Route IISIS Distribution, Sets the origin of the route(s) to be redistributed. Yes
Redistribution/ Static Distribution
List (default)
IP Subnet Standard dot Sets the IP subnet address for redistribution. Yes
notation
Subnet Mask Standard dot Sets the subnet mask for redistribution. Yes
notation
Metric 1 to 65535 Sets the metric for redistribution. Yes
Metric Type External (default), Sets the metric type for redistribution. Yes
Internal

The OSPF Circuit option has two tables:
• The upper table displays information about the OSPF circuit. Use the Add
button to add an OSPF circuit. Use the Delete button to delete an existing
OSPF circuit.
• The lower Area List table displays information about the area lists
provisioned for the OSPF circuit.
Area lists are not supported in this release and the table will always be
empty. The area list fields and the Enter and Delete buttons on the Add
OSPF Circuit Parameters dialog box are disabled.
Table 2-74

Editable
Unit OTM4 ports Displays the OTM4 ports available for OSPF. Yes
Carrier GCC0, GCC1 Sets the GCC on the OTM4 port for the OSPF Yes
circuit.
Network Area Standard dot notation Sets the area (defaults to backbone area of 0.0.0.0). Yes
Cost 1 to 65534 (default Sets the cost of the route (reflects speed of Yes
10) interface). Defaults as follows:
• GCC0/1: 75
Area Default 1 to 16777215 Sets the cost of the route to the next area. No
Cost (default 1) Note: It is not supported in this release.
Dead Interval 1 to 65535 (default Sets the interval (in seconds) at which hello packets Yes
40) must not be seen before neighbors declare the
router down.
Hello Interval 1 to 65535 (default Sets the interval (in seconds) between the hello Yes
10) packets that the router sends on the interface.
Retransmit 1 to 3600 (default 5) Sets the interval (in seconds) required between link- No
Interval state advertisement retransmissions.
Transmit 1 to 3600 (default 1) Sets the estimated time (in seconds) it takes to No
Delay transmit a link state update packet over this
interface.
Priority 0 to 255 (default 1) Sets the router priority value used in multi-access Yes
networks for the election of the designated router (0
indicates that router is not eligible to become
designated router).
Area Off (default), NSSA, Sets whether the router is in a not so stubby area Yes
Stub (NSSA) or stub area. NSSA and Stub not supported
in this release.
Opaque Link On (default), Off Sets whether opaque link state advertisement Yes
State performs on the OSPF circuit.
Advertisement
Passive OSPF On, Off (default) Determines whether OSPF adjacency loss should Yes
Circuit be detected. If set to On, OSPF adjacency loss will
be ignored.


Editable
Authentication Null (default), Simple Sets the authentication type. Null means no Yes
Type Password, MD5 authentication.
Simple string of up to 8 Sets the password if authentication type is simple Yes

Password characters password.
Status Accepting, Rejecting Displays the status of the simple password No

authentication.
MD5 Identifier 0 to 255 Sets the identifier for the first MD5 key. Must be Yes
MD5 Key 1 string of up to 16 Sets the password for the first MD5 key. Yes
characters
Key 1.
MD5 Identifier 0 to 255 Sets the identifier for the second MD5 key. Must be Yes
MD5 Key 2 string of up to 16 Sets the password for the second MD5 key. Yes
characters
Key 2.
Area List
IP Subnet Standard dot notation Sets the IP subnet address of the OSPF area. No
Subnet Mask Standard dot notation Sets the subnet mask of the OSPF area. No
Result Displays the OPSF areas entered in the area list. Up No

to 10 OSPF area ranges can be configured.
Transponder connections parameters

The following tables detail the 100G circuit pack parameters associated with
the Transponder Connections Site Manager application.
Table 2-75 provides transponder connections application parameters for

100G circuit packs.
Table 2-75
Transponder Connections application parameters for 100G circuit packs
Connection ID The connection identifier string is used to identify a provisioned transponder
connection. The transponder connection ID can contain a maximum of 64
characters, with the exception of the \, “, and % characters.
This release only supports a connection identifier for:
• ODU2 connections on 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit packs
• ODU4 connections on 100G OCLD, 100GE OCI, 100G OCI, 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX, and 10x10G
MUX circuit packs
Rate Select the rate as ODU4 for all 100G circuit packs. (This is the only connection
rate supported on 100G circuit packs.)
Type Select the connection type as 2WAY (Bidirectional) for all 100G circuit packs.
(This is the only connection type supported on 100G circuit packs.)
From and To panels Select the Equipment and Facility for the From and To endpoints as
required. Refer to Table 2-76 on page 2-368 for details.
For some circuit packs, the transponder connections associated with

pluggable facilities are automatically added/deleted when the pluggable
facilities are added/deleted, and cannot be manually added/deleted. Table
2-76 on page 2-368 does not include these transponder connections.
Table 2-76
Equipment and facility parameters for transponder connections for 100G circuit packs
100G OCLD circuit packs
ODU4 100GOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5 for 7-slot shelf
slot# = 2, 3, 5, 9, 10, 11, 13 for
14-slot shelf
slot# = 2, 3, 5 for 6500-7 packet-
optical shelf
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14,
15, 17, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27, 31, 33,
34, 35, 37 for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
100GE OCI circuit packs
ODU4 PCFP-shelf#-slot#-port# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1 for 7-slot shelf
slot# = 3 and 9 for 14-slot shelf
slot# = 2, 3, 5 for 6500-7 packet-
optical shelf
slot# = 1, 5, 11, 15, 21, 25, 31,
port# = 1
100G OCI circuit packs
ODU4 PCFP-shelf#-slot#-port# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1, 4 for 7-slot shelf
slot# = 1, 4, 9, 12 for 14-slot
shelf
slot# = 1, 4 for 6500-7 packet-
optical shelf
slot# = 1, 4 13, 16, 21, 24, 33, 36
for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1

Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
ODU4 100GOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1 to 6, 9 to 14 for 14-slot
shelf
optical shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and
31-38 for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
10x10GE MUX circuit packs
slot# = 1, 4, 9, 12 for 14-slot
shelf
optical shelf
slot# = 1, 2, 4, 6, 12, 13, 16, 21,
22, 24, 26, 32, 33, 36 for 32-slot
shelf
port# = 100
10x10G MUX circuit packs
slot# = 1, 4, 9, 12 for 14-slot
shelf
optical shelf
slot# = 1, 2, 4, 6, 12, 13, 16, 21,
22, 24, 26, 32, 33, 36 for 32-slot
shelf
port# = 100

100G WaveLogic 3 OTR circuit packs
ODU4 100GOTR-shelf#-slot# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1 to 6, 9 to 14 for 14-slot
shelf
optical shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and
31-38 for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
100G (2xQSFP+/2xSFP+) MUX circuit packs
slot# = 1, 4, 9, 12 for 14-slot
shelf
optical shelf
slot# = 1, 2, 4, 6, 12, 13, 16, 21,
22, 24, 26, 32, 33, 36 for 32-slot
shelf
port# = 100
6500 Packet-Optical Platform
40G, 100G, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10 Circuit Packs and 200G Services
Copyright© 2010-2015 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.
Release 10.1
Publication: 323-1851-102.4
Document status: Standard
Issue 2
Document release date: February 2015
CONTACT CIENA
For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena
web site at www.ciena.com

323-1851-102.4 (6500 R10.1 40G 100G OSIC ISS SLIC10 and 200GServices) Issue2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

323-1851-102.4 (6500 R10.1 40G 100G OSIC ISS SLIC10 and 200GServices) Issue2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6500 Packet-Optical Platform

40G, 100G, OSIC, ISS, and SLIC10 Circuit

323-1851-102.4 - Standard Issue 2

Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com

New in this release and documentation roadmap xi

Equipping rules 1-63

ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters 1-220

New in this release and documentation

This Technical Publication supports 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500)

The following new/enhanced features are covered in this document:

— Flex3 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Premium with EDFA NxOTU4 C-Band

— 100G OTR WaveLogic 3 Premium C-band LR4 Multirate circuit pack

— 100G MUX Multi-Protocol 2xQSFP+/2xSFP+ circuit pack

6500 Packet-Optical Platform technical publications

Planning - Installation - Administration Fault Management - Common Equipment

SAOS-based Command Fault and MIB

6500 Photonic 6500 Data 6500 / 5400 Common

40G, OSIC, ISS, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex

This chapter provides an overview of the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500)

40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5 and NTK539RxE5)

The following variants of Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD C-Band circuit

• eDC40G OCLD Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band (NTK539RBE5):

Red triangle (Fail)

Blue diamond (In Use)

Transmit/receive fixed dual LC connector

Yellow circle (LOS)

Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Processor Sync Power

Red triangle (Fail)

Blue diamond (In Use)

Transmit/receive fixed dual LC connector

Yellow circle (LOS)

Ciena FEC EOC Laser

Processor Sync Power

The 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5) and Wavelength-Selective

• offers GCC0 data communications channels between Broadband

• line interworking between different 40G OCLD variants or between

__40G OCLD (NTK539xx) 40G Wavelength-Selective OCLD

40G OCLD PA Same Partial Partial Partial No No No No No No No No

PB Same Partial Partial No No No No No No No No

40G RA Same Partial Partial Partial No

For detailed information and procedures associated with performance

• Circuit Pack Latch Open

OTM facility alarms

• Protection Scheme Mismatch

OTUTTP facility alarms

PTP facility alarms

Control Plane alarms

• Configuration Mismatch - Common ID

Software Auto-Upgrade alarms

• any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCI/Wavelength-Selective

Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs. No specific Layer 2

Shelf type 40G OCLD eMOTR eMOTR 40G OCLD

Shelf type 40G OCLD eMOTR eMOTR 40G OCLD

7-slot 1 2/3 4/5 6

14-slot 1 2/3 4/5 6

32-slot 1 2/3 4/5 6

• Two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs

pack between two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit

The 40G OCLD or Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are

40G TR protected group. Protection can be configured between ODU TTP

Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs in the adjacent even slots.

The following restrictions on using a cross-connect circuit pack are applied